used board of trustees for - rrwrd.dst.il.us · 2013-09-15 · 13225 fiberglass reinforced plastic...

Contract Documents Co-digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2

Capital Project #1155

Rock River Water Reclamation District

Board of Trustees

Donald Massier ........................................................... President

Lloyd Hawks.........................................................Vice President

Donald Kerestes ................................................Clerk/Treasurer

Elmer Jones .................................................................... Trustee

Rick Pollack .................................................................... Trustee

Officials

Steve Graceffa .................................................. District Director

Dana L. Carroll, P.E .................................Engineering Manager

Volume I of II Bidding and Contract Requirements

Specifications Prepared by: Black & Veatch 101 N. Wacker Drive, Suite 1100 Chicago, IL 60606 Project No. 176424 March 2015

Not be used for bidding purposes!

Bid Doc. No. 15-408 Index / Page 1

Index


Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2

Capital Project No. 1155

BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

Notice to Bidders

Instructions to Bidders

Proposal

00305 List of Subcontractors

00310 Equipment Questionnaire

Fair Employment Practices Affidavit of Compliance

Bid Bond

Agreement

Performance Bond

Labor & Material Payment Bond

00700 General Conditions

00800 Supplementary Conditions

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01015 Project Requirements

01070 Abbreviations of Terms and Organizations

01300 Submittals Procedures

01300-F01 Submittal Identification & Contractor's Approval Statement

01300-F02 Submittal Identification & Contractor's Approval Statement



01310 Construction Scheduling

01320 Construction Progress Documentation

01400 Quality Control

01400-S01 Anticipated Special Inspections Schedule

01500 Temporary Facilities

01610 General Equipment Stipulations

01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria

01612 Product Delivery Requirements

01614 Product Storage and Handling Requirements

01615 Equipment and Valve Identification

01620 Equipment Schedule

01630 Pipeline Schedule

01630-S01 Pipeline Schedule

01630-S02 Restrained Joint Schedule

01650 Startup Requirements

DIVISION 02 – SITEWORK

02050 Demolition and Salvage

02704 Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing

02704-S02 Plant Piping Test Pressure Schedule

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03302 Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete

03600 Grouting

03710 Concrete Crack Repair

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY – Not Used



DIVISION 05 – METALS

05550 Anchorage In Concrete and Masonry

05990 Structural and Miscellaneous Metals

DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTIC – Not Used

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07900 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS – Not Used

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09940 Protective Coatings

09940-F01 Coating System Data Sheet

09940-F02 Coating System Data Sheet

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10990 Miscellaneous Specialties

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11060 Equipment Installation

11117 End Suction Chopper Pumps

11331 Pump Mixing Systems

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – Not Used

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13225 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Flat Tank Cover

13226 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Dome Tank Cover



13500 Instrumentation and Control System

13500-F01 Instrument Calibration Report

13500-A Instrument Device Schedule

13500-B Input/Output Listing

13550 Software Control Block Descriptions

13561 Panel Mounted Instruments

13563 Pressure and Level Instruments

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS – Not Used

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15010 Valve Installation

15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation

15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods

15061 Ductile Iron Pipe

15061-S01 Ductile Iron Pipe Schedule

15065 Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

15091 Miscellaneous Ball Valves

15102 Eccentric Plug Valves

15102-S01 Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule – Manual

15102-S02 Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule – Electric

15140 Pipe Supports

15140-F01(A) Hangers and Supports

15140-F01(B) Hangers and Supports

15180 Valve Actuators

15250 Mechanical Insulation

15400 Plumbing



DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS

16050 Electrical

16050-F01 Cable Data - 600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting Cable

(600-1-PVC-THHN-THWN)

16050-F02 Cable Data - 600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power

Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW-2)

16050-F15 Cable Data - 2000 Volt, 3 Conductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Cable (2000-3-AFD-XLP-PVC-SH-TC)

16150 Adjustable Frequency Drives

16220 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment

16670 Lightning Protection For Structures

ATTACHMENTS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS

Owner Provided In-Line Grinder - Submittal Information

Co-Digestion Receiving Station Operational Narrative


Bid Doc. No. 15-408



Bidding and Contract Requirements

Rock River Water Reclamation District Rockford, Illinois


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Instructions to Bidders


Co-digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2

Capital Project No. 1155 1 General 1.1 Scope and Intent This section of the contract documents is concerned with furnishing detailed information and requirements for preparing bids to prospective bidders, bidders' responsibility, the preparation and the submission of bids, basis for awarding the contract and other general information concerned with bidding and executing the contract. 1.2 Contradictions If in the case of apparent contradiction between or among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall be consulted in the following order: Addenda, Agreement, Supplementary Drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Detailed Specifications, Plans, District General Provisions and Technical Specifications for Sanitary Sewer Construction. The language in the first such document in which language regarding the conflict, error or discrepancy occurs shall control. 1.3 Pre-Bid Meeting A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at 1:00 P.M. on Monday, April 6, 2015 to address questions from the prospective bidders and to make a tour of the site. Bidders are required to attend the pre-bid conference. Manufacturers of protective coatings for the storage tank are encouraged to attend. The pre-bid conference will be held at the District’s Administration Building, 3501 Kishwaukee Street, Rockford, Illinois 61109. Bidders are responsible for legibly signing the attendance list and for making sure their names appear on the attendance list which will be attached to the minutes of the pre-bid conference. Bids from Bidders not listed will not be opened. 2 Legal Requirements 2.1 Illinois Regulations 1. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares he will comply with prevailing wages in accordance with

the Illinois Department of Labor Standards. The State of Illinois requires contractors and subcontractors on public works projects (including Rock River Water Reclamation District) to submit certified payroll records on a monthly basis, along with a statement affirming that such records are true and accurate, that the wages paid to each worker are not less than the required prevailing rate and that the contractor is aware that filing false records is a Class B Misdemeanor.

The certified payroll records must include the name, address, telephone number, social security number, job classification, hourly wages paid in each pay period, the number of hours worked each day, and the starting and ending time of work each day, for every worker employed on the project. Any contractor who fails to submit a certified payroll or knowingly files a false


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

certified payroll is guilty of a Class B Misdemeanor. Certified payroll reports shall be submitted on standard IDOT forms.

2. Public Act 83–1030 entitled "Steel Products Procurement Act" requires that steel products used

or supplied in performance of this contract or subcontract shall be manufactured or produced in the United States with three exceptions.

The provisions of this Section shall not apply:

a. Where the contract involves an expenditure of less than $500. b. Where the executive head of the public agency certifies in writing that

i. the specified products are not manufactured or produced in the United States in sufficient quantities to meet the agency's requirements, or

ii. obtaining the specified products, manufactured or produced in the United States would increase the cost of the contract by more than 10%.

c. When its application is not in the public interest. 3. Article 2 of Public Act 96-929 (30 ILCS 570) provides that Illinois residents be employed on

Illinois public works projects, provided there has been a period of excessive unemployment (5%) in the State of Illinois as defined in the Act; and, further, that Illinois workers are available and capable of performing the particular type work involved.

4. Public Act 87-1257 requires that any party to a contract adopt and promulgate written sexual

harassment policies that include, as a minimum, the following information:

a. the illegality of sexual harassment b. the definition of sexual harassment under Illinois State law c. a description of sexual harassment, utilizing examples d. my (our) organization's internal complaint process including penalties e. the legal recourse, investigative and complaint process available through the Illinois

Department of Human Rights and the Illinois Human Rights Commission f. directions on how to contact the Department and the Commission g. protection against retaliation as provided by Section 6-101 of the Illinois Human Rights

Act

Upon request, this information shall be provided to the Illinois Department of Human Rights and the District.

5. With regard to nondiscrimination in employment, the Contractor for this project will be required

to comply with the Illinois Fair Employment Practices Commission's Rules and Regulations. 6. The Contractor for this project shall comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act. 7. The Contractor for this project shall comply with the Federal Drug-Free Workplace Act. 8. Public Act 96-1416 requires the Certification of Clean Construction and Demolition Debris

(CCDD) and uncontaminated soil prior to disposal at a CCDD fill site. The Contractor for this project shall comply with Public Act 96-1416 and be responsible for the certifications and any fees associated with the disposal at a CCDD fill site.

2.2 Americans with Disabilities Act The Contractor for this project will comply with all applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). The Contractor will hold harmless and indemnify Rock River Water Reclamation District (District) and their representatives from all:


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

1. suits, claims, or actions 2. costs, either for defense (including but not limited to reasonable attorney's fees and expert

witness fees) or for settlement 3. damages of any kind (including but not limited to actual, punitive, and compensatory

damages) relating in any way to or arising out of the ADA, to which said firm is exposed or which it incurs in the execution of the contract. 3 General Instructions 3.1 Bidder's Responsibility Bidders are cautioned not to submit proposals until having carefully examined the entire site of the proposed work and adjacent premises and the various means of approach and access to the site, and having made all necessary investigations to inform themselves thoroughly as to the facilities for delivering, placing and handling the materials at the site, and having informed themselves thoroughly as to all difficulties involved in the completion of all the work under this Contract in accordance with its requirements. Bidders must examine the Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents and shall exercise their own judgment as to the nature and amount of the whole of the work to be done and for the bid prices must assume all risk of variance, by whomsoever made, in any computation or statement of amount or quantities necessary to complete fully the work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. The Bidder must satisfy himself by making borings or test pits, or by such methods as he may prefer, as to the character and location of the materials to be encountered or work to be performed. No pleas of ignorance of conditions that exist or that may hereafter exist, or of conditions or difficulties that may be encountered in the execution of the work under this Contract, as a result of failure to make the necessary examinations and investigations, will be accepted as an excuse for any failure or omission on the part of the Contractor to fulfill, in every detail, all of the requirements of the Contract Documents, or will be accepted as a basis for any claims whatsoever for extra compensation or for an extension of time. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the location of all existing utilities in the project areas. The Bidder, therefore, shall satisfy himself by such means as he may deem proper as to the location of all structures that may be encountered in construction of the work. The Bidder must perform with their own organization and forces not less than 25% of the total amount of the work that is performed at the project site, computed on the basis of cost. 3.2 Addenda and Interpretations No interpretation of the meaning of the Plans, Specifications, or other Contract Documents will be made to any bidder orally. Every request for such interpretation must be in writing addressed to the Rock River Water Reclamation District, 3501 Kishwaukee Street, Rockford, Illinois. To be given consideration, such request must be received at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda which, if issued, will be sent by e-mail, fax, or certified mail with return receipt requested, to all prospective bidders, at the respective addresses furnished for such purposes,


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

not later than three (3) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addenda or interpretation shall not relieve said bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 3.3 Laws and Regulations The prospective bidder is warned that he must comply with all laws of the United States Government, State of Illinois, all ordinances and regulations of the District in the performance of the work under this contract. The Bidder's attention is specifically called to that provision of the General Conditions regarding the rate of wage to be paid on the work. 3.4 Quantities Estimated Only Not used in this project. 3.5 Form, Preparation, and Presentation of Proposals For particulars as to the quantity and quality of the supplies, materials and equipment to be furnished, and the nature and extent of the work or labor to be done, prospective bidders are referred to the Contract Documents, which may be examined or obtained at the office of the District. Bids shall be priced on a lump sum basis for the base contract (base bid) and bid alternative as follows:

Base Bid: The base bid will include all of the Work required by the Contract Documents including the FRP Flat Tank Cover and related items as indicated in the Drawings and in the Specifications as specified in Section 13225-Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Flat Tank Cover.

Alternative A: Provide FRP Dome Tank Cover in lieu of the specified FRP Flat

Tank Cover, and related items as indicated in the Drawings and in the Specifications as specified in Section 13226-Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Dome Tank Cover.

The price bid for the alternative shall be the amount to be added or deducted from the base contract if the District selects the bid alternative. Bid prices shall include the entire cost of the alternative, including cost for engineering changes to accommodate the Alternative, and additional work to be preformed which is not shown on the Drawings, but which is required as a result of selection of the Alternative. Each bid will be submitted upon the prescribed proposal form. All blank spaces for base bid and alternate prices must be filled in, in ink, with the unit or total sum or both for which the proposal is made. If the proposal contains any conditions, omissions, erasures, alterations, additions or items not called for in the itemized proposal, or contains irregularities of any kind, such may constitute sufficient cause for rejection of bid. In case of any discrepancy in the unit price or amount bid for any item in the proposal, the unit price as expressed in figures will govern. In no case is the agreement form to be filled out or signed by the bidder. Should the Contractor desire to have an electronic proposal form e-mailed to him, the Contractor should contact the District’s Engineering Department at (815) 387-7660. This form must be attached to the hard copy proposal form and appropriately signed and executed with the bid.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

The bid must be verified and be presented on the prescribed form in a sealed envelope on or before the time and at the place stated in the Advertisement for Bids, endorsed with the name of the person, firm or corporation presenting it, the date of presentation, and the title of the work for which the bid is made. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the proposal and marked as directed above, must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to Clerk of the Rock River Water Reclamation District, 3501 Kishwaukee Street, Rockford, Illinois, 61109 and be sent preferably by certified mail. The District will not accept facsimile generated bids. 3.6 Bid Security Each proposal must be accompanied by the District Bid Bond form with an acceptable Bid Security attached, in an amount not less than five (5) percent of the total base bid price. This sum is a guarantee that, if the Proposal is accepted, a contract will be entered into and its performance properly secured. The District’s Bid Bond Form included in the bid packet must be used. No other Bid Bond form may be substituted. Within ten (10) days after the opening of bids, the deposits of all but the three lowest bidders will be returned. The deposits of the remaining two unsuccessful bidders will be returned within three (3) days after the execution of the contract, or, if no such contract has been executed, within sixty (60) days after the date of opening bids. The deposit of the successful bidder will be returned only after he has duly executed the contract and furnished the required bond and insurance. 3.7 Affidavit of Compliance Each proposal must be accompanied by an executed Affidavit of Compliance. A separate Affidavit of Compliance form is enclosed with the Proposal packet. Failure to submit an executed Affidavit of Compliance with the proposal may constitute sufficient cause for rejection of the bid. 3.8 Statement of Qualifications Each proposal must be accompanied by a Statement of Qualifications certifying that the bidder is registered to do business in the State of Illinois, has a permanent business office within sixty (60) miles of the District office at 3501 Kishwaukee Street in Rockford, IL, and provides documentation that the bidder possesses the appropriate financial, material, equipment, facility and personnel resources and expertise necessary to meet all contractual obligations. The bidder shall document no less than three (3) contracts for similar size and complexity construction at waste water treatment plants within the past five (5) years having equal or greater value to the bid being submitted. The District reserves the right to request additional information as needed to evaluate bids prior to making an award. 3.9 Comparison of Proposals Bids on item contracts will be compared on the basis of a total computed price arrived at by taking the sum of the estimated quantities of each item, multiplied by the corresponding unit prices and including any lump sum bids on individual items, in accordance with the estimate of quantities set forth in the proposal form. Bids on lump sum contracts will be considered upon the basis of the lowest lump sum bid, including any bid alternative(s) selected by the District. 3.10 Acceptance of Bids and Basis of Award No bidder may withdraw his bid after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, for at least sixty (60) days.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Consideration of bid alternatives will be made prior to the award of the contract. The contract will be awarded, if at all, to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder. The Rock River Water Reclamation District also reserves the right to reject any or all bids. The bidder whose proposal is accepted shall enter into a written contract for the performance of the base bid and bid alternative if selected by the District and furnish the required bonds and insurance certificate within ten (10) days after written notice by the Engineering Manager of the District has been served on such bidder personally or by mailing a postpaid wrapper to such bidder at the address given in his proposal. If the bidder to whom the contract is awarded refuses or neglects to execute it or fails to furnish the required bond and insurance within five (5) days after receipt by him of the notice, the amount of his deposit shall be forfeited and shall be retained by the District as liquidated damage and not as a penalty. It being now agreed that said sum is a fair estimate of the amount of damages that the District will sustain in case said bidder fails to enter into a contract and furnish the required bond and insurance. No plea of mistake in the bid shall be available to the bidder for the recovery of his deposit or as a defense to any action based upon the neglect or refusal to execute a contract. 3.10.1 Evaluation of Responsiveness The responsiveness of bidders will be judged on the basis of the completeness of the bid submitted. To be responsive, a Bid must be submitted on the forms provided as part of the Bid Documents and comply with all the requirements of the Instruction to Bidders. 3.10.2 Evaluation of Responsibility To be judged as responsible, the bidder shall:

a. Have adequate financial resources for performance, the necessary experience, organization, technical qualifications, and facilities, or a firm commitment to obtain such by subcontracts;

b. Be able to comply with the required completion schedule for the project; c. Have a satisfactory record of integrity, judgment, and performance, including, in particular,

any prior performance on contracts from the District; d. Have an adequate financial management system and audit procedures, that provide efficient

and effective accountability and control of all property, funds, and assets; e. Conform to the civil rights, equal employment opportunity and labor law requirements of the

Bid Documents. f. Have satisfactorily completed no less than three (3) similar contracts within the past five (5)

years of equal or greater value to the bid being submitted at waste water treatment plant facilities.

g. The apparent low bidder shall submit to District, within 2 business days of bid opening, a Contractor’s Schedule of Values for approval. The Contractor’s Schedule of Values shall provide a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the work.

3.11 The Rejection of Bids The District reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted in the statement of the bidder's qualifications, or if investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the District that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations and to complete the work contemplated therein. Any or all proposals will be rejected if there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the bidders. Conditional bids will not be accepted. The District reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

accept the bid which they deem most favorable to the interest of the District after all proposals have been examined and canvassed. 3.12 Insurance and Bonding Contractor shall provide all necessary insurance and bonds required to complete the project. No more than ten (10) calendar days subsequent to the District’s issuance of an award letter, the Contractor shall provide documentation to prove that he has obtained all required insurance and bonds. The District shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of any such proof. 3.12.1 General The Contractor shall ensure that:

1. All insurance policies shall be specific to the project. 2. The District shall be named as insured in all policies; this shall include the Owners Contractors

Protective Policy option. 3. All completed operations coverages and bonds shall remain in force for a period of two (2)

years following acceptance of the project and completed operations shall stay in force for two (2) years following completion of the project.

3.12.2 Insurance The Contractor shall, for the duration of the contract and for two (2) years following project acceptance, maintain the following:

1. General Liability: $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage. If Commercial General Liability Insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit. The Contractor shall provide "XCU" coverage.

2. Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and

property damage including coverages for owned, hired or non-–owned vehicles, as applicable. 3. Workers' Compensation and Employers Liability: Workers' Compensation limits as required

by statute and Employers Liability limits of $500,000 per accident and $500,000 per disease. 4. Umbrella: $2,000,000 per occurrence/aggregate for contracts valued at $500,000 or over, or

$1,000,000 for contracts below $500,000. $10,000 is maximum allowable self-retained limit. 5. Errors and Omissions: If the Contractor performs professional services, he shall maintain

errors and omissions insurance with a limit no lower than $1,000,000 for the duration of the contract.

The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions in the General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage’s:


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

a. Unless otherwise provided in paragraph “c” of this section, the District, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers shall be covered as additional insureds as respects liability arising out of activities performed by or on insured’s general supervision of the Contractor, products and completed operations of the Contractor, premises owned, occupied or used by the Contractor, or automobiles owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the District, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents.

b. Unless otherwise provided in paragraph “c” of this section, the Contractor’s insurance

coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the District, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, and agents. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the District, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents shall be excess of the Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it.

c. As an acceptable alternative to provisions “a” and “b” of this section, the Contractor may

provide owner's and contractor's protective liability insurance with coverage limits, named insureds, and in conformity with all applicable specifications of this section.

d. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage

provided to the District, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents. e. The Contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is

made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. f. All Coverages — Each insurance policy required by this clause shall not be suspended,

voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage, or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the District.

3.12.3 Best's Ratings The District shall be the sole judge of whether or not said insurer's ratios are satisfactory. The District's decision shall be final and the District's bidding procedures contain no appeal provision.

1. Alphabetical Rating: For purposes of this Request for Bids, "insurer" shall mean any surety, insurance carrier, or other organization which proposes to provide an insurance policy or bond for the Contractor. No insurer or surety rated lower than "A-, Excellent” in the current Best's Key Rating Guide shall be acceptable to the District.

2. Financial Size Rating: Provided an insurer's alphabetical rating is satisfactory, the District will

examine said insurer's financial size rating.

a. If Best classifies the insurer XII or larger, said insurer shall be acceptable to the District. b. If Best classifies the insurer as smaller than XII, but larger than VI, said insurer shall be

submitted to the District’s Business Manager and/or the District’s insurance consultant for review.

c. Financial Size ratings less than VII are not acceptable and will disqualify the Contractor.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

3.12.4 Performance Bond and Labor & Materials Payment Bond Form The Contractor shall provide a Performance Bond and Labor & Materials Payment Bond form acceptable to the District. The performance bond shall be for either 100% of the contract price or for the Contractor’s unit price times the estimated number of units, as applicable. This Request for Bids contains a Performance Bond and a Labor & Material Bond form for the Contractor’s use. If the Contractor fails to provide acceptable bonds within the specified time, he shall be in default. 3.12.5 Correction of Contractor’s Insurance or Bond Deficiencies If the District determines that the Contractor’s insurance or bond documentation does not conform to these specifications, the District shall inform said Contractor of the non-conformity. If said Contractor fails to provide conforming insurance or bond documentation within five (5) calendar days of the District's deficiency notice, he shall be in default. 3.12.6 Indemnification Clause Contractor shall protect, indemnify, hold and save harmless and defend the District, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, and agents against any and all claims, costs, causes, actions and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees incurred by reason of a lawsuit or claim for compensation arising in favor of any person, including the employees, officers, independent contractors, or subcontractors of the Contractor or District, on account of personal injuries or death, or damages to property occurring, growing out of, incident to, or resulting directly or indirectly from the performance by the Contractor or subcontractor, whether such loss, damage, injury or liability is contributed to by the negligence of the District or by premises themselves or any equipment thereon whether latent or patent, or from other causes whatsoever, except that the successful bidder shall have no liability for damages or the costs incident thereto caused by the sole negligence of the District. The indemnification shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages payable by or for the Contractor or its subcontractor under any employee benefits act including, but not limited, to the Workers Compensation Act. No inspection by the District, its employees, or agents shall be deemed a waiver by the District of full compliance with the requirements of the Contract. This indemnification shall not be limited by the required minimum insurance coverages in the Contract. 3.13 Taxes The District is exempt, by law, from paying bidder Federal Excise Tax and Illinois Retailers' Occupational Tax. Therefore, the bidder shall exclude those taxes from his bid. The District's tax exemption number is E9992-3696-06. The bidder shall include all applicable taxes in his bid price.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408 Proposal / Page 1

PROPOSAL Rock River Water Reclamation District

PROJECT: Co-digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2 Capital Project #1155 LOCATION: 3333 Kishwaukee Street Rockford, Illinois COMPLETION DATE: 272 Days from the Notice to Proceed LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: $300/calendar day per each completion date deadline To: Board of Trustees Rock River Water Reclamation District 3501 Kishwaukee Street Rockford, IL 61109 From: ____________________________________________________________ (Individual, Partnership or Corporation, as case may be) ____________________________________________________________ (Address of Individual, Partnership or Corporation)

Gentlemen:

I (We), the undersigned, hereby propose to furnish all materials, equipment, tools, services, labor, and whatever else may be required to construct and place in service the above subject project for the Rock River Water Reclamation District all in accordance with the plans and specifications, provided by the Rock River Water Reclamation District. The undersigned also affirms and declares: 1. That I (we), have, examined and am (are) familiar with all the related contract

documents and found that they are accurate and complete and are approved by the undersigned.

2. That I (we), have carefully examined the site of the work, and that, from my (our)

investigation, has satisfied myself (ourselves) as to the nature and location of the work, the character, quality, and quantity of materials and the kind and extent of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the work, the general and local conditions and all difficulties to be encountered, and all other items which may, in any way, effect the work or its performance.

3. That this bid is made without any understanding, agreement or connection with any

other person, firm, or corporation making a bid for the same purposes, and is in all



respects fair and without collusion or fraud; and that I (we) am (are) not barred from bidding as a result of a bid-rigging or bid-rotating conviction.

4. That accompanying the Proposal is a Bidder's Bond in the amount of FIVE PERCENT (5%) OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT BASE BID payable to the Board of Trustees of the Rock River Water Reclamation District,

which it is agreed, shall be retained as liquidated damages by said Rock River Water Reclamation District if the undersigned fails to execute the Contract in conformity with the contract documents incorporated in the contract documents and furnish bond as specified, within ten (10) days after notification of the award of the contract to the undersigned.

5. The Bidder is of lawful age and that no other person, firm or corporation has any

interest in this Proposal or in the Contract proposed to be entered into. 6. The Bidder is not in arrears to the Rock River Water Reclamation District, upon debt

or contract, and is not a defaulter, as surety or otherwise, upon any obligation to the Rock River Water Reclamation District.

7. No officer or employee or person whose salary is payable in whole or in part by the

District is, shall be or become interested, directly or indirectly as a contracting party, partner, stockholder, surety, or otherwise, in this Proposal, or in the performance of the Contract, or in the work to which it relates, or in any portion of the profits thereof.

8. The Bidder which I represent complies with all applicable requirements of the

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and that if said bidder is awarded a contract, it will complete all OSHA-required or ADA-required employee and customer training, will make available all required information, and will hold harmless and indemnify the District and the District's representatives.

In regard to participation in an approved Apprenticeship program, upon request,

Contractor will be required to provide written proof of participation. 9. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares that he has adopted and promulgated written

sexual harassment policies in accordance with Public Act 87-1257 and will make this information available upon request.

10. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares he will comply with prevailing wages in

accordance with the Illinois Department of Labor Standards. The State of Illinois requires contractors and subcontractors on public works projects (including the Rock River Water Reclamation District) to submit certified payroll records on a monthly basis, along with a statement affirming that such records are true and accurate, that the wages paid to each worker are not less than the required prevailing rate and that the contractor is aware that filing false records is a Class B Misdemeanor. The successful Bidder shall be responsible for verifying the prevailing wages each month



and notifying all subcontractors of the appropriate monthly rates. Prevailing wage rates may be found on the Illinois Department of Labor website at www.state.il.us/agency/idol/rates.

The certified payroll records must include the name, address, telephone number, social security number, job classification, hourly wages paid in each pay period, the number of hours worked each day, and the starting and ending time of work each day, for every worker employed on the project. Any contractor who fails to submit a certified payroll or knowingly files a false certified payroll is guilty of a Class B Misdemeanor. Certified payroll reports shall be submitted on industry standard forms such as IDOT Statement of Compliance (SBE 348) or other approved equal.

11. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares he will comply with the Federal Drug Free Workplace Act.

12. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares he will comply with Public Act 83-1030 entitled "Steel Products Procurement Act".

13. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares he will comply with Article 2 Public Act 96-

929 (30 ILCS 570) regarding Illinois residents employment. 14. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares he will comply with non-discrimination in

employment in accordance with the Illinois Fair Employment Practices Commissions Rules & Regulations.

15. The undersigned, as Bidder, declares that he currently participates in an

apprenticeship or training program that is registered with the United States Department of Labor’s Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or other acceptable State of Illinois Department of Labor monitored program.

In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Rock River

Water Reclamation District to reject any and all bids. It is agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the opening thereof.

The undersigned further declares that he (they) has (have) carefully examined the

following items of work and that the cost of all the work to complete this project is given in this Proposal.

The Bidder is required to provide a total price for each item included in the bid schedule, and a single lump sum price. Bids submitted without costs for all items will be rejected as being non-responsive. The award of this contract, if at all, will be made to the firm submitting the lowest cost for the scope of work as determined by the District.



LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT

Total Amount of Lump Sum Bids, expressed in figures, for providing all materials, equipment, and labor to complete this project in conformity with all specifications in this Invitation to Bid: Base Bid $________________________._______ Add to Base Bid for Alternative A (+) $________________________._______ Deduct from Base Bid for Alternative A (-) $________________________._______ The undersigned acknowledges that they have received Addendum numbers ____, ____, ____, and realizes that all Addenda are considered part of the contract. Date: ________________________ Bidder: _____________________________ By: ______________________________ (print name of firm) (authorized rep's signature) ___________________________________ _________________________________ (print street address) print rep's name) ___________________________________ _________________________________ (print city, state, zip) (print rep's title) ___________________________________ _________________________________ (area code and phone number) (facsimile number) Note: The Rock River Water Reclamation District, a Governmental Unit, pays neither Federal Excise Tax nor Illinois Retailers' Occupational Tax. The bidder shall exclude those taxes from their bid.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Section 00305

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS In compliance with the Instructions To Bidders and other Contract Documents, the undersigned submits the following names of Subcontractors that will perform in excess of 10% of the total Bid Price, including bid alternatives, for the Work for “Co-digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2 – Capital Project #1155” for the Rock River Water Reclamation District. Bidder certifies that all Subcontractors listed are eligible to perform the Work. Subcontractor's Work Subcontractor's Name __________________ ___________________________ __________________ ___________________________ __________________ ___________________________ __________________ ___________________________ __________________ ___________________________ As listed in the Instructions To Bidders, the Bidder must perform with their own organization and forces not less than 25% of the total amount of the Work, computed on the basis of cost. Each Bidder shall enter into the space provided below the minimum percentage of the Work they propose to self-perform. Minimum percentage of the Work to

be self-performed by Bidder

______________

NOTE: This form must be submitted with the Proposal in accordance with the Instructions To Bidders. ____________________________________________________ Bidder's Signature


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Section 00310

EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE The Bidder shall enter in the spaces provided the names of the manufacturers of equipment which Bidder proposes to furnish, and shall submit this Equipment Questionnaire with its Proposal. Owner will review and evaluate the information before award of the Contract. Only one manufacturer's name shall be listed for each item of equipment. Upon award of a contract, the named equipment shall be furnished. Substitutions will be permitted only if named equipment does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the manufacturer is unable to meet the delivery requirements of the construction schedule, or the manufacturer is dilatory in complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions shall be subject to concurrence of Owner and shall be confirmed by Change Order. Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by manufacturer's name shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications covering such equipment; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the Contract Documents. Failure to furnish all information requested or entering more than one manufacturer's name for any item in this Equipment Questionnaire may be cause for rejection of the Proposal. Equipment Manufacturer 1. Hydrophilic HSW Tank Special

Coating Systems, Section 09940

______________________________ 2. End Suction Chopper Pumps,

Section 11117

______________________________ 3. FRP Flat Tank Cover, Section

13225 (Base Bid)

______________________________ 4. FRP Dome Tank Cover, Section

13226 (Bid Alternative)

______________________________ 5. Eccentric Plug Valves, Section

15102

______________________________ 6. Adjustable Frequency Drives,

Section 16150

______________________________End of Section


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Fair Employment Practices Affidavit of Compliance

Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2 Capital Project No. 1155

NOTE: THE BIDDER MUST EXECUTE THIS AFFIDAVIT AND SUBMIT IT WITH HIS SIGNED BID. THE ROCK RIVER WATER RECLAMATION DISTRICT CANNOT ACCEPT ANY BID WHICH DOES NOT CONTAIN THIS AFFIDAVIT , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (Name of person making affidavit) They are: of (Officer’s Title) (Company Name) that said company is an “Equal Opportunity Employer” as defined by Section 2000(e) of Chapter 21, Title 42 of the United States Code annotated and Federal Executive Orders #11375 which are incorporated herein by reference; and that said company will comply with any and all requirements of Article VI – Equal Opportunity Clause, Rules and Regulations, Illinois Department of Human Rights, which read as follows: “In the event of the contractor’s non-compliance with the provisions of this Equal Employment Opportunity Clause, the Illinois Human Rights Act or the Rules and Regulations of the Illinois Department of Human Rights (“Department”), the contractor may be declared ineligible for future contracts or subcontracts with the State of Illinois or any of its political subdivisions or municipal corporations, and the contract may be cancelled or voided in whole or in part, and such other sanctions or penalties may be imposed or remedies invoked as provided by statute or regulation. During the performance to this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

1. That it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, marital status, national origin or ancestry, age, physical or mental handicap unrelated to ability, or an unfavorable discharge from military service; and further that it will examine all job classifications to determine if minority persons or women are underutilized and will take appropriate affirmative action to rectify any such underutilization.

2. That, if it hires additional employees in order to perform this contract or any portion

thereof, it will determine the availability (in accordance with the Department’s Rules and Regulations) of minorities and women in the area(s) from which it may reasonably recruit and it will hire for each job classification for which employees are hired in such a way that minorities and women are not underutilized.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

3. That, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by it or on its behalf, it will state that all applicants will be afforded equal opportunity without discrimination because of race, color, religion, sex, marital status, national origin or ancestry, age, physical or mental handicap unrelated to ability, or an unfavorable discharge from military service.

4. That it will send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which it

has or is bound by a collective bargaining or other contract or understanding, a notice advising such labor organization or representative of the contractor’s obligations under the Illinois Human Rights Act and the Department’s Rules and Regulations. If any such labor organization or representative fails or refuses to cooperate with the contractor in its efforts to comply with such Act and Rules and Regulations, the contractor will promptly so notify the Department and the contracting agency and will recruit employees from other sources when necessary to fulfill its obligations thereunder.

5. That it will submit reports as required by the Department’s Rules and Regulations,

furnish all relevant information as may from time to time be requested by the Department or the contracting agency, and in all respects comply with the Illinois Human Rights Act and the Departments Rules and Regulations.

6. That it will permit access to all relevant books, records, accounts and work sites by

personnel of the contracting agency and the Department for purposes of investigations to ascertain compliance with the Illinois Human Rights Act and the Department’s Rules and Regulations.

7. That it will include verbatim or by reference the provisions of this clause in every

subcontract it awards under which any portion of the contract obligations are undertaken or assumed, so that such provisions will be binding upon such subcontractor. In the same manner as with other provisions of this contract, the contractor will be liable for compliance with applicable provisions of this clause by such subcontractors; and further it will promptly notify the contracting agency and the Department in the event any subcontractor fails or refuses to comply therewith. In addition, the contractor will not utilize any subcontractor declared by the Illinois Human Rights Commission to be ineligible for contacts or subcontracts with the State of Illinois or any of its political subdivisions or municipal corporations.

(Filed February 6, 1981, Effective February 9, 1981)”

Signature Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ____ , 20 .

Notary Public


Performance Bond




KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that WHEREAS, the Rock River Water Reclamation District has awarded to: _______________________________________________ hereinafter designated as the “Principal”, a contract, dated, ________________, for the Rock River Water Reclamation District. WHEREAS, said Principal is required under the terms of said Contract to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said Contract (the “Bond”); NOW, THEREFORE, we the Principal and ____________________________________, as Surety, are firmly bound unto the Rock River Water Reclamation District in the penal sum of _________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($____________________ ) lawful money of the United States for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents for a performance bond. The conditions of this obligation is such that if the said Principal does well and faithfully performs all the conditions and covenants of said Contract, according to the true intent and meaning thereof, upon its part to be kept and performed, then the above obligation is to be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the above bounden Principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in the said Contract, including the provisions for liquidated damages in the said Contract, any changes, additions or alterations thereof made as therein provided, on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Rock River Water Reclamation District, its officers and agents, as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. And the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same and no inadvertent overpayment of progress payments shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the specifications or of any inadvertent overpayment of progress payments. The Rock River Water Reclamation District shall be named as beneficiary on this Performance Bond.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this instrument under their seal this _________day of _________________, 20_______, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.

CONTRACTOR SURETY Contractor Firm Name: By: _____________________________ By: _________________________

Signature Attorney-in-Fact _________________________ Title Resident Agent ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporations only)


Labor & Material Payment Bond


Co-digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2

Capital Project No. 1155 TO: Contractor Name Contractor City, State

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That: (Contractor) as Principal, and _____________________________________________________ a corporation of the State of _________________________ as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Rock River Water Reclamation District, as Obligee, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinafter defined in the amount of Dollars ($ ), for the payment where of Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated 20 Entered into a Contract with Obligee for _______________________________________ in accordance with contract documents prepared by the Rock River Water Reclamation District which Contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as “the Contract”.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if Principal shall promptly pay for all laborers, workers and mechanics engaged in the work under the Contract, and not less than the general prevailing rate of hourly wages of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, as determined by the State of Illinois Department of Labor pursuant to the Illinois Compiled Statutes 280 ILCS 130 / 1-12 et.seq. and for all material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. 1. A claimant is deemed as any person, firm, or corporation having contracts with the

Principal or with any of Principal’s subcontractors for labor or materials furnished in the performance of the Contract on account of which this Bond is given.

2. Nothing in this Bond contained shall be taken to make the Obligee liable to any subcontractor, material man or laborer, or to any other person to any greater extent than it would have been liable prior to the enactment of The Public Construction Bond Act, approved June 20, 1931, as amended; provided further, that any person having a claim for labor and materials furnished in the performance of the Contract shall have no right of


action unless he shall have filed a verified notice of such claim with the Obligee within 180 days after the date of the last item of work or the furnishing of the last item of materials, which claim shall have been verified and shall contain the name and address of the claimant, the business address of the claimant within the State of Illinois, if any, or if the claimant be a foreign corporation having no place of business within the State the principal place of business of the corporation, and in all cases of partnership the names and residences of each of the partners, the name of the Contractor for the Obligee, the name of the person, firm or corporation by whom the claimant was employed or to whom such claimant furnished materials, the amount of the claim and a brief description of the public improvement for the construction or installation of which the contract is to be performed. No defect in the notice herein provided for shall deprive the claimant of its right of action under the terms and provisions of this Bond unless it shall affirmatively appear that such defect has prejudiced the rights of an interested party asserting the same.

3. No action shall be brought on this Bond until the expiration of 120 days after the date of the last item of work or of the furnishing of the last item of material except in cases where the final settlement between Obligee and the Contractor shall have been made prior to the expiration of the 120 day period, in which case action may be taken immediately following such final settlement; nor shall any action of any kind be brought later than 6 months after the acceptance by the Obligee of the work. Such suit shall be brought only in the circuit court of this State in the judicial district in which the Contract is to be performed.

4. Surety hereby waives notice of any changes in the Contract, including extensions of time for the performance thereof.

5. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder.

6. The Principal and Surety shall be liable for any attorney fees, engineering costs, or court costs incurred by the Obligee relative to claims made against this Bond.

Signed and Sealed this day of , 2015 CONTRACTOR SURETY: _________________________________________ Contractor Firm Name: ______________________________________________ By: _____________________________ By: ____________________________

Signature Attorney-in-Fact _______ ____________________________ Title Resident Agent ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporations only)


EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly by

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES ______________________

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA

______________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS _______________________

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE

A Practice Division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS

Endorsed by

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE



Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005

(202) 347-7474 www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

(800) 548-2723 www.asce.org

Associated General Contractors of America 2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308

(703) 548-3118 www.agc.org

The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.



Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 –Definitions and Terminology...........................................................................................................1 1.01 Defined Terms ...............................................................................................................................1 1.02 Terminology ..................................................................................................................................5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters..........................................................................................................................6 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................6 2.02 Copies of Documents ....................................................................................................................6 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed...............................................................6 2.04 Starting the Work ..........................................................................................................................7 2.05 Before Starting Construction.........................................................................................................7 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ..................................7 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ....................................................................................................7

Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse.............................................................................8 3.01 Intent ..............................................................................................................................................8 3.02 Reference Standards ......................................................................................................................8 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies .......................................................................................9 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ...................................................................9 3.05 Reuse of Documents....................................................................................................................10 3.06 Electronic Data ............................................................................................................................10

Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points...........................................................................................................11

4.01 Availability of Lands...................................................................................................................11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...........................................................................................11 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions .............................................................................12 4.04 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................13 4.05 Reference Points..........................................................................................................................14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ..............................................................................14

Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance ......................................................................................................................16 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ...................................................................................16 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ....................................................................................................16 5.03 Certificates of Insurance..............................................................................................................17 5.04 Contractor’s Insurance.................................................................................................................17 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................19 5.06 Property Insurance.......................................................................................................................19 5.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................20 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .........................................................................21



Page ii

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace............................................................21 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer..........................................................22

Article 6 –Contractor’s Responsibilities.........................................................................................................22 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ...............................................................................................22 6.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................22 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment............................................................................................22 6.04 Progress Schedule........................................................................................................................23 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” .......................................................................................................23 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ....................................................................25 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties............................................................................................................27 6.08 Permits .........................................................................................................................................27 6.09 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................28 6.10 Taxes............................................................................................................................................28 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................28 6.12 Record Documents ......................................................................................................................29 6.13 Safety and Protection...................................................................................................................29 6.14 Safety Representative ..................................................................................................................30 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................30 6.16 Emergencies.................................................................................................................................30 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples.......................................................................................................31 6.18 Continuing the Work...................................................................................................................32 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee...........................................................................33 6.20 Indemnification............................................................................................................................33 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ...............................................................................34

Article 7 – Other Work at the Site ...................................................................................................................35 7.01 Related Work at Site....................................................................................................................35 7.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................35 7.03 Legal Relationships .....................................................................................................................36

Article 8 – Owner’s Responsibilities ...............................................................................................................36 8.01 Communications to Contractor ...................................................................................................36 8.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................36 8.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................36 8.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................36 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ...................................................................................36 8.06 Insurance......................................................................................................................................36 8.07 Change Orders .............................................................................................................................37 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................37 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities....................................................................................37 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ....................................................................37 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements..........................................................................................37 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program ...............................................................................................37

Article 9 – Engineer’s Status During Construction.........................................................................................37 9.01 Owner’s Representative ..............................................................................................................37



Page iii

9.02 Visits to Site.................................................................................................................................37 9.03 Project Representative.................................................................................................................38 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work...................................................................................................38 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work...........................................................................................................38 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ..........................................................................39 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work...........................................................................................39 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work .....................39 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities.........................................................39 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program ...............................................................................................40

Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims......................................................................................................40 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................................40 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work............................................................................................41 10.03 Execution of Change Orders .......................................................................................................41 10.04 Notification to Surety ..................................................................................................................41 10.05 Claims..........................................................................................................................................41

Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work .......................................................................42 11.01 Cost of the Work .........................................................................................................................42 11.02 Allowances ..................................................................................................................................45 11.03 Unit Price Work...........................................................................................................................45

Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times................................................................46 12.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................46 12.02 Change of Contract Times...........................................................................................................47 12.03 Delays ..........................................................................................................................................47

Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work .......................48 13.01 Notice of Defects.........................................................................................................................48 13.02 Access to Work............................................................................................................................48 13.03 Tests and Inspections...................................................................................................................49 13.04 Uncovering Work ........................................................................................................................49 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work .........................................................................................................50 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work.................................................................................50 13.07 Correction Period.........................................................................................................................50 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ...................................................................................................51 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work..........................................................................................52

Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion.....................................................................................52 14.01 Schedule of Values......................................................................................................................52 14.02 Progress Payments.......................................................................................................................52 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title....................................................................................................55 14.04 Substantial Completion ...............................................................................................................55 14.05 Partial Utilization.........................................................................................................................56 14.06 Final Inspection ...........................................................................................................................57 14.07 Final Payment ..............................................................................................................................57 14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..........................................................................................................58



Page iv

14.09 Waiver of Claims.........................................................................................................................58

Article 15 –Suspension of Work and Termination.........................................................................................59 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work.........................................................................................................59 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause................................................................................................59 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ...................................................................................60 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate...................................................................................60

Article 16 – Dispute Resolution.......................................................................................................................61 16.01 Methods and Procedures .............................................................................................................61

Article 17 – Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................61 17.01 Giving Notice ..............................................................................................................................61 17.02 Computation of Times.................................................................................................................62 17.03 Cumulative Remedies .................................................................................................................62 17.04 Survival of Obligations ...............................................................................................................62 17.05 Controlling Law...........................................................................................................................62 17.06 Headings ......................................................................................................................................62



Page 1 of 62

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

5. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.

6. Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner.

7. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda).

8. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.

9. Change Order—A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.

10. Claim—A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

11. Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.



Page 2 of 62

12. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.

13. Contract Price—The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work).

14. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment.

15. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.

16. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 for definition.

17. Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.

18. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.

19. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

20. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

21. General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.

23. Hazardous Waste—The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time.

24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.

25. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property.

26. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.



Page 3 of 62

27. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.

28. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents.

29. Owner—The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed.

30. PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls.

31. Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.

32. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

33. Project—The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part.

34. Project Manual—The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents.

35. Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.

36. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof.

37. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.

38. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities.

39. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.



Page 4 of 62

40. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

41. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

42. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.

43. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.

44. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

45. Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award.

46. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions.

47. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.

48. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

49. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

50. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents.

51. Work Change Directive—A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an



Page 5 of 62

addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).



Page 6 of 62

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.



Page 7 of 62

2.04 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run.

2.05 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents;

2. apreliminary Schedule of Submittals; and

3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on



Page 8 of 62

Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations

1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.



Page 9 of 62

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive.

B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways:



Page 10 of 62

1. A Field Order;

2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or

3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification.

3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or

2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.

3.06 Electronic Data

A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.

B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.

C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator.



Page 11 of 62

ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS

4.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.



Page 12 of 62

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and conclusions.

C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or

b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and



Page 13 of 62

contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such final commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

4.04 Underground Facilities

A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated:

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the



Page 14 of 62

consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

4.05 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.



Page 15 of 62

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.

D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 4.06.E.

E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.

G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.



Page 16 of 62

H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.

ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.

C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02.

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers

A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also



Page 17 of 62

meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

5.03 Certificates of Insurance

A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain.

B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain.

C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor’s full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain such insurance.

D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor.

E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.

5.04 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts;

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees;

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees;

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained:



Page 18 of 62

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or

b. by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall:

1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby;

2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater;

3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20;

4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);

5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and

6. include completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.



Page 19 of 62

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.

5.06 Property Insurance

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee;

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;

5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;

6. include testing and startup; and

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.

B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,



Page 20 of 62

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee.

C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.

D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense.

E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner.

5.07 Waiver of Rights

A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for:



Page 21 of 62

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them.

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order.

B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties.

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace

A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party’s



Page 22 of 62

interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer

A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy.

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.

6.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer.

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.



Page 23 of 62

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

6.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto.

2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order.

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below.

1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics;



Page 24 of 62

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.

2. Substitute Items:

a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item.

b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.

c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances.

d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design,

b) be similar in substance to that specified, and

c) be suited to the same use as that specified;

2) will state:

a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time,

b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and



Page 25 of 62

c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;

3) will identify:

a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and

b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and

4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be



Page 26 of 62

required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work.

C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.

E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.

F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner,



Page 27 of 62

Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same.

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

6.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.



Page 28 of 62

6.09 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

6.10 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work.

2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.

3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought



Page 29 of 62

by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor’s performance of the Work.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

6.12 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner.

6.13 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;

2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and



Page 30 of 62

shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

6.14 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.

6.16 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is



Page 31 of 62

required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples

A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

2. Samples:

a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications.

b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Submittal Procedures:

1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.



Page 32 of 62

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

6.18 Continuing the Work

A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.



Page 33 of 62

6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.

6.20 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable .



Page 34 of 62

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1.



Page 35 of 62

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

7.01 Related Work at Site

A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then:

1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and

2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.

C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.

7.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:

1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified;

2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.



Page 36 of 62

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination.

7.03 Legal Relationships

A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner.

B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s wrongful actions or inactions.

C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor’s wrongful action or inactions.

ARTICLE 8 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

8.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer.

8.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

8.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

8.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C.

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

8.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5.



Page 37 of 62

8.07 Change Orders

A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B.

8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06.

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents.

8.12 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

9.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents.

9.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or



Page 38 of 62

continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

9.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

9.04 Authorized Variations in Work

A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

9.05 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.



Page 39 of 62

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17.

B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21.

C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.

D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14.

9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B.

C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.

9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not



Page 40 of 62

exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.

B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any.

9.10 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).

B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.



Page 41 of 62

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D.

10.03 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering:

1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;

2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and

3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A.

10.04 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.

10.05 Claims

A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims.

B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data



Page 42 of 62

shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).

C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing:

1. deny the Claim in whole or in part;

2. approve the Claim; or

3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.

D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied.

E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial.

F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.

ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

11.01 Cost of the Work

A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items:



Page 43 of 62

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of



Page 44 of 62

said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not



Page 45 of 62

limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A.

C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.

D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

11.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Cash Allowances:

1. Contractor agrees that:

a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance:

1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

11.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to



Page 46 of 62

the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.

ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES

12.01 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).



Page 47 of 62

C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.

12.02 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12.

12.03 Delays

A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or



Page 48 of 62

neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God.

B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C.

D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.

ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK

13.01 Notice of Defects

A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.

13.02 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.



Page 49 of 62

13.03 Tests and Inspections

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.

B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except:

1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;

2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and

3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation.

F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

13.04 Uncovering Work

A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.

B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment.



Page 50 of 62

C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

13.05 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work

A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work.

13.07 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions:



Page 51 of 62

1. repair such defective land or areas; or

2. correct such defective Work; or

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.



Page 52 of 62

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09.

ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

14.01 Schedule of Values

A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.

14.02 Progress Payments

A. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an



Page 53 of 62

Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or



Page 54 of 62

involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or

d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A.

C. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.



Page 55 of 62

D. Reduction in Payment:

1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work;

b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;

c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or

d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.

2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.

14.04 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before



Page 56 of 62

final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.

E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the tentative list.

14.05 Partial Utilization

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work.

2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.



Page 57 of 62

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance.

14.06 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

14.07 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. alist of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner’s property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying



Page 58 of 62

documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.

C. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

14.08 Final Completion Delayed

A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

14.09 Waiver of Claims

A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:

1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and

2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled.



Page 59 of 62

ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);

2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;

3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or

4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor:

1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion);

2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and

3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when



Page 60 of 62

so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice.

E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C.

15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses;

3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and

4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days



Page 61 of 62

to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.

ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION

16.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.

B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.

C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:

1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or

3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS

17.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:



Page 62 of 62

1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice.

17.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

17.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.

17.04 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

17.05 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

17.06 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Section 00800

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SCOPE. These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated herein. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. SC-1. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY. SC-1.01. Defined Terms.

A. Delete and replace definitions 9, 15, 17, 19, 22, 23, 29, and 51 in Paragraph 1.01.A of the General Conditions with the following:

9. Change Order--A document which is signed by Contractor and

Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.

15. Contractor--The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered

into the Agreement. The terms Contractor and CONTRACTOR are interchangeable and shall have the same meaning in the Contract Documents.

17. Drawings--That part of the Contract Documents prepared or

approved by Consulting Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. The terms Drawings and Plans are interchangeable and shall have the same meaning in the Contract Documents.

19. Engineer-- The terms Engineer and ENGINEER are

interchangeable and shall refer to the Engineering Manager of the Rock River Water Reclamation District. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The presence at the Site of hazardous materials or conditions, including, but not limited to, Contaminated Environmental Media, Asbestos, Metal Bearing Protective Coatings, Paints, and Linings, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, Radioactive Material, metals such as but not limited to arsenic, cadmium, chrome, cobalt, lead, and mercury, and other Hazardous Substances; in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto or cause


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

them to come under the application of a federal, state, or local regulation.

23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in 40 CFR 261 titled “Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste,” as amended from time to time.

29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered

into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. The terms Owner and OWNER and District are interchangeable and shall have the same meaning in the Contract Documents.

51. Work Change Directive--A written statement to Contractor issued

on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the Work or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.

B. Add the following definitions to Paragraph 1.01.A of the General Conditions:

52. Consulting Engineer--The firm of Black & Veatch Corporation, 101 North Wacker Drive, Suite 1100, Chicago, IL 60606 and their duly authorized agents, such agents acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them in each case. 53. Float--The amount of time between the early start date and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, of any of the activities in the progress schedule.

54. Proposal--The terms "Proposal" and "Bid" are interchangeable and shall have the same meaning in the Contract Documents.

55. Resident Project Representative--In lieu of the definition set forth in Paragraph 1.01.A.36 of the General Conditions, the Resident Project Representative shall be the authorized representative of Owner, who may be assigned to the site or any part thereof. 56. without exception--The term "without exception", when used in the Contract Documents following the name of a Supplier or a proprietary


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

item of equipment, product, or material, shall mean that the sources of the product are limited to the listed Suppliers or products and that no like, equivalent, or "or-equal" item and no substitution will be permitted. 57. Hazardous Substances--The term Hazardous Substance shall have the meaning provided in 29 CRF 1910.120 titled “Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response,” as ammended from time to time. 58. Metal Bearing Protective Coatings, Paints and Liners--Protective coatings, paints, and liners that contain measurable amounts of metals such as but not limited to arsenic, cadmium, chrome, cobalt, lead, or mercury. 59. Contaminated Environmental Media--Soil, sediment, ground water, or air contaminated with Hazardous Substances.

SC-2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS. SC-2.02. Copies of Documents. Delete Paragraph 2.02.A of the General Conditions, and replace it with the following new paragraph:

A. The Contractor to whom a contract is awarded will be furnished, free of charge, 3 copies of the Project Manual and 3 sets of the Drawings, together with all Addenda. Additional copies of the Project Manual and Drawings may be obtained from Owner on the following basis:

Full Set of Drawings and Project Manual $100.00

SC-3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE. SC-3.05. Reuse of Documents. Delete Paragraphs 3.05.A of the General Conditions and replace it with the following:

A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Consulting Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or

2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or

copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Consulting Engineer or his consultants and specific written verification or adaptation by entity responsible for those documents.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

SC-3.06. Electronic Data. Delete paragraph 3.06.A of the General Conditions and replace it with the following: A. Except as permitted in the Submittals Procedures section of Division 1,

data furnished by Owner, Engineer, or Consulting Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner, Engineer, or Consulting Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.

SC-4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS. SC-4.02. Subsurface and Physical Conditions. A. Reports and Drawings. Delete Paragraph 4.02.A of the General

conditions and replace it with the following:

A. Reports and Drawings: 1. No reports of explorations and tests of subsurface

Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to the Owner.

2. The following drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface and subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) were relied upon:

a. Drawings dated April 1967, prepared by Greeley and

Hansen, titled " Sewage Treatment Plant Additions: Division TPI-H, Preliminary Treatment Facilities" consisting of 54 sheets, numbered 1 to 54, inclusive.

b. Drawings dated March 1975, prepared by Greeley

and Hansen, titled " Sewage Treatment Plant Additions: Division TPI-P, Primary Treatment and Thickening Facilities " consisting of 59 sheets, numbered 1 to 59, inclusive.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

c. Drawings dated October 2003, prepared by Black & Veatch, titled "Biosolids Processing Improvements: Phase 2" consisting of 84 sheets, numbered 1 to 84, inclusive.

d. Drawings dated May 2013, prepared by Black &

Veatch, titled "Co-digestion Receiving Station" consisting of 70 sheets, numbered 1 to 70, inclusive.

These drawings will be available for review at the District office at 3501 Kishwaukee Street in Rockford, IL; however, copies will not be made available.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized. Delete Paragraph 4.02.B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph:

B. No Reliance by Contractor Authorized. Owner, Consulting

Engineer, and Engineer do not warrant the accuracy of the physical conditions information and drawings which are not Contract Documents. Contractor uses such information at Contractor's sole risk.

It shall be understood that the information provided is not guaranteed

by Owner, Consulting Engineer, Engineer to be more than a general indication of the physical conditions likely to be found.

SC-4.04. Underground Facilities.

A. Shown or Indicated. Delete Paragraph 4.04.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or

indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Consulting Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Consulting Engineer shall not be responsible

for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

2. The cost of all of the following shall be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information and

data: b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated

in the Contract Documents: c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such

Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction: and

d. the safety and protection of all such Underground

Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated. Delete Paragraph 4.04.B of the General

Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:

B. Not Shown or Indicated:

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner. Owner will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

2. If Owner concludes that a change in the Contract

Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

SC-4.06. Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site.

A. Delete Paragraph 4.06.A of the General Conditions and replace with the following paragraph:

A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental

Conditions at the Site are known to the Owner.

B. Delete Paragraph 4.06.B of the General Conditions in its entirety.

C. Delete Paragraph 4.06.G and 4.06.H of the General Conditions and replace with the following:

G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,

Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Consulting Engineer, Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

D. Renumber Paragraph 4.06.I of the General Conditions as Paragraph

4.06.H.

E. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.06.H of the General Conditions as renumbered above:

I. Abatement of Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site is

covered in the Project Requirements section.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

SC-5. BONDS AND INSURANCE. Delete Article 5 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and insert the following text in its place:

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE Bonds and Insurance requirements shall be as identified in Instructions To Bidders.

SC-6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. SC-6.02. Labor; Working Hours. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions:

C. No work shall be done between 4 PM and 6:30 AM. Any work on outside of working hours or on Owner holidays requires Owner approval at least two (2) business days in advance of the proposed extended work hours. However, emergency work may be done without prior permission.

SC-6.06. Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others. Delete Paragraph 6.06.B of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following two paragraphs in its place:

B. The Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner with the Proposal , and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work.

Particular consideration will be given to the qualifications of each

Subcontractor proposed on the List of Subcontractors. The use of Subcontractors proposed by Bidder and accepted by Owner prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work unless otherwise permitted or directed by Owner.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

SC-6.07. Patent Fees and Royalties. Delete paragraph 6.07.B of the General Conditions in its entirety, and renumber paragraph 6.07.C as paragraph 6.07.B. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.07.B of the General Conditions:

C. Contractor shall furnish to Owner at the time of initial submittal, satisfactory evidence that Suppliers of proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes to be furnished or used in the performance of the Work do indemnify, keep, and save harmless Contractor from all liabilities, judgments, costs, damages, and expenses which may arise from the use of such proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes, furnished to Contractor for incorporation in or use in performance of the Work and their operation by Owner after acceptance of the Work. Such satisfactory evidence shall consist of patent licenses or patent releases covering proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes.

SC-6.09. Laws and Regulations. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.09.C of the General Conditions:

D. The Contractor shall plan, schedule, and coordinate work in consideration of Owner’s safety requirements, including but not limited to personal protective equipment for arc flash.

E. Additional laws and regulations are included in the Instructions To

Bidders. SC-6.10. Taxes. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.10.A of the General Conditions:

B. Pursuant to Department of Revenue, Illinois Retailer's Occupation Tax Rule 15(4), sales of materials for incorporation into Owner's real estate are exempt from retailer's occupation tax and use tax. However, sales of tools, fuel, lumber for forms, and other end use or consumption items which are not incorporated into Owner's real estate are taxable sales.

SC-6.17. Shop Drawings and Samples. Delete Paragraph 6.17 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:

6.17. Shop Drawings and Samples. Requirements for shop drawings, samples, and submittal procedures shall be as specified in Division 1 Submittals Procedures section. Fabrication that proceeds prior to acceptance of submittals by Engineer shall be at Contractor’s risk.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

SC-6.19. Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee. Delete Paragraphs 6.19.C.6 and 6.19.C.7 of the General Conditions and replace with the following Paragraphs 6.19.C.6, 6.19.C.7, and 6.19.C.8.

6. an inspection, test, or approval by others; 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner; or 8. any expiration of a correction period.

SC-6.20. Indemnification. Delete Paragraph 6.20 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:

6.20. Indemnification – Indemnification shall be as indicated in Instructions To Bidders.

SC- 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services. B. Delete Paragraphs 6.21.B, 6.21.C, and 6.21.D of the General

Conditions in their entirety, and replace with the following Paragraphs 6.21.B, 6.21.C, and 6.21.D.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design

professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an Illinois licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Owner.

C. Owner shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and

completeness of the services, certifications or approval performed by such design professionals, provided Owner has specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Owner's review and acceptance

of signed and sealed certifications of performance and design criteria used when designing systems, materials, or equipment and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Owner's review and acceptance of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except performance and design criteria and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Division 1 Submittals Procedures section.

SC-7. OTHER WORK AT THE SITE. SC-7.01. Related Work at Site. Add the following new paragraph at the end of Paragraph 7.01.A of the General Conditions:

In addition to the Work under this Contract, Owner will perform other work related to the Project at the Site and with its own workers. Such work by Owner is listed in Division 1, General Requirements.

SC-8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES. SC-8.01. Communications to Contractor. Delete Paragraph 8.01.A of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace it with the following:

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner will issue communications to Contractor.

SC-8.11. Evidence of Financial Arrangements. Delete Paragraph 8.11 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace it with the following:

8.11. Evidence of Financial Arrangements. – Not used. SC-9. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION. SC-9.08. Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work.

A. Add the following new words at the end of the first sentence of Paragraph 9.08.A of the General Conditions;

…insofar as the subject matter of any pertinent claim, dispute, or other

matter falls within the realm of the technical expertise of Engineer.

B. Add the following new sentence at the end of Paragraph 9.08.A of the General Conditions:

Engineer shall not render any decision on any claims, disputes, or

other matters the subject matter of which, at Engineer's sole discretion, requires legal, rather than technical, interpretation.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

C. Delete 9.08C in its entirty SC-10. CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS. SC-10.03. Execution of Change Orders.

A. Replace the first sentence of Paragraph 10.03.A of the General Conditions with the following:

Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

B. Delete Paragraph 10.03.A.3 in its entirity. SC-10.05. Claims.

A. Delete Paragraph 10.05.B. of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following:

B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim

shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 7 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 14 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 7 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).

B. Delete Paragraph 10.05.E. of the General Conditions in its entirety,

and replace with the following:

E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Contractor appeals


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

to the Owner’s Board of Trustees within 30 days of such action or denial. All other disputes will be settled by the remedies at law.

SC-11. COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK. – No Modifications. SC-12. CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES. – No Modifications. SC-13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK. SC-13.07. Correction Period. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 13.07.E of the General Conditions:

F. Nothing in this Article 13 concerning the correction period shall establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which Contractor has under the Contract Documents. The establishment of time periods relates only to the specific obligations of Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations other than to specifically correct the Work.

G. The correction period set forth in Paragraph 13.07.A shall be 2 years in

lieu of 1 year. All other provisions of Paragraph 13.07 shall remain unchanged.

SC-14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION. SC-14.02. Progress Payments. Add the following new paragraphs immediately following Paragraph 14.02.A.3 of the General Conditions:

4. Materials and Equipment. Payments for stored materials and equipment shall be based only upon the actual cost to Contractor of the materials and equipment and shall not include any overhead or profit to Contractor.

Partial payments will not be made for undelivered materials or

equipment.


Bid Doc. No. 15-408

5. Schedules and Data. During the progress of the Work, each application for Payment shall be accompanied by Contractor's updated schedule of operations or progress report, with such shop drawings schedules, procurement schedules, values of materials and equipment on hand included in application, and other data specified or reasonably required by Engineer.

6. Lien Waivers. Each application for Payment shall be accompanied

by lien waivers.

SC-14.07. Final Payment. Add the following new sentence at the end of Paragraph 14.07.A.2 of the General Conditions:

Consent of the surety, signed by an agent, must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act for the surety.

SC-15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION. No modifications. SC-16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION. Delete Article 16 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and insert the following text in its place:

ARTICLE 16 – NOT USED SC-17. MISCELLANEOUS. SC-17.04. Survival of Obligations. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.04.A of the General Conditions:

B. Contractor shall obtain from all Suppliers and manufacturers any and all warranties and guarantees of such Suppliers and manufacturers, whether or not specifically required by the Specifications, and shall assign such warranties and guarantees to Owner. With respect thereto, Contractor shall render reasonable assistance to Owner when requested, in order to enable Owner to enforce such warranties and guarantees. The assignment of any warranties or guarantees shall not affect the correction period or any other provisions of these Contract Documents.

End of Section


Bid Doc. No. 15-408



Specifications



Rock River Water Reclamation District 01015 3/11/15 Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station -1- 176424 Phase 2

Section 01015

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK. The Work to be performed under these Contract Documents is generally described as follows: The Co-digestion Project - Receiving Station Phase 2 - Capital Project #1155 consists of improvements to the Rock River Water Reclamation District’s Wastewater Treatment Plant located at 3333 Kishwaukee St. in Rockford, Illinois. The project includes the repurposing of existing facilities to serve as a new hydrophilic waste storage and handling system. Modifications to include the installation of a new circular fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) cover and a protective coating system for the storage tank, as well as associated piping, equipment, heat tracing, and other miscellaneous items and appurtenances as indicated within the Bidding Documents. The upgrades will be constructed while the Wastewater Treatment Plant remains in operation. The Base Bid will include all of the Work required by the Contract Documents including the specified flat FRP cover. The bidding will include an alternative to provide a domed FRP cover in lieu of the flat cover. 2. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT. Both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of measurement are specified herein; the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern. 3. WORK BY OWNER. Owner shall perform certain activities in connection with the Project with its own personnel as follows: The Owner will operate all existing valves to isolate sections of existing pipelines as required to make interconnections with the new Work. The Owner will provide laboratory testing services for the mixing system. The Owner will operate the existing plant during construction. The Owner will modify the existing programming as required to accommodate the new equipment as described in Section 13500. 4. OFFSITE STORAGE. Offsite storage arrangements shall be approved by Owner for all materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work but included in Applications for Payment. Such offsite storage arrangements shall be presented in writing, shall be accompanied by proof of payment, and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Offsite storage facilities shall be accessible to Owner and Engineer.



5. ITEMS FURNISHED BY OWNER. The items of equipment described in the following subparagraph shall be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. Shop and installation drawings pertaining to the equipment and accessories have been attached to the specifiactions.

5.01. For Installation by Contractor.

a. Hydrophilic HSW Grinder (see Attachment to the Specifications for

submittal information). b. Knife Gate Valve as identified on the drawings.

5.02. Delivery. Except for items to be salvaged, all equipment furnished by Owner will be delivered to the Contractor’s storage area. Such items will be available to Contractor, as required to maintain Contractor's construction schedule.

5.03. Responsibility for Equipment. Contractor's responsibility for equipment furnished by Owner shall begin at the point of delivery on acceptance by Contractor. Contractor shall carefully examine each shipment prior to acceptance and shall reject all defective items. Owner reserves the right, however, to accept items rejected by Contractor and to authorize their installation in the Work. All materials furnished by Owner which disappear or are damaged after their acceptance by Contractor shall be replaced by and at the expense of Contractor. Replacements shall conform to the original procurement specifications. 5.04. Items to be re-used. Contractor shall provide Owner an opportunity to inspect items intended to be removed and re-used as part of the Work. Owner shall have the right to provide substitute materials if salvage items are not desired for re-use as indicated in the Contract Documents. 6. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS. Provisions for evaluation of substitutes and "or-equal" items of materials and equipment are covered in Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions. Requests for review of equivalency will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone except Contractor, and such requests will not be considered until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 7. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All materials shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and protect against damage during transit and storage. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer.



Each item, package, or bundle of material shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. 8. LAND FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. Contractor will be permitted to use available land belonging to Owner, on or near the Site, for construction purposes and for storage of materials and equipment. The locations and extent of the areas so used shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall immediately move stored materials or equipment if any occasion arises, as determined by Owner, requiring access to the storage area. Materials or equipment shall not be placed on the property of Owner until Owner has agreed to the location to be used for storage. 9. USE OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall not be permitted to use existing, District-owned equipment without written permission. 10. OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES. The existing facilities must be kept in continuous operation throughout the construction period. No interruption will be permitted which adversely affects the degree of service currently provided. Contractor shall provide temporary facilities and make temporary modifications as necessary to keep the existing facilities in operation during the construction period. Due to potential health hazards and requirements of State of Illinois Environmental Protection Agency and U.S. EPA, existing wastewater treatment facilities must be maintained in operation during construction. Degree of treatment during construction shall be equal to or exceed efficiency of facility before construction started. Provided permission is obtained from Owner in advance, portions of the existing facilities may be taken out of service for short periods corresponding with periods of minimum service demands. Access to Gravity Belt Thickener Building overhead door, located on the north side of the building, must be maintained at all times. Access to the ferric chloride fill pipe must be maintained at all times. Access to the Receiving Station must be maintained at all times. Guidelines for key portions of the facility are provided herein. The allowable length of time for all other temporary outages shall be coordinated with and as acceptable to the Owner. 10.01. Active Pipeline Connections. As shown on the Drawings, new piping connections and minor piping modifications will need to be made to several existing and active pipelines as part of the Work. When required and with Owner permission, these existing pipelines may be taken out of service for short periods



of time. The allowable length of time for each service outage shall be coordinated with the Owner, but shall not exceed 4 hours. Operation of isolation valves on the existing pipelines, when required, shall be by or under the direct supervision of the Owner. Draining of isolated pipe segments as required, as well as clean up of all incidental spillage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. These active pipelines include, but are not limited to: Hydrophobic HSW, Glycol Supply/Return, and Thickened Sludge. Contractor shall notify Owner a minimum of two weeks in advance of these service outages and shall plan work accordingly to minimize the impact to plant operations. 11. LINES AND GRADES. All Work shall be done to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Drawings. Basic horizontal and vertical control points are shown on the Drawings and will be used as datums for the Work. All additional survey, layout, and measurement work shall be performed by Contractor as a part of the Work. Contractor shall provide a licensed land surveyor, competent assistants, and such instruments, tools, stakes, and other materials required to complete the survey, layout, and measurement work. In addition, Contractor shall furnish, without charge, competent persons and such tools, stakes, and other materials as Engineer may require in establishing or designating control points or in checking survey, layout, and measurement work performed by Contractor. Contractor shall keep Engineer informed, a reasonable time in advance, of the times and places at which it wishes to do Work, so that horizontal and vertical control points may be established and any checking deemed necessary by Engineer may be done with minimum inconvenience to Engineer and minimum delay to Contractor. Contractor shall remove and reconstruct work which is improperly located. 12. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, Contractor shall make all necessary connections to existing facilities, including structures, drain lines, and utilities such as water, sewer, gas, telephone, and electric. In each case, Contractor shall receive permission from Owner or the owning utility prior to undertaking connections. Contractor shall protect facilities against deleterious substances and damage. Connections to existing facilities which are in service shall be thoroughly planned in advance, and all required equipment, materials, and labor shall be on hand at



the time of undertaking the connections. Work shall proceed continuously (around the clock) if necessary to complete connections in the minimum time. Operation of valves or other appurtenances on existing utilities, when required, shall be by or under the direct supervision of the owning utility. 13. UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS. During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable construction conditions, Contractor shall confine its operations to work which will not be affected adversely by such conditions. No portion of the Work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by Contractor to perform the Work in a proper and satisfactory manner. 14. CUTTING AND PATCHING. As provided in General Conditions, Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for the Work and as may be necessary in connection with uncovering Work for inspection or for the correction of defective Work. Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for and in connection with the Work, including but not limited to the following:

Removal of improperly timed Work.

Removal of samples of installed materials for testing.

Alteration of existing facilities.

Installation of new Work in existing facilities. Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, supports, and protective devices necessary to safeguard all Work and existing facilities during cutting and patching operations. Contractor shall not undertake any cutting or demolition which may affect the structural stability of the Work or existing facilities without Engineer's concurrence. Materials shall be cut and removed to the extent indicated on the Drawings or as required to complete the Work. Materials shall be removed in a careful manner, with no damage to adjacent facilities or materials. Materials which are not salvable shall be removed from the site by Contractor. All Work and existing facilities affected by cutting operations shall be restored with new materials, or with salvaged materials acceptable to Engineer, to obtain a finished installation with the strength, appearance, and functional capacity required. If necessary, entire surfaces shall be patched and refinished.



15. HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE. No Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site in areas that will be affected by the Work are known to the Owner. 15.01. Previously Unidentified Hazardous Environmental Conditions. If, during the progress of the Work, previously unidentified Hazardous Environmental Conditions are identified, Contractor shall stop work in the affected area and immediately notify the Owner and Engineer in accordance with the requirements in the General Conditions. At the Owner’s discretion, the Owner may instruct the Contractor to engage an abatement Subcontractor qualified to perform abatement of the suspected Hazardous Environmental Condition identified, to verify the materials and, if necessary, encapsulate, enclose, or remove and dispose of all ACM, Metal Bearing Protective Coatings, Paints, and Linings, Contaminated Environmental Media, and/or other Hazardous Substances in accordance with current regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency and the U. S. Department of Labor - Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the applicable state regulating agency, and any local government agency. Payment for such work will be made by Change Order. 16. CLEANING UP. Contractor shall keep the premises free at all times from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish, as well as spillage from connections to existing piping. Contractor shall provide adequate trash receptacles about the Site and shall promptly empty the containers when filled. Construction materials, such as concrete forms and scaffolding, shall be neatly stacked by Contractor when not in use. Contractor shall promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint, corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or other damage. Volatile wastes shall be properly stored in covered metal containers and removed daily. Wastes shall not be buried or burned on the Site or disposed of into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways. All wastes shall be removed from the Site and disposed of in a manner complying with local ordinances and antipollution laws. Adequate cleanup will be a condition for recommendation of progress payment applications.



17. APPLICABLE CODES. References in the Contract Documents to local codes mean the following:

ICC International Building Code (with local amendments), 2009 edition

ICC International Existing Building Code (with local amendments), 2009 edition

ICC International Fire Code (with local amendments), 2009 edition

ICC International Mechanical Code (with local amendments), 2009 edition

ICC International Fuel Gas Code (with local amendments), 2009 edition

IDPH Illinois Plumbing Code (with local amendments), 2004 edition

NFPA 70 National Electric Code (with local amendments), 2008 edition

NFPA 820 Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities, 2008 edition

ICC International Energy Conservation Code as adopted by the Illinois Energy Efficient Building Act (with local amendments)

IEPA: Part 370, Illinois Recommended Standards for Sewage Works, November 1997 edition

ASTM Material Standards

RRWRD General Provisions & Technical Specifications for Sewer Construction, dated 1983

City of Rockford Building Code

Other standard codes which apply to the Work are designated in the Specifications. 18. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE. Prior to the commencement of Work at the Site, a preconstruction conference will be held at a mutually agreed time and place. The conference shall be attended by:

Contractor and its superintendent. Principal Subcontractors.

Representatives of principal Suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate.

Engineer and its Resident Project Representative.

Representatives of Owner.



Government representatives as appropriate.

Others as requested by Contractor, Owner, or Engineer. Unless previously submitted to Engineer, Contractor shall bring to the conference a preliminary schedule for each of the following:

Progress Schedule.

Procurement Schedule.

Schedule of Values for progress payment purposes.

Schedule of Shop Drawings and other submittals. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda will include:

Contractor's preliminary schedules.

Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals.

Processing Applications for Payment.

Maintaining record documents.

Critical Work sequencing.

Field decisions and Change Orders.

Use of premises, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner's needs.

Major equipment deliveries and priorities.

Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid.

Engineer will preside at the conference and will arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance.



19. PROGRESS MEETINGS. Contractor shall schedule and hold regular progress meetings at least every other week and at other times as requested by Engineer or required by progress of the Work. Contractor, Engineer, and all Subcontractors active on the Site shall be represented at each meeting. Contractor may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its Suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcontractors. Contractor shall preside at the meetings. Meeting minutes shall be prepared and distributed by Contractor. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems which may develop. 20. SITE ADMINISTRATION. Contractor shall be responsible for all areas of the Site used by it and by all Subcontractors in the performance of the Work. Contractor shall exert full control over the actions of all employees and other persons with respect to the use and preservation of property and existing facilities, except such controls as may be specifically reserved to Owner or others. Contractor shall have the right to exclude from the Site all persons who have no purpose related to the Work or its inspection, and may require all persons on the Site (except Owner's employees) to observe the same regulations as Contractor requires of its employees.

End of Section



Section 01070

ABBREVIATIONS OF TERMS AND ORGANIZATIONS

1. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. Abbreviations for standards and organizations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:

AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials ABMA American Bearning Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AFBMA Antifriction Bearing Manufacturers Association now

recognized as the ABMA AFPA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International ANSI American National Standards Institute APA Engineered Wood Association (formerly American

Plywood Association) API American Petroleum Institute AREMA American Railway Engineers and Maintenance-of-Way

Association ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-

Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM ASTM International AWG American Wire Gauge AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association



BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America (formerly SCPI)

CDA Copper Development Association

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America

CRA California Redwood Association

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) DHI Door and Hardware Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association EEI Edison Electric Institute EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCC Federal Communications Commission FCI Fluid Controls Institute Fed Spec Federal Specification FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FHWA Federal Highway Administration FIA Factory Insurance Association FM Factory Mutual FSA Fluid Sealing Association GST Gravity Settling Tank or Gravity Thickening Tank HEI Heat Exchange Institute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association HTI Hand Tools Institute HSW High Strength Waste I-B-R Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IBC International Building Code IES Illuminating Engineering Society IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISA International Society of Automation



LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design LSW Low Strength Waste MHI Materials Handling Institute MIL Military Specification MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fitting Industry NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers NACE NACE International NBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors NBS See NIST NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly

NBS) NLA National Lime Association NPC National Plumbing Code NPT National Pipe Thread NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSC National Safety Council NSF NSF International (formerly National Sanitation

Foundation) NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PS Product Standard RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SDI Steel Door Institute SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SI Systéme International des Unités (International System of

Units) SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association



SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association SPFA Steel Plate Fabricators Association SPI Society of the Plastics Industry SPTA Southern Pressure Treaters Association SSFI Scaffolding, Shoring & Forming Institute, Inc SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings TABB Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau UL Underwriters' Laboratories USBR U.S. Bureau of Reclamation USGBC U.S. Green Building Council WEF Water Environment Federation

End of Section



Section 01300

SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES 1. SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA.

1.01. General. Shop Drawings and engineering data (submittals) covering all equipment and all fabricated components and building materials which will become a permanent part of the Work under this Contract shall be submitted to Engineer for review, as required, within the first 30% of the Contract time and all submittals shall be approved within the first 50% of the Contract time. Owner shall have the right to withhold further payments until this submittal requirement is satisfied. No claims for time delay will be allowed if the Contractor fails to meet this submittal time requirement. Submittals shall verify compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall include drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and the operation of component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required; the performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment.

Each submittal shall cover items from only one section of the specification unless the item consists of components from several sources. Contractor shall submit a complete initial submittal including all components. When an item consists of components from several sources, Contractor's initial submittal shall be complete including all components. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be approved by Contractor and clearly identified with the name and number of this Contract, Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each copy of all submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped or affixed with an approval statement of Contractor. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified and inapplicable data crossed out. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data.

Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness of each submittal. Contractor's stamp or affixed approval statement of a submittal, per Figure 1-01300, is a representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that Contractor has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.



All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified as deviations on each submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal using Figure 2-01300. Such submittals shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in either hard copy or electronically. All submittals shall be made with the selected method, and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer by letter one week after award of the Contract, which method has been selected. Submittals made by any method other than that selected by the Contractor, will be returned without review.

For hard copy submittals five copies of each drawing and the necessary data shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer will return one copy, either marked and reproducible or with an appended and typed list of comments, to Contractor. Facsimile (fax) or electronic copies will not be acceptable. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades.

For electronic submittals, drawings and the necessary data shall be submitted electronically to Engineer as specified below. Submittal documents shall be in black and white unless color is required for the review of the submittal. All electronic files shall be in Portable Document Format (PDF) as generated by Adobe Acrobat Professional Version 7.0 or higher. The PDF file(s) shall be fully indexed using the Table of Contents, searchable with thumbnails generated. PDF images must be at a readable resolution. For most documents, they should be scanned or generated at 300 dots per inch (dpi). Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture must be performed on these images so that text can be searched, selected and copied from the generated PDF file. The PDF documents shall have a bookmark created in the navigation frame for each major entry (“Section” or “Chapter”) in the Table of Contents. Thumbnails shall be generated for each page or graphic in the PDF file. The opening view for each PDF document shall be as follows:

Initial View: Bookmarks and Page

Magnification: Fit In Window

The file shall open to the Contractor’s transmittal letter, with bookmarks to the left. The first bookmark shall be linked to the Table of Contents.

PDF document properties shall include the submittal number for the document title and the Contractor’s name for the author.



Electronic submittal file sizes shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required for a submittal the least number of files possible shall be created. Instruction on procedures for transmitting submittals and receiving comments will be provided after award of the Contract.

Facsimiles (fax) will not be acceptable. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades.

1.02. Engineer's Review of Submittals. Engineer's review of submittals covers only general conformity to the Drawings and Specifications, external connections, and dimensions that affect the layout; it does not indicate thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device, or item covered. Engineer's review shall not relieve Contractor of sole responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations in the drawings and data, nor of Contractor's sole responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. Engineer's submittal review period shall be 14 consecutive calendar days and shall commence on the first calendar day following receipt of the submittal or resubmittal in Engineer's office. The time required to mail the submittal or resubmittal back to Contractor shall not be considered a part of the submittal review period, nor shall review time as required by the City of Rockford Building Code Official.

When the drawings and data are returned with review status "NOT ACCEPTABLE" or "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION", the corrections shall be made as instructed by Engineer. If submittals are made in hard copy, five corrected copies shall be resubmitted. If submittals are made electronically, the corrected drawings and data shall be resubmitted to Owner. Resubmittals by facsimile or e-mail will not be accepted. When the drawings and data are returned with review status "EXCEPTIONS NOTED", "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED", or "RECORD COPY", no additional electronic or hard copies need be furnished unless specifically requested by Engineer. If submittals are made electronically, two final hard copies of the submittal shall be submitted to Owner.

1.03. Resubmittal of Drawings and Data. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each resubmittal. Contractor shall verify that all corrected data and additional information previously requested by Engineer are provided on the resubmittal. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall direct specific attention to all revisions in writing and shall list separately any revisions made other than



those called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Requirements specified for initial submittals shall also apply to resubmittals. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) or a unique identification that indicates the initial submittal and correct sequence of each resubmittal. If more than one resubmittal is required because of failure of Contractor to provide all previously requested corrected data or additional information, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmittals. This does not include initial submittal data such as shop tests and field tests that are submitted after initial submittal.

Resubmittals shall be made within 7 days of the date of the letter returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within 2 days Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time. The need for more than one resubmittal, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Times unless delay of the Work is the direct result of a change in the Work authorized by a Change Order or failure of Engineer to review and return any submittal to Contractor within the specified review period.

1.04. Color Selection. Contractor shall submit samples of colors and finishes for all accepted products before Engineer will coordinate the selection of colors and finishes with Owner. Engineer will prepare a schedule of finishes that includes the colors and finishes selected for both manufactured products and for surfaces to be field painted or finished and will furnish this schedule to Contractor within 60 days after the date of acceptance of the last color or finish sample.

2. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied for all equipment requiring maintenance or other attention. The equipment Supplier shall prepare a project specific operation and maintenance manual for each type of equipment indicated in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. Parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for other equipment not listed in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.



b. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

c. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operation,

regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. d. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. e. Guide to troubleshooting. f. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear. g. Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and

wiring diagrams. h. Test data and performance curves, where applicable.

The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by Contractor. Three hard copies and one reproducible electronic copy of each manual shall be submitted to Engineer prior to the date of shipment of the equipment. When the O&M manuals are returned with the review status "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION", the corrections shall be made as instructed by the Engineer, and two copies of the corrected portion(s) and one complete corrected copy of the O&M manual returned to the Engineer. After review by Engineer is complete, two hard copies and one electronic copy of each operation and maintenance manual shall be prepared and delivered to Engineer not later than 30 days prior to placing the equipment in operation. The electronic copy shall be submitted and will be reviewed for content and organization and assigned a review status by the Engineer. When corrections are required, a corrected version of the electronic copy shall be resubmitted. Procedures for submission of the electronic copy will be provided after award of the Contract. When review of the electronic copy by the Engineer is complete, two copies of each electronic O&M manual shall be delivered on CD-ROM to the Engineer. Each CD shall contain only one copy of one manual.

All material shall be marked with project identification, and inapplicable information shall be marked out or deleted. Shipment of equipment will not be considered complete until all required manuals and data have been received. 2.01. Hard Copy Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Hard copies submitted for review shall be temporarily bound in heavy paper covers bearing suitable



identification. All manuals and other data shall be printed on heavy, first quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch paper, with standard three-hole punching. Drawings and diagrams shall be reduced to 8-1/2 x 11 inches or 11 x 17 inches. Where reduction is not practicable, larger drawings shall be folded separately and placed in envelopes, which are bound into the manuals. Each envelope shall be suitably identified on the outside. Each volume containing data for three or more items of equipment shall include a table of contents and index tabs. The final hard copy of each manual shall be prepared and delivered in substantial, permanent, three-ring or three-post binders with a table of contents and suitable index tabs. 2.02. Electronic Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Electronic manuals shall be in Adobe Acrobat’s Portable Document Format (PDF), and shall be prepared at a resolution between 300 and 600 dots per inch (dpi), depending on document type. Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture shall be performed on these documents. OCR settings shall be performed with the “original image with hidden text” option in Adobe Acrobat Exchange. For each drawing included in the operation and maintenance manual, an electronic AutoCAD (version 2010) file shall also be submitted.

File size shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required the least number of files possible shall be created. File names shall be in the format OMXXXXX-YYYZ-V.pdf, where XXXXX is the five digit number corresponding to the specification section, YYY is a three digit O&M manual number, e.g. 001, Z is the letter signifying a resubmittal, A, B, C, etc, and V is a number used only when more than one 10 MB file is required for an O&M manual. Documents prepared in PDF format shall be processed as follows:

1. Pages shall be searchable (processed for optical character recognition) and indexed when multiple files are required.

2. Pages shall be rotated for viewing in proper orientation. 3. A bookmark shall be provided in the navigation frame for each entry in

the Table of Contents. 4. Embedded thumbnails shall be generated for each completed PDF file. 5. The opening view for PDF files shall be as follows: Initial View: Bookmarks and Page Page Number: Title Page (usually Page 1) Magnification: Set to Fit in Window Page: Single Page 6. Where the bookmark structure is longer than one page the bookmarks

shall be collapsed to show the chapter headings only. 7. When multiple files are required the first file of the series (the parent file)

shall list every major topic in the Table of Contents. The parent file shall also include minor headings bookmarked based on the Table of Contents. Major headings, whose content is contained in subsequent



files (children) shall be linked to be called from the parent to the specific location in the child file. The child file shall contain bookmark entries for both major and minor headings contained in the child file. The first bookmark of any child file shall link back to the parent file and shall read as follows "Return to the Equipment Name Table of Contents", e.g. Return to the Polymer Feed System Table of Contents.

8. Drawings shall be bookmarked individually. 9. Files shall be delivered without security settings to permit editing,

insertion and deletion of material to update the manual provided by the manufacturer.

2.03. Labeling. As a minimum, the following information shall be included on all final O&M manual materials, including CD-ROM disks, jewel cases, and hard copy manuals:

Equipment name and/or O&M title spelled out in complete words. Project Name. City Project/Contract Number. Specification Section Number. Example: “Section 15500” Manufacturer’s name. File Name and Date.

For example:

Backwash Pump Operation and Maintenance Manual Somewhere Plant Expansion Project/Contract No. ____ Specification Section 11110 Manufacturer OM11110-001.pdf, 5/05/07

End of Section


Black & Veatch Project No. ___________Phase________ Contract No. __________ Project Description: _______________ __________________________________ FIGURE 1-01300 REFERENCE: Section 01300, Shop Drawing and Engineering Data

SUBMITTAL No. ________ SECTION ______________ Do not combine multiple sections together

unless required by specifications.

(Contractor's Letterhead)

SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION & CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STATEMENT

DATE: ____________ COPIES ____________ DRAWING SHEET NO._______ Description submittal contents: ____________________________________________ Location: ____________________________________________________________ Manufacturer___________________________________________________________ Subcontractor or Supplier (Optional) ________________________________________ REMARKS: ___________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL ( Construction Company ) has reviewed and coordinated the submitted documentation and verifies that the equipment and material meet the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. We accept sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data contained in the submittal as required by the Contract Documents. Deviations: □ None □ Yes (See attached Figure 2-01300 for written description) Approved By: ____________________ Date: ________________ This approval does not release subcontractor / vendor from the contractual responsibilities.


Black & Veatch Project No. ___________Phase________ Contract No. __________ Project Description: _______________ __________________________________ FIGURE 2-01300 REFERENCE: Section 01300, Shop Drawing and Engineering Data

SUBMITTAL No. ________ SECTION ______________ Do not combine multiple sections together

unless required by specifications.

(Contractor's Letterhead)

SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION & CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STATEMENT

DATE: ____________ COPIES ____________ DRAWING SHEET NO._______ Description submittal contents: ____________________________________________ Location: ____________________________________________________________ Manufacturer___________________________________________________________ Subcontractor or Supplier (Optional) ________________________________________ DEVIATIONS ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Section 01310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

1. PROGRESS SCHEDULE. A Progress Schedule shall be submitted to Engineer. The Progress Schedule shall indicate the sequence of the Work; the time of starting and completion of each part; the installation date for each major item of equipment; and the time for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities. An initial Progress Schedule shall be submitted at the preconstruction conference. The schedule shall be revised as necessary before Work is started and shall be revised during construction to reflect changes in the progress of the Work. Revised schedules shall be submitted at the minimum frequency of 30 days. Owner shall cooperate with Contractor in arrangements for continuity of service and operation of valves and other control facilities. Owner may require Contractor, at Contractor's expense, to add to its facilities, equipment, or construction forces, as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any time during the construction period. 1.01. Progress Reports. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each Application for Payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the progress schedule, and proposed corrective actions. Any work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence. Each progress report shall also include three prints of the accepted graphic schedule marked to indicate actual progress.

End of Section



Section 01320

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1. GENERAL. 1.01. Units of Measurement. When both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of measurement are specified herein, the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern. 2. SCHEDULE OF VALUES. As noted in the Instructions to Bidders, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a Schedule of Values covering each lump sum item. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, and plant may be listed separately in the Schedule of Values, provided the amounts can be substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. The Schedule of Values shall have sufficient detail such that partial completion of separable items of work can easily be calculated. The Schedule of Values shall have separate lines for manufacturer's field services, O&M manuals, and performance testing for each item of equipment requiring such services. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor on items of Work which would be performed first will not be accepted. The Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress payments, and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item. 3. SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS. Within 30 days after award of contract, Contractor shall furnish to Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be revised and resubmitted each time an Application for Payment varies more than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule.

End of Section



Section 01400

QUALITY CONTROL 1. TESTING SERVICES. Testing services shall be provided in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. All tests to determine compliance with the Contract Documents shall be performed by an independent commercial testing firm acceptable to Engineer. The testing firm's laboratory shall be staffed with experienced technicians, properly equipped and fully qualified to perform the tests in accordance with the specified standards. Testing services provided by Owner are for the sole benefit of Owner; however, test results shall be available to Contractor. Testing necessary to satisfy Contractor's internal quality control procedures shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor. 1.01. Testing Services Provided by Contractor. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall provide all testing services in connection with the following:

Concrete materials and trial batch mixtures.

All other tests and engineering data required for Engineer's review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the Work.

Contractor shall obtain Engineer's acceptance of the testing firm before having services performed, and shall pay all costs for these testing services. 1.02. Testing Services and Special Inspections Provided by Owner. Unless otherwise specified, Owner shall provide for tests made on the following materials and equipment:

See Schedule 01400-S01 for Anticipated Special Inspections.

Other materials and equipment at the discretion of Owner.

Testing, including sampling, will be performed by Engineer or the testing firm's laboratory personnel, in the general manner indicated in the Specifications. Engineer shall determine the exact time, location, and number of tests, including samples. Arrangements for delivery of samples and test specimens to the testing firm's laboratory will be made by Owner. The testing firm's laboratory shall perform all laboratory tests within a reasonable time consistent with the specified standards and shall furnish a written report of each test.



Contractor shall furnish all sample materials and cooperate in the testing activities, including sampling. Contractor shall interrupt the Work when necessary to allow testing, including sampling, to be performed. Contractor shall have no Claim for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times due to such interruption. When testing activities, including sampling, are performed in the field by Engineer or laboratory personnel, Contractor shall furnish personnel and facilities to assist in the activities. 1.03. Transmittal of Test Reports. Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by Contractor for Engineer's review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the Work shall be submitted as specified for Shop Drawings. The laboratory retained by Owner will furnish four copies of a written report of each test. Two copies of each test report will be transmitted to the Resident Project Representative, one copy to Engineer, and one copy to Contractor, within 3 days after each test is completed. 3. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. Manufacturer’s field services shall be as specified herein except as specifically specified in the respective equipment sections. 3.01. Services Furnished Under This Contract. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer of each item of equipment for which field services are indicated in the respective equipment section or in the equipment schedule section shall visit the Site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the manufacturer's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer. Each manufacturer's representative shall furnish to Owner, through Engineer, a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

End of Section


Schedule 01400-S01

Anticipated Schedule of Special Inspections

Rock River Water Reclamation District 01400-S01 3/11/15 Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station -1- 176424 Phase 2

CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION (IBC 1704.4)

VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION Y/N EXTENT1 COMMENTS AGENT AGENT

QUALIFICATIONTASK

COMPLETE1. Inspection of reinforcing steel and placement. Verify size, spacing, bar clearances, cover, and adequate support to prevent displacement during concrete placement. Verify lap splices, mechanical splices, and embedment lengths. Verify dowels for work above are properly aligned and spaced to match other work.

Y P ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7 PE/SE or EIT

2. Inspect bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete. All bolts visually inspected to verify anchor size, location, and embedment length

Y C IBC 1911.5 and IBC

1912.1 PE/SE or EIT

3. Verifying use of required design mix. Y P ACI 318: Ch 4, 5.2-5.4 PE/SE or EIT

4. At time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests and determine the temperature of the concrete.

Y C ASTM C172; ASTM

C31; ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8

ACI-CFTT or

ACI-STT

5. Inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques. Verify concrete delivery tickets. Verify that water added at the site does not exceed that allowed by the mix design. Verify conveying, depositing, and consolidation of concrete. Observe placement procedures for evidence of segregation, possible cold joints, displacement of reinforcing or forms, and proper support of embedded items, anchor bolts, etc.

Y C ACI 318: 5.9, 5.10 PE/SE or EIT

6. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques.

Y P ACI 318: 5.11-5.13 PE/SE or EIT

7. Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete member being formed.

Y P ACI 318: 6.1.1 PE/SE or EIT

8. Inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete. All bolts visually inspected to verify anchor size, location, and embedment length. Verify manufacturer’s installation procedures are followed. See post-installed concrete and masonry anchors requirements.

Y P (prior to

anchor install)

IBC 1912.1 ACI 318 3.8.6, 8.1.3,

21.2.8 PE/SE or EIT

1. Extent of special inspection and/or testing shall be as follows:

a. P – Periodic b. C – Continuous c. S – Submittal



Section 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1. OFFICE AT SITE OF WORK. During the performance of this Contract, Contractor shall maintain a suitable office at or near the Site which shall be the headquarters of its representative authorized to receive drawings, instructions, or other communication or articles. Any communication given to the said representative or delivered at Contractor's office at the Site in the representative's absence shall be deemed to have been delivered to Contractor. Copies of the Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents shall be kept at Contractor's office at the Site and available for use at all times. 2. WATER. Except as listed herein, all water required for and in connection with the Work to be performed will be furnished by Owner in the vicinity of the Site without charge to Contractor, provided:

a. Contractor shall procure such water in the location and in the manner designated by Engineer.

b. Contractor at its own expense shall make authorized connections and

provide means for delivering the water to the Site. c. Contractor shall provide adequately against waste and needless use

of water. Potable water used for domestic purposes, including drinking and handwashing, shall be supplied by the Contractor. 3. POWER. Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical power usage in the Contractor’s office trailer area and staging area along with all of their subcontractors. Contractor may purchase power from the Owner if the Contractor does not want to provide his own power. To purchase power, Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner where to connect to the Owner’s Power, provide a meter, and make payments to the Owner. The Owner will charge the Contractor only the Owner’s cost for power. Miscellaneous power will be made available to the Contractor by Owner at no cost to the Contractor, subject to the following conditions:

a. Existing lighting systems may be utilized by Contractor to the extent available. Any necessary additional or temporary lighting systems shall be provided by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.



c. Power will be available at 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase at convenience receptacles. No 480 volt power will be available.

d. Electrical power shall be used only in such quantities as will not

interfere with Owner's requirements, and care shall be taken not to overload the existing facilities. Contractor shall provide any additional or temporary electrical power or power of other voltages it may require for prosecution of the Work.

These provisions shall not be construed as a guarantee by Owner of the uninterrupted continuation of power, and interruptions beyond the control of Owner shall not be reason for claims for additional costs nor for extensions of time. Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost to Owner, any necessary power required for prosecution of the Work during such interruptions. 4. VOICE AND DATA SERVICES. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and pay all installation charges for voice and data lines in its offices at the Site. 5. SANITARY FACILITIES. Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the Site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services on the Project. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. Contractor shall furnish at least one toilet facility for each 20 workers at the site. Contractor shall provide at least one handwashing station next to each temporary sanitary facility. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the Site. 6. MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC. Contractor shall conduct its work to interfere as little as possible with public travel or facility traffic, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be required when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point. In making open-cut street crossings, Contractor shall not block more than one-half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing shall be provided as necessary on shoulders.



6.01. Traffic Plan. Contractor shall provide a traffic plan for construction acceptable to Owner. 6.02. Detours. Where required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover that traffic be maintained over any construction work in a public street, road, or highway, and the traffic cannot be maintained on the alignment of the original roadbed or pavement, Contractor shall, at its own expense, construct and maintain a detour around the construction work. Each detour shall include a bridge across the pipe trench and all necessary barricades, guardrails, approaches, lights, signals, signs, and other devices and precautions necessary for protection of the Work and safety of the public. 7. BARRICADES AND LIGHTS. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions, such as material piles and equipment, shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights, and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover. 8. FENCES. All existing fences affected by the Work shall be maintained by Contractor until completion of the Work. Fences which interfere with construction operations shall not be relocated or dismantled until written permission is obtained from the owner of the fence, and the period the fence may be left relocated or dismantled has been agreed upon. Where fences must be maintained across the construction easement, adequate gates shall be installed. Gates shall be kept closed and locked at all times when not in use. On completion of the Work across any tract of land, Contractor shall restore all fences to their original or to a better condition and to their original locations. 9. DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY. Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures, Work, materials, or equipment because of his



operations and shall repair or replace any damaged structures, Work, materials, or equipment to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, Owner. Contractor shall protect all existing structures and property from damage and shall provide bracing, shoring, or other work necessary for such protection. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, curbs, sidewalks, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property, which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or workers to or from the Work. Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the agency having jurisdiction over the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement. 10. TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION. All trees and other vegetation which must be removed to perform the Work shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor; however, no trees or cultured plants shall be unnecessarily removed unless their removal is indicated on the Drawings. All trees and plants not removed shall be protected against injury from construction operations. Trees considered by Engineer to have any significant effect on construction operations are indicated on the Drawings and those which are to be preserved are so indicated. Contractor shall take extra measures to protect trees designated to be preserved, such as erecting barricades, trimming to prevent damage from construction equipment, and installing pipe and other Work by means of hand excavation or tunneling methods. Such trees shall not be endangered by stockpiling excavated material or storing equipment against their trunks. When injuring or removal of trees designated to be preserved cannot be avoided, or when removal and replacement is indicated on the Drawings, each tree injured beyond repair or removed shall be replaced with a similar tree of the nearest size possible. All trimming, repair, and replacement of trees and plants shall be performed by qualified nurserymen or horticulturists. 11. SECURITY. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the Site, and all Work, materials, equipment, and existing facilities thereon, against vandals and other unauthorized persons. No Claim shall be made against Owner by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser, and Contractor shall make good all damage to Owner's property resulting from Contractor's failure to provide security measures as specified.



Security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by Owner to protect Owner's existing facilities during normal operation, but shall also include such additional security fencing, barricades, lighting, and other measures as required to protect the Site. 12. ACCESS ROADS. Contractor shall establish and maintain temporary access roads to various parts of the Site as required to complete the Project. Such roads shall be available for the use of all others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the Project. 13. PARKING. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all workers and others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or construction activities. 14. NOISE CONTROL. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound-muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the Work. During construction activities on or adjacent to occupied buildings, and when appropriate, Contractor shall erect screens or barriers effective in reducing noise in the building and shall conduct its operations to avoid unnecessary noise which might interfere with the activities of building occupants. 15. DUST CONTROL. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant. When practicable, dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing dust. Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar equipment shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. 16. TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS. Contractor shall provide for the drainage of storm water and such water as may be applied or discharged on the Site in performance of the Work. Drainage facilities shall be adequate to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, and adjacent property. Existing drainage channels and conduits shall be cleaned, enlarged, or supplemented as necessary to carry all increased runoff attributable to Contractor's operations. Dikes shall be constructed as necessary to divert



increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural channels), to protect Owner's facilities and the Work, and to direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Ponding shall be provided as necessary to prevent downstream flooding. 17. EROSION CONTROL. Contractor shall prevent erosion of soil on the Site and adjacent property resulting from its construction activities. Effective measures shall be initiated prior to the commencement of clearing, grading, excavation, or other operation that will disturb the natural protection. Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time, and natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practicable. Temporary storage and construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to minimize erosion. Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover shall be provided as necessary to control runoff. 18. POLLUTION CONTROL. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes shall be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris, or other substance shall be permitted to enter sanitary sewers, and reasonable measures shall be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse. 19. CONCRETE WASHOUT. Contractor shall construct and maintain an above ground, temporary concrete washout facility at a location determined by the District. The facility shall comply with the Illinois Urban Manual, Practice Standard, Code 954. The washout facility and concrete waste shall be removed upon completion of the project. The solidified concrete wash shall be considered Clean Construction or Demolition Debris (C.C.D.D.) as per the Illinois Environmental Protection Act (415 ILCS 5) and disposed of in accordance with the Act. This work shall be incidental to all other concrete work.

End of Section



Section 01610

GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS

1. SCOPE. When an equipment specification section in this Contract references this section, the equipment shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this section, except as otherwise specified in other sections.

2. COORDINATION. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Drawings or Specifications.

3. MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE. Unless specifically named in the Specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years.

4. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment and materials shall be new and not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.

Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick. When dissimilar metal components are used, consideration shall be given to prevention of galvanic corrosion.

5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. All equipment, and other non-structural components and non-building structures as defined in ASCE 7, and their anchorage, shall be designed and detailed in accordance with the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. Submittals for equipment and other non-structural components and non-building structures shall include a seal by a professional engineer registered in the state of the project, to confirm



that the anchorage design meets the code requirements. Conformance to the building code of the Contractor designed pipe support systems, shall be certified by a professional engineer registered in the state of the project.

6. LUBRICATION. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. Lubricants of the types recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided in sufficient quantities to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position. 7. ELEVATION. The elevation of the site shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. All equipment furnished shall be designed to meet stipulated conditions and to operate satisfactorily at the specified elevation. 8. ELECTRIC MOTORS. Unless otherwise specified, motors furnished with equipment shall meet the requirements specified in Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section or specified in specific equipment sections.

9. DRIVE UNITS. The nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer shall be at least equal to the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hour continuous service.

9.01. Gearmotors. The use of gearmotors sharing an integral housing or cutgears into the motor output shaft, or that require removal of lubricant from the gear reducer to change out the motor will not be acceptable. 9.02. Gear Reducers. Each gear reducer shall be a totally enclosed unit with oil or grease lubricated, rolling element, antifriction bearings throughout.

Unless superseded by individual specification requirements each helical, spiral bevel, combination bevel-helical, and worm gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least 1.50 based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Cycloidal gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least 2.0 based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Shaft-mounted and flange-mounted



gear reducers shall be rated AGMA Class III. Helical gear reducers shall have a gear strength rating to catalog rating of 1.5. Each gear reducer shall be designed and manufactured in compliance with applicable most current AGMA standards, except the L10 bearing life shall be 200, 000 hours. The thermal horsepower rating of each unit shall equal or exceed the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. During continuous operation, the maximum sump oil temperature shall not rise more than 100°F above the ambient air temperature in the vicinity of the unit and shall not exceed 200°F. Each grease lubricated bearing shall be installed in a bearing housing designed to facilitate periodic regreasing of the bearing by means of a manually operated grease gun. Each bearing housing shall be designed to evenly distribute new grease, to properly dispose of old grease, and to prevent overgreasing of the bearing. The use of permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings will not be acceptable in large sized reducers. In small reducers, similar to basin equipment, permanently sealed grease lubricated bearings rated L10 200,000 hour life may be provided at the manufacturer’s option. An internal or external oil pump and appurtenances shall be provided if required to properly lubricate oil lubricated bearings. A dipstick or a sight glass arranged to permit visual inspection of lubricant level shall be provided on each unit. Gear reducers which require the removal of parts or the periodic disassembly of the unit for cleaning and manual regreasing of bearings will not be acceptable.

Certification shall be furnished by the gear reducer manufacturer indicating that the intended application of each unit has been reviewed in detail by the manufacturer and that the unit provided is fully compatible with the conditions of installation and service. 9.03. Adjustable Speed Drives. Each mechanical adjustable speed drive shall have a service factor of at least 1.75 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower [kilowatts] of the drive motor. A spare belt shall be provided with each adjustable speed drive unit employing a belt for speed change. Unless specifically permitted by the detailed equipment specifications, bracket type mounting will not be acceptable for variable speed drives. 9.04. V-Belt Drives. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment. V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.75 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor.

10. SAFETY GUARDS. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage thick or thicker galvanized, aluminum-clad sheet steel, or stainless sheet steel or from 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal, or pultrusion molded UV resistant materials. Each



safety guard shall be reinforced or shaped to provide suitable strength to prevent vibration and deflection and shall comply with OSHA. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water.

11. ANCHOR BOLTS. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolt materials shall comply with the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section, and sleeves shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts shall be at least 3/4 inch in diameter. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. 12. EQUIPMENT BASES. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on concrete bases at least 6 inches high. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall be provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Each unit and its drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components, and adequate grout holes. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout as specified in the Grout section. 13. SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices.

14. SHOP PAINTING. All iron and steel surfaces of the equipment shall be protected with suitable protective coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces of the equipment that will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with an epoxy or polyurethane enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system.



Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of a universal primer. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-preventive compound as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

15. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. Equipment shall be prepared for shipment as specified in the Product Delivery Requirements section. 16. STORAGE. Handling and storage of equipment shall be as specified in the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. 17. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. Installation and operation shall be as specified in respective equipment sections and the Startup Requirements section.

18. OBSERVATION OF PERFORMANCE TESTS. Where the Specifications require the presence of Engineer, initial tests shall be observed or witnessed by Engineer. Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor for all costs of subsequent visits by Engineer to witness or observe incomplete tests, retesting, or subsequent tests. 19. PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE. Programming software shall be provided for any equipment which includes a programmable logic controller (PLC) or other digital controller that is user-programmable. The software shall be suitable for loading and running on a laptop personal computer operating with a Windows-based operating system. A copy of the manufacturer's original operating logic program shall be provided for use in maintaining and troubleshooting the equipment. Where multiple pieces of equipment, from the same or different vendors, use the same programming software, only one copy of the software need be provided.

End of Section



Section 01611

METEOROLOGICAL AND SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA

1. SCOPE. Buildings, non-structural components and non-building structures shall be designed in accordance with this section. In the event of conflict with requirements in other sections, the more stringent criteria shall be followed. 2. DESIGN CRITERIA. Buildings , non-structural components, non-building structures including anchorage of such items, shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria.

General Design Data:

Building code and references IBC 2009, ASCE 7-05 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”, AISC 360

“Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”,

Site elevation, above mean sea level

700 ft

Design flood elevation, DFE 699.70 ft

Design groundwater elevation N/A

Wind Design Data:

Basic wind speed, V 90 mph

Exposure category C

Importance factor (wind loads), I 1.15

Snow Design Data:

Ground snow load, Pg 30 psf

Importance factor (snow loads), I 1.1

Exposure factor (Ce) 1.0

Thermal factor (Ct) 1.2

Ice Design Data:

Nominal ice thickness, t 0.75 in

Concurrent wind speed, Vc 40 mph



Importance factor (ice loads – ice thickness), Ii

1.25

Importance factor (ice loads – concurrent wind), Iw

1.00

3. SEISMIC DESIGN. 3-1. General. Structural systems shall provide continuous load paths, with adequate strength and stiffness to transfer all seismic forces from the point of application to the point of final resistance.

3-2. Non-structural Components. Non-structural components are architectural, mechanical, and electrical items that are permanently attached to and supported

Occupancy Category III

Design short period spectral response acceleration, SDS

0.164

Design one second period spectral response acceleration, SD1

0.089

Importance factor, I 1.25

Seismic Design Category B

Seismic Design Data for Non-structural Components:


0.164

Component importance factor, IP 1.5 (or as reduced per ASCE Section 13.1.3)

Seismic Design Category B

Seismic Design Data for Non-building Structures

Occupancy Category


0.164

Design one second period spectral response acceleration, SD1

0.089

Mapped MCE one second period spectral response acceleration, S1

0.055

Importance factor, I 1.25



by a structure but are not part of the structural system, as indicated in Chapter 13 of the ASCE 7. Non-structural components shall have sufficient strength and ductility to resist the specified seismic effects, and shall meet all of the design, proportioning, detailing, inspection, and quality assurance provisions of the specified building code and other referenced codes. Non-structural components shall be attached so that seismic forces are transferred to the structural system. These attachments shall be bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened. Frictional resistance due to gravity shall not be considered in evaluating the required resistance to seismic forces. Non-structural components shall be designed to be operable during and following a seismic event, without collapsing or breaking away from supports, and remain intact to the extent that they do not create an ignition hazard or release hazardous materials. Components that contain contents that are hazardous (flammable, explosive, corrosive, acidic, caustic, toxic, or that otherwise present a danger to the general public if released) shall maintain containment of those contents following the design earthquake. “Wp” shall include the total operating weight of the component or system, including, but not limited to, any insulation, fluids, and concentrated loads such as valves, condensate traps, and similar components. Seismic effects that shall be analyzed in the design of piping systems include the dynamic effects of the piping system, contents, and, when appropriate, supports. The interaction between the piping system and the supporting structures, including other mechanical and electrical equipment, shall also be considered.

3-3. Non-building Structures. Non-building structures are the items described as such in Chapter 15 of ASCE 7. Non-building structures shall provide sufficient strength and ductility to resist the specified seismic effects, and shall meet all of the design, proportioning, detailing, inspection, and quality assurance provisions of the specified building code and other referenced codes. The seismic design of non-building structures shall provide sufficient stiffness, strength and ductility to resist the effects of seismic ground motions during the design earthquake. "W" for non-building structures shall include the total dead load and shall also include all normal operating contents of tanks, vessels, bins, and piping.

End of Section



Section 01612

PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

1. SCOPE. This section covers packaging and shipping of materials and equipment. 2. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept dry at all times. Painted and coated surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted and coated surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer. Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items.

3. SHIPPING. Before shipping each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment.

End of Section



Section 01614

PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

1. SCOPE. This section covers delivery, storage, and handling of materials and equipment. 2. DELIVERY. Contractor shall bear the responsibility for delivery of equipment, spare parts, special tools, and materials to the site and shall comply with the requirements specified herein and shall provide required information concerning the shipment and delivery of the materials specified in this Contract. These requirements also apply to any subsuppliers making direct shipments to the Site. Contractor shall, either directly or through contractual arrangements with others, accept responsibility for the safe handling and protection of the equipment and materials furnished under this Contract before and after receipt at the port of entry. Acceptance of the equipment shall be made after it is installed, tested, placed in operation and found to comply with all the specified requirements. All items shall be checked against packing lists immediately on delivery to the site for damage and for shortages. Damage and shortages shall be remedied with the minimum of delay. Delivery of portions of the equipment in several individual shipments shall be subject to review of Engineer before shipment. When permitted, all such partial shipments shall be plainly marked to identify, to permit easy accumulation, and to facilitate eventual installation.

3. STORAGE. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected until installed in the Work. Stacked items shall be suitably protected from damage by spacers or load distributing supports that are safely arranged. No metalwork (miscellaneous steel shapes and reinforcing steel) shall be stored directly on the ground. Masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to hold breakage, chipping, cracking, and spalling to a minimum. Cement, lime, and similar products shall be stored off the ground on pallets and shall be covered and kept completely dry at all times. Pipe, fittings, and valves may be stored out of doors, but must be placed on wooden blocking. PVC pipe, geomembranes, plastic liner, and other plastic materials shall be stored off the ground on pallets and protected from direct sunlight. Pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight structures maintained at a temperature above 60°F. Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected



against moisture and water damage. All space heaters furnished in equipment shall be connected and operated continuously. Equipment having moving parts, such as gears, bearings, and seals, shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc., unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's storage instructions shall be carefully followed by Contractor. When required by the equipment manufacturer, moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of twice a month to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal to metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, Contractor shall, at the discretion of Engineer, start the equipment at one-half load for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. When required by the equipment manufacturer, lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. New lubricants shall be put into the equipment by Contractor at the time of acceptance. Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects of storage when installed in the Work. In addition to the protection specified for prolonged storage, the packaging of spare units and spare parts shall be for export packing and shall be suitable for long-term storage in a damp location. Each spare item shall be packed separately and shall be completely identified on the outside of the container. 4. HANDLING. Stored items shall be laid out to facilitate their retrieval for use in the Work. Care shall be taken when removing the equipment for use to ensure the precise piece of equipment is removed and that it is handled in a manner that does not damage the equipment.

End of Section



Section 01615

EQUIPMENT AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of nameplates and tags for identification of equipment, valves, panels, and instruments. 1-2. GENERAL. Except as otherwise specified in equipment, valve, and instrumentation sections, nameplates and tags shall be as specified herein. Nameplates or tags shall be provided for all equipment, valves, operator interfaces, control and electrical panels, cabinets, instruments, and instrument racks that have been named and/or tagged on the Drawings. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Drawings and data shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Submittals Procedures section for each type of tag provided including materials, colors, sizes, letter sizes, and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. EQUIPMENT NUMBER PLATES. All equipment tagged on the drawings, except for submerged equipment shall be provided with number plates bearing the equipment tag number identified on the Drawings. Number plates shall be bevelled, 1/8th inch thick laminated black phenolic plastic engraving stock with white core. Lettering on number plates shall be capitalized block letters ¾ inch high. Number plate height shall be twice the letter height. Number plate length shall be as needed, with suitable margins all around. Lettering shall be placed in one row where practicable; however, where necessary due to excessive length, lettering shall be placed on more than one row and centered. Number plates shall be attached with stainless steel panhead screws, rivets, or drive screws. When a number plate cannot be installed due to the physical size, space, or mounting surface geometry of the equipment, the Contractor shall provide a 12 gauge stainless steel tag with engraved or imprinted equipment tag number. Lettering on tags shall be ¼ inch high. Tags shall be rectangular with smooth edges, and shall be fastened to the equipment with stainless steel mechanical fasteners or with a stainless steel chain. 2-2. EQUIPMENT INFORMATION PLATES. Equipment shall be provided with engraved or stamped equipment information plates securely affixed with



mechanical fasteners to the equipment in an accessible and visible location. Equipment information plates shall be in addition to the number plates specified. Equipment information plates shall indicate the manufacturer’s name, address, product name, catalog number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and any other pertinent design data. Equipment information plates listing the distributing agent only will not be acceptable. 2-3. VALVE AND GATE TAGS. 2-3.01. Temporary Tags. Each valve and gate with an identifying number indicated on the Drawings or listed in the valve or gate schedule, shall be tagged or marked in the factory with the identifying number. 2-3.02. Permanent Tags. All valves and gates, except buried or submerged valves, that have been assigned a number on the Drawings or in the valve or gate schedule, shall be provided with a permanent number plate. Tags shall be permanently attached to valves and gates with stainless steel mechanical fasteners or with stainless steel chains. Numerals shall be ¾ inch high and shall be black baked enamel on an anodized aluminum plate. All buried valves shall be tagged with a brass plate cast into a 6-inch by 6 inch concrete pad at grade next to the valve box. The valve number shall be engraved in the brass plate with lettering and numerals at least 1 inch high. 2-4. INSTRUMENT TAGS. 2-4.01. Temporary Tags. Where instruments are not provided with permanent tags furnished from the factory, instruments shall be tagged or marked in the factory with the instrument tag number indicated on the Drawings. 2-4.02. Permanent Tags. Instruments shall be tagged with the instrument tag number indicated on the Drawings. Tags shall be 12 gauge stainless steel with engraved or imprinted symbols. Lettering on tags shall be ¼ inch high. Tags shall be rectangular with smooth edges, and shall be fastened to the instrument with stainless steel mechanical fasteners or with a stainless steel chain. PART 3 – EXECUTION Not used.

End of Section



Section 01620

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

1. SCOPE. This section consists of an equipment schedule for items for which a basic level of manufacturer's field services or operation and maintenance manuals are required, but not covered in other sections. When other sections indicate that manufacturer’s field services and operation and maintenance manuals are required, the requirements shall be as specified in the other sections. Specific requirements for manufacturer's field services are covered in the Quality Control section and the equipment specifications. Specific requirements for operation and maintenance manuals are covered in the Submittals Procedures section and the equipment specifications.

2. SCHEDULE. Manufacturer's field services, including equipment installation checks and training, and operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided for the items of equipment indicated in the following schedule:

Spec Section

Type of Equipment

Mfr's. Field Services

O&M Manual

11117 End Suction Chopper Pumps X X 11331 Pump Mixing Systems X 13225 FRP Flat Tank Cover (for Base Bid) X X 13226 FRP Dome Tank Cover (for Bid Alternative) X X 13500 I&C Control System X X 15102 Eccentric Plug Valves X X

15180 Valve Actuators X X

15400 Plumbing X

16050 Electrical X

16150 Adjustable Frequency Drives X X

16220 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment

X

End of Section



Section 01630

PIPELINE SCHEDULE

1. SCOPE. This section consists of a schedule of 4 inch and larger pipelines indicating the type of pipe to be used. Pipe materials, installation, testing, and disinfection, when specified, are covered in other sections. Piping smaller than 4 inches is covered in the various miscellaneous piping sections. Piping for plumbing, heating and air conditioning systems is covered in other sections. Piping to be furnished with equipment is covered in the applicable equipment section. 2. ALTERNATIVE PIPE TYPES. Where more than one type of pipe is indicated in the schedule, the type of pipe material to be installed may be selected by Contractor. The details on the drawings cover only one type of pipe for each line. If a different material is selected by Contractor, all details of connections, jointing, wall fittings, support, anchorage, and harnesses shall be modified as necessary to produce an equivalent design acceptable to the Engineer. 3. WALL FITTINGS. A wall pipe or sleeve will be required for all pipe passing through concrete or masonry block walls. Wall fittings and sleeves shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the applicable piping section. 4. RESTRAINED JOINTS. The buried or submerged pipelines indicated in Schedule 01630-S02 shall have restrained joints as specified in the applicable piping sections. Restrained joints shall be designed for a working pressure equal to or greater than the test pressure specified in Section 02704. 5. SCHEDULE INDEX. Pipe material abbreviations and their applicable specification section number are as indicated:

Abbreviation Pipe Material Section No.

CS Miscellaneous steel pipe 15065

DIP Ductile iron pipe 15061

PE Polyethylene 15067



Abbreviations for the pipe locations are as follows:

Abbreviation Location

B Buried or concrete encased E Exterior, exposed outdoors I Interior, inside structures S Submerged V In vault or pipe chase

6. SCHEDULE. Pipe materials shall conform to Schedule 01630-S01. All pipelines indicated on the drawings and all pipelines required for proper operation of the equipment furnished shall be provided whether listed in the schedule or not.

End of Section


01630-S01Pipeline Schedule

Size, in Service Installation Materials

All Glycol Return (GLR) V, I CS, PE

All Glycol Supply (GLS) V, I CS, PE

All Hydrophilic HSW I, S, E, V DIP

All Thickened Sludge I DIP

End of Schedule

Rock River Water Reclamation District Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2

01630-S01-1-

3/11/15176424


01630-S02Restrained Joint Schedule

ServiceLess than 90

degrees 90 degrees or tees Dead end or valve

Hydrophilic HSW

End of Schedule

Restrained Joint Length (feet)

Length on each side of joint

Restrain All Joints

Rock River Water Reclamation District Co-Digestion Project – Receiving StationPhase 2

01630-S02-1-

3/11/15176424



Section 01650

STARTUP REQUIREMENTS

1. SCOPE. This section covers startup requirements for all items of equipment and systems including mechanical equipment. Additional requirements may be specified in specific equipment specifications. The requirements of this section shall be satisfactorily completed prior to any field tests specified in the specific equipment sections. 2. GENERAL. Equipment shall not be operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper results. All items of equipment and systems shall be tested for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. All required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activity shall be provided by qualified personnel. Contractor shall be responsible for planning, supervising, and executing the installation of Work. 2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall coordinate all tests related to startup of equipment and systems and shall report the results to Engineer in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Contractor shall accept the equipment and the test results related to starting of equipment and systems before Engineer will accept the equipment and the test results. When equipment is ready for a witness test, Contractor shall give written notice to Engineer at least 14 days before any offsite witness testing is performed or any field witnessed performance testing, unless otherwise specified. 3. EQUIPMENT TESTS. 3.01. Factory Tests. When specified in the specific equipment sections, the equipment will be test run at the point of manufacture and the test results will be delivered to Engineer. Such equipment will not be shipped until Engineer has reviewed the test results and advised the Contractor, in writing, that the equipment is acceptable for shipment. Such acceptance, however, will not be considered as final acceptance, which will only be made on the basis of the test results of the equipment after installation. 3.02. Preliminary Field Tests. All items of mechanical equipment shall be given a preliminary field test by Contractor after installation for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. The preliminary field test shall consist of the requirements listed herein, unless exceptions or additions are indicated in the specific equipment sections. Equipment associated with the Hydrophilic HSW systems shall be preliminarily field tested using water. Contractor shall provide equipment to remove water from the system after successful completion of



testing and dispose of the water to a sewer and/or to the treatment facility headworks, but not to the Owner’s digestion system. Contractor's test operation of each piece of mechanical equipment shall continue for not less than 8 hours without interruption. All moving parts of equipment and machinery shall be carefully tested for operation, and adjusted so all parts move freely and function to secure satisfactory operation. All equipment shall be tested continuously under actual or simulated operating conditions. All parts shall operate satisfactorily in all respects, under continuous full load and in accordance with the specified requirements, for the full duration of the 8 hour test period. If any part of a unit shows evidence of unsatisfactory or improper operation during the 8 hour test period, correction or repairs shall be made and the full 8 hour test operation, as specified, shall be completed after all parts operate satisfactorily. Tests of all process and pumping equipment, drive motors, including auxiliaries shall be made in accordance with the appropriate and approved test codes such as the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Hydraulic Institute Standards, and IEEE. Tests shall be conducted after the Work is substantially complete so each item of equipment is ready for integrated operation with other equipment at the plant. Testing, measuring, and calibrating procedures shall be submitted to Engineer for review and acceptance prior to startup and testing of equipment. The equipment shall be properly filled, by Contractor, with oil and grease, and Contractor shall furnish all power, personnel, water, chemicals, fuels, oil, grease, and auxiliaries necessary for conducting the testing of the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. The period of inspection, initial startup operation, and field adjustment shall be as needed to achieve satisfactory installation and operation of the items furnished. Any period required for instruction of Owner's personnel shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. When the specific equipment sections indicate that an installation check is required by the equipment manufacturer, the manufacturer's representative will make all necessary field adjustments and correct defects in materials or workmanship during this test period. All instruments and controls necessary for the continuous operation and protection of the equipment must be installed and fully functional prior to any equipment testing. All equipment installed under this Contract, including that furnished by others, shall be placed into successful operation according to the written instructions of the equipment manufacturer and the instructions of the manufacturer's field representative.



3.03. Field System Operation Test. After all equipment is installed and the entire plant or system is ready to operate, Contractor shall conduct a field system operation test. The test shall consist of the requirements listed herein, unless exceptions or additions are indicated in the specific equipment sections. The test period shall be at least 7 days, and each system shall operate under actual or simulated operating conditions before a certificate of Substantial Completion of the Work is issued. All defects of material, workmanship, or equipment which appear during this test period shall be corrected by Contractor. After such corrections are made, the 7 day test shall be repeated before a certificate of Substantial Completion of Work is issued, unless waived by Engineer. Contractor shall provide 4 weeks notification prior to operation testing. During this operation test, the Contractor shall simulate operation of the system. Testing shall not begin until at least 10 loads of waste are available for delivery. Successful completion of the testing requires pumping of the waste materials to the digestion system. No removing of waste materials or cleaning of the tank are required unless necessary for repairs of defective work/materials. Contractor shall be responsible for simulating delivery conditions, and verifying all alarm and instrument readings. Contractor shall supply all power, water, oil, grease, auxiliaries, and operating personnel required for this operation test. When necessary for certain items of equipment, the final adjustments and inspections will be made by factory trained service personnel (other than sales representatives), rather than by Contractor. The service personnel will also supervise the test operation. This requirement will be stated under the detailed specification for the particular piece or pieces of equipment. The manufacturer's service personnel will make adjustments and supervise testing by Contractor until such tests have been accepted by Engineer. 4. ACCEPTANCE. When no other field tests for acceptance are specified in the equipment sections, at the end of the field system operation testing, each system will be accepted if, in the opinion of Engineer, it has operated satisfactorily without excessive power use, wear, or need for lubrication, or requiring undue attention; and if all its rotating parts operate without excessive vibration or noise at any operating condition. When other field tests for acceptance are specified in the equipment sections, acceptance shall be after all tests are satisfactorily conducted as specified in the appropriate equipment procurement specification. Acceptance of Work in connection with the installation of equipment furnished by others will be subject to approval of the manufacturer's field representative.



Acceptance by Owner or approval of the manufacturer's field representative will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for defective Work.

End of Section



Section 02050

DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the demolition of existing piping and equipment, and the salvage of existing materials and equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall be responsible for all work under this section and the applicable requirements within Article 1 of the Owner’s Technical Specifications (T.S.). Contractor shall provide 14 days written notice prior to beginning demolition activities. All structures and facilities of the existing wastewater treatment plant which are not to be removed must remain in continuous operation during the work. Demolition and salvage work shall create minimum interference with Owner's operations and minimum inconvenience to Owner. Contractor shall provide protection and safety of all roadways, sidewalks, and all accessible areas during demolition activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. DEMOLITION. Removal of equipment or facilities shall include removal of all accessories, piping, valves, wiring, supports, associated electrical starters and devices, baseplates and frames, and all other appurtenances, unless otherwise directed. Existing materials and equipment removed, and not indicated to be reused as a part of the Work, shall become Contractor's property unless otherwise specified, and shall be removed from the Site. Contractor shall conduct demolition activities in a manner that prevents damage to existing facilities which are indicated to remain and shall provide all necessary protection for existing facilities. Any remaining facilities damaged during demolition shall be repaired by Contractor to a condition equal to or better than the original condition. When demolition is complete, all debris shall be removed from the Site. Any damage to the site shall be restored to its original conditions.



3-1.01. Piping and Equipment Demolition. The following piping and equipment shall be removed and shall become the property of Contractor. All such items shall be promptly removed from the jobsite.

Gallery No. 1 Hydrophilic HSW Digester Feed piping and appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, except as indicated in article 3-2.02 herein.

Removal of Hydrophobic HSW Storage Structure perimeter birdscreen at base of aluminum dome as required for installation of weathertight seal and reassembly of closure.

3-2. SALVAGE. 3-2.01. Items To Be Salvaged by Owner. Not used. 3-2.02. Items To Be Salvaged by Contractor. Existing materials and equipment removed, and not reused as a part of the work, shall become Contractor's property unless otherwise specified, and shall be removed from the jobsite. The following items shall remain Owner's property and shall be delivered to Owner’s Stock Room on pallets by Contractor in good condition:

Gallery No. 1 Hydrophilic HSW to Digesters static mixer, Hydrophilic HSW Digester Feed piping appurtenances, and stainless steel piping, as indicated on the Drawings.

Contractor shall carefully remove, in a manner to prevent damage, all materials and equipment specified herein or indicated to be salvaged and to remain the property of Owner. Contractor shall store and protect salvaged items specified or indicated to be reused in the work. Any items damaged in removal, storage, or handling through carelessness or improper procedures shall be replaced by Contractor in kind or with new items. Contractor may, at his option, furnish and install new items instead of those specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused, in which case such removed items will become Contractor's property.

End of Section



Section 02704

PIPELINE PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers field hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing of piping. The term "piping" shall be used in this section to refer to piping systems, pipelines, or sections thereof. Testing of other piping is covered in the Sewer Pipe Installation and Testing section and Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section and Article 8 of the Owner’s Technical Specifications.

1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall coordinate pressure and leakage testing with adjacent work as necessary to preclude work interferences or duplication of effort and to expedite the overall progress of the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary piping, piping connections, temporary valves, backflow preventers, and all other items of equipment or facilities necessary to complete the pressure and leakage testing. In all cases where it is necessary to interrupt service, permission of Owner shall be obtained at least two days before the service will be interrupted. In all cases where it is necessary to interrupt service to water customers, permission of the Owner shall be obtained and each customer affected shall be notified of the proposed service interruption and its possible duration in accordance with the Project Requirements section. Water shall remain in piping and be pumped into the process. Engineer or Engineer's representative shall be present during testing and shall be notified of the time and place of testing at least 3 days prior to commencement of testing. All testing shall be performed to the satisfaction of Engineer, and in accordance with all governing standards and regulations. 1-2.01. Testing Schedule and Procedure. A testing schedule and procedure shall be submitted to Engineer for review and acceptance not less than 21 days prior to commencement of testing. The schedule and procedure shall include, but not be limited to the following information for each pipe section to be tested:

limits of each pipe test section; proposed time and sequence; physical locations and set positions of all valves;



locations of temporary bulkheads, stops, caps, restraints, supports, and other temporary equipment needed;

manner of filling and source of water; method and location of metering volumes; and method and location of gauging pressures.

1-2.02. Special Testing Requirements. Special testing requirements include the following: Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, the general sequence of work for each pipeline, or valved or bulkheaded section thereof, shall be as follows:

Initial cleaning and flushing of pipeline. Filling pipeline. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing.

Unless otherwise acceptable, during testing of the pipeline, all valves, except for auxiliary hydrant valve(s), shall be in the open position Unless otherwise acceptable, temporary bulkheads shall be provided during testing so that the test pressure is not applied to existing or new valves and hydrants, or to existing water lines, or to any portion of water lines installed under this Contract that have already been put into service.

Unless otherwise acceptable, a temporary pressure gauge shall be installed at each end of the limits of the pipeline to be tested. 1-2.03. Water. Water for testing shall be furnished as stipulated in the Temporary Facilities section. As a conservation measure, the water shall be collected for reuse in subsequent testing. Following completion of testing, the water shall remain in piping and be pumped into the process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary connections between the piping to be tested and the water source, together with pumping equipment, water meter, pressure gauges, backflow prevention, and all other equipment, materials, and facilities required to perform the specified tests, shall be provided. All required blind flanges, valves, bulkheads, bracing, blocking, and other sectionalizing devices shall also be provided. All temporary sectionalizing devices shall be removed upon completion of testing. Vents shall be provided in test bulkheads where necessary to expel air from the piping to be tested. Test pressure shall be applied by means of a force pump sized to produce and maintain the required pressure without interruption during the test.



Water meters and pressure gauges shall be accurately calibrated and shall be subject to review and acceptance by Engineer.

Permanent or temporary gauge connections shall be installed at each location where test gauges are connected to the piping during the required test. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls will not be permitted. Upon successful completion of testing, each permanent gauge connection shall be fitted with an isolation valve and a permanent gauge, and each temporary gauge connection, if used, shall be fitted with a permanent sealed plug or cap acceptable to the Engineer. Permanent or temporary fill and vent connections shall be installed as needed for the required test. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls will not be permitted. Upon successful completion of testing, each permanent fill and vent connection shall be fitted with the permanent fill or vent piping, and each temporary fill and vent connection, if used, shall be fitted with a permanent sealed plug or cap acceptable to the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. FILLING AND VENTING. Before filling the piping with water, care shall be taken to ensure that all air release valves and other venting devices are properly installed and operating properly. Hand-operated vent valves shall not be closed until an uninterrupted stream of water is flowing from each valve. The rate of filling the piping with water must not exceed the venting capacity of the installed air vent valves and devices.

3-2. BLOCKING AND BACKFILLING. Piping shall be adequately blocked, anchored, and supported before the test pressure is applied. All piping may be tested after backfilling. 3-3. PRESSURE TESTING. After the piping to be tested has been filled with water, the test pressure shall be applied and maintained without interruption within plus or minus 5 psi of test pressure for 2 hours plus any additional time required for Engineer to examine all piping being tested and for Contractor to locate any defective joints and pipe materials. Piping shall be subjected to the test pressure as indicated in the Plant Piping Test Pressure Schedule. 3-4. PLANT PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING. All plant piping shall be watertight and free from leaks. Each leak which is discovered within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor.

End of Section


Piping DesignationTest

Pressure (psi)

Glycol Return (GLR) 100Glycol Supply (GLS) 100Hydrophobic HSW 60Hydrophilic HSW Tank Drawdown 70Hydrophilic HSW to Digesters 150Hydrophilic HSW Recirculation Discharge 80Hydrophilic HSW Recirculation Suction 60Thickened Sludge 150

Schedule 02704-S02

Plant Piping Test Pressure Schedule

End of Schedule

Rock River Water Reclamation District Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station Phase 2

02704-S02 -1-

3/11/15176424



Section 03302

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers all cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcing steel, forms, finishing, curing, and appurtenant work. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. All submittals of drawings and data shall be in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. LIMITING REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall be controlled within the following limiting requirements:

Cement Content At least 564 lbs per cubic yard.

Maximum Water-Cement Ratio

The maximum water-cement ratio shall be 0.42 on a weight basis, or, if fly ash is used, the combined mass of cement plus fly ash shall be used to determine the water-cementitious materials ratio.

Fly Ash Content At the option of Contractor, fly ash may be substituted for up to 25 percent of the Portland cement, on the basis of 1.0 lbs of fly ash added for each lb of cement reduction.

Concrete Strength 4,500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days.

Air Content 6 percent ±1.5 percent.

Coarse Aggregate Maximum nominal coarse aggregate size, 1 inch.

Admixtures A water-reducing admixture and an air-entraining admixture shall be included in all concrete. No calcium chloride or admixture containing chloride from sources other than impurities in admixture ingredients will be



acceptable.

Consistency Workable, without segregation, with slump not more than 5 inches when concrete is placed.

Mixing In accordance with ASTM C94.

2-1.01. Slump. Concrete slump shall be kept as low as possible consistent with proper handling and thorough compaction. Unless otherwise authorized by Engineer, slump of concrete without a superplasticizer shall not exceed 4 inches. Slump of concrete with a superplasticizer, or a midrange water reducer, shall not exceed 8 inches. 2-1.02. Total Air Content. The total volumetric air content of concrete after placement shall be 6 percent ±1.5 percent. Air-entraining admixture may be omitted from concrete for interior slabs which are to be trowel finished. 2-1.03. Admixtures. The admixture content, batching method, and time of introduction to the mix shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and acceptable to Engineer. A water-reducing admixture and an air-entraining admixture shall be included in all concrete. A midrange water reducer or a superplasticizer may be used at Contractor’s option. No calcium chloride or admixture containing chloride from sources other than impurities in admixture ingredients will be acceptable. 2-1.04. Strength. The minimum acceptable compressive strengths, as determined by ASTM C39, shall be:

Age Minimum Compressive Strength

7 days 3,375 psi

28 days 4,500 psi

Cylinders shall be 6 inches diameter by 12 inches high for concrete mixes using a maximum nominal aggregate size of 1 inch or larger. Cylinders may be either 6 inches diameter by 12 inches high, or 4 inches diameter by 8 inches high for concrete mixes using a maximum nominal aggregate size of less than 1 inch. The average compressive strength shall be determined from the results of at least three cylinders when using 4 inch diameter cylinders, and at least two cylinders when using 6 inch diameter cylinders. All tests shall be performed using the same sized cylinders for the duration of the work.



2-2. MATERIALS.

Cement ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali.

Fly Ash ASTM C618, Class F or Class C, except loss on ignition shall not exceed 4 percent.

Fine Aggregate Non-reactive, clean, natural sand, ASTM C33.

Coarse Aggregate Non-reactive crushed rock, washed gravel, or other inert granular material conforming to ASTM C33, class 4S, except that clay and shale particles shall not exceed 1 percent.

Water Potable.

Admixtures

Water-Reducing ASTM C494, Type A or D.

Air-Entraining ASTM C260.

Superplasticizing ASTM C494, Type F or G.

Reinforcing Steel

Bars ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185 or A497.

Bar Supports CRSI Class 1, plastic protected; or Class 2, stainless steel protected.

Mechanical Connector (Couplers or Form Savers)

Classified Type 2 per ACI 318. Use only where indicated on the drawings.



Expandable Waterstops, permitted only at locations indicated on Drawings

Hydrophilic; bentonite free, chemically modified rubber. Adeka “Ultra Seal MC-2010MN” or Greenstreak “Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K”. Adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

Sealant for expandable waterstop

Adeka “Ultra Seal P-201” or Greenstreak “Leakmaster”.

Expansion Joint Material

Forms

Sponge rubber expansion joint material, ASTM D1752 Type I, as indicated on the drawings.

Plywood Product Standard PS1, waterproof, resin-bonded, exterior type, Douglas fir.

Lumber Straight, uniform width and thickness, and free from knots, offsets, holes, dents, and other surface defects.

Form Coating Nonstaining and nontoxic after 30 days. Product shall not exceed VOC limits established by the federal, state, or local regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the project site.

Evaporation Reducer Dayton Superior “AquaFilm Concentrate J74”, Euclid "Eucobar", L&M Chemical "E-Con", BASF "Confilm", or Sika "SikaFilm".

Membrane Curing Compound and Floor Sealer

ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, minimum 25 percent solids, acrylic, non-yellowing, unit moisture loss 0.40 kg/m2 maximum in 72 hours. Product shall not exceed VOC limits established by the federal, state, or local regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the project site.

Polyethylene Film Product Standard PS17 or ASTM D4397, 6 mils or thicker.



2-3. PRELIMINARY REVIEW. Reports covering the source and quality of concrete materials and the concrete proportions proposed for the work shall be submitted to Engineer for review before any concrete is placed. 2-4. FORMS. Forms shall be designed to produce hardened concrete having the shape, lines, and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and shall be maintained in proper position and accurate alignment. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated before concrete is placed and shall not be removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely support all loads without damage. 2-5. REINFORCEMENT. Reinforcement shall be accurately formed and positioned, and shall be maintained in proper position while the concrete is being placed and compacted. Reinforcement shall be free from dirt, loose rust, scale, and contaminants. Mechanical connectors shall be used only as indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. PLACEMENT. Concrete shall be conveyed to the point of final deposit and placed by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of the ingredients. During and immediately after placement, concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and worked around all reinforcement and embedments and into the corners of the forms. Unless otherwise authorized, compaction shall be by immersion-type vibrators. The use of "jitterbug" tampers to compact concrete flatwork will not be permitted. 3-1.01. Polyethylene Film. Where concrete is placed against gravel or crushed rock which does not contain at least 25 percent material passing a No. 4 sieve, such surfaces shall be covered with polyethylene film. Joints in the film shall be lapped at least 4 inches and taped. 3-2. WATER STOPS. Each water stop shall be continuous throughout the length of the joint in which it is installed. Water stops shall be clean, free from coatings, and shall be maintained in proper position until surrounding concrete has been deposited and compacted. 3-3. FINISHING. Fins and other surface projections shall be removed from all formed surfaces, except exterior surfaces that will be in contact with earth backfill. Surface voids and recesses resulting from removal of form ties shall be filled with mortar. Unless otherwise specified, unformed surfaces shall be given a float finish.



3-3.01. Application of Evaporation Reducer. Concrete flatwork subject to rapid evaporation due to hot weather, drying winds, and sunlight may be protected with an evaporation reducer. The evaporation reducer shall form a continuous film on the surface of fresh, plastic concrete to reduce evaporation. Immediately following screeding, evaporation reducer shall be sprayed over the entire surface of fresh, plastic concrete flatwork at a rate of not less than 200 square feet per gallon, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The spray equipment shall have sufficient capacity to continuously spray the product at approximately 40 psi with a suitable nozzle as recommended by the manufacturer. The sprayable solution shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer. Under severe drying conditions, additional applications of evaporation reducer may be required following each floating or troweling, except the last finishing operation. 3-3.02. Sidewalks. Concrete surfaces shall be screeded to the proper elevation and contour. All aggregates shall be completely embedded in mortar. Screeded surfaces shall be given an initial float finish as soon as the concrete has stiffened sufficiently for proper working. Any piece of coarse aggregate which is disturbed by the float or which causes a surface irregularity shall be removed and replaced with mortar. Initial floating shall produce a surface of uniform texture and appearance, with no unnecessary working of the surface. Initial floating shall be followed by a second floating at the time of initial set. Floated surfaces shall be given a light broom finish, using a horsehair broom, to provide a nonslip surface. Brooming shall be done at right angles to the length of the walk. Sidewalks shall be edged using a 3 or 4 inch wide edging tool with a 1/8 inch corner radius. Edger lap marks at corners of each slab shall be carefully removed. False joints shall be provided at right angles to the length of the walk, using a grooving tool with 1/8 inch radius. The finished edge on each side of the joint shall be the same width as the edging tool used. False joints shall divide each sidewalk into square sections. The finished surface of all sidewalks shall be neat in appearance, shall be sloped to drain, and shall not pond water. 3-3.03. Curb and Gutter. Curb and gutter shall be finished to the shape indicated on the drawings. After the forms have been removed, all exposed edges shall be rounded, using an edging tool with a 1/8 inch corner radius. Exposed surfaces shall be float finished and given a light broom finish applied at right angles to the curb at the time of initial set, using a horsehair broom.



3-4. CURING. Concrete shall be protected from loss of moisture for at least 7 days by membrane curing or by water curing. Membrane curing compound shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer. Water curing shall be in accordance with ACI 308.1. Concrete shall be protected against freezing for at least 7 days following placement. 3-5. REPAIRING DEFECTIVE CONCRETE. Defects in concrete surfaces shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer. All concrete which is honeycombed or otherwise defective shall be cut out and removed to sound concrete, with edges cut square to avoid feathering. Concrete repair work shall conform to Article 5.3.7 of ACI 301 and shall be performed in a manner that will not interfere with thorough curing of surrounding concrete. Repair work shall be adequately cured. 3-6. OWNER’S FIELD CONTROL TESTING. Field control tests shall be performed by Engineer or Owner’s testing laboratory personnel, at the expense of Owner. Contractor shall provide access to all facilities and the services of one or more employees as necessary to assist with the field control testing. 3-6.01. Air Content. An air content test shall be made on concrete from each batch of concrete from which concrete compression test cylinders are made. Air content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C231. 3-6.02. Slump. A slump test shall be made on concrete from each batch of concrete from which concrete compression test cylinders are made. Slump shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C143. 3-6.03. Test Cylinders. Compression test specimens shall be made, cured, stored, and delivered to the laboratory in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39. Compressive strength tests will be evaluated in accordance with ACI 318 and as specified herein. One set of concrete test cylinders shall be cast for each concrete pour. A set of test cylinders shall consist of four or six cylinders depending on the cylinder size selected. Half of the cylinders shall be tested at 7 days, and the remaining half shall be tested at 28 days. All concrete required for testing shall be furnished by, and at the expense of, Contractor.

End of Section



Section 03600

GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers procurement and installation of grout. Unless otherwise specified, only nonshrink grout shall be furnished. Epoxy grouting of anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors, and reinforcing bars is covered in the anchorage in concrete and masonry section. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. A letter of certification indicating the types of grout to be supplied and the intended use of each type shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent damage of any kind. Materials shall be protected from moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS.

Nonshrink Grout Precision cementitious grout with demonstrated non-shrinking properties, minimum 28 day compressive strength of 9000 psi; L&M "Crystex", BASF "Masterflow 928”, Sika “SikaGrout 328”, or Dayton Superior "Sure-Grip High Performance Grout".

Water Clean and free from deleterious substances. 2-2. CEMENTITIOUS GROUT. Cementitious grout shall be furnished factory premixed so that only water is added at the jobsite. 2-3. EPOXY GROUT. Epoxy grout shall be used in lieu of cementitious grout when required by the equipment manufacturer for performance or warranty requirements. Epoxy grout products and installation procedures shall be submitted to Engineer for approval.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. PREPARATION. The concrete foundation to receive nonshrink grout shall be saturated with water for at least 12 hours preceding grouting unless additional time is required by the grout manufacturer. 3-2. INSTALLATION. 3-2.01. Mixing. Grout shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. No more water shall be used than is necessary to produce a flowable grout. 3-2.02. Placement. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, grout under baseplates shall be 1-1/2 inches thick. Grout shall be placed in strict accordance with the directions of the manufacturer so that all spaces and cavities below the baseplates are completely filled without voids. Forms shall be provided where structural components of baseplates will not confine the grout. 3-2.03. Edge Finishing. In all locations where the edge of the grout will be exposed to view, the grout shall be finished smooth after it has reached its initial set. Except where shown to be finished on a slope, the edges of grout shall be cut off flush at the baseplate. 3-2.04. Curing. Nonshrink grout shall be protected against rapid loss of moisture by covering with wet cloths or polyethylene sheets. After edge finishing is completed, the grout shall be wet cured for at least 3 days and then an acceptable membrane curing compound shall be applied.

End of Section



Section 03710

CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the repair of concrete and shotcrete cracks and joints. Both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of measurement are specified herein; the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern. 1-1.01. General Crack Repair. General crack repair, as required for the Hydrophilic HSW Tank coating system provided, shall include the following:

a. Sealing of all cracks and crack networks that are wider than 10 mils (0.01 inch) as measured at the exposed surface.

b. All necessary repairs to structures that have failed a leakage test, including sealing of construction joints.

All costs for general crack repair shall be included in the Contract Price. General crack repair work is expected to be necessary on the Project due to cracks that commonly develop during concrete construction. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. Specifications and data covering physical properties, mixtures, application procedures, and curing procedures of the materials proposed shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Submittals shall include the approvals from the material manufacturer. 1-3. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-3.01. Manufacturer's Field Services. The material manufacturer shall provide engineering field services to review the Project and the material application prior to any preparation; to approve the applicator, the material used, and the procedure to be used; to observe surface preparation; to approve surface preparation; and to observe application. The field representative of the material manufacturer shall submit, in writing through Contractor, approvals of proposed material, application procedures, applicator, and surface preparation. The field representative shall be an employee of the material manufacturer. 1-3.02. Applicator. The applicator shall submit through Contractor a satisfactory experience record including references from previous application of the specified materials to structures of similar design and complexity.



1-3.03. Pre-Construction Meeting. At least 30 days prior to concrete crack repairs, Contractor shall conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work. Site conditions, surface preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing, placing procedures, and curing methods shall be discussed and approved by Engineer and by the manufacturer’s field representative. Contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties, including but not limited to Contractor’s superintendent, repair contractor, manufacturer’s field representative and proposed equipment supplier representative. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by Contractor and distributed to all parties within 5 days after the meeting. 1-3.04. Quality Assurance Certification. Material manufacturers shall be ISO 9001/9002 registered or shall provide proof of documented quality assurance. The documented quality assurance system shall be obtained through an independent auditing registrar. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified or authorized, repairs shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Types of repairs not specified herein shall be as specified in other sections, as indicated on the Drawings, or, in the absence of any definite requirement, as recommended by the manufacturer's representative and subject to acceptance by Engineer. The following types of repairs shall be performed as required. 2-1.01. Pressure-Injected Epoxy Resin. Pressure-injected epoxy resin shall be used to seal cracks, construction joints, and other repairs in concrete and shotcrete structures as required or as directed by Engineer. 2-1.02. Pressure-Injected Foam Resin. Pressure-injected foam resin shall be used to seal joints and cracks in concrete and shotcrete structures that will have movement as required or as directed by Engineer. 2-1.03. Crack Sealant. Crack sealant shall be used to seal cracks in structures prior to pressure injection of resin.

2-2. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Repair products/materials shall be manufactured by the companies specified herein. Equivalent products of other manufacturers regularly producing high quality concrete crack repair products/materials, providing engineering field services, and meeting the



specified quality assurance requirements may be furnished subject to review and acceptance by Engineer. 2-3. MATERIALS. All materials shall be as specified or as recommended by the manufacturer for temperature and moisture conditions encountered.

Pressure-Injected Epoxy Resin

ASTM C881, Type I or Type IV, moisture tolerant or moisture insensitive.

Pressure-Injected Foam Resin

Hydrophillic polyurethane foam; Prime Resins “Prime-Flex 900 XLV”, DeNeef "HYDRO ACTIVE Sealfoam", or Avanti “AV-333 Injectaflex”.

Foam Resin Accelerator As recommended by foam resin manufacturer.

Crack Sealant As recommended by the manufacturer of the pressure-injected epoxy resin product.

Water Clean and free from deleterious substances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. Prior to the placement of the repair materials, the crack to be repaired shall be inspected by the material manufacturer to assure that preparation and conditions are correct for the type of repair and the product/material being used as specified herein. 3-2. PREPARATION. All cracks and surfaces around the cracks shall be free of objectionable substances and shall conform to the requirements of the material manufacturer. Concrete and shotcrete to be repaired shall be cleaned by methods acceptable to the material manufacturer so that the cracks are free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance, and other foreign matter. All loose and deteriorated existing concrete and shotcrete shall be removed down to sound materials. All concrete and shotcrete surfaces shall be checked for delamination to ensure that all surfaces are sound. All edges shall be square cut to avoid feather edges. Any other preparation recommended by the material manufacturer shall be brought to Engineer's attention and may be incorporated into the work if acceptable to Engineer. Concrete and shotcrete surfaces in the area of a crack to be repaired shall be cleaned by wire brushing, blasting, or other acceptable methods.



Wall surfaces shall be sandblasted clean to expose crack networks and construction joints. If there is active water seepage in the repair area, the seepage shall be stopped as recommended by the injection material manufacturer and as acceptable to Engineer. Injection ports shall be installed, when recommended by the injection material manufacturer. 3-2.01. Injected Epoxy Resin. Preparation for injected epoxy resin shall include sealing the surface at the crack on both sides, when possible, with crack sealant as recommended by the material manufacturer and as acceptable to Engineer for the pressure injection work. Injection ports for epoxy resin shall penetrate through the crack sealant into the cracks at spacings recommended by the material manufacturer. 3-2.02. Injected Foam Resin. Preparation for injected foam resin shall include drilling offset injection holes at an angle that will intersect the crack, joint, or crack network at approximately one-half the thickness of the concrete or shotcrete up to a thickness of 36 inches. Spacing of injection ports shall be determined as recommended by the injection material manufacturer and as acceptable to Engineer. When the injection material manufacturer certifies, in writing, that spacing of injection ports and installation procedures are acceptable, the injection ports may be installed directly into the crack, subject to review by Engineer. 3-3. APPLICATION. Concrete and shotcrete repair work shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements. 3-3.01. Crack Sealant. Crack sealant shall be trowel-applied to a minimum dried thickness of 1/8 inch. The concrete surface where the sealant is applied shall be smooth, uniform, and free from irregularities. Crack sealant shall be removed after the injection of resin is completed whenever the sealant will be visible after completion of the work. 3-3.02. Pressure-Injected Resin. The injected areas shall be prepared as specified and as recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure-injected resin shall be suitable for penetration of joints, cracks, and crack networks 2 mils (0.002 inch) wide and larger. After the joints and cracks are prepared and before the injection of the resin, the joints shall be flushed with water. The water flush shall be terminated when the turbidity of the expelled water is equal to that of the flush water. The pumping equipment used for the pressure injection of resin shall have pressure metering. Written procedures for use and quality control of the injection equipment shall be furnished to Engineer for review and acceptance. The pump shall be electric. The material and process used for the pressure injection of the resin shall have been in use a minimum of 5 years.



The joints and crack networks shall have a minimum of 90 percent penetration of resin into the joint or crack network. Core samples may be taken at Engineer's discretion. 3-3.02.01. Epoxy Resin. Epoxy resin shall be injected into the structure in accordance with the material manufacturer's recommendations and as acceptable to Engineer. Epoxy resin shall be injected until the resin appears at the next port. 3-3.02.02. Foam Resin. Foam resin shall be premixed and injected into the structure in accordance with the material manufacturer's recommendations and as acceptable to Engineer. Foam resin shall be injected into the structure until the resin appears at the next injection port. Surfaces of cracks and joints may need to be sealed with crack sealant. 3-3.03. Cold Weather. When ambient temperatures below 40°F are expected during the curing period, the repair materials shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50°F for 14 days or 75°F for 7 days after placement. Sudden cooling of the repair materials shall not be permitted. 3-4. PROTECTION. Post-placement curing and protection shall be as specified herein and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3-5. CLEANING. Work areas shall be cleaned each day in accordance with the Project Requirements section. Upon completion of the final cleanup, Contractor shall restore all areas affected by the grouting procedures to their original condition, leaving no trace of material piles or other wasted materials.

End of Section



Section 05550

ANCHORAGE IN CONCRETE AND MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the procurement and installation of anchors in concrete. It includes cast-in-place anchor bolts, adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, undercut anchors, and reinforcing bars to be installed in concrete. 1-2. GENERAL. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings all anchors and anchor bolts shall be cast-in-place anchor bolts with forged heads or embedded nuts and washers. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors and anchor bolts in concrete shall have a diameter of at least 3/4 inch. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, anchors and anchor bolts used in the following locations and applications shall be of the indicated materials. Anchors and anchor bolts in other locations and applications shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts.

Submerged locations Stainless steel.

Locations subject to splashing Stainless steel.

Buried locations Stainless steel.

Anchorage of structural steel columns Stainless steel.

Other exterior locations Stainless steel.

Other interior locations Stainless steel.

Adhesive, Expansion, and Undercut Anchors.

Submerged locations Stainless steel.

Locations subject to splashing Stainless steel.

Buried locations Stainless steel.

Anchorage of structural steel columns Stainless steel.



Other exterior locations Stainless steel.

Other interior locations Stainless steel. Adhesive, expansion, and undercut anchors may be used instead of cast-in-place anchors where specifically indicated or permitted on the Drawings or with the specific acceptance by Engineer. All portions of stainless steel anchors exposed within the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall have a PTFE coating. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Data, catalog cuts, and ICC ESR reports indicating the manufacturer and types of adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, and undercut anchors to be supplied shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. If Contractor requests use of products other than those indicated herein, calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer using methods and procedures required by the building code may be required as part of the submittal package. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent damage or corrosion. Damaged materials shall be promptly replaced. Materials shall be shipped and stored in original manufacturer's packaging.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, materials shall be as indicated below.

Anchor Bolts

Stainless steel Bolts, ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; nuts, ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (minimum yield strength of 30 ksi for both bolts and nuts).

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1; of the same material as anchor bolts and nuts.

Reinforcing Bars ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

Reinforcing Bars, weldable ASTM A706, Grade 60, deformed.



Expansion Anchors in Concrete Products shall be single component anchors tested in accordance with ICC AC193, and shall have an ICC ESR report in compliance with the International Building Code (2009 or later edition). The anchors shall be approved for use in cracked concrete, and for resisting seismic forces. Hilti "Kwik-Bolt TZ", ITW Red Head "Trubolt+", Powers Fasteners “Power-Stud+SD2”, Simpson “Strong-Bolt”.

Undercut Anchors in Concrete Products shall be tested in accordance with ICC AC193, and shall have an ICC ESR report in compliance with the International Building Code (2009 or later edition). Hilti “HDA Undercut Anchor”, USP Structural Connectors “DUC Undercut Anchor”, Powers Fasteners “Atomic+ Undercut Anchor”.

Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Products shall be tested in accordance with ICC AC308, and shall have an ICC ESR report in compliance with the International Building Code (2009 or later edition). The anchors shall be approved for use in cracked concrete, and for resisting seismic forces.

Threaded Rods and Nuts As recommended by the adhesive manufacturer; materials as indicated on the Drawings or in this specification.

Adhesive Hilti “HIT-RE 500-SD” or "HIT-HY 200", Powers Fasteners “PE1000+”, Simpson “Set-XP”.

2-2. ANCHORS. 2-2.01. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts. Cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be delivered in time to permit setting before the structural concrete is placed. Unless installed in pipe sleeves, anchor bolts shall be provided with sufficient threads to permit a nut to be installed on the concrete side of the concrete form or the supporting template. Two nuts, a jam nut, and a washer shall be furnished for



cast-in-place anchor bolts indicated on the Drawings to have locknuts; two nuts and a washer shall be furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts without locknuts. 2-2.02. Adhesive, Expansion, and Undercut Anchors. When adhesive, expansion, or undercut anchors are indicated on the Drawings, only acceptable systems shall be used. Acceptable systems shall include only those systems and products specified or specifically indicated by product name on the Drawings. Alternative anchoring systems may be used only when specifically accepted by Engineer. Unless otherwise required, single nuts and washers shall be furnished for adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, and undercut anchors. Adhesive anchors shall be free of coatings that would weaken the bond with the adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. GENERAL. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to projecting, threaded portions of stainless steel anchors immediately before tightening of the nuts. 3-1.01. ESR Report Compliance. Anchors shall be installed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the ESR report for the anchoring system. If conflicts are found between the Drawings and the ESR report installation requirements, Contractor shall notify Engineer for resolution. 3-1.02. Special Inspection. Special inspection shall be performed by Engineer or Owner’s representative during installation of all anchors covered in this section. Anchorage work shall be performed in a manner that allows the inspections to take place without adversely impacting the schedule. For cast-in-place anchor bolts, bolts shall be positioned in advance of the concrete placement so that the inspector will have sufficient time to inspect the bolts prior to placing concrete. For other types of anchors, the minimum frequency and extent of the inspections shall be as indicated in the anchor system’s ESR report. 3-2. CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS. Cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be carefully positioned with templates and secured in the forms prior to placing concrete. Contractor shall verify that anchorage devices are positioned in accordance with the Drawings and with applicable equipment or structure submittal drawings.



Threads, bolts, and nuts spattered with concrete during placement shall be cleaned prior to final installation of the bolts and nuts. 3-3. ADHESIVE ANCHORS. The embedment depth and spacing for adhesive anchors or reinforcing bars shall be per the manufacturer’s requirements unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Adhesive shall be statically mixed in the field during application. All proportioning and mixing of the components shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchors or bars shall be installed in holes drilled into hardened concrete. Diameter of holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than the outside diameter of the rod or bar unless recommended otherwise by the anchor system manufacturer. Holes shall be prepared by removing all dust and debris using procedures recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Adhesive anchors and holes shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and other foreign matter at the time of installation. The adhesive shall be placed and the rods or bars shall be set in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Care shall be taken to ensure that all spaces and cavities are filled with adhesive, without voids. 3-4. EXPANSION AND UNDERCUT ANCHORS. Expansion and undercut anchors shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings, but in no case shall the embedment depth be less than six bolt diameters. The minimum distance between the center of any anchor and an edge or exterior corner of concrete shall be at least six times the diameter of the bolt. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the distance between the centers of anchors shall be per the manufacturer’s requirements.

End of Section



Section 05990

STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the fabrication and erection of structural and miscellaneous metal items not covered in other sections.

Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the AISC "Steel Construction Manual” (13th edition) with the exception of the “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”; and the Aluminum Association "Specification for Aluminum Structures". Special inspection during the fabrication and erection of structural steel, if required by the local building code, is addressed in the quality control section. Both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of measurement are specified herein; the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. Complete data, fabrication drawings, and setting or erection drawings covering all structural and miscellaneous metal items shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section.

All bolted connections and welds shall be properly identified on the shop drawings. Welding procedures, welding procedure qualification records and welder qualifications shall be submitted. Submittals for high strength bolts, tension control bolts and load indicator washers shall include statements from the bolt and washer manufacturers certifying satisfactory compliance with the governing standards and the specified tests. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent bends, dents, significant coating damage, or corrosion. Damaged materials shall be promptly replaced. Structural and miscellaneous metal work shall be stored on blocking so that no metal touches the ground and water cannot collect thereon. The material shall be protected against bending under its own weight or superimposed loads. Bolting materials shall be stored indoors. Weld rod shall be stored in accordance with the supplier’s instructions and AWS D1.1.



1-4. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATION. All fabricating plants providing structural steel shall be qualified fabricators who participate in the AISC Certification program and are designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD. Plant certification is not required for fabrication of miscellaneous metal which does not meet the AISC definition for structural steel found in the AISC “Steel Construction Manual” (13th edition), Part 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. All field connection materials shall be furnished. 2-2. MATERIALS.

Steel

Other Shapes (angles) ASTM A36

Plates and Bars ASTM A36.

Sheets ASTM A1008 CS Type B or A1011 CS Type B.

Pipe ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B; ASTM A500, Grade B or C; or ASTM A501.

Square and Rectangular Structural Tubing

ASTM A500, Grade B or C.

Bolts and Nuts

Bolts, High Strength ASTM A325, Type 1; tested in accordance with Article 9.2 thereof.

Bolts, unfinished ASTM A307.

Nuts, Heavy-Hex ASTM A563, grade and finish compatible with bolts.

Nuts, Self-Locking Prevailing torque type; IFI-100, Grade A.

Washers

Flat, Hardened ASTM F436, Type 1.



Lock ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type.

Beveled ASTM F436.

Anchor Bolts ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or 55

Threaded Rods ASTM A36

Stainless Steel

Shapes ASTM A276, Type 316L.

Plates ASTM A240, Type 316L.

Pipe ASTM A312, Grade TP316L

Tube ASTM A269, Grade TP316L

Checkered Plate ASTM A793, stainless steel, raised pattern A

Bolts ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2

Nuts ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2

Washers

Flat ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, Type 316.

Lock ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type, Type 316.

Aluminum

Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.

Rolled Sections ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6. All members shall be Aluminum Association standard shapes.

Rod and Bar (Rolled or Drawn)

ASTM B211, Alloy 6061-T6 or 2017-T4.

Extrusions ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T6.

Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6061-T6.



Rivets ASTM B316, Alloy 6061-T6.

Bolts, Aluminum ASTM F468, Alloy 2024-T4.

Nuts, Aluminum ASTM F467, Alloy 6061-T6.

Washers, Aluminum

Flat ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, Type 6061 T-6.

Lock ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type, Type 6061-T6.

Castings ASTM B26 or B85.

Checkered Plate ASTM B632, Type 6061-T6.

Weld Metal (Steel Connections) ANSI/AWS D1.1, Table 3.1, filler metal with minimum 70 ksi [482 MPa] tensile strength unless otherwise required.

Shop Coatings

Universal Primer As indicated in protective coatings section.

Epoxy Enamel As indicated in protective coatings section.

Galvanizing ASTM A123, A153, A385.

2-3. FABRICATIONS. The fabrications shall be constructed as indicated on the Drawings. 2-4. SHOP COATING. All structural and miscellaneous metal items shall be shop coated as specified herein. The requirements for field painting are covered in the protective coatings section. 2-4.01. Cleaning. Surfaces shall be dry and of proper temperature when coated, and shall be free of grease, oil, dirt, dust, grit, rust, loose mill scale, weld flux, slag, weld spatter, and other objectionable substances. Articles to be galvanized shall be pickled before galvanizing. All other ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned by solvent, high-speed power wire brushing or by blasting to the extent recommended by the paint manufacturer and as required in the protective coatings section.



2-4.02. Edge Grinding. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metals which will be submerged in operation, except for items specified to be hot-dip galvanized, shall be ground to a radius as needed to ensure satisfactory paint adherence and as required in the protective coatings section.

2-4.03. Prime Painted Steel. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all ungalvanized structural and miscellaneous steel shall be given a universal prime coat in the shop after fabrication. The dry film thickness of the universal primer shall be at least 5 mils. Steel surfaces shall be prime-coated as soon as practicable after cleaning. Steel shall not be moved or handled until the shop coat is dry and hard. 2-4.04. Galvanizing. Steel materials required to be galvanized are indicated on the Drawings. All galvanizing shall be done by the hot-dip process after fabrication. An approved zinc-rich paint shall be used to touch up minor coating damage. Materials with significant coating damage shall be regalvanized or replaced. Where galvanized bolts are indicated on the Drawings or specified, the use of zinc-plated bolts will not be acceptable. 2-4.05. Stainless Steel. Unless otherwise specified, all items fabricated from stainless steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased after fabrication. Pickling or a light blast cleaning shall produce a modest etch and remove all embedded iron and heat tint. Surfaces shall be subjected to a 24 hour water test or a ferroxyl test to detect the presence of residual embedded iron and shall be retreated as needed to remove all traces of iron contamination. Surfaces shall be adequately protected during shipping and handling to prevent contact with iron or steel objects or surfaces. 2-4.06. Aluminum. All surfaces of aluminum which will be in contact with concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals shall be given a coat of epoxy enamel. 2-4.07. Castings. Shop coating of miscellaneous iron castings will not be required. 2-4.08. Other Surfaces. Painting of zinc coated steel or bronze surfaces will not be required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL CONNECTIONS. Connections for miscellaneous steel fabrications not included in the AISC definition of structural steel may be made with unfinished bolts unless indicated otherwise on the



Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings all unfinished bolts shall be snug tight. 3-2. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL WELDING. Welding and related operations shall conform to applicable provisions of the Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1, of the American Welding Society. All welding shall be performed in accordance with written procedures, using only those joint details which have prequalified status when performed in accordance with AWS D1.1. All welding shall be performed by welders qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society for steel welding and American Society for Mechanical Engineers Section IX for stainless steel welding.

All welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with AWS procedures. Welds not dimensioned on the Drawings shall be sized to develop the full strength of the least strength component of the connection. Where structural or miscellaneous steel connections are welded, all butt and miter welds shall be continuous and, where exposed to view, shall be ground smooth. Intermittent welds shall have an effective length of at least 2 inches and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces within 2 inches of a weld shall be free from loose or thick scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, paint and other foreign materials that would prevent proper welding or release objectionable fumes. Only shielded metal arc, gas metal arc, flux cored arc, submerged arc, and gas tungsten arc welding are permitted. For flux cored arc welding, only E70xx one (1) or five (5) wire electrodes with supplemental gas shielding shall be permitted. Use of electroslag or electrogas welding processes or the short-circuiting transfer mode of the gas metal arc process will not be acceptable. Field welded connections shall not be substituted for field bolted connections indicated on the Drawings. Deformed bar anchors, headed studs, concrete anchors and shear connectors shall be welded with an automatic stud welding gun per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Hand welding will not be acceptable. 3-3. MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM. Unless otherwise noted, all work shall conform to applicable provisions of the Aluminum Association "Specification for Aluminum Structures". 3-3.01. Connections. Connections not specifically detailed on the Drawings shall develop the full strength of the least strength member of the connections. Bolted connections shall be all-bolted bearing type, equipped with a helical spring



lock washer under the stationary element (bolt head or nut) and a flat washer under the turned element. All bolts shall be fully tightened. Bolts and nuts for structural aluminum connections shall be stainless steel. Bolts and nuts for nonstructural miscellaneous aluminum assemblies shall be stainless steel or aluminum. A sufficient number of bolts shall be provided in each connection to develop the shear strength of the member. Welded connections shall be made in accordance with the American Welding Society D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. All welding shall be performed by welders qualified in accordance with American Welding Society. Welds shall be free of porosity, cracks, holes, and flux. Welded connections shall not be substituted for bolted connections without prior approval of Engineer. 3-3.02. Erection. Structural aluminum shall be erected so that individual pieces are plumb, level, and aligned within a tolerance of 1:500. The elevation of horizontal members shall be within 1/16 inch of the elevation indicated on the Drawings. Baseplates shall be set level in exact position and grouted in place.

End of Section



Section 07900

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers caulking and sealing. Fire rated caulking is covered in the Fireproofing section.

1-2. GENERAL. The terms "caulking" and "sealing", as used on the Drawings and in these Specifications, are synonymous. Both terms indicate the materials specified herein. Oil-base caulking shall not be used on this Project. 1-3. APPROVALS. All caulking shall meet the requirements of the standards specified herein. All caulking and sealing to be used in contact with potable water shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NSF Standard 61. 1-4. SUBMITTALS. Specifications and data covering the materials proposed for use, together with samples or color cards showing the manufacturer's full line of sealant colors, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Thiokol Sealants (polysulfides) Fed Spec TT-S-00227E, Class A or

ASTM 920 Type M; polysulfide rubber, two component.

Nonsag

Submerged Service, Non potable water

Pecora "Synthacalk GC-2+".

Nonsubmerged Service Pecora "Synthacalk GC-2+";

Polymeric Systems “PSI-350”.

Urethane Sealants (Polyurethanes) Fed Spec TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type 2 and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, two component.

Nonsag

Submerged Service



Potable Water Polymeric Systems “RC-270”; Sika “Sikaflex-2cNS.

Nonpotable Water Polymeric Systems “RC-270".

Nonsubmerged Service Bostik "Chem-Calk 500"; Tremco "Vulkem 227"; Pecora "Dynatrol II"; Tremco "DYmeric 240"; Sika “Sikaflex-2cNS”.

Acrylic Sealant Fed Spec TT-S-230; ASTM C834.

Bostik “Chem-Calk 600”; Pecora “ AC20”; Tremco “Mono 555”.

Primer As recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

Backup Material Polyethylene or polyurethane foam as recommended by the sealant manufacturer; Dow "Ethafoam SB" or Plateau "Denver Foam".

Bondbreaker Tape Adhesive-backed polyethylene tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2-2. COLORS. Colors of sealants shall be as selected by Engineer from the manufacturer's standard line of colors. Different colors may be required for different locations.

2-3. LOCATIONS TO BE CAULKED. 2-3.01. With Thiokol or Urethane Sealant (Nonsag) - Submerged Service.

All joints requiring caulking in submerged locations.

2-3.02. With Thiokol or Urethane Sealant (Nonsag) - Nonsubmerged Service. Perimeter of aluminum entrances and assemblies, except exterior side of exterior sills. Joints between cast-in-place concrete, where indicated on the Drawings. Other locations where caulking is indicated on the Drawings, specified in other sections, or required for weatherproofing.

2-3.03. With Acrylic Sealant.

Watertight joints in sheet metal work.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. JOINT PREPARATION. All surfaces to receive sealant shall be clean, dry, and free from dust, grease, oil, or wax. Concrete surfaces which have been contaminated by form oil, paint, or other foreign matter which would impair the bond of the sealant to the substrate shall be cleaned by sandblasting. All surfaces shall be wiped with a clean cloth saturated with xylol or other suitable solvent, and shall be primed before the sealant is applied. Unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer and permitted by the Engineer, the depth of sealant in a joint shall be equal to the width of the joint, but not more than 1/2 inch. Backup material shall be provided as necessary to control the depth of sealant and shall be of suitable size so that, when compressed 25 to 50 percent, the space will be filled. Backup material shall be rolled or pressed into place in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, avoiding puncturing and lengthwise stretching. If depth of the joint does not permit use of backup material, bondbreaker tape shall be placed at the bottom of the joint to prevent three-sided adhesion. 3-2. SEALING. Sealing work shall be done before any field painting work is started. The air temperature and the temperature of the sealed surfaces shall be above 50F when sealing work is performed. Upon completion of the sealing work, each sealed joint shall have a smooth, even, tooled finish, flush with the edges of the sealing recess, and all adjacent surfaces shall be clean. Sealant shall not lap onto adjacent surfaces. Any sealant so applied as to prevent the painting of adjacent surfaces to a clean line, or with an excess of material outside the joint and feathered onto surfaces, shall be removed and the joint resealed.

End of Section



Section 09940

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers field applied protective coatings, including surface preparation, protection of surfaces, inspection, and other appurtenant work for equipment and surfaces designated to be coated with heavy-duty maintenance coatings. Regardless of the number of coats previously applied, at least two field coats in addition to any shop coats or field prime coats shall be applied to all surfaces unless otherwise specified.

1-2. GENERAL. Cleaning, surface preparation, coating application, and thickness shall be as specified herein and shall meet or exceed the coating manufacturer's recommendations. When the manufacturer's minimum recommendations exceed the specified requirements, Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's minimum recommendations. When equivalent products are acceptable to Engineer, Contractor shall comply with this Specification and the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Concrete crack repair is covered in Section 03710 and shall be coordinated with Hydrophillic HSW Tank Special Coating Systems as specified herein.

1-2.01. Governing Standards. All cleaning, surface preparation, coating application, thickness, testing, and coating materials (where available) shall be in accordance with the referenced standards of the following AWWA, ANSI, NACE, SSPC, NSF, and ASTM. 1-2.02. Delivery and Storage. All coating products shall be received and stored in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Contractor shall submit color cards for all coatings proposed for use, together with complete descriptive specifications, manufacturer's product data sheet and the completed Coating System Data Sheets, to Engineer for review and color selection. Each product data sheet shall include application temperature limits including recoat time requirements for the ambient conditions at the site, including temperatures up to 130°F. Requests for review submitted directly to Engineer by coating suppliers will not be considered. Contractor shall submit a Coating System Data Sheet for each separately identified surface in the Metal Surfaces Coating Schedule, Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Coating Schedule, and the Miscellaneous Surfaces Coating Schedule that will be used in the Project, using the appropriate Coating System Data Sheet forms (Figures 1-09940 and 2-09940) at the end of this section. Each field coating system shall be acceptable to the coating material manufacturer.



Coating System Data Sheets shall be assigned a unique number with a prefix letter based on the following:

Prefix Surfaces Fig. 09940

A Iron and steel (coated entirely in field) 1

A Iron and steel (shop primed) 2

C Concrete and concrete block 1

E Equipment – submerged 1

E Equipment – nonsubmerged 2

F Nonferrous metal 1

G Galvanized 1

H High temperature 1

P PVC and FRP 1

Each coating system that will be applied entirely in the field shall be assigned only a prefix letter and no suffix letter. Fig.1-09940 shall be submitted for each surface coated entirely in the field. Each shop-applied coating system that includes one or more field applied coats shall be assigned both a prefix letter and suffix letter “F”. Fig.2-09940 shall be submitted for each surface having a shop applied coating and one or more field applied finish coats. A separate Coating System Data Sheet shall be developed and submitted for each surface scheduled to be coated or variation or change in a coating system. The number identifying the surface and coating system shall be of the form A11 or A12-F. The subscript number shall be assigned by the Contractor so that each surface and coating system combination is uniquely identified. For example:

A11-F may be assigned to “Epoxy – one coat to metal curbs for skylights and power roof ventilators that have been shop primed.”

A21 may be assigned to “Epoxy – two coats to non-galvanized structural and miscellaneous steel exposed to view inside buildings.”

C21 may be assigned to “Epoxy – two coats to all concrete and concrete block in corrosive area (Except floors and surfaces scheduled to receive other coatings) which are exposed to view.”

C22 may be assigned to “Epoxy – two coats to walls, floors, and curbed areas, adjacent to corrosive chemical storage and feed equipment as indicated on the Drawings.”



The manufacturer’s standard colors will be acceptable for all coatings. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE.

1-4.01. Coating System Data Sheet Certifications. The coating applicator and coating manufacturer shall review and approve in writing the coating manufacturer's written recommendations for the coating system and the intended service. Any variations from the Specifications or the coating manufacturers published recommendations shall be submitted in writing and approved by the coating manufacturer.

1-4.03. Hydrophilic HSW Tank Special Coating Systems. The coating system for the interior walls, floors, sludge ring, concrete supports, and immersion service piping of the Hydrophilic HSW Tank shall be as indicated in the Metal Surfaces Coating Schedule and Concrete Surfaces Coating Schedule. Special attention shall be given to the removal of existing coatings as well as the removal and/or replacement of surfacings on this structure. All costs for this work and surface preparation, both to the degree recommended by the coating manufacturer, shall be included in the Bid Price. The existing structure was coated with Tnemec “Series 218 MortarClad” (epoxy modified cementitious mortar) followed by Tnemec “Series 406 Elasto-Shield” (aromatic polyurethane hybrid). Portions of both coatings are damaged. A large majority of both coatings were removed during the Co-Digestion Project Phase 1 work; however, some coating remains. Contractor shall perform concrete crack repair per Section 03710 as required prior to replacement of surfacings and application of coating system for the Hydrophilic HSW Tank. The Contractor shall coordinate crack repair products and finish of the Hydrophilic HSW Tank concrete crack repair work with the coating manufacturer to ensure compatibility with the special coating system. Coating manufacturer shall review and approve, in writing, the proposed crack repair products. Coating manufacturer shall review and inspect all concrete crack repairs prior to replacement of surfacings and applying coatings. Unless otherwise authorized by Engineer, all field coating shall be preformed after completion of required tank demolition, concrete crack repair, concrete coring, concrete pipe support, and interior piping and tank appurtenance work. Any damages to the coating system after initial application due to additional work performed in or out of the Hydrophilic HSW Tank shall be repaired. The intended service of Hydrophillic HSW storage tank shall be to store non-oily food processing waste, termed Hydrophilic High Strength Waste (HSW). The waste will be stored and mixed at ambient temperatures and varying liquid levels.



The anticipated temperature range of the waste to be stored within the tank is 40-180F with an average anticipated temperature of 90F. The anticipated pH range of the waste to be stored within the tank is 2.0 to 7.0 and the anticipated chloride range is up to 1,000 mg/L. While hydrogen sulfide concentrations are not anticipated to be significant within this tank, the coating manufacturer is requested to utilize a product suitable for application in raw sewage service. The coating manufacturer’s attention is also directed to the potential for groundwater presence on the opposite, buried side of the existing structure, as well as adhesion testing requirements specifically for this surface.

In addition to the requirements for all coating systems, the coating applicator and coating manufacturer shall develop and submit, in writing, the proposed detailed procedures for handling, storing, surface preparation, mixing, and application to verify compliance with this Specification and the coating manufacturer's written recommendations. The procedures shall include copies of the coating manufacturer's published recommendations and the proposed method for complying with these recommendations and these Specifications. Contractor, coating applicator, and coating manufacturer shall review and approve, in writing, the proposed detail procedures before they are submitted for review. Contractor and coating manufacturer shall inspect coating application of the appropriate application methods. 1-5. WARRANTY. The manufacturer shall warrant the Hydrophillic HSW Tank Special Coating Systems for a minimum life of 5 years after the Project Substantial Completion date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. 2-1.01. Alternative Manufacturers. In addition to the coatings listed herein, equivalent products of other manufacturers that distribute globally will also be acceptable.

2-1.02. Equivalent Coatings. Whenever a coating is specified by the name of a proprietary product or of a particular manufacturer or vendor, it shall be understood as establishing the desired type and quality of coating. Other manufacturers' coatings will be accepted, provided that sufficient information is submitted to enable Engineer to determine that the proposed coatings are equivalent to those named. Information on proposed coatings shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Requests for review of equivalency will be accepted only from Contractor, and will be considered only after the contract has been awarded.



2-2. MATERIALS. All coatings shall be delivered to the job in original, unopened containers, with labels intact. Coatings shall be stored indoors and shall be protected against freezing. No adulterant, unauthorized thinner, or other material not included in the coating formulation shall be added to the coating for any purpose. All coatings shall conform to the air quality regulations applicable at the location of use. Coating materials that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturer to conform, whether or not specified by product designation, shall not be used. With the exception of heat resistant coatings, the coatings specified have been selected on the basis of the manufacturer's statement that the VOC content of the product is 2.8 lbs per gallon or less; however, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to use only coating materials that are in compliance with the requirements of all regulatory agencies. Local regulations may require some coatings to have a lower VOC content than specified herein. The coatings specified may meet the VOC limits in the unthinned (as shipped) condition, but may exceed the limits if thinned according to the manufacturer's recommendations. In such case, the coatings shall not be thinned beyond the 2.8 lbs per gallon limit, and if the product cannot be thinned to suit the application method or temperature limits, another manufacturer's coating shall be used, subject to acceptance by Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the compatibility of field coatings with each other or with any previously applied coatings and concrete crack repair work. Coatings used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. The first field coat over shop coated or previously coated surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to underlying coats. 2-2.01 Primers.

Universal Primer (tie coat) PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline "Rustbond", ICI Devoe "Devran 224HS", Tnemec "Series 27 F.C. Typoxy", or Sherwin-Williams "Dura Plate 235".

Zinc Primer PPG Amercoat "Dimetate 9 Series", Carboline "Carbo Zinc II Series", ICI Devoe "Catha-Coat 304V", or Sherwin-Williams "Zinc Clad II Series".

2-2.02. Fillers and Surfacers.

Epoxy Concrete Block Filler PPG Amercoat "Amerlock 400BF



Epoxy Block Filler", Carboline "Sanitile 600", ICI Devoe "Truglaze 4015", Tnemec "Series 54-562", or Sherwin-Williams "Kem Cati-Coat HS".

Epoxy Concrete Filler and Surfacer

Tnemec "Series 218 MortarClad", PPG Amercoat "NuKlad 114A", Carboline "Carboguard 510", or Sherwin-Williams "Corobond 300".

2-2.03. Intermediate and Finish Coatings.

Epoxy (NSF certified systems)

Ferrous Metal Surfaces and Concrete Surfaces in Contact with Treated or Raw Water in Potable Water Facilities

PPG Amercoat "Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy Coating", Carboline "Carboguard 891", ICI Devoe "Bar-Rust 233H" Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus", or Sherwin-Williams "Dura Plate 235 NSF"; immersion service.

Epoxy

Concrete Floors PPG Amercoat "Amerlock 400", Carboline "Carboguard 890", ICI Devoe "Devran 224HS", Tnemec "Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II”, or Sherwin-Williams "Armorseal 1000HS"; nonskid.

Ferrous Metal Surfaces and Masonry or Concrete Surfaces Other Than Floors

PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline "Carboguard 890", ICI Devoe Devran "224HS", Tnemec "Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II", or Sherwin-Williams "Dura Plate 235".

Novolac Epoxy

Hydrophilic HSW Tank Concrete and Immersion service piping

Tnemec "Tank Armor Series 391", Carboline “Plasite 4550/4500S”, or Sherwin-Williams “Nova-Plate UHS”



Latex Emulsion Ameron “Amerguard 2200 Acrylic Enamel Satin”, Carboline “Carbocrylic 3350”, Sherwin-Williams “Metalatex Semi-Gloss Enamel Series B-42”, or Tnemec “Series 7 Tneme-Cryl SG”.

Aliphatic Polyurethane PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 450H", Carboline "Carbothane 134HG", ICI Devoe "Devthane 379H" Tnemec "Series 1074 Endura-Shield II", or Sherwin-Williams "Acrolon 218HS".

Coal Tar Epoxy High-build coal tar epoxy; PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline "Bitumastic 300 M", Tnemec "46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy".

Medium Consistency Coal Tar Carboline "Bitumastic 50" or Tnemec "46-465 H.B. Tnemecol".

Vinyl Ester Tnemec "Series 120 Vinester" Carboline "Plasite 4110" or Sherwin-Williams "Magnalux 304FF".

Heat-Resistant Suitable for temperatures up to 400F; PPG Amercoat "Amerlock 400", Carboline "Thermaline 450", Tnemec "43-36 Chrome Aluminum", or Sherwin-Williams "Silver-Brite Aluminum".

High Heat-Resistant Suitable for temperatures up to 1000°F; PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 878", Carboline "Thermaline 4700 VOC", or Sherwin-Williams "Silver-Brite Hi-Heat Silicone Aluminum".

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. SURFACE PREPARATION. All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry and shall meet the recommendations of the coating manufacturer for surface preparation. Freshly coated surfaces shall be protected from dust and other contaminants. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of solvents or



detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. The gloss on previously coated surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of topcoats. Surfaces shall be free of cracks, pits, projections, or other imperfections that would interfere with the formation of a smooth, unbroken coating film, except for concrete block construction where a rough surface is an inherent characteristic. When applying touchup coating or repairing previously coated surfaces, the surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned as recommended by the coating manufacturer, and the edges of the repaired area shall be feathered by sanding or wire brushing to produce a smooth transition that will not be noticeable after the coating is applied. All coatings made brittle or otherwise damaged by heat of welding shall be completely removed. For additional requirements related to surface preparation of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank see Article 1-4.02. 3-1.01. Galvanized Surfaces. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared for coating according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the epoxy. Any chemical treatment of galvanized surfaces shall be followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. 3-1.02. Ferrous Metal Surfaces. Ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared for coating by using one or more of the following cleaning procedures specified here-in: solvents (SSPC-SP1); abrasive blasting (SSPC-SP5, -SP10, -SP6, or -SP7) power tools (SSPC-SP3 or -SP11); or hand tools (SSPC-SP2). Oil and grease shall be completely removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 before beginning any other cleaning method. Surfaces of welds shall be scraped and ground as necessary to remove all slag and weld spatter. Tools which produce excessive roughness shall not be used. All components of equipment that can be properly prepared and coated after installation shall be installed prior to surface preparation. Components that will be inaccessible after installation shall have the surfaces prepared and coated before installation. Motors, drive trains, and bearings shall be protected during surface preparation in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. All cut or sheared edges shall be ground smooth to a 1/8 inch minimum radius for all material 1/4 inch thickness and larger. For material thickness less than 1/4 inch all cut or sheared edges shall be ground smooth to a radius equal to 1/2 the material thickness. Grinding of rolled edges on standard shapes with a minimum radius of the 1/16 inch will not be required. All ferrous metal surfaces shall have all welds ground smooth and free of all defects in accordance with NACE Standard SP0178, Appendix C, Designation C and sharp edges ground smooth, if not previously prepared in the shop. Instead of blending of the weld with the base metal as required by the NACE standard, it will be acceptable to furnish a welded joint that has a smooth transition of the



weld to the base metal. All welds shall be ground smooth to ensure satisfactory adhesion of paint. The cleaning methods and surface profiles specified herein are minimums, and if the requirements printed in the coating manufacturer's data sheets exceed the limits specified, the value printed on the data sheets shall become the minimum requirement. 3-1.02.01. Ferrous Metal Surfaces – Non-immersion Service. Ferrous metal surfaces, including fabricated equipment, in non-immersion service shall be cleaned to the degree recommended by the coating manufacturer for surfaces to be coated with coal tar epoxy, epoxy, and heat-resistant coatings, except galvanized surfaces. Surface preparation of ferrous metal surfaces in nonimmersion service shall consist of abrasive blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6, and the first application of coating shall be performed on the same day. If more surface area is prepared than can be coated in one day, the uncoated area shall be blast cleaned again to the satisfaction of Engineer. Surface profile shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than 2.0 mils. 3-1.02.02. Ferrous Metal Surfaces - Immersion Service. Surface preparation of ferrous metal surfaces in immersion service shall consist of abrasive blast cleaning to at least SSPC-SP10 and the first application of coating shall be performed on the same day. If more surface area is prepared than can be coated in one day, the uncoated area shall be blast cleaned again to the satisfaction of Engineer. Surface profile shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than 3.5 mils. 3-1.03. Concrete Surfaces. All concrete surfaces shall be free of objectionable substances and shall meet the coating manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation. Contractor shall provide all surface repair and preparation work as well as all priming necessary for the coating system. Concrete surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE 6. Any other surface preparation recommended by the coating material manufacturer shall be brought to Engineer's attention and may be incorporated into the work if acceptable to Engineer. For additional requirements related to crack repair and surface preparation of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank see Article 1-4.02. All concrete surfaces shall be dry when coated and free from dirt, dust, sand, mud, oil, grease, and other objectionable substances. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. New concrete shall have cured for at least 4 weeks before coating is applied as recommended by the material manufacturer. Concrete surfaces shall be tested for capillary moisture in accordance with ASTM D4263. There shall be no capillary moisture when coatings are applied on concrete.



All surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258 and abraded in accordance with ASTM D4259. Surface profile shall be at least 25 percent of the dry film thickness specified for the coating system. Prior to application of the coating, the surfaces shall be thoroughly washed or cleaned by air blasting to remove all dust and residue. Spalled areas, voids, and cracks shall be repaired in accordance with the Concrete section and as acceptable to the Engineer. Fins and other surface projections shall be removed to provide a flush surface before application of coating. The concrete surfaces, including those with bug holes less than 1 inch in any dimension, shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer, using an epoxy concrete filler and surfacer. Where coating with a vinyl ester the concrete filler and surfacer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer to be compatible with vinyl ester. 3-1.04. Concrete Block Surfaces. Voids and openings in concrete block surfaces shall be pointed. All exposed exterior surfaces and surfaces to be coated with epoxy, including the joints, shall be filled so that a continuous unbroken coating film is obtained. 3-1.05. Copper Tubing. All flux residue shall be removed from joints in copper tubing. Immediately before coating is started, tubing shall be wiped with a clean rag soaked in xylol. 3-1.06. Plastic Surfaces. All wax and oil shall be removed from plastic surfaces that are to be coated, including PVC and FRP, by wiping with a solvent compatible with the specified coating. 3-1.07. Hardware. Hardware items such as bolts, screws, washers, springs, and grease fittings need not be cleaned prior to coating if there is no evidence of dirt, corrosion, or foreign material. 3-1.08. Stainless Steel. When a coating system is required, surface preparation shall conform to the coating manufacturer’s recommendations. 3-2. MIXING AND THINNING. Coating shall be thoroughly mixed each time any is withdrawn from the container. Coating containers shall be kept tightly closed except while coating is being withdrawn. Coating shall be factory mixed to proper consistency and viscosity for hot weather application without thinning. Thinning will be permitted only as necessary to obtain recommended coverage at lower application temperatures. In no case shall the wet film thickness of applied coating be reduced, by addition of coating thinner or otherwise, below the thickness recommended by the coating



manufacturer. Thinning shall be done in compliance with all applicable air quality regulations. 3-3. APPLICATION. Coating shall be applied in a neat manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper thickness, with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps, and brush marks. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry and hard before the next coat is applied. Each coat shall be a different color, if available. In no case shall coating be applied at a rate of coverage greater than the maximum rate recommended by the coating manufacturer. Coating failures will not be accepted and shall be entirely removed down to the substrate and the surface recoated. Failures include but are not limited to sags, checking, cracking, teardrops, fat edges, fisheyes, or delamination. 3-3.01. Priming. Edges, corners, crevices, welds, and bolts shall be given a brush coat (stripe coat) of primer before application of the primer coat. The stripe coat shall be applied by a brush and worked in both directions. Special attention shall be given to filling all crevices with coating. When using zinc primers the stripe coat shall follow the initial prime coat. Abraded and otherwise damaged portions of shop-applied coating shall be cleaned and recoated as recommended by the manufacturer of the finish coating. Welded seams and other uncoated surfaces, heads and nuts of field-installed bolts, and surfaces where coating has been damaged by heat shall be given a brush coat of the specified primer. Before the specified spot or touchup coating of metal surfaces, edges, corners, crevices, welds, and bolts in the area of the spot or touchup coating shall be given a brush coat of primer. This patch, spot, or touchup coating shall be completed, and the paint film shall be dry and hard, before additional coating is applied. 3-3.02. Epoxy. When used, epoxy shall be applied in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations, including temperature limitations and protection from sunlight until top-coated. When concrete is to be coated, coatings shall not be applied to concrete surfaces in direct sunlight or when the temperature of the concrete is rising. Preferably the coating shall be applied when the temperature of the concrete is dropping. When applying high build epoxy coatings with a roller or brush and where a dry film thickness of at least 4-6 mils per coat is required, two or more coats shall be applied to achieve the recommended dry film thickness equal to a spray applied coating. 3-3.03. Coal Tar Epoxy. When used, the application of coal tar epoxy, including time limits for recoating, shall conform to the recommendations of the coating manufacturer.



When concrete is to be coated, coatings shall not be applied to concrete surfaces in direct sunlight or when the temperature of the concrete is rising. Preferably the coating shall be applied when the temperature of the concrete is dropping. 3-3.04. Vinyl Ester. When used, the application of vinyl ester coating system, including time limits for recoating and temperature requirements of the materials, shall conform to the recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3-3.05. Latex Coating. When used, latex coatings shall be applied by brusing or rolling; spraying will not be permitted. Latex coating shall not be thinned excessively. The application of the latex coating system, including time limits for recoating and temperature requirements of the materials, shall conform to the recommendations of the coating manufacturer.

3-3.06. Film Thickness. The total coating film thickness including intermediate coats and finish coat, shall be not less than the following:

Type of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness Medium consistency coal tar 20 mils. Coal tar epoxy (two coats) 20 mils. Epoxy

Floors (two coats) 10 mils. Surfaces with first coat of epoxy and final coat of aliphatic polyurethane

7 mils (5 mils DFT for epoxy plus 2 mils DFT for aliphatic polyurethane).

Surfaces with first and second coat of epoxy and final coat of aliphatic polyurethane

12 mils (10 mils DFT for epoxy plus 2 mils DFT for aliphatic polyurethane).

Other surfaces (two coats) 10 mils. Immersion service (three coats) 15 mils.

Latex (one coat) 3 mils. Novolac Epoxy

Hydrophilic HSW Tank Concrete (one or two coats) Hydrophilic HSW Tank Immersion service (two coats)

40 mils. 40 mils.

Vinyl ester 30 mils. Zinc, epoxy, polyurethane

Surfaces with first coat of zinc, intermediate coat of epoxy, and final coat of aliphatic polyurethane

10 mils, 3 mils zinc, 5 mils epoxy, plus 2 mils for aliphatic polyurethane.

Heat-resistant (silicone) 3 mils. High heat-resistant (silicone) 3 mils. Other (one coat) 5 mils.



Type of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness Other (two coats) 10 mils.

3-3.07. Weather Conditions. Coatings shall not be applied, except under shelter, during wet, damp, or foggy weather, or when windblown dust, dirt, debris, or insects will collect on freshly applied coating. Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures lower than the minimum temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer, or to metal surfaces such as tanks or pipe containing cold water, regardless of the air temperature, when metal conditions are likely to cause condensation. When necessary for proper application, a temporary enclosure shall be erected and kept heated until the coating has fully cured.

Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures higher than the maximum temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer. Where coatings are applied during periods of elevated ambient temperatures, Contractor and the coatings manufacturer shall be jointly responsible to ensure that proper application is performed including adherence to all re-coat window requirements. Precautions shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the surface application, especially for metal, at elevated temperatures above 100°F including shading application area from direct sunlight, applying coating in the evening or at night, and ventilating the area to reduce the humidity and temperature, Vinyl ester coating materials, when required, shall be maintained during transportation, storage, mixing, and application at the temperature required by the coating manufacturer, 35°F to 90°F.

3-4. REPAIRING FACTORY FINISHED SURFACES. Factory finished surfaces damaged prior to acceptance by Owner shall be spot primed and recoated with materials equivalent to the original coatings. If, in the opinion of Engineer, spot repair of the damaged area is not satisfactory, the entire surface or item shall be recoated. 3-5. PROTECTION OF SURFACES. Throughout the work Contractor shall use drop cloths, masking tape, and other suitable measures to protect adjacent surfaces. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting and repairing any damage resulting from its or its subcontractors' operations. Coatings spilled or spattered on adjacent surfaces which are not being coated at the time shall be immediately removed. Exposed concrete or masonry not specified to be coated which is damaged by coatings shall be either removed and rebuilt or, where authorized by Owner, coated with two coats of masonry coating. 3-6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. The following inspection and testing shall be performed: surface profile, visual inspection, adhesion testing (for the Hydrophilic



HSW Structure only), and wet and dry film thickness testing. All inspection and testing shall be witnessed by Engineer.

3-6.01. Surface Profile Testing. The surface profile for ferrous metal surfaces shall be measured for compliance with the specified minimum profile. The surface profile for concrete shall comply with SSPC 13/NACE 6 Table 1 for severe service. 3-6.02. Visual Inspection. The surface of the protective coatings shall be visually inspected.

3.6.03. Film Thickness. Coating film thickness shall be verified by measuring the film thickness of each coat as it is applied and the dry film thickness of the entire system. Wet film thickness shall be measured with a gauge that will measure the wet film thickness within an accuracy of ±0.5 mil. Dry film thickness shall be measured in accordance with SSPC-PA 2.

3-6.04. Adhesion Testing. An adhesion test shall be conducted on a properly prepared and coated concrete surface that is acceptable to the coating material manufacturer and Engineer. The test area shall be at least 2 square feet or larger to allow a minimum of three tests to be conducted. The test area shall be coated with the specified system and cured as recommended by the coating material manufacturer. Pull-off strength adhesion tests of the coating shall be conducted by the coating material manufacturer in accordance with ASTM D4541 for metal surfaces and ASTM D7234 for concrete surfaces. Elcometer or other tensile adhesion tester acceptable to the Engineer shall be used. At least three adhesion tests shall be conducted and the results averaged. Adhesion strength shall equal or exceed the minimum adhesion strength recommended by the coating material manufacturer and shall exceed the tensile strength of the concrete. If the coating fails the adhesion test, the cause of the failure shall be determined and corrected before reconducting the test. 3-7. FIELD PRIMING SCHEDULE. In general, steel and cast iron surfaces of equipment are specified to be shop primed. Any such surfaces which have not been shop primed shall be field primed. Damaged or failed shop coatings which have been determined unsuitable by Engineer shall be removed and the surfaces shall be field coated, including prime coat (if any). Galvanized, aluminum, stainless steel, and insulated surfaces shall be field primed. Primers used for field priming, unless otherwise required for repair of shop primers, shall be:

Surface To Be Primed Material Equipment, surfaces to be coated with

Aliphatic polyurethane Universal primer. Epoxy Same as finish coats.



Surface To Be Primed Material Coal tar coating Same as finish coats. Vinyl ester Same as finish coats.

Steel and cast iron, surfaces to be coated with

Epoxy Same as finish coats or inorganic zinc.

Coal tar coating Same as finish coats. Aluminum Epoxy. Galvanized Epoxy. Copper Epoxy. Stainless steel Epoxy. Plastic surfaces, including PVC and FRP

Same as finish coats.

Insulated piping and equipment As recommended by manufacturer of finish coats.

Hydrophilic HSW Tank Concrete, surfaces to be coated with novolac epoxy Hydrophilic HSW Tank Immersion service, surfaces to be coated with novolac epoxy Concrete, surfaces to be coated with epoxy

As recommended by manufacturer of finish coats. As recommended by manufacturer of finish coats.

For damp-proofing Epoxy. For all other surfaces Epoxy concrete filler and

surfacer. Concrete block exposed in exterior locations

Epoxy concrete block filler.

Concrete block to be coated with epoxy

Epoxy concrete block filler.

Unless otherwise recommended by the coating manufacturer or specified herein, priming will not be required on concrete, or concrete block, nor on metal surfaces specified to be coated with coal tar epoxy, and heat-resistant coatings. Concrete surfaces to be coated with epoxy shall be filled with epoxy concrete filler and surfacer so that a continuous film is obtained, except where concrete is damp-proofed with epoxy. 3-8. FINISH COATING SYSTEMS. The following schedule lists coatings systems and coating surface designations. See Article1-3 for a definition of the surface designations.



No. Finish Coating Systems Coating Surface Designation

A C E F G H P

1. Epoxy – One coat x x x

2. Epoxy – Two coats x x x x x x

3. Epoxy / NSF – Two coats x x

4. Epoxy – Three coats x x x

5. Epoxy / NSF – Three coats x x x

6. Epoxy – First coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat

x x x x x x

7. Epoxy – First and second coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat

x x x x x

8. Universal primer – First coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat

x x

9. Medium consistency coal tar – Two coats

x x x

10. Coal tar epoxy – Two coats x x x

11. Vinyl ester – Two coats x x x

12. Heat resistant – Two coats x

13. High heat resistant – Two coats x

14. Zinc primer – First coat Epoxy – Intermediate coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Final coat

x x

15. Latex x x x

16. Novolac epoxy x x

3-8.01. Surfaces Not To Be Coated. Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be left uncoated:

Exposed aluminum, except ductwork. Polished or finished stainless steel. Unfinished stainless steel, except flashings and counter flashings, shall be coated. Nickel or chromium. Galvanized surfaces, except piping, conduit, ductwork, and other items specifically noted. Rubber and plastics, except as specified. Exterior concrete.



Surfaces specified to be factory finished. 3-8.02. Shop Finishing. Items to be shop finished include the following. Shop finishing shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.

a. Other surfaces where blast cleaning cannot be or is not recommended to be performed in the field.

b. Other items as otherwise specified. 3-8.03. Field Coating. Items to be field coated include the following. Field coating shall be in accordance with the field priming schedule, the coating schedule, and the manufacturer's recommendations.

a. Interior wall, floors, supports, and immersion service piping within the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank.

b. Surfaces not indicated to be shop finished and surfaces where blast cleaning can be performed in the field.

c. All interior ferrous metal surfaces. d. Other items as otherwise specified.

3-9. METAL SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Surface To Be Coated Finish Coating System

Non-galvanized structural and miscellaneous steel exposed to view or to the elements in exterior locations, including all non-galvanized steel components of the pre-engineered metal building

A7 or A14

Non-galvanized structural and miscellaneous steel exposed to view inside buildings.

A2

Unless otherwise specified, pumps, motors, speed reducers, and other machines and equipment exposed to view.

E8

Actuator surfaces for valves, unless factory finished.

Outdoor – E8 ,

Indoor – E8

Basin covers, all iron and steel parts that will be exposed to view.

E7

Heating and air conditioning units, convector covers, electrical equipment cabinets, and similar Items and equipment (unless factory finished) exposed to view.

E8




Cast Iron and steel piping inside structures, buildings, and not scheduled to be insulated, including valves, fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and accessories, and galvanized surfaces after proper priming.

A2

Cast Iron and steel piping inside structures, buildings, and scheduled to be insulated, including piping valves, fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and accessories, and galvanized surfaces after proper priming.

A1

Piping in immersion service inside the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank, including valves, fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and accessories, and galvanized surfaces after proper priming.

A16

All metal surfaces, unless otherwise specified, which will be submerged or buried, all or in part, including valves, and scum baffles, and cast iron slide gates, but excluding piping laid in the ground.

E4

Cast iron and steel piping in manholes, wetwells, grit basin, aeration basin, and similar locations, including valves fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and accessories.

A4

Basin covers, all iron and steel parts that will be fully or partially submerged, exposed to sludge gas, or concealed inside.

A4

Aluminum in contact with concrete. F1

Aluminum and galvanized ductwork and conduit indoors.

F1 or G1

Aluminum and galvanized ductwork and conduit exposed to elements outdoors.

F6 or G6

3-10. CONCRETE SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.


All walls, floors, supports and interior concrete within the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank up to elevation 704.50.

C16



3-11. MISCELLANEOUS SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Plastic Surfaces, including PVC and FRP.

Outdoor – P6 Indoor – P2

Piping and Equipment Insulation Outdoor – P15 Indoor – P15

3-12. PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE. Exposed piping and piping in accessible chases shall be identified with lettering or tags designating the service of each piping system, marked with flow directional arrows, and color coded. Piping scheduled to be color coded shall be completely coated with the indicated colors, except surfaces specified to remain uncoated shall include sufficiently long segments of the specified color to accommodate the lettering and arrows. All other piping shall be coated to match adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. 3-12.01. Location. Lettering and flow direction arrows shall be provided on pipe near the equipment served, adjacent to valves, on both sides of wall and floor penetrations, at each branch or tee, and at least every 50 feet in straight runs of pipe. If, in the opinion of Engineer, this requirement will result in an excessive number of labels or arrows, the number required shall be reduced as directed. 3-12.02. Metal Tags. Where the outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, aluminum or stainless steel tags shall be provided instead of lettering. Tags shall be stamped as specified and shall be fastened to the pipe with suitable chains. Pipe identified with tags shall be color coded as specified. 3-12.03. Lettering. Lettering shall be provided on plastic pipe labels. Plastic labels shall be “Marking Services Inc’s model MS-970 Coiled Plastic Pipe Markers”, or equal. Letter size shall be as follows:

Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters

5/8 inch and smaller Metal tags -1/4 inch

3/4 to 4 inches 3/4 inch

5 inches and larger 2 inches

3-12.04. Color Coding. All piping for the following services shall be color coded. Bands shall be 6 inches wide spaced along the pipe at 5 foot intervals. For services not listed, the color coding shall be as directed by the Engineer.



Piping Identification

Service Color of Pipe Color of Letters

Drain Gray ANSI 70 White

Plumbing Vents Gray ANSI 70 White

Hydrophilic High Strength Waste (HSW)

Gray ANSI 70, except for immersion service piping in the HSWi Storage Tank that will be field coated as specified herein

White

Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (TWAS)

Gray ANSI 70 White

Thickened Sludge Gray ANSI 70 White

Electrical conduit shall be coated to match adjacent ceiling or wall surfaces as directed by Engineer. Vent lines shall be coated to match surfaces they adjoin. In addition, special coating of the following items will be required:

Item Color Valve handwheels and levers Red Hoist hooks and blocks Yellow and black stripes

Numerals at least 2 inches high shall be painted on or adjacent to all accessible valves, pumps, flowmeters, and other items of equipment which are identified on the Drawings or in the Specifications by number.

End of Section


Rock River Water Reclamation District 09940-F01 3/11/15 Co-Digestion Project – Receiving Station -1- 176424 Phase 2

SURFACE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM NO. -

SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION

Solvent SSPC-SP1Ferrous Metal Nonimmersion SSPC-SP6

Ferrous Metal Immersion SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP-5

Other

COATING DFT

mils [µm] MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

First Coat (Primer)

Second Coat

Third Coat

Total System

Not less than minimum thickness specified.

Notes: (Attached if needed.)

Project:

Coatings Manufacturer: Initials ______

Painting Applicator: Initials ______

BLACK & VEATCH COATING SYSTEM DATA SHEET

Fig 1-09940



SHOP PRIMED SURFACE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM NO. - -F

SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION

Solvent SSPC-SP1Other:

COATING DFT

mils [µm] MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

Shop (Primer)

(Identify Product/Type)

Touchup

Intermediate Coat

Finish Coat

Total System

Not less than minimum thickness specified.

Notes: (Attached if needed.)

Project:

Coatings Manufacturer: Initials ______

Painting Applicator: Initials ______

BLACK & VEATCH COATING SYSTEM DATA SHEET

Fig 2-09940



Section 10990 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the miscellaneous items of work not covered in other sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Miscellaneous specialties shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and in accordance with the details, arrangements, and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Where not specifically indicated or specified, fasteners, gaskets, and other accessories shall be provided as required and as recommended by the manufacturer of the specific item. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete specifications, detailed drawings, and setting or erection drawings covering miscellaneous specialties shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. IDENTIFICATION PLATES. Identification plates shall be furnished and installed for all mechanical and electrical equipment, flowmeters, electrical controls, instrumentation, and exterior doors. Identification plates shall also be furnished for all new valves with identification numbers. All equipment and valves shall be identified using designations shown on the drawings. Items of electrical equipment such as controls, panels, and instrumentation shall be identified as required in the sections where they are specified and as shown on accepted shop drawings. Unless otherwise specified, identification plates for items of equipment in wet or damp locations shall be stainless steel. Unless otherwise specified, identification plates for electrical and instrumentation equipment and controls and for items of equipment in dry locations shall be phenolic plastic. Identification plates for valves shall be as specified in the applicable sections. Identification for buried valves shall be stamped on wet concrete as shown on the drawing details. If identification plates are not specified in the valve section, they shall conform to the stainless steel plate requirements herein.



2-1.01. Stainless Steel Identification Plates. Stainless steel identification plates shall be of 1/8 inch thick, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and shall be permanently fastened using 3/8 inch long round head stainless steel, Type U, No. 8 screws, stainless steel pop rivets, or two-part epoxy adhesive. The use of double-stick tape is not acceptable. Names and/or designations shall be engraved on the plates and the engraving painted with a primer and black paint system compatible with stainless steel. 2-1.02. Dimensions and Installation. Except as otherwise specified, lettering shall be of the height indicated in the following schedule and plates shall be twice the letter height by the length required, with suitable margins.

Item Letter Height inch

Potable water and plant non-potable water hose bibs, faucets, and other outlets

3/4

Valves, flowmeters, and minor items of equipment

1/2

All other equipment except electrical and instrumentation equipment

3/4

Except as otherwise specified, lettering shall be placed in one row where practicable; however, where required due to excessive length, lettering shall be placed on more than one row and centered. Abbreviations will be allowed where acceptable to the Engineer and the Owner. Lettering on stainless steel plates and phenolic plastic plates shall be in block style capital letters. The location of identification plates on doors and equipment shall be acceptable to Engineer and the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. All products listed herein shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.

End of Section



Section 11060

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers general installation requirements of new equipment units that have been purchased by Contractor as part of this Work. Equipment specific installation requirements are covered in the equipment sections. Equipment furnished by Contractor includes the following:

End Suction Chopper Pumps FRP Flat Tank Cover (base bid) FRP Dome Tank Cover (bid alternate) Pump Mixing Systems

Equipment furnished by Owner for Contractor installation includes the following:

Grinder 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Any existing equipment which is removed and salvaged for reinstallation shall be handled as indicated in the Demolition and Salvage section. Including, but not limited to, the following:

Hydrophilic HSW valves, as noted on the Drawings Hydrophilic HSW Tank Drawdown and Hydrophilic HSW to Digesters

Instruments and flow meter, as noted on the Drawings 1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services are provided by the equipment manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment manufacturer. Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services furnished by others. Flanged connections to equipment including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the appropriate pipe specification section.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Materials shall be as follows:

Grout As specified in the Grouting section.

Anti-Seize thread lubricant for SS bolts

As specified in the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper results as specified in the Startup Requirements section. Each equipment unit shall be leveled, aligned, and shimmed into position. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as required herein. Shimming between machined surfaces will not be permitted. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. When specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer will provide installation supervision and installation checks. For installation supervision, the manufacturer’s field representative will observe, instruct, guide, and direct Contractor's erection or installation procedures as specified in the equipment specifications. For installation checks, the manufacturer’s field representative will inspect the equipment installation immediately following installation by Contractor, and observe the tests indicated in the Startup Requirements section. The manufacturer's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation satisfactory to Owner. All equipment shall be protected after installation, prior to final acceptance by Owner. Protection provisions shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, and shall include provisions to prevent rust, mechanical damage, and foreign objects entering the equipment. 3-2. STARTUP AND TESTING. Startup requirements, and tests associated with startup shall be as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. Other field tests shall be as indicated in the specific equipment sections. Startup and tests required shall occur in the order listed in the following paragraphs. Tests shall not begin until any installation supervision and installation checks by the equipment manufacturer have been completed, except where noted below.



3-2.01. Preliminary Field Tests. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted on all equipment by Contractor as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. When an installation check is specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer's representative will participate in these tests to the extent described in the Startup Requirements section and in the equipment sections. 3-2.02. Field System Operation Tests. Field system operation tests shall be conducted on all equipment by Contractor as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. When an installation check is specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer's service personnel will participate in these tests to the extent described in the Startup Requirements section and in the equipment sections.

3-2.03. Field Demonstration Tests. Field demonstration tests will be conducted by the equipment manufacturer on equipment as indicated and as specified in the equipment sections. 3-2.04. Field Performance Tests & Distribution Tests. Field performance tests or distribution tests will be conducted by the equipment manufacturer on equipment as indicated and as specified in the equipment sections. 3-2.05. Field Baseline Performance Tests. Field baseline performance tests shall be conducted by Contractor on the equipment indicated in the equipment sections, and the tests shall be performed as indicated. When indicated in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer will participate in these tests. This test shall not be considered an acceptance test, but rather a test to determine initial performance curves and efficiency just prior to the equipment entering service.

End of Section



Section 11117

END SUCTION CHOPPER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of one adjustable speed, horizontal, end suction centrifugal chopper pumping unit. The pumping unit (designated PCL-313) shall be installed in Gallery No. 1. The pumping unit shall be complete with pump, electric motor, flexible coupling, and baseplate. The pump and drive unit shall be mounted on a common baseplate and shall be provided with anchor bolts and all other appurtenances specified or otherwise required for proper operation. 1.2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the ENGINEER. Hydraulic considerations and definition of terms shall be as set forth in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. 1-2.02 Coordination. The pump specified herein and the mixing system in Section 11331 shall be coordinated and furnished by a single supplier. The mixing pump supplier shall be responsible for coordination of the mixing pump requirements with the mixing system and for supply of the mixing system as part of a coordinated system design. 1-2.03. Tagging. Each item of equipment and each part shipped separately shall be tagged and identified with indelible markings for the intended service. Tag number shall be clearly marked on all shipping labels and on the outside of all containers. 1-2.04 Identification. Equipment furnished under this section shall be identified in accordance with the Equipment and Valve Identification section. 1-2.05. Power Supply. Power supply to equipment shall be 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.



1-2.06. Electrical Equipment. All electrical equipment and devices shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code for operation in Class I, Division 2, Group D environment. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used, drive unit, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: Pumps

Name of Manufacturer Type and model. Tag Number Rotative speed. Size of suction flange Size of discharge flange Maximum bhp requirement Net weight of pump and motor. Complete performance curves showing capacity versus head, NPSH

required, efficiency, and pump input power. Net weight of pump and baseplate Base and anchor bolt details Data on shop painting

Bearing life calculations

Motors Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Type of bearings and method of lubrication. Rated size of motor, hp, and service factor. Insulation class and temperature rise. Full load rotative speed.

Net weight Efficiency at full load and rated pump condition. Full load current. Locked rotor current.

Adjustable Frequency Drives, As specified in the Adjustable Frequency Drives section.



1-3.02. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Operation and maintenance manual shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The operation and maintenance manual shall be in addition to any instruction or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. Operation and maintenance manual shall include the following:

a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

b. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

c. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions.

d. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

e. Guide to troubleshooting.

f. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

g. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring diagrams.

h. Test data and performance curves, where applicable. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Balance. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the unfiltered vibration velocity, as measured at any point on the machine including the motor, shall not exceed the maximum vibration limits of the governing standard unless otherwise required. At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or its components shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements. Handling and Storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements Section.



1-6. SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES. The spare parts and accessories as required shall be furnished in substantial wooden boxes with identifying labels and delivered to the project site. The following spare parts shall be furnished for pumping unit PCL-313:

One impeller Two cutter bars One cutter nut One mechanical seal One complete set of pump bearings One complete set of gaskets and o-rings

Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in accordance with the General Equipment Stipulations, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Pumping unit PCL-313 will be installed in Gallery No. 1 to pump Hydrophilic HSW from the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank through external nozzles that will discharge back into the Hydrophilic HSW Tank. The pumps and nozzles will be part of each tank’s mixing recirculation system. The pumping unit shall be suitable for the following service conditions:

Service Condition Pump Unit PCL-313 Seismic design requirements. See Meteorological and

Seismic Design Criteria section Type of environmental exposure. Indoor Liquid temperature range. 40 to 180°F; average 90°F Maximum solids concentration, by weight.

<5 to 6%

pH range 2.0 – 7.0 Ambient air temperature range 50 – 75°F

Pumps start and stop against a closed valve.

No

Site elevation. See Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Pumping unit shall be designed for the following operating conditions and requirements at rated speed unless otherwise noted:



Unit designation Pump Unit PCL-313

Type Horizontal, end suction chopper

Number of Units 1

Rated total head, ft * 30 – 40

Capacity at rated head, gpm * 2000

Min. shutoff head, ft * 54

Full speed operating head range, ft 20 – 52

Max (nominal) pump operating speed at rate head, rpm

900

Max power required at input shaft of pump for any point in the operating head range, bhp

30

Min NPSH available at center line of pump shaft at rated head, feet absolute

Flooded

Minimum NPSHa to NPSHr ratio 1.1

Pump rotation as viewed from the driven end

As indicated on the drawings

Min pump nozzle size, in.

Suction 10

Discharge 8

Maximum suction pressure, ft 17

Min hydrostatic test pressure, ft 1.5 times shutoff head plus maximum suction pressure

*Final Design to be determined by the Pump and Mixing System Supplier Pumping unit shall be suitable for flushing water pressures of 80psi. The waste shall macerated and conditioned by the pumps as an integral part of the pumping action. The pump must have demonstrated the ability to grind and pump high concentrations of solids such as plastics, heavy rags, grease and hairballs, wood, paper products and stringy materials without plugging, both in tests and in field applications. 2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The pumps furnished under this section shall be products of Vaughan Co., Inc., without exception.



2-4. PUMP MATERIALS. Casing Ductile cast iron, ASTM A536. All

water passages to be smooth, and free from imperfections that inhibit good flow characteristics.

Impeller ASTM A148 Gr. 90-60 cast alloy

steel heat treated to Rockwell C60 Hardness and dynamically balanced.

Cutter Bar Plate ASTM A148 Grade 90-60 cast alloy

steel, heat treated to minimum Rockwell C60.

Cutter Nut and Upper Cutter Cast steel heat traced to a

minimum Rockwell C60 Pump Shafting AISI 4140 stressproof steel. Pump Shaft Ball Bearings Oil bath lubricated inboard bearing

and grease lubricated on the outboard bearings

Mechanical Seal Vaughan “E-Series” flushless

cartridge-type mechanical seal with tungsten carbide faces, without exception.

Baseplate Fabricated steel Anchor Bolts Galvanized, as specified in the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry Section 2-4.01. Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts shall be accurately located and centered in pipe sleeves as detailed on the Drawings. 2-5. PUMP CONSTRUCTION. 2-5.01. Casing. The pump casing shall be of semi-concentric design, with flanged connections. The suction nozzle shall have a flanged cleanout handhole with interior surfaces flush with casing water passage. Casing parts shall have



registered fits to maintain alignment. The nozzle flanges shall be flat face with ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 diameter and drilling. Pipe tapped openings shall be provided for draining, priming, and venting the casing. The pump discharge and suction flanges shall be tapped and plugged for a 1/4 inch pressure gauge connection. 2-5.02. Impeller. The impeller shall be semi-open type with pump-out vanes to reduce seal area pressure, and to draw lubricant down from the reservoir, should leakage occur. Grinding/maceration of materials shall be accomplished by the action of the cupped and sharpened leading edges of the impeller blades moving across the cutter bar at the intake openings, with a set clearance between the impeller and cutter bar of 0.010 inch and 0.015 inch. The impeller shall be rigidly held in place with an impeller bolt and have no axial adjustments and no set screws. 2-5.03. Cutter Bar. The cutter bar shall be recessed into the pump bowl, with a funnel shaped inlet opening, and shall extend diametrically across entire pump suction opening. 2-5.04. Pump Shaft Ball Bearings. The bearings shall have a minimum ABMA L10 life rating of 100,000 hours. Shaft thrust shall be taken up by two back-to-back mounted single row angular contact ball bearings. Two single row radial bearings shall also be provided. 2-5.05. Mechanical Seal. The mechanical seal system for the pumping unit shall be designed to require no seal flush. The mechanical seal shall be located immediately behind the impeller hub to eliminate the stuffing box and maximize the flushing available from the impeller pumpout vanes. The seal shall be a cartridge-type mechanical seal with Viton O-rings and tungsten carbide faces. This cartridge seal shall be a pre-assembled, and pre-tested so that no seal settings or adjustments are required from the installer. Any springs used to push the seal faces together must be shielded from the fluid to be pumped. The cartridge for shall include a 17-4PH, heat-treated seal sleeve and a ductile iron seal gland. 2-5.06. Shaft Coupling. The coupling shall be resilient type.The shaft coupling shall be T.B. Woods “Sureflex” elastomeric type or equal, with a minimum service factor of 1.5, based on the drive rated horsepower, and shall be protected with a guard meeting OSHA requirements. Coupling design shall permit removal of the pump rotating element without disconnecting the piping, moving the drive unit, or axial movement of the coupling halves on the shaft. 2-5.07. Pump Baseplate. The pump baseplate shall be fabricated carbon steel of 1/2 inch minimum thickness, and shall include lifting lugs.



2-5.08. Stainless Steel Nameplates. Stainless steel nameplates bearing pertinent manufacturer's information shall be attached to each pump and drive motor. 2-5.09. Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts and nuts shall be furnished as required for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. The bolts shall be at least 3/4 inch in diameter. Anchor bolts shall be accurately located and centered in pipe sleeves having an inside diameter approximately 2-1/2 times the bolt diameter and a length approximately 8 times the bolt diameter. A square anchor plate with thickness of approximately 1/2 the bolt diameter and side dimensions 4 times the bolt diameter shall be welded to the bottom of each sleeve, with the anchor bolt extended through the plate and welded thereto. Anchor bolts and an anchor bolt template shall be delivered to the jobsite within 90 days of award of contract.

Anchor Bolts and Nuts Carbon steel, ASTM A307 or ASTM 36.

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1; of the same material as the bolts and nuts.

Anchor bolts shall be long enough to accommodate at least 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. Anti-seize compound will be applied to the threads of all stainless steel bolts before assembly. 2-5.10. Lubrication. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. Lubricants shall be provided in sufficient quantities to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, synthetic lubricants will not be acceptable. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the normal



operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position. 2-5.11. Shop Painting. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with an oil-resistant enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system. All other surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of universal primer. 2-6. ACCESSORIES. Pump shall be provided with lifting eyebolts or lugs; tapped and plugged openings for casing assembly and bearing housing vents and drains; and appropriate fittings for adding bearing lubricant. Grease lubricated pumping units shall be provided with a means of venting the casing. Oil lubricated units shall be provided with constant level oilers or with sight glasses arranged to indicate operating and static oil levels. Pump manufacturer shall provide air release valves for the system if necessary to prevent equipment from air binding in this installation. Air release valves shall be suitable for use on sludge pumping system. 2-7. DRIVE UNITS. Pump shall be driven by a premium efficiency electric motor through a flexible coupling. Motors shall comply with the General Equipment Stipulations except as specified herein. Motors shall be horizontal, squirrel-cage induction type, rated 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hour continuous service. Gearmotors shall not be used. Motor shall be provided with a totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) enclosure with lifting lugs. 2-7.01. Electric Motors. The premium efficiency electric motor shall be designed as specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section. 2-7.02. Safety Guards. All moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage thick or thicker galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or from 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation



and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. 2-7.03. Adjustable Frequency Drives. Adjustable frequency drives (AFDs) shall be provided for the pump and shall be coordinated with the requirements of the pumping unit. The pump manufacturer shall be responsible for furnishing the adjustable frequency drive, for matching the motor and the drive, and for coordinating the collection of data and the design to limit harmonics to the levels specified. Adjustable frequency drives shall be designed as specified in the Adjustable Frequency Drives section. 2-8 SHOP TESTS. The pump shall be tested at the factory for capacity, power requirements, and efficiency at specified rated head, evaluated head, shutoff head, operating head extremes, and at as many other points as necessary for accurate performance curve plotting. All tests and test reports shall be made in conformity with the requirements and recommendations of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Acceptance testing shall be ANSI/HI Table 14.6.3.4, Grade 1U, with no minus tolerance or margin allowed. A certified performance curve including head, pump input power and pump efficiency shall be prepared by the pump manufacturer. Variable speed pump curves shall include performance curves for full speed and 3 other speeds including minimum recommended operating speed for intended system and two equally spaced speeds between minimum recommended and full speed. Five copies of the certified curve shall be delivered to ENGINEER not less than 10 days prior to the shipment of the equipment from the factory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Each pumping unit shall be leveled, plumbed, aligned and wedged into position to fit connecting piping. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer and as specified herein. Grouting shall be as specified in the grout section. The pump base shall be grouted after initial fitting and alignment but before final bolting of connecting piping. After final alignment and bolting, pump connections shall be tested for applied piping stresses by loosening the flange bolts. If any movement or opening of the joints is observed, piping shall be adjusted to ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges.



3-2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-2.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with the Startup Requirements Section and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. All cost for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

End of Section



Section 11331

PUMP MIXING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the pump mixing system to be furnished and installed for the Hydrophilic HSW Tank at the location indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

Mixing System Designation. Hydrophilic HSW Tank

Associated Pump tag number. PCL-313

Number of mixing systems. 1

Equipment location. Gallery No. 1 and Hydrophilic HSW Tank

Piping and valves not specified herein are specified in the respective piping and valve sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations furnished by the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for maintenance, spare parts, operation, manufacturer’s service, and single source responsibility. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Coordination. The pump mixing system specified herein and the mixing pumps specified in the End Suction Chopper Pump Section shall be coordinated and furnished by a single supplier. The mixing system supplier shall be responsible for coordination of the mixing system requirements with the mixing pump and for supply of the pump as part of a coordinated system design. The Contractor shall coordinate the interconnection piping and flange mounting locations for the nozzle assemblies; the location of the concrete bases required to support the pump; and controls to ensure and proper operation of the pump mixing system.



1-2.03. Tagging. Each item of equipment and each part shipped separately shall be tagged and identified with indelible markings for the intended service. Tag number shall be clearly marked on all shipping labels and on the outside of all containers. 1-2.04. Identification. Equipment furnished under this section shall be identified in accordance with the Equipment and Valve Identification section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Submittals Procedures section. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted. Submittals and shop drawings shall include the following:

A letter of certification stating that the proposed pump mixing system meets all the performance requirements of this Specification, the pump characteristics specified in End Suction Chopper Pumps section have been coordinated with the equipment specified in this section, and piping configuration as indicated on the Drawings is acceptable. The letter shall verify the design flow requirements through each nozzle in the tank with a head loss not to exceed 25 feet of water column across each nozzle for the specified range of solids concentration in the tank.

Dimensional and weight information for all separate components and assemblies and number and positioning locations of all nozzles in the tanks, including setting angles.

Loads requirements and connection details for all nozzle supports, including all loads transferred to the tanks from supports

Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and

identification of materials of construction. Manufacturers submitting proposals for equipment that would require

changes in the design shall also include detailed information on structural, electrical, mechanical, and other miscellaneous changes or modifications necessary to adapt their equipment to the arrangement indicated on the Drawings.

1-3.02. Operations and Maintenance Manual. Operation and maintenance manual shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The operation and maintenance manual shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered.



1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. When practical, the equipment specified herein shall be factory assembled. The parts and assemblies that are shipped unassembled shall be packaged and tagged in a manner that will protect the equipment from damage and facilitate the final assembly in the field. Generally, machined and unpainted parts shall be protected from damage by the elements of weather with the application of a strippable protective coating. All items of equipment shall be cleaned at the point of origin and all openings plugged so that they arrive at the jobsite ready for assembly and operation. 1-5. WARRANTY. The manufacturer shall warrant the nozzles for a minimum life of 10 years. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2-1, SERVICE CONDITIONS. The pump mixing system shall recirculate waste from the tank and discharge the waste through fixed nozzles arranged in a pattern determined by the mixing system manufacturer. Each mixing system shall consist of multiple nozzles. For the Hydrophilic HSW Tank, nozzle assemblies shall be flange mounted at the tank floor and side of the tank.

Top-mounted discharge nozzle(s) for mixing and breaking up the grease blanket shall be provided for the Hydrophilic HSW Tank. The number, location and orientation of the nozzles shall be determined by the manufacturer, based on the drawings, to meet the performance requirements as specified herein. The pump mixing equipment specified herein shall be standard equipment of proven ability for the mixing of the specified waste. The solids concentration of the HSW will vary over the range specified herein. The pump mixing system shall be suitable for the following conditions:


Associated pump tag number(s). PCL-313

Tank contents. Hydrophilic HSW (non oil-based food

processing waste)

Solids concentration range, by weight. <5 to 6%

pH range. 2 to 7




Temperature range. 40 to 180 F; average 90 F

Tank construction. Concrete

Cover type. Fixed

Cover material. Fibreglass Reinforced Plastic

Inside diameter. 55 ft

Top of sidewall elevation. 704.50 ft

Maximum liquid level elevation. 701.50 ft

Bottom of sidewall elevation. 694.65 ft

Minimum liquid level elevation for upper nozzle operation.

701.33 ft

Minimum liquid level elevation for lower nozzle operation

692.75 ft

Operating shutoff liquid level elevation 692.25 ft

Bottom of cone elevation. 689.65 ft

Bottom of sludge sump elevation. 686.40± ft

Bottom slope 2.75 in/ft

Maximum liquid volume. 158,000 gal

Diameter of manway. 36 inches (square) Equipment specified herein shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The pump mixing system shall be designed to mix the tank contents and develop a strong pumping action capable of creating a wall-to-wall and top-to-bottom mixing of the tank contents. The mixing system shall provide a positive means of eliminating and dispersing grease on top of the liquid. The mixing system shall be designed to produce a rotational mixing pattern within the tank, while also producing flow across the middle portion of the tank thereby preventing solids from migrating towards the center. Solids shall be effectively drafted by the nozzle discharge to the outer 30 percent of the tank where the peripheral rotation will create a homogenous state throughout the entire process suspending both organic and inorganic solids sufficient to meet the performance requirements.



The tank mixing system shall continuously mix the entire contents of the tank to ensure a uniform solids and temperature distribution throughout the tank. The mixing system shall provide a minimum of 90 percent actively mixed volume within 30 minutes and a blend time in the actively mixed volume of 90 minutes. The variation in total solids concentration throughout the tank shall not vary more than plus or minus 10 percent from the mean total solids for the tank. The variation in temperatures throughout the tank shall not vary more than 1.0 degree F, plus or minus, from the mean average tank temperature. The mixing system shall be designed in accordance with the following requirements:


Associated pump tag number(s) PCL-313

Active volume mixing cut off velocity. 0.33 ft/s

Flange Mounted Tank Floor Mixing Assemblies.

Minimum total number of assemblies per tank (2 nozzles per assembly)

2

Nozzle minimum inlet diameter. 8 in

Minimum total design liquid flow rate through each assembly.

400 gpm

Flange Mounted Top Grease Nozzle

Minimum number of nozzles per tank. 1

Nozzle minimum inlet diameter. 2 in

Nozzle distance below liquid surface. 24 in

2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The equipment furnished under this section shall be Vaughan Rotamix Mixing System, without exception.



2-4. MATERIALS. Pump mixing system materials shall be as follows:

Mixing System

Nozzles Flange mounted double nozzles in all stainless steel construction with polyurethane nozzles barrels with a long straight taper length of a minimum of 10 inches

Assembly Fittings Schedule 40 316 SS fittings, ANSI 150 lb flanged 316 SS piping connections

Steel Plates and Shapes ASTM A36; 1/2 inch minimum thickness

Anchor Bolts and Fasteners ASTM F593, Alloy Group 2

Nuts ASTM F594, Alloy Group 2

Washers, Flat ANSI B18.22.1, same material as bolts

Anti-Seize Thread Lubricant Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane "Thred Gard Nickel", Never-Seez "Pure Nickel Special", Permatex "Nickel Anti-Seize", or equal.

2-4.01. Mixing Nozzle Assemblies. Each mixing nozzle assembly shall consist of multiple flange mounted abrasion-resistant nozzle(s) able to be horizontally adjusted.

The nozzle assembly shall be attached to ductile iron pipe. Each nozzle assembly for the Hydrophilic HSW Tank shall be supported off the flange of the connecting pipe. The connecting pipe shall be suitably supported and anchored to the concrete tank. Connection of the feed pipe to the nozzle assembly shall be a flanged connection compatible with a Class 125 flat faced flange. Joints shall be watertight and capable of withstanding the pressures generated by the static head of the tank plus the discharge pressure of the mixing pump. Pipe supports for the feed pipe shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. 2-4.02. Mixing Pump. The mixing pump is specified in Section 11117, End Suction Chopper Pumps. 2-5. FABRICATION. 2-6.01. Structural and Miscellaneous Metals. Unless otherwise specified, all structural and miscellaneous metals shall comply with the Structural and Miscellaneous Metals section.



2-5.02. Edge Grinding. Sharp corners of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metals which will be submerged or in contact with tank contents shall not be welded and shall be ground to a radius, to ensure satisfactory paint adherence. 2-5.03. Surface Preparation. All ferrous metal surfaces, except stainless steel, shall be shop cleaned by blasting or equivalent, in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be completely removed before shop primer is applied. 2-5.04. Shop Painting. All ferrous metal surfaces of the nozzle assemblies and piping, except stainless steel, which will be fully or partially submerged, or within the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall be coated with novolac epoxy as indicated in Section 09940. Refer to the General Equipment Stipulations section for other shop painting requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Unless otherwise authorized by Engineer, pump mixing system nozzle assemblies and tank interior mixing system appurtenances shall be installed prior to field coating of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank. Any damages to the coating system after initial application due to additional work performed in or out of the Hydrophilic HSW Tank shall be repaired. The pump mixing system nozzle assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The equipment shall be installed level and plumb. Threads of all stainless steel anchor bolts and assembly bolts shall be given a coat of anti-seize thread lubricant during assembly. All work shall be completed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Care shall be exercised to ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the equipment. The equipment shall be operated, adjusted, and tested after installation as needed to ensure proper adjustment and operation of all controls. 3-2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-2.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with Startup Requirements section, and shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer.



The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is accurately aligned; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been tested under full load conditions and operated satisfactorily. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price. 3-2.02. Installation Supervision. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the equipment installation. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price. Manufacturers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing contractor's erection or installation procedures. The equipment manufacturer will be provided with written notification 10 days prior to the need for such services. 3-3. PERFORMANCE TESTING. The mixing system installed in the Hydrophilic HSW Tank shall be performance tested. Testing shall be coordinated with the Owner to minimize the impact on plant operations. Owner lab will analyze samples collected by mixing system manufacturer for the mixing test. All other costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price. Feed to the tank shall be discontinued for a minimum of eight (8) hours prior to the start of testing. A series of discreet grab samples shall be taken from the sample port downstream of the pump. Sampling for solids shall be performed at 15 minute intervals for a minimum of four (4) hours of continuous operation of the pump mixing system. Samples shall be provided to the Owner and analyzed for total solids using the analysis method specified in the latest edition of the “Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater”. Sample analysis and reporting shall be carried out by the Owner. Data shall be recorded in tabular format and shall include the solids concentration and time. The table shall also include a comments column to recorded any relevant observations and/or site specific conditions affecting data collection. Solids testing shall confirm the solids distribution within the tank is within +/- 10% of the average solids concentration over the duration of the test. The manufacturer shall utilize analysis results and prepare and submit 3 copies of the test report to the Engineer. The report will form the basis for acceptance of the mixing system. 3-4. PROTECTION. The equipment shall be protected after installation, and prior to final acceptance by Owner. Protection provisions shall be as



recommended by the manufacturer, and shall include provisions to prevent rust, mechanical damage, and foreign objects entering the equipment. 3-5. TRAINING. The manufacturer's representative shall provide training for the Owner in proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. The training shall include instruction in both the operation and maintenance of the equipment using the operation and maintenance manual as the principal basis for the instruction. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

End of Section



Section 13225

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FLAT TANK COVER

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the Base Bid item for furnishing and installation of one all-fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), flat type walkable basin cover on the Hydrophilic High Strength Waste (HSW) Tank and the weather-tight closure perimeter sealing of the existing aluminum Hydrophobic HSW Structure cover, as indicated on the Drawings and herein. The Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank flat FRP cover shall be furnished and installed complete with internal beams or internal trusses; internal center support column, if required by the manufacturer; perimeter weather-tight closure and panels; all required fasteners, sealant, and gaskets; expansion anchors; anchor bolts; access hatches; duct and inlet curbs and all accessories and appurtenances specified, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise required for a complete installation. The cover shall also be sloped to drain as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations furnished by the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. All materials and equipment covered in this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and satisfactory performance of all components. Contractor shall coordinate the work under this section with items of work covered in applicable Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank preparation and coating sections, and with mixing system piping and supports as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, detail, specifications and data covering materials used for the FRP flat cover and accessories shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The data shall indicate the sizes of all major components, connection locations and details, loads imposed



on the structure at support locations, and assembly and installation details including calculations for the given spans and loading conditions. The manufacturer shall accept responsibility for the complete design, engineering, and function of the FRP flat cover. Drawings and data shall be signed and sealed by a licensed Structural Engineer in the state of Illinois. Approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for providing materials and design conforming to the specifications. Certificates of compliance attesting to the properties of materials used by the manufacturer shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-3.01. Coordination. Prior to preparation of submittals, an authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the project Site for as long as deemed necessary to conduct a Site survey to acquire all necessary information including, but not limited to, elevations, lengths, and existing tank dimensions and special installation conditions, where applicable, for the preparation of and fabrication of drawings for the covers. If field changes or modifications arise from errors contained in manufacturer prepared drawings, the costs of such field changes or modifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. All component parts and accessories of cover and closures shall be adequately protected during transportation, in storage at the job site, and during assembly and installation. Damaged components will be rejected and shall be replaced with undamaged units or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The cover over the Hydrophilic HSW Tank will contain potentially odorous air emissions from the hauled material. The cover and all appurtenant materials shall be resistant to corrosion and shall be certified by the cover manufacturer as fully suitable for continuous exposure to water-saturated air containing hydrogen sulfide and acid vapors. The tank cover shall be anchored to the top surface of the concrete tank wall and be designed to operate under the following service conditions:

Design temperature range.

Ambient

Internal

-20 to 120°F

40 to 120°F

Enclosed space conditions. Passively Ventilated



pH range of stored waste material 2.0 – 7.0Chloride concentration of stored waste material 1000 mg/L

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The cover over the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall meet the performance and design requirements as follows:

Type of basin Existing

Basin Wall Concrete

Inside diameter 55 +/- ft

Outside diameter 57 +/- ft

Width of supporting wall 12 +- in*Dormer and Access Door No

* 6”+/- chamfer at top of wall sloping out and downward at 45 degree angle. Cover shall be a circular flat internal truss or beam supported structure of the specified dimensions and suitable for installation on a circular basin as indicated on the Drawings. Cover shall be clear span and self-supported from the tank wall. If required by the cover manufacturer, one center column may be utilized, as indicated on the Drawings. Flat cover height shall be based on manufacturer standard design and meet the dimensional requirements identified on the Drawings.

Cover shall be sloped 1/8” per foot to allow drainage of rainwater and snowmelt to the perimeter drainage trough.

The cover design shall provide for expansion and contraction due to climatic change without damage to cover. Where anchor bolts or expansion anchors are used at support points for beams or members, the connections shall accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of the cover. Any surfaces of the cover system, including support members or cover panels, that come in contact with the concrete wall of the tank shall be provided with support bearing pads, gaskets, or corrosion protective tape so that they do not come in direct contact with those surfaces. All connections shall be designed to permit expansion and contraction of the cover and movement of the support walls due to variable hydraulic loading.

A bearing pad and a minimum of 2 stainless steel cast-in-place anchors, shall be provided at each support point to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of the cover. Anchor design shall be based on “Cracked Concrete” theory per ACI 318-08, Appendix D and the anchor manufacturer’s requirements.



Bearing pads shall be uniformly spaced around the cover perimeter at intervals not to exceed 14’-8”.

The Hydrophilic HSW Storage Flat Tank cover shall be designed as a sealed weather-tight system under all loading conditions. All perimeter edges shall be sealed with a waterproof and non-breathable weather-tight material suitable for the service conditions described herein and as indicated on the Drawings. The panels shall be firmly clamped to truss frame members or beams with batten bars in a continuous, interlocking manner, so that they will not slip or disengage under the specified loading conditions or as a result of thermal expansion or contraction. Direct attachment of closure panels to the top surface of frame members by means of bolts, screws, or self-drilling fasteners extending through the panels or the top flange of the members will not be acceptable. The existing Hydrophobic HSW Storage Structure aluminum dome cover north of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall be retrofitted with a sealed perimeter waterproof and non-breathable weather-tight system similar to the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank cover, as described above. Contractor to remove the bottom skirts, clean off caulking, re-install, and caulk or replace all components that require removal. The cover frame, closure panels, and accessories shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7-05, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures"; and as specified herein. The cover manufacturer shall visit the site prior to fabrication and accurately determine the basin dimensions and the required cover dimensions. 2-2.01. Frame Design Loads And Criteria. Superimposed dead load locations and magnitudes shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Uniform roof live load and internal vacuum load shall be as specified herein. Wind, snow, and seismic loading criteria shall be as specified in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section.

Uniform roof snow/live load magnitude (unreduced, ground snow load controls).

30 psf

Internal vacuum load magnitude. 3 psf

Other special dead loads and magnitudes.


Panel design load.

Concentrated load applied simultaneously on two separate 1 ft2 areas at any point on the panel.

250 lbs



Cover dead load. To be provided by cover manufacturer

(8 psf maximum)

psf

Maximum access hatch weight 150 lbs

Duct and piping support (future odor control, venting, etc.)

5 psf

Duct and piping supports, locations, and loadings shall be designed and coordinated by the Contractor with the cover manufacturer to ensure proper support from the cover structure. Snow loads and uniform roof live loads shall be distributed as indicated in ASCE 7, including all applicable unbalanced effects. Wind loads shall include internal pressure coefficients from ASCE 7-05. Internal pressure coefficient shall be +/- 0.55 unless demonstrated otherwise by the manufacturer.

The cover frame design loads specified herein shall be considered as acting in accordance with basic load combinations set forth in Paragraph 2.3.2 or 2.4.1 of ASCE 7-05. Internal vacuum pressures shall be added into the load combinations as indicated below. Contractor shall coordinate furnished equipment with FRP cover manufacturer.

When using Paragraph 2.3.2: a. Load combination (3) + 1.6V. b. Load combination (4) + 1.6V. c. Load combination (5) + 1.6V. d. Load combination (6).

When using Paragraph 2.4.1:

a. Load combination (3) + 1.0V. b. Load combination (5) + 1.0V. c. Load combination (6) + 1.0V. d. Load combination (7).

Anchor bolts shall be designed for the maximum loads transferred to the supporting basin, tank, walls, and structure at each bearing pad, under the loading combinations stipulated herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Anchors shall be designed per ACI 318-08, Appendix D and the anchor manufacturer’s requirements. Submittals shall include code compliant calculations signed and sealed by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the state of Illinois. See specification 05550, Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry, for additional anchorage requirements.



The maximum deflection of any structural component under the live load only shall not exceed L/120 of the span of that component. 2-3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The covers furnished under this section shall be Ershigs, Fiberglass Fabricators, Augusta Fiberglass, RPS Engineering, or DuraTech. 2-4. MATERIALS. All materials and resins used in the construction of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank flat cover shall be suitable for the Service Conditions and Performance and Design Requirements specified herein. No pigment or fillers will be allowed in the resin. Corrosion resistance data shall be provided for the proposed resin. Fiberglass reinforcing shall consist of chopped strand mat, woven roving and/or unidirectional roving. The color of the covers, hatches, and fiberglass accessories shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s standard colors and shall be opaque. Hardware and hinges for fiberglass mounting frames, brackets, and supports shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. Fasteners internal to the tank shall be Type 316 stainless steel with factory applied resin-bonded PTFE based coating (Whitford Xylan® coating 1424, or equal). Galvanized, plated, or coated carbon steel members, components, or fasteners will not be acceptable. 2-5. ACCESSORIES. Cover accessories shall be as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein. Cover accessories and fasteners shall be design for component and cladding wind loads, including internal pressure coefficients, and maximum roof gravity loads as specified in ASCE 7-05. 2-5.01. Ventilation Connections. Ventilation connections shall be at the location indicated on the Drawings. See HVAC Drawings for connection locations. The connection shall consist of an FRP pipe (or stainless steel per mfr) with wall thickness not less than 0.09 inch and shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings. The connection pipe shall penetrate and be rigidly attached to the closure panel. All joints between the connection pipe and the panel shall be suitably reinforced, gasketed, and permanently sealed to meet the structure tightness requirements specified herein. The pipe shall project at least 12 inches from the face of the panel. The end of the pipe shall be as required to connect to the connecting piping. All connection locations shall be finalized and coordinated by the Contractor with the cover manufacturer.



2-5.02. Air Vents. Air vents shall be provided on the Hydrophilic HSW Tank cover in the locations, quantities, and sizes as indicated in the drawings. Air vents shall be FRP or SS and shall be provided by the cover manufacturer. Each air vent shall penetrate and be rigidly attached to the closure panel. All joints between the air vent and the panel shall be suitably reinforced, gasketed, and permanently sealed to meet the structure tightness requirements specified herein. All vent flanges and vent locations shall be finalized and coordinated by the Contractor with the cover manufacturer. 2-5.03. Access Hatches. Four square access hatches shall be provided for the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank, including:

One 36 inch square access hatch at the west side of the tank. One 36 inch square access hatch at the east side of the tank. Two 36 inch square access hatches for mixing nozzle

access/removal on the north and south sides of tank. Mixing nozzle hatch locations to be directly above each mixing nozzle; locations to be coordinated by Contractor.

Hatches and frames shall be suitably reinforced to provide a rigid, weather-tight installation. Each hatch cover shall be continuously hinged along one side and shall be provided with a locking latch and a gasket. All hatches shall be equipped with an automatic hold-open arm. For hatches with an automatic hold-open arm that are over 30 inches in length a cable shall be provided on the side opposite the hold-open arm to prevent wind racking of the hatch lid when open. A minimum 4 inch curb shall be provided on the panel for installation of the hatch cover. Each access hatch shall be capable of supporting a temporary installed personal fall arrest and retrieval system which meets all applicable ANSI and OSHA requirements. The cover framing and skin plate shall have sufficient strength capable of supporting the reactions from the fall arrest and retrieval system including the weight of all fall protection equipment. Cover manufacturer shall ensure that the support and load requirements of this system are incorporated into the design of the cover. 2-5.04. Personal Fall Arrest and Retrieval System. A temporary installed personal fall arrest and retrieval system shall be provided for use on the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank. System shall be a portable tripod or other similar surface-mounted device as manufactured by Capital Safety, or equal. 2-5.05. Future Odor Control. Provisions for future odor control system shall be provided for the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank as indicated on the Drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION SUPERVISION. Cover shall be installed and erected by a qualified erector approved by the manufacturer and shall be in accordance with OSHA, local safety regulations, and the manufacturer’s requirements. The cover manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the cover assembly and installation. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price for 2 site visits. Manufacturers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing contractor's erection or installation procedures. The cover manufacturer will be provided with written notification 10 days prior to the need for such services. Contractor shall furnish suitable lifting equipment as needed to assemble and install each cover. After installation and field load testing, and completion of all connections, the exterior surfaces of each cover shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3-2. FIELD LOAD TESTING. Following completion of cover installation, the cover panels shall be field load tested. Contractor shall submit proposed field load testing method for Engineer review. At least two cover panels, as selected by Engineer, shall be load tested. One panel shall be subjected to two concentrated loads applied simultaneously on two separate 1 square foot areas of the test panel. Each concentrated load shall be at least 1.5 times the concentrated design load specified for the cover panel. The second test panel shall be subjected to a uniform test load of 1.5 times the specified uniform design load applied over the entire surface of the panel. The test panels shall withstand the specified field test loads without damage, slippage, or permanent distortion. If either test panel fails to meet the specified requirements, all cover panels shall be removed and replaced with new panels, and selected panels shall be retested. Removal, replacement, and retesting of panels shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. End of Section



Section 13226

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DOME TANK COVER

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the Bid Alternative item for furnishing and installation of one all-fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), dome type basin cover on the Hydrophilic High Strength Waste (HSW) Tank and the weather-tight closure perimeter sealing of the existing aluminum Hydrophobic HSW Structure cover, as indicated on the Drawings and herein. The Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank cover shall be furnished and installed complete with dome frame; internal center support column, if required by the manufacturer; perimeter weather-tight closure and panels; all required fasteners, sealant, and gaskets; expansion anchors; anchor bolts; and all accessories and appurtenances specified, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise required for a complete installation. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations furnished by the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. All materials and equipment covered in this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and satisfactory performance of all components. Contractor shall coordinate the work under this section with items of work covered in applicable Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank preparation and coating sections, and with mixing system piping and supports as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, details, and specifications for the FRP dome cover and accessories shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The data shall indicate the sizes of all major components, anchor bolt locations and details, loads imposed on the structure at support locations, and assembly and installation details. Drawings and data shall be signed and sealed by a licensed Structural Engineer in the state of Illinois.



Certificates of compliance attesting to the properties of materials used by the manufacturer shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-3.01. Coordination. Prior to preparation of submittals, an authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the project Site for as long as deemed necessary to conduct a Site survey to acquire all necessary information including, but not limited to, elevations, lengths, and existing tank dimensions and special installation conditions, where applicable, for the preparation of and fabrication of drawings for the covers. If field changes or modifications arise from errors contained in manufacturer prepared drawings, the costs of such field changes or modifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. All component parts and accessories of cover and closures shall be adequately protected during transportation, in storage at the job site, and during assembly and installation. Damaged components will be rejected and shall be replaced with undamaged units or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The cover over the Hydrophilic HSW Tank will contain potentially odorous air emissions from the hauled material. The cover and all appurtenant materials shall be resistant to corrosion and shall be certified by the cover manufacturer as fully suitable for continuous exposure to water-saturated air containing hydrogen sulfide and acid vapors. The tank cover shall be anchored to the top surface of the concrete tank wall and be designed to operate under the following service conditions:

Design temperature range.

Ambient

Internal

-20 to 120°F

40 to 120°F

Enclosed space conditions. Passively VentilatedpH range of stored waste material 2.0 – 7.0Chloride concentration of stored waste material 1000 mg/L



2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The cover over the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall meet the performance and design requirements as follows:

Type of basin. Existing

Basin Wall Concrete

Inside diameter. 55 +/- ft

Outside diameter. 57 +/- ft

Width of supporting wall. 12 +- in*Dormer and Access Door No

* 6”+/- chamfer at top of wall sloping out and downward at 45 degree angle. Covers shall be spherical and either the radial truss type or radial beam type of the specified dimensions and suitable for installation on a circular basin as indicated on the Drawings. Dome cover height shall range between 9’-6” and 13’-6”.

The cover shall be clear span and self-supported from the tank wall. If required by the cover manufacturer, one center column may be utilized, as indicated on the Drawings Primary horizontal thrust shall be carried by a bottom tension ring integral with the cover frame. The cover design shall provide for expansion and contraction due to climatic change without damage to cover. Where anchor bolts or expansion anchors are used at support points for beams or members, the connections shall accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of the cover. Any surfaces of the cover system, including support members or cover panels, that come in contact with the concrete wall of the tank shall be provided with support bearing pads, gaskets, or corrosion protective tape so that they do not come in direct contact with those surfaces. All connections shall be designed to permit expansion and contraction of the cover and movement of the support walls due to variable hydraulic loading.

A bearing pad and a minimum of 2 stainless steel adhesive anchors, shall be provided at each support point to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of the cover. Anchor design shall be based on “Cracked Concrete” theory per ACI 318-08, Appendix D and the anchor manufacturer’s requirements. Bearing pads shall be uniformly spaced around the cover perimeter at intervals not to exceed 14’-8”. The Hydrophilic HSW Storage Dome Tank cover shall be designed as a sealed weather-tight system under all loading conditions. All perimeter edges shall be sealed with a waterproof and non-breathable weather-tight material suitable for the service conditions described herein and as indicated on the Drawings. The



panels, as necessary, shall not slip or disengage under the specified loading conditions or as a result of thermal expansion or contraction. The existing Hydrophobic HSW Storage Structure aluminum dome cover north of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall be retrofitted with a sealed perimeter waterproof and non-breathable weather-tight system similar to the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank cover, as described above. Contractor to remove the bottom skirts, clean off caulking, re-install, and caulk or replace all components that require removal. The cover frame, roof panels, and accessories shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7-05, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures"; and as specified herein. The cover manufacturer shall visit the site prior to fabrication and accurately determine the basin dimensions and the required cover dimensions. 2-2.01. Frame Design Loads And Criteria. Superimposed dead load locations and magnitudes shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Uniform roof live load and internal vacuum load shall be as specified herein. Wind, snow, and seismic loading criteria shall be as specified in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section.

Uniform roof snow/live load magnitude (unreduced, ground snow load controls).

30 psf

Internal vacuum load magnitude. 3 psf

Other special dead loads and magnitudes.


Panel design load.

Concentrated load applied simultaneously on two separate 1 ft2 areas at any point on the panel.

250 lbs

Cover dead load To be provided by cover manufacturer

(8 psf maximum)

psf

Maximum access hatch weight 150 lbs

Duct and piping support (future odor control, venting, etc.)

5 psf



Duct and piping supports, locations, and loadings shall be designed and coordinated by the Contractor with the dome manufacturer to ensure proper support from the dome structure. Snow loads and uniform roof live loads shall be distributed as indicated in ASCE 7, including all applicable unbalanced effects. Wind loads shall include internal pressure coefficients from ASCE 7-05. Internal pressure coefficient shall be +/- 0.55 unless demonstrated otherwise by the manufacturer.

The cover frame design loads specified herein shall be considered as acting in accordance with basic load combinations set forth in Paragraph 2.3.2 or 2.4.1 of ASCE 7-05. Internal vacuum pressures shall be added into the load combinations as indicated below. Contractor shall coordinated furnished equipment with Dome manufacturer.

When using Paragraph 2.3.2: a. Load combination (3) + 1.6V. b. Load combination (4) + 1.6V. c. Load combination (5) + 1.6V. d. Load combination (6).

When using Paragraph 2.4.1:

a. Load combination (3) + 1.0V. b. Load combination (5) + 1.0V. c. Load combination (6) + 1.0V d. Load combination (7).

Anchor bolts shall be designed for the maximum loads transferred to the supporting basin, tank, walls, and structure at each bearing pad, under the loading combinations stipulated herein. Anchors shall be designed per ACI 318-08, Appendix D and the anchor manufacturer’s requirements. Submittals shall include code compliant calculations signed and sealed by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the state of Illinois. See specification 05550, Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry, for additional anchorage requirements. The maximum deflection of any structural component under the live load only shall not exceed L/120 of the span of that component. 2-3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The domes furnished under this section shall be Augusta Fiberglass, Ershigs, or RPS Engineering. 2-4. MATERIALS. All materials and resins used in the construction of the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank dome cover shall be suitable for the Service Conditions and Performance and Design Requirements specified herein.



No pigment or fillers will be allowed in the resin. Corrosion resistance data shall be provided for the proposed resin. Fiberglass reinforcing shall consist of chopped strand mat, woven roving and/or unidirectional roving. The color of the covers, hatches, and fiberglass accessories shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s standard colors and shall be opaque. Hardware and hinges for fiberglass mounting frames, brackets, and supports shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. Fasteners internal to the tank shall be Type 316 stainless steel with factory applied resin-bonded PTFE based coating (Whitford Xylan® coating 1424, or equal). Galvanized, plated, or coated carbon steel members, components, or fasteners will not be acceptable. 2-5. ACCESSORIES. Cover accessories shall be as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein. Cover accessories and fasteners shall be design for component and cladding wind loads, including internal pressure coefficients, and maximum roof gravity loads as specified in ASCE 7-05. 2-5.01. Ventilation Connections. Ventilation connections shall be at the location indicated on the Drawings. See HVAC Drawings for connection locations. The connection shall consist of an FRP pipe (or stainless steel per mfr) with wall thickness not less than 0.09 inch and shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings. The connection pipe shall penetrate and be rigidly attached to the closure panel. All joints between the connection pipe and the panel shall be suitably reinforced, gasketed, and permanently sealed to meet the structure tightness requirements specified herein. The pipe shall project at least 12 inches from the face of the panel. The end of the pipe shall be as required to connect to the connecting piping. All connection locations shall be finalized and coordinated by the Contractor with the dome manufacturer. 2-5.02. Air Vents. Air vents shall be provided on the Hydrophilic HSW Tank cover in the locations, quantities, and sizes as indicated in the drawings. Air vents shall be FRP or SS and shall be provided by the cover manufacturer. Each air vent shall penetrate and be rigidly attached to the closure panel. All joints between the air vent and the panel shall be suitably reinforced, gasketed, and permanently sealed to meet the structure tightness requirements specified herein. All vent flanges and vent locations shall be finalized and coordinated by the Contractor with the dome manufacturer.



2-5.03. Access Hatches. Three square access hatches and one raised square access hatch shall be provided for the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank, including:

One 36 inch square raised access hatch at the west side of the tank.

One 36 inch square access hatch at the east side of the tank. Two 36 inch square access hatches for mixing nozzle

access/removal on the north and south sides of tank. Mixing nozzle hatch locations to be directly above each mixing nozzle; locations to be coordinated by Contractor.

Hatches and frames shall be suitably reinforced to provide a rigid, weather-tight installation. Each hatch cover shall be continuously hinged along one side and shall be provided with a locking latch and a gasket. All hatches except the raised hatch shall be equipped with an automatic hold-open arm. For hatches with an automatic hold-open arm that are over 30 inches in length a cable shall be provided on the side opposite the hold-open arm to prevent wind racking of the hatch lid when open. A minimum 4 inch curb shall be provided on the panel for installation of the hatch cover. The raised access hatch shall be provided as a horizontal surface sized and for the purpose of supporting a temporary installed personal fall arrest and retrieval system which meets all applicable ANSI and OSHA requirements. The dome framing and skin plate shall have sufficient strength capable of supporting the reactions from the fall arrest and retrieval system including the weight of all fall protection equipment. Dome manufacturer shall ensure that the support and load requirements of this system are incorporated into the design of the dome. 2-5.04. Safety Line and Support. A center support at the apex of the dome and a permanently installed horizontal lifeline system shall be provided meeting applicable ANSI and OSHA requirements for fall protection and shall allow complete travel over the cover surface. The safety line shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and be coordinated to not interfere with the lightning protection system air terminals. 2-5.05. Personal Fall Arrest and Retrieval System. A temporary installed personal fall arrest and retrieval system shall be provided for use on the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank. System shall be a portable tripod or other similar surface-mounted device as manufactured by Capital Safety, or equal. 2-5.06. Future Odor Control. Provisions for future odor control system shall be provided for the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank as indicated on the Drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION SUPERVISION. The cover manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the cover assembly and installation. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price for 2 site visits. Manufacturers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing contractor's erection or installation procedures. The cover manufacturer will be provided with written notification 10 days prior to the need for such services. Contractor shall furnish suitable lifting equipment as needed to assemble and install each cover. After installation and field load testing, and completion of all connections, the exterior surfaces of each cover shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3-2. FIELD LOAD TESTING. Following completion of cover installation, the cover roof panels shall be field load tested. Contractor shall submit proposed field load testing method for Engineer review. At least two roof panels, as selected by Engineer, shall be load tested. One panel shall be subjected to two concentrated loads applied simultaneously on two separate 1 square foot areas of the test panel. Each concentrated load shall be at least 1.5 times the concentrated design load specified for the roof panel. The second test panel shall be subjected to a uniform test load of 1.5 times the specified uniform design load applied over the entire surface of the panel. The test panels shall withstand the specified field test loads without damage, slippage, or permanent distortion. If either test panel fails to meet the specified requirements, all roof panels shall be removed and replaced with new panels, and selected panels shall be retested. Removal, replacement, and retesting of panels shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.

End of Section



Section 13500

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the modification of an existing instrumentation and control system designated as the Plant Control System. The work shall include the addition of input/output signals associated with HSW hydrophilic tank mixing pump. Additionally, the Foxboro pressure transmitter previously used for the SE Gravity Sludge Thickener discharge line shall be re-installed and calibrated by the Contractor as indicated in the drawings to provide a continuous level signal for the HSW Hydrophilic Tank.

1-1.02. Associated Sections. This section also includes the equipment and services specified in the following sections.

Section 13550 Software Control Block Descriptions

Section 13561 Panel Mounted Instruments

Section 13563 Pressure and Level Instruments

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

1-2.02. Drawings. The Drawings indicate locations and arrangements of equipment and may include installation details and block and one-line diagrams showing connections and interfaces with other equipment. The input/output (I/O) lists are attached as an appendix to this section. Principal components of the instrumentation systems shall be as indicated on the P&ID drawings and instrument device schedule attached to this section.

1-2.03. Codes, Permits and Agency Approvals. All work performed and all materials used shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and with



applicable local regulations and ordinances. Where mandated by codes, panels, assemblies, materials, and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. Contractor shall, as part of their work, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and approvals by the authorities having local jurisdiction of such work. This shall include any third-party inspections and testing of panels and equipment.

1-2.04. Coordination. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated by System Supplier for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications, under other contracts, and, where applicable, with related existing equipment. All equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, and the manufacturer of the related equipment. 1-2.06. Related Equipment and Materials. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrumentation, motor controllers, valve actuators, chemical feeders, analytical measuring devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other sections or furnished under other contracts. 1-2.07. Device Tag Numbering System. All devices shall be provided with permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with System Supplier’s equipment drawings and shall be as close as practical to the tag numbers used on the Drawings and device schedules. All field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable. 1-3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The drawings and specifications indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the Drawings or Specifications are deemed necessary by System Supplier, details of such departures and the reasons shall be submitted to Engineer for review with or before the first stage submittal. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance. The specifications describe the minimum requirements for hardware and software. Where System Supplier’s standard configuration includes additional items of equipment or software features not specifically described herein, such equipment or features shall be furnished as a part of the system and shall be warranted as specified herein. 1-3.01. Governing Standards. Equipment furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with IEEE 519, ANSI C37.90, FCC Part 15 - Class A, and NEMA ICS-1-109.60.



1-3.02. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The System Supplier shall review the Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications requisite for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. At least three feet of clear access space shall be provided in front of all instrumentation and control system components. 1-3.03. Workmanship and Materials. System Supplier shall guarantee all equip-ment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except for testing. 1-3.04. Corrosive Fluids. All parts, which are exposed to corrosive conditions, shall be made from corrosion resistant materials. System Supplier shall submit certification that the instrument manufacturer approves the selection of materials of primary elements that are in contact with the specified process fluid to be inert to the effects of the process fluid. 1-3.05. Appurtenances. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, and isolation devices shall be furnished as needed for proper performance of the equipment. 1-4. SUBMITTALS. Complete dimensional, assembly, and installation drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams; and details, specifications, and data covering the materials used and the parts, devices and accessories forming a part of the system furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Submittal data shall be grouped and submitted in three separate stages. The submittal for each stage shall be substantially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. Equipment tag numbers or identifications used on the Drawings shall be referenced where applicable. 1-4.01. First Stage Submittal. The first stage submittal shall include the following items.

a. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or discrepancies between the system proposed by System Supplier and



this specification.

b. Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware and software items, clearly marked to show the model number, optional features, and intended service of each device.

c. A block diagram or schematic drawing showing the principal items of equipment furnished, including model numbers, and their interrelationships.

d. Drawings showing floor and wall space or desktop area requirements for all equipment items, including allowances for door swings and maintenance access.

e. Environmental and power requirements, including heat release information for each equipment item.

f. Additional Requirements identified in other Division 13 sections.

1-4.02. Second Stage Submittal. Before any equipment is released for shipment to the site, the following data shall be submitted. At System Supplier’s option, the first and second stage submittals may be combined.

a. Wiring and installation drawings for all interconnecting wiring between components of the system and between related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams shall show complete circuits and indicate all connections. If panel terminal designations, inter-device connections, device features and options, or other features are modified during the fabrication or factory testing, revised drawings shall be submitted before shipment of the equipment to the site.

b. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve System Supplier from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment.

c. Input/output listings showing point names, numbers, and addresses. Input/output identification numbers from the contract documents shall be cross-referenced in this submittal.

d. Additional Requirements identified in other Division 13 sections.

1-4.03. Third Stage Submittal. Complete system documentation, in the form of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, shall be submitted before the commence-ment of field acceptance testing. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include complete instruction books for each item of equipment and software furnished. Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range of device, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the device



model number and other special features. A complete set of "as-built" wiring, fabrication, and interconnection drawings shall be included with the manuals. If field-wiring modifications are made after these drawings are submitted, the affected drawings shall be revised and resubmitted. Additional requirements are identified in other Division 13 specification sections. 1-5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All electronic equipment and instruments shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements, shall be kept dry at all times, and shall not be exposed to adverse ambient conditions. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer. Each shipment shall include an appropriate shipping list that indicates the contents of the package, including the specific instrument tags. The shipping list shall be accessible without exposing the instruments to the atmosphere. The shipping list shall also contain any cautionary notes regarding storage of the instruments, including requirements to protect the instrument from static discharge, desensitizing chemicals (solvents, paints, etc.), or ambient atmospheric conditions. Individual instruments shall be appropriately tagged or labeled to positively identify the device. All identification shall be visible without the need to unpack the instrument from its protective packaging. Instrument shipment and storage requirements shall be coordinated with Engineer or District prior to shipment. System Supplier shall provide adequate storage and be ready to accept the shipment before shipping any equipment to the site. Additional shipping and storage requirements shall be as detailed in the individual instrument specifications. Components which are shipped loose due to transportation limitations shall be assembled and disassembled by the manufacturer prior to shipment to assure that all components fit together and are adequately supported. 1-6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section.

1-7. SPARE PARTS. Spare parts and consumable items are specified in other sections.



1-7.01. Packaging. All spare parts shall be delivered to District before final acceptance of the system. Packaging of spare parts shall provide protection against dust and moisture and shall be suitable for storage. Circuit boards and other electronic parts shall be enclosed in anti-static material. All packages shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, part number or other identifi-cation, date of manufacture, and approximate shelf life. 1-7.02. Replacement. System Supplier may utilize spare parts and supplies during system installation, de-bugging, startup, or training, but shall restore all such materials and supplies to the specified quantities before final acceptance of the systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All equipment furnished under each section referenced in SCOPE is a part of this section and shall be selected by System Supplier for its superior quality and intended performance. Equipment and materials used shall be subject to review. 2-1.01. Standard Products. The systems furnished shall be standard products. Where two or more units of the same type of equipment are supplied, they shall be the products of the same manufacturer; however, all components of the systems furnished hereunder need not be the products of one manufacturer unless specified herein. To the extent possible, instruments used for similar types of functions and services shall be of the same brand and model line. Similar components of differ-ent instruments shall be the products of the same manufacturer to facilitate maintenance and stocking of repair parts. Whenever possible, identical units shall be furnished. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The design of the systems furnished hereunder shall utilize concepts, techniques and features that provide maximum reliability and ease of maintenance and repair. The systems shall include board-level devices such as light emitting diodes or other indicators to facilitate quick diagnosis and repair. Diagnostic software shall be furnished to facilitate system-level troubleshooting. Where redundant hardware is provided, the system shall be capable of performing all specified functions, without reconfiguring hardware or software, with only one device of each category in service. 2-2.01. Factory Assembly. Equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, except where its physical size, arrangement, configuration, or



shipping and handling limitations make the shipment of completely assembled units impracticable. 2-3. POWER SUPPLY AND INSTRUMENT SIGNAL. Power supply to all control system equipment will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. System Supplier shall be responsible for distribution of power among enclosures, consoles, peripherals, and other components of the system from the power supply receptacles and junction boxes indicated on the Drawings. Power distribution hardware shall include cables and branch circuit overcurrent protection installed in accordance with the electrical section. Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the instrumentation will be unregulated 120 volts ac. Unless otherwise indicated, all transmitted electronic analog instrument signals shall be 4-20 mA dc and shall be linear with the measured variable. 2-3.01. Facility Distribution System. Equipment not indicated to be powered from an uninterruptible power source shall be suitable for being supplied from the facility distribution system and shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations of 10 percent and harmonics up to the limits of IEEE 519 without affecting operation. System Supplier shall provide voltage conditioning or filtering equipment if necessary to meet the requirements specified. 2-3.02. Power Supplies. Power supplies for voltages other than those listed above shall be an integral part of the equipment furnished. Internal power supplies shall be regulated, current limiting, and self-protected. 2-3.03. Surge Withstand. All equipment shall meet all surge withstand capability tests as defined in ANSI C37.90 without damage to the equipment. 2-4. SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. The equipment provided for the instrumentation and control system shall be suitable for the service conditions specified in the attached equipment sections. All equipment shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in performance throughout the environmental extremes specified. Equipment shall be designed to prevent the generation of electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices.

2-4.01. Ambient Temperature and Elevation. All system equipment located in air conditioned rooms shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures from 10°C to 35°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 80 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located in non air conditioned indoor areas shall be suitable for an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 50°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 95 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located outdoors shall be suitable for



operation in an ambient temperature range -20°C to 60°C and a relative humidity of 5 to 100 percent. Heaters and air conditioning/cooling equipment shall be provided where essential to maintain equipment within its manufacturer-recommended operating ranges. All equipment and instruments shall be designed to operate at the site elevation of 600 ft. 2-4.02. Deleterious Effects. All system equipment will be installed in areas without anti-static floor construction and without any provisions for control of particulates or corrosive gases other than ordinary office-type HVAC filtering. System Supplier shall furnish any additional air cleaning equipment, anti-static chair pads, or other protective measures necessary for proper operation of the system. All input/output hardware shall meet or exceed, without false operation, all requirements of NEMA ICS-1-109.60, Electrical Noise Tests. 2-4.03. Noise Level. The equivalent "A" weighted sound level for any system equipment located in the control room, except printers, shall not exceed 35 dBA. The sound level for printers shall not exceed 65 dBA. Sound reduction enclosures shall be provided where necessary to comply with these limits. 2-4.04. Lightning Protection. In addition to other environmental protection specified herein, the entire system shall be provided with lightning protection. Lightning protection measures shall include the following. 2-4.04.01. Grounding. All major components of the system shall have a low resistance ground connection. Grounding system provisions indicated on the Drawings shall be modified as recommended by System Supplier.

2-4.04.02. Surge Suppressors. Surge and lightning supressors shall be non-faulting, non-interrupting, and shall protect against line-to-line and line-to-ground surges. Devices shall be solid-state metal oxide varistor (MOV) or silicon junction type, with a response time of less than 50 nanoseconds. Surge protective devices shall be applied for the following:

a. All 120 VAC power connections to RTUs, PLCs, DCUs, instruments and control room equipment. Surge arresters shall be Transtector "ACP-100-HW Series", Power Integrity Corporation “ZTA Series”, Phoenix Contact “Mains PlugTrab”, or MCG Surge Protection “400 Series”.

c. All analog signal circuits where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Circuits shall be protected at both the transmitter and the control system end of the circuit. Surge protection devices shall not impede or interfere with the use of smart transmitter



calibration/communication. Protection devices located near the transmitter shall be Telematic “TP48.” Protection devices in control panels shall be Transtector “PDS Series or FSP Series”, Telematic “SD Series”, Phoenix Contact “PipeTrab Series”, or Citel “BP1-24.”

d. All metallic pair (twisted and untwisted) conductor local area network and data highway termination points, where any part of the data highway cable is routed outside of the building envelope. Single-port protective devices shall be Phoenix Contact “PlugTrab Series”, Transtector “FSP” Series”, or Telematic “NP Series.”

2-5. INSTALLATION TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary testing equipment for calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System Supplier. System Supplier shall also furnish calibration and maintenance records for all testing and calibration equipment used on the site if requested by Engineer. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. The installation of equipment furnished hereunder shall be by the Contractor or their assigned subcontractors. 3-1.01. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the electrical section. 3-1.02. Instrument Installation. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for some instruments are indicated on the Drawings. All outdoor instrumentation shall be protected from direct sun exposure. Instruments shall be placed in locations to limit south and west sun exposure. Sunshades shall be provided on instruments that are subject to the direct sun exposure. Sunshades shall be located so the opening faces north or east where possible. Sunshades shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. 3-1.03. Salvage of Existing Equipment. Existing equipment and materials removed or replaced under this contract shall be delivered to District at a location designated by District, or shall be properly disposed of at District’s discretion. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to equipment delivered to District. Any mounting brackets, enclosures, stilling wells, piping, conduits, wiring, or openings that remain after removal of equipment and support hardware shall be removed or repaired in a manner acceptable to District and Engineer. Transmitters or switches containing mercury shall be removed and disposed of



by personnel trained in the handling of hazardous materials and using approved procedures.

3-2. SYSTEM SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION. The system software will be configured by the District. System Supplier shall be responsible for the following configuration support tasks:

a. Configure the hardware and provide any necessary firmware or software programming associated with the hardware, configuration such as PLC, and RTU device address assignments.

b. Provide complete startup, checkout, and calibration of all system hardware and I/O specified herein.

3-3. SYSTEMS CHECK. System Supplier shall provide the services of a trained and experienced field supervisor to assist the installation contractor during installation, and to calibrate, test, and advise others of the procedures for installation, adjustment, and operation. 3-3.01. Field Inspection at Delivery. The field supervisor shall inspect major equipment items within five working days of delivery, to assure that the equipment was not damaged during shipment and shall supervise or assist with unpacking, initial placement, and initial wiring of the system. 3-3.02. Field Calibration of Instruments. After each instrument has been installed, a technical representative of System Supplier shall calibrate each instrument and shall provide a written calibration report for each instrument, indicating the results and final settings. The adjustments of calibrated instruments shall be sealed or marked, insofar as possible, to discourage tampering. Instrument calibration shall be done before checkout of the system operation. A typical instrument calibration report is attached to the end of this section. 3-3.03. Training for Installation Personnel. The field supervisor shall train the installation personnel in reading and understanding submittal drawings, and in the correct installation and wiring procedures for the equipment. 1 day shall be included for this training. 3-3.04. Field Inspection Prior to Start Up. After installation and wiring connections are complete, the field supervisor, with additional System Supplier’s personnel shall verify that each external connection to the system is correctly wired and field process components and devices are functioning as intended. A minimum of 1 working day shall be included for this task, but System Supplier shall be responsible for completing the following scope of work.



3-3.04.01. Analog Signals. Analog input signals shall be simulated at the transmitting source, and verified to be received at the proper register address in the control system. Analog outputs shall be generated at the control system, and verified to be received with the correct polarity, at the respective receiving device. 3-3.04.02. Discrete Signals. Discrete input and output signals shall be simulated and verified that they are received at the respective receiving device, and at the proper voltage. 3-3.04.03. Devices by Other Suppliers. If interrelated devices furnished by other suppliers, under other contracts, or by District, such as valve actuators, motor controls, chemical feeders, and instruments, do not perform properly at the time of system checkout, the field supervisor shall use suitable test equipment to introduce simulated signals to and/or measure signals from these devices to locate the sources of trouble or malfunction. 3-3.04.04. System Check Out Report. The System Supplier shall submit a written report on the results of such tests to Engineer. Additional documentation shall be furnished as requested by Engineer to establish responsibility for corrective measures. System Supplier shall verify, in writing, to Engineer or District that System Supplier has successfully completed the external connection check before beginning system startup or field acceptance testing. 3-3.05. Start Up Assistance. After the field supervisor has completed the system check and submitted his report, System Supplier shall supply a factory-trained engineer to provide on-site start up assistance. During the startup period, these personnel shall thoroughly check all equipment, correct any deficiencies, and verify the proper operation of all components. 2 working days shall be included for this task. 3-4. TESTING. The system shall be acceptance tested at the factory and on site. System Supplier shall prepare a testing procedure to be approved by District and Engineer that shall demonstrate that the system conforms to the specifications. The testing procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of testing. The testing shall be conducted by System Supplier and witnessed by District and/or Engineer. System Supplier shall notify Engineer and District in writing at least 14 days before the proposed testing date. If the factory acceptance test is concluded unsuccessfully, the test shall be repeated. System Supplier shall reimburse District and Engineer for all expenses incurred in connection with attending repeated factory or site testing necessitated by system failure or inadequate preparation.



3-4.01. Site Acceptance Testing. After installation and checkout by System Supplier’s personnel, the system shall be subjected to an acceptance test. Site acceptance testing shall be scheduled after receipt of the System Check Out Report and System Supplier shall verify that all field signal changes are reflected in the proper address locations in the system database. The site acceptance testing shall follow the same procedure as the factory testing and shall operate without loss of basic functions. The number of working days of continuous operation for the test shall be 5. The operational demonstration shall confirm that the status, alarm, and process variable signals are valid and are being updated appropriately, and that the discrete and analog output signals from the control system are being correctly transmitted and implemented. Any errors or abnormal occurrences shall be recorded by System Supplier’s field representative. System Supplier’s field representative need not be continuously present during the site acceptance testing, but shall be available to respond to the site within one hour of notification. The representative shall inspect the system for faults at least once every 24 hours and shall log or record any noted problems. The log shall include a description of the problem, its apparent cause, and any corrective action taken. 3-4.01.01. Failure of Redundant Equipment. Failure of redundant equipment shall not be considered downtime provided that automatic failover occurs as specified and, in the opinion of Engineer, the failure was not caused by deficiency in design or installation. In the event of repeated failure of any hardware component or software module, the acceptance test shall be terminated and re-started. 3-4.01.02. Completion of Test. Successful completion of the site acceptance test, including the operational demonstration, is prerequisite to Substantial Completion as specified in the Supplementary Conditions.

End of Section



INSTRUMENT NAME & SERVICE:

BRAND & MODEL NO.:

TAG OR LOOP NO.:

INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE:

INPUT

ACTUAL OUTPUT

DESIRED OUTPUT

PROPORTIONAL BAND:

RESET:

POSITION OF SWITCHES, JUMPERS, ETC.

COMMENTS:

DATE OF CALIBRATION: CALIBRATED BY:

Black & Veatch INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION REPORT

Figure 1-13500


Black & Veatch Instrument Device Schedule

Item Tag Loop Service Description Device Type Remarks Size Output Type Output Range Power PID DRAWING Specification Furnished By

1 HS 315Hydrophilic Mixing Pump Hand‐Off‐Auto Control

3 Position Selector Switch Dry Contact I‐04 16050 Contractor

2 LIT 315Hydrophilic HSW Level Indication Transmitter

Flange‐Mounted Pressure Transmitter

Provide with remote indicator, Pressure Transmitter is existing and shall be re‐installed as indicated in Drawings.

4‐20 mAEl 684.0 ‐ El 704.0 Feet

2‐WIRE I‐04 N/AExising Instrument (Foxboro) installed by Contractor

3 PI 315Hydrophilic Mixing Pump Suction Pressure Indication

Pressure Gauge with Diaphragm Seal

4 1/2" Dial

Compound 30"Hg/15 psig

I‐04 13563 Contractor

4 PI 316Hydrophilic Mixing Pump Discharge Pressure Indication

Pressure Gauge with Diaphragm Seal

4 1/2" Dial

0 ‐ 30 psig I‐04 13563 Contractor


13500A-1

3/11/15176424


Black & Veatch Input/Output Listing

Item Type No. Description Field Device

Controller ID or

Rem I/O

Analog Signal

Type

Analog Calibrated

Range

Analog

Power

Digital Signal

Type Digital Closed State

Digital Power

Source

Digital Interp

Relay P&ID

1 AI 1 Hydrophilic HSW Tank Level LIT‐315 PLC‐GTB 4‐20 mAEl 684.0 ‐

El 704.0 Feet2‐WIRE I‐04

2 AI 2Hydrophilic HSW Mixing Pump, PCL‐313, Speed Indication

PCL‐313 PLC‐GTB 4‐20 mA 0‐100% 2‐WIRE I‐04

3 AO 1Hydrophilic HSW Mixing Pump, PCL‐313, Speed Setpoint

PCL‐313 PLC‐GTB 4‐20 mA 0‐100% 2‐WIRE I‐04

4 DI 1Hydrophilic HSW Mixing Pump, PCL‐313, Failure

PCL‐313 PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Alarm PLC No I‐04

5 DI 2Hydrophilic HSW Mixing Pump, PCL‐313, In Auto

PCL‐313 PLC‐GTB 120 VAC In Auto PLC No I‐04

6 DI 3Hydrophilic HSW Mixing Pump, PCL‐313, Status Indication

PCL‐313 PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Running PLC No I‐04

7 DI 4Hydrophobic HSW Tank, Anti‐Scum Valve, In Remote

PV‐340A PLC‐GTB 120 VAC In Auto PLC No N/A

8 DI 5Hydrophobic HSW Tank, Anti‐Scum Valve, Open

PV‐340A PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Valve Open PLC No N/A

9 DI 6Hydrophobic HSW Tank, Anti‐Scum Valve, Closed

PV‐340A PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Valve Closed PLC No N/A

10 DO 1Hydrophilic HSW Mixing Pump, PSM‐313, Run Command

PSM‐313 PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Run Command Field Yes I‐04

Input/Output List - Legend/Description Sheet

DO = Discrete Output

PI = Pulse Input (totalizer or accumulator type input)

Number. This is a sequential number for a given type within a specific controller (PLC, RTU, or DCU).

Service Description. This is the description or the function (i.e. Filter No. 1 Loss-of-Head).

DI = Discrete Input

Item. This is an arbitrary sequential number which is for reference only.

Type: This is the type of I/O signal, as follows:

AI = Analog Input

AO = Analog Output

for additional details.

Field Device. This is the tag number of equipment identifier associated with the I/O point.

Field = External field power source. (May require interposing relays or isolated I/O module type.)

Local = Power originates from within the PLC or I/O enclosure.

Discrete Data (Power Source). This will indicate the location of the power source for the wetting voltage on the contacts, as follows:

Discrete Data (Closed State). This will indicate the state of the input or output when it is considered to be closed or energized (norma

Controller ID or Remote I/O. This is the identification for the PLC/RTU responsible for controlling this IO point or the RIO rack where t

Analog Data (Signal Type). This will typically be 4-20mA, but could also be 1-5Vdc, serial, HART, DeviceNet, ControlNet, or similar to

Analog Data (Calibrated Range). This will be the scaled value of the input in engineering units.

Discrete Data (Signal Type). This will be 120VAC, 24VDC, Bus, or similar to indicate the signal type of the associated input or output

Analog Data (Power). This will typically be '2-wire' for devices which are loop powered from the PLC enclosure, or '4-wire' for devices which are powered form external power supplies, unless noted otherwise.


13500B-1

3/11/15176424


Black & Veatch Input/Output Listing

Item Type No. Description Field Device

Controller ID or

Rem I/O

Analog Signal

Type

Analog Calibrated

Range

Analog

Power

Digital Signal

Type Digital Closed State

Digital Power

Source

Digital Interp

Relay P&ID

11 DO 2Hydrophobic HSW Tank, Anti‐Scum Valve, Open Command

PV‐340A PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Valve Open Cmnd PLC Yes N/A

12 DO 3Hydrophobic HSW Tank, Anti‐Scum Valve, Closed Command

PV‐340A PLC‐GTB 120 VAC Valve Close Cmnd PLC Yes N/A


13500B-2

3/11/15176424



Section 13550

SOFTWARE CONTROL BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section provides functional descriptions of the PLC and computer software requirements for the Instrumentation and Control System as indicated on the Drawings. These descriptions are intended to provide an overview of the operating concept of the plant process equipment rather than describing in detail every operating feature or interlock. This section is provided as configuration reference only. All configuration tasks shall be provided by the District. The contractor shall coordinate as necessary with the District to identify spare PLC inputs and terminals to be used for all signals identified in the I/O listing. For more information and an overview of the total system see Attachment to the Specifications, Co-Digestion Receiving Station Operational Narrative. 1-1.01. Control System. The Instrumentation and Control System section shall apply to all systems described in this section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. The descriptions are applicable to the existing PLC-GTB software PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. PLC PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. The following paragraphs describe general configuration tasks that are required for the system PLC(s). These tasks shall be programmed in any applicable PLC. Each PLC may have multiple instances of each of these tasks, or may have no instances of some or all of these tasks. The input/output lists (located in these documents as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section) and detailed equipment control descriptions (included herein) shall be referenced to determine the requirements for each PLC. The following paragraphs cover functional requirements of the software, which are generic and may or may not be related to any specific control loop.



3-1.01. Available Process Values. All PLC-generated process alarm, equipment status, and process variable values shall be available at any operator workstation. 3-1.02. Flow Values. Flow values shall be integrated, totalized, and stored in the PLC registers so the values displayed on the HMI computers and on the field processor will be identical. 3-1.03. System Failure. Failure of a PLC shall result in safe shutdown of associated process equipment. Interposing relays shall be provided where required to assure that equipment will revert to its fail-safe condition. Failure of any PLC or its communication shall be alarmed on the HMI computer. 3-1.04. HMI Computers. The HMI computers shall function as a monitoring system, not as a controller, for the process equipment. The computer shall download set points and other information to the PLCs, and the PLCs shall perform all control algorithms, so a temporary failure of the any HMI computer will not disrupt plant control. 3-1.05. Rack/Module Configuration. The rack and module definitions for each PLC, as well as the PLC communications configuration shall be completely configured to allow proper addressing of all field connected I/O points. This shall include configuration of any remote input/output (RIO) racks. 3-1.06. PLC Database Definition. The PLC database will include both field I/O points and internally generated points required for programming. All field I/O points and internal programming points shall be fully defined according to database naming conventions approved by Owner. As a minimum, each database point shall be provided with a tag name, engineering unit, alarm parameters, and description. 3-1.07. Analog Scaling. Each analog input and output will be appropriately scaled for use in internal PLC programming, monitoring by the HMI computers, or transmission to other PLCs. Requirements for raw count values shall be coordinated with the operator interface software to ensure compatibility. 3-1.08. Equipment Runtimes. For each equipment item whose "run" status is monitored by a PLC, an internal equipment runtime shall be accumulated by the respective PLC. The runtime procedure will monitor the status of the equipment "run" contact and, when the equipment is running, increment a software timer that maintains equipment runtime to within a one-minute resolution. The timer shall stop incrementing, but not reset, when the "run" contact indicates that the equipment is not running. The timer value shall increment an hour counter that maintains an integer value representing the equipment run time in hours. The counter value shall be available for display on the HMI computer. A manual reset



of the runtime value shall be available at the HMI computers for personnel at the supervisor level and above. 3-1.09. Change-of-State Alarms. While equipment is controllable from the PLC ("in remote"), discrete output commands shall be compared to their respective process feedback status signal (where available) to verify proper execution. If the feedback status does not match the most recent output command (after an adjustable 2 to 300 second time delay), an alarm message shall be displayed on the HMI computer and the condition shall be logged as an alarm, requiring operator acknowledgment. The alarm shall remain energized until the proper discrete condition is sensed or until the operator resets the alarm through the HMI computer. 3-1.10. Equipment Availability. In general, equipment with PLC control has been provided with a local selector switch that transfers control to the PLC. The PLC shall monitor the position of this switch to determine if the equipment is available for PLC control. If the equipment is not available, the PLC program shall not attempt to implement remote manual or automatic status changes for the equipment. The PLC program may, however, need to implement special routines if equipment unavailability affects a sequence (as described in the detailed equipment descriptions). 3-1.11. Maintained/Momentary Outputs. The need for maintained or momentary control outputs shall be determined from the input/output listing and the electrical schematics. In general, equipment with only one control output indicated in the I/O list shall be programmed for a maintained control output. Equipment with two (or more) control outputs shall be programmed for momentary outputs. Provisions shall be made, in either case, to remove the active state (start, open, forward, initiate, etc.) control output when an equipment failure is sensed or when the equipment transitions from available to unavailable (local switch change). 3-1.12. Equipment Mode Changes. Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment control descriptions, equipment in automatic mode shall be transitioned to manual mode (and stopped) if the equipment fails or becomes unavailable or if the PLC processor resets. 3-1.13. Manual/Auto Bumpless Transfer. Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment control descriptions, equipment changes from automatic to manual control shall be bumpless. Equipment running or stopped in automatic mode shall remain running or stopped when manual mode is selected. 3-2. HMI FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. The following paragraphs describe general configuration tasks that are required for the HMI and related software. 3-2.01. Database. The system database, including field I/O and internal points shall be established according to the database point naming conventions



approved by Owner. Database generation for field I/O shall include all required coordination with PLC level addresses. If no Owner database point naming conventions are available, the database names shall utilize an ISA or ISA-like tag name. 3-3. EQUIPMENT CONTROL AND CONTROL MODE OVERVIEW. The following paragraphs explain the general format and control modes that are used in the detailed equipment descriptions. These paragraphs apply to the attached, project specific, equipment control descriptions included herein. 3-3.01. General. Appended to this section are the equipment control programming requirements, with requirements for both PLC programming and the minimum operator interface functions. The HMI requirements represent the anticipated display generation requirements and shall be adjusted if the PLC programming warrants adjustment. 3-3.02. Control Modes. There are two general control modes available for the process equipment: 1) remote manual, and 2) remote auto. Remote manual control provides a means for operators to adjust equipment status or setpoint, through the HMI, using manually initiated commands. Remote automatic control provides a means for automatically changing equipment status or setpoint based on measured process parameters, calculated values, or operator setpoints. Some equipment may have more than one remote auto mode.

Descriptions for local control are included in the detailed equipment control descriptions. They are provided primarily for documentation purposes and for information. These controls are hardwired and require no programming effort.

3-4. DETAILED EQUIPMENT CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS. The following paragraphs describe specific function requirements for various software control blocks in the control system. These descriptions are intended to provide an overview of the operational concept for the facilities, rather than describing in detail every operating feature or interlock. Loop Description Title Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank Mixing Pump Associated Equipment PCL-313 Associated PLC PLC-GBT Associated P&ID(s) I-4



Local Manual Mode Local manual control of the hydrophilic HSW storage tank mixing pump shall be provided at the equipment. The local control panel shall have an ON-OFF-REMOTE (OOR) selector switch. When the OOR switch is in the ON position, the mixing pump shall run at the speed setpoint set at the VFD. Local Manual control of the pump via the VFD shall be provided at the VFD LCD control screen when the local control station switch is in REMOTE and the VFD LCD LOCAL- REMOTE (L- R) switch is in LOCAL. When the LCD control point ON is selected, the pump shall run and the speed adjusted through inputs entered at the VFD LCD controls. Local Auto Mode None Remote Manual Mode Remote manual control shall be provided through the PLC. When the OOR selector switch is in the REMOTE position and MANUAL is selected at the HMI, the mixing pump shall be controlled from the HMI using operator manual start/stop commands. The pump shall start/stop and the pump speed shall be adjusted based on the input entered at the HMI. Remote Auto Mode Remote automatic control shall be provided through the PLC. When the OOR selector switch is in the REMOTE position and AUTO is selected at the HMI, the pump shall run when level in the tank (as read by LIT-315) exceeds an operator adjustable “START” setpoint. When level falls below an operator adjustable “OFF” setpoint, the pump shall stop. The pump speed shall increase proportionally to the level. The level setpoint shall only be selectable from supervisory security level. Alarms The PLC shall receive a Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank Mixing Pump Failure alarm from the MCC. Status Indications The HMI shall indicate the following hydrophilic HSW storage tank mixing pump status: Mixing Pump Running, and Mixing Pump In Remote. PLC Powerup On PLC powerup, control of the pump shall be set to remote manual mode. Power Failure



Utility Power Restoration: Once utility power has been confirmed restored, Control of the pump shall resume with the control mode established prior to the power failure. HMI Requirements The Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank Mixing Pump shall be depicted on the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank system display. The display layout shall be similar to the P&ID. The pump symbol shall be a selectable target which retrieves the respective control overlay display. The overlay display shall contain control targets which allow selection of control mode (manual/auto), manual pump control (start/stop), auto mode, and level setpoint entry. Adjustment of level setpoints shall be accessible to the supervisor's security level.

End of Section



Section 13561

PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL. 1-1. SCOPE. The Panel Mounted Instruments section covers the furnishing of all panel mounted instruments and accessories required for the Instrumentation and Control System as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings. Equipment and services provided under this section shall be subject to the Instrumentation and Control System section. This section shall be used and referenced only in conjunction with the Instrumentation and Control System section. Supplementing the Instrumentation and Control System section, instrument data, special requirements, and options are indicated on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule. When multiple instruments of a particular type are specified, and each requires different features, the required features are described on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule. 1-2. DESIGN CRITERIA. The instruments shall be installed to measure, monitor, or display the specified process at the ranges and service conditions indicated on the Drawings or as indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instruments shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule. Where possible, each instrument shall be factory calibrated to the calibration ranges indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. Transmitters or similar measurement instruments shall be calibrated using National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) approved bench calibration procedures, when such procedures exist for the instrument type. For "smart" devices, calibration data shall be stored digitally in each device, including the instrument tag designation indicated on the Drawings and/or Instrument Device Schedule. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Submittals shall be as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. The following paragraphs describe minimum device stipulations. The Drawings or Instrument Device Schedule shall be used to determine any additional instrument options, requirements, or service conditions.



2-1.01 Programming Device. For systems that require a dedicated programming device for calibration, maintenance, or troubleshooting, one such programming device shall be provided for each Owner facility (quantity required shall be as indicated in the Instrumentation and Control System section). The programming device shall include appropriate operation manuals and shall be included in the training stipulations. For systems that allow the programming device functions to be implemented in software, running on a laptop computer, the software shall be provided instead of the programming device. 2-2. PANEL FRONT MOUNTED DEVICES. 2-2.01. Switches, Lights, and Push Buttons. 2-2.01.01. Selector Switches. Selector switches shall be 30.5-mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight type with gloved-hand or wing lever operators. Position legends shall be engraved on the switch faceplate. Switches for electric circuits shall have silver butting or sliding contacts, rated 10 amperes continuous at 120 V ac. Contact configuration shall be as indicated on the Drawings or for the application. Switches used in electronic signal circuits shall have contacts suitable for that duty. Switches shall be Eaton/Cutler-Hammer "10250T", General Electric "CR104P", or Allen Bradley “800T”. 2-2.01.02. Indicating Lights. Indicating lights shall be 30.5-mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight type, with full voltage LED lamps. Legends shall be engraved on the lens or on a legend faceplate. Lights shall be push-to-test type. Indicating lights shall be Eaton/Cutler Hammer "10250T", General Electric "CR104P", or Allen Bradley “800T”. 2-2.01.03. Push Buttons. Push buttons shall be 30.5-mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight type. Legends shall be engraved on the push-button faceplate. Contacts shall be rated 10 amperes continuous at 120 V ac. Push buttons shall be Eaton/Cutler-Hammer "10250T", General Electric "CR104P", or Allen Bradley “800T”. 2-3. PANEL INTERIOR MOUNTED DEVICES. 2-3.01. Relays. Relays indicated to be provided in panels, enclosures, or systems furnished under this section shall be of the plug-in socket base type with dustproof plastic enclosures unless noted otherwise. Relays shall be UL recognized and shall have not less than double-pole, double-throw contacts. Control circuit relays shall have silver cadmium oxide contacts rated 10 amperes at 120 V ac. Electronic switching-duty relays shall have gold-plated or gold alloy contacts suitable for use with low-level signals. Relays used for computer input, alarm input, or indicating light service shall have contacts rated at least 3 amperes. Time delay relays shall have dials or switch settings engraved in



seconds and shall have timing repeatability of ±2 percent of setting. Latching and special purpose relays shall be for the specific application. Unless otherwise indicated, all relays shall have an integral pilot light that illuminates to indicate an energized condition. Relays shall be IDEC "Series RR"; Potter & Brumfield "Series KRP, CB"; or Struthers-Dunn "Series 219, 246".

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3-1 FIELD SERVICES. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided for installation, field calibration, startup, and training as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section. Instruments shall not be shipped to the Work Site until two weeks prior to the scheduled installation. System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the installation schedule with the Installation Contractor. Each shipment shall contain a listing of protective measures required to maintain sensor operation, including a listing of any common construction or cleaning chemicals that may affect instrument operation.

End of Section



Section 13563

PRESSURE AND LEVEL INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of pressure and level instruments and accessories required for the Instrumentation and Control System as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings. Equipment and services provided under this section shall be subject to the Instrumentation and Control System section. This section shall be used and referenced only in conjunction with the Instrumentation and Control System section. Supplementing the Instrumentation and Control System section, instrument data, special requirements, and options are indicated on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule. When multiple instruments of a particular type are specified, and each requires different features, the required features are described on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule. 1-2. DESIGN CRITERIA. Each device shall be a pre-assembled, packaged unit. Upon delivery to the work site, each device or system shall be ready for installation with only minor piping and electrical connections required by Contractor. Primary elements shall derive any required power from the transmitter, unless otherwise indicated. The instruments shall be installed to measure, monitor, or display the specified process at the ranges and service conditions indicated on the Drawings or as indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instruments shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. Where possible, each instrument shall be factory calibrated to the calibration ranges indicated in the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. Transmitters or similar measurement instruments shall be calibrated using National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) approved bench calibration procedures, when such procedures exist for the instrument type. Calibration data shall be stored digitally in each device, including the instrument tag designation indicated on the Drawings and/or Instrument Device Schedule. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Submittals shall be made as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section.



1-4. SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE. Equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, protected, and stored in accordance with the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control System section. Identification of packaging shall be as described in the Instrumentation and Control System section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. The following paragraphs provide minimum device stipulations. The Drawings or Instrument Device Schedule shall be used to determine any additional instrument options, requirements, or service conditions. 2-1.01. Interconnecting Cable. For systems where the primary element and transmitter are physically separated, interconnecting cable from the element to the transmitter shall be provided. The cable shall be the type approved by the instrument manufacturer for the intended purpose of interfacing the element to the transmitter. Length of cable shall be a minimum of three meters or as indicated in the Drawings or Instrument Device Schedule. 2-1.02. Programming Device. For systems that require a dedicated programming device for calibration, maintenance, or troubleshooting, one such programming device shall be provided for each Owner facility (quantity required shall be as indicated in the Instrumentation and Control System section.) The programming device shall include appropriate operation manuals and shall be included in the training requirements. For systems that allow the programming device functions to be implemented in software, running on a laptop computer, the software shall be provided instead of the programming device. 2-1.03. Configuration Software/Serial Interface. Devices indicated as requiring a serial interface shall be provided with all accessories required to properly communicate over the serial link. An appropriate cable shall be provided to allow the transmitter serial interface to be connected to a personal computer. One licensed copy of the diagnostic/interface software shall be provided for each Owner facility (quantity required shall be as indicated in the Instrumentation and Control System section). Software shall be capable of running under Microsoft’s Windows XP operating system. If the software furnished performs the same functions as the programming device, specified elsewhere, then the programming device shall not be furnished.

2-2. PRESSURE AND LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION.

2-2.01. Radar Level Transmitters. Not used.



2-2.02. Field-Mount Pressure Gauges. Pressure gauges shall be of the indicating dial type, with C-type phosphor bronze Bourdon tube; stainless steel rotary geared movement; phenolic or polypropylene open front turret case; adjustable pointer; stainless steel, phenolic, or polypropylene ring; and acrylic plastic or shatterproof glass window. Gauge dial shall be 4-1/2 inch size, with white background and black markings. The units of measurement shall be indicated on the dial face. Subdivisions of the scale shall conform to the requirements of the governing standard. Pointer travel shall be not less than 200 degrees or more than 270 degrees of arc. Surface-mounted gauges shall be provided with 1/4 inch NPT connections. All stem-mounted gauges shall be provided with 1/2 inch NPT connections. Where indicated in the Drawings or on the Instrument Device Schedule, stem mounted gauges shall have an adjustable viewing angle to allow the gauge to be positioned for optimum viewing. All pressure gauges shall measure in psi and all vacuum gauges in inches water. All gauges shall have a suitable range to give mid-scale readings under normal conditions. Gauge accuracy shall be 0.5 percent of scale range. Each gauge shall be provided with a threaded end, ball-type gauge valve. Gauge valve materials shall be compatible with the measured process. Where the process is not defined, gauge valves shall have AISI Type 316 stainless steel wetted parts and Teflon seals. Multi-port gauge valves shall have all unused ports plugged. Gauge valve construction shall be as detailed in Section 13565. Where indicated on the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule, the pressure gauge shall be provided with a pressure snubber. Each snubber shall be of a size and pressure range compatible with the gauge served. Snubbers shall be Ashcroft "Pulsation Dampers", or approved equal. Where indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule, a diaphragm seal shall be provided for the respective gauge. Diaphragm seals shall be thread-attached type with removable AISI Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm, zinc or cadmium plated carbon steel upper housing, and stainless steel lower housing. The upper housing shall be contoured to fit and provide a seat and seal for the diaphragm and shall be designed to permit removal of the gauge with the system under pressure. The lower housing shall be provided with a tapped and plugged 1/4 inch NPT flushing connection. Each diaphragm seal and the gauge served shall be factory assembled, filled with a suitable fluid, and calibrated as a unit. Gauges shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings, with installation conforming to the installation details. All gauges, snubbers, and diaphragm seals shall be installed in the vertical, upright position. Thread sealer,



suitable for use with the associated process, shall be used in the assembly of threaded connections. All connections shall be free from leaks. Lines shall be purged of trapped air at gauge locations prior to installation of the gauge or diaphragm seal. Each gauge shall be provided with all required mounting hardware to securely mount the unit according to the mounting requirements indicated in the Drawings or the Instrument Device Schedule. Unless otherwise indicated, mounting and installation hardware shall be Type 316L stainless steel. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft "1279 Duragauge", or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. FIELD SERVICES. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided for installation, field calibration, startup, and training as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section. This shall include recalibration of the existing pressure transmitter to re-located to monitor level in the Hydrophilic HSW Tank (existing LE/LIT-315). Instruments shall not be shipped to the Work Site until two weeks prior to the scheduled installation. System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the installation schedule with the Installation Contractor. Each shipment shall contain a listing of protective measures required to maintain sensor operation, including a listing of any common construction or cleaning chemicals that may affect instrument operation.

End of Section



Section 15010

VALVE INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of new valves and actuators purchased by Contractor as part of this Work or purchased by others under the valve specifications. The equipment to be furnished by others for installation by Contractor is identified in the applicable valve schedules or on the drawings.

Cleaning, disinfection, pressure and leakage testing, insulation, and pipe supports are covered in other sections. The following specification sections are applicable to valves to be installed:

Title Miscellaneous Ball Valves Eccentric Plug Valves

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

Any valves and actuators that are identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for installation by Contractor. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be purchased are available.

1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services or installation check services are provided by the valve manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the valve manufacturer. Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services. Submittals for equipment that will be furnished by others under each procurement contract will be furnished to Contractor upon completion of review by Engineer. Contractor shall review equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria. Flanged, push-on, and grooved connections to valves including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the appropriate pipe specification section. Valve ends shall match piping.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSPECTION. All valves and accessories shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and re-cleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by Owner or his representative before its use. 3-2. INSTALLATION.

3-2.01. General. Valves shall be installed with sufficient clearance for proper operation of any external mechanisms, and with sufficient clearance to dismantle the valve for in-place maintenance. Installation shall be in accordance with the valve manufacturer’s recommendations.

Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, all valves installed in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the finish floor shall be installed with their operating stems vertical. Valves installed in horizontal runs of piping having centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above the finish floor shall be installed with their operating stems horizontal. If adjacent piping prohibits this, the stems and operating handwheel shall be installed above the valve horizontal centerline as close to horizontal as possible. Valves installed in vertical runs of pipe shall have their operating stems oriented to facilitate the most practicable operation, as reviewed by Engineer.

3-2.02. Installation Checks. When specified in the valve sections, the valve manufacturer will provide installation checks. For installation checks, the manufacturer’s field representative will inspect the valve installation immediately following installation by Contractor. The manufacturer's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation satisfactory to Owner. Contractor shall perform no work related to the installation or operation of materials or equipment furnished by others without direct observation and guidance of the field representative, unless Engineer and manufacturer furnishing such materials concur otherwise.



3-2.03. Eccentric Plug Valves. Eccentric plug valves shall be installed with the shaft horizontal and the plug in the upper half of the valve body. Valves in horizontal wastewater, sludge, or scum lines shall be installed with the seat on the upstream end. Valves in all vertical piping shall be installed with the seat at the upper end of the valve. 3-3. VALVE ACTUATORS. Valve actuators and accessories shall be factory mounted on the valve, calibrated, and tested by the valve or actuator manufacturer. 3-4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3.4.01. Field Testing. After installation, all valves shall be tested in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. 3-4.01.01. Pressure Tests. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section.

3-4.01.02. Leakage Tests. All valves shall be free from leaks. Each leak that is discovered within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor. This requirement applies whether pressure testing is required or not. 3-5. ADJUSTING. After installation, the opening and closing time shall be adjusted as needed for each pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuated valve.

End of Section



Section 15020

MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of piping and accessories as

indicated on the Drawings for the following piping sections:

Section Title Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

Contractor shall furnish all necessary jointing materials, coatings, and accessories that are specified herein. Pipe supports and anchors shall be furnished by Contractor, and are covered in the Pipe Supports section. Pipe trenching and backfilling are covered in the Trenching and Backfilling section. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. Coordination. Materials installed under this section shall be installed in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Items requiring submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

Watertight/dusttight pipe sleeves.

Materials as specified herein.

1-3.02. Welder Certification. Prior to the start of the work, Contractor shall submit a list of the welders he proposes using and the type of welding for which each has been qualified. Copy of certification and identification stamp shall be submitted for each welder. Qualification tests may be waived if evidence of prior qualification is deemed suitable by Engineer.



1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE.

1-4.01. Welding and Brazing Qualifications. All welding and brazing procedures and operators shall be qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section IX of the ASME Code. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. 1-4.02. Tolerances. These tolerances apply to in-line items and connections for other lines. The general dimension, such as face-to-face, face or end-to-end, face- or end-to center, and center-to-center shall be 1/8 inch. The inclination of flange face from true in any direction shall not exceed 3/64 inch per foot . Rotation of flange bolt holes shall not exceed 1/16 inch. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Pipe, tubing, and fittings covered herein shall be installed in the services indicated in the various pipe sections.

2-2. MATERIALS.

Threaded Fittings

Anti-Seize Thread Lubricant

Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane "Thred Gard Nickel", Never-Seez "Pure Nickel Special", or Permatex "Nickel Anti-Seize".

Teflon Thread Sealer Paste type; Hercules "Real-tuff", John Crane "JC-30", or Permatex "Thread Sealant with Teflon".



Teflon Thread Tape Hercules "Tape Dope" or John Crane "Thread-Tape".

Solvent Welded Fittings

Solvent cement for PVC Systems

ASTM D2564.

Solvent cement for CPVC Systems

ASTM F493.

Sodium Hypochlorite, Sodium Hydroxide, and Sodium Bisulfite Service

IPS Corporation "Weld-On 724"

Primer for PVC Systems ASTM F656.

Solder or Brazed Fittings

Solder

Solid wire, ASTM B32, ANSI/NSF 61 certified, Alloy Grade Sb5, (95-5).

Soldering Flux Paste type, ASTM B813.

Brazing Filler Metal AWS A5.8, BCuP-5; Engelhard "Silvaloy 15", Goldsmith "GB-15", or Handy & Harman "Sil-Fos".

Brazing Flux Paste type, Fed Spec O-F-499, Type B.

Insulating Fittings

Threaded Dielectric steel pipe nipple, ASTM A53, Schedule 40, polypropylene lined, zinc plated; Perfection Corp. "Clearflow Fittings".

Flanged Epco "Dielectric Flange Unions" or Central Plastics "Insulating Flange Unions".

Pipe Insulation See Mechanical Insulation section.

Watertight/Dusttight Pipe Sleeves O-Z Electrical Manufacturing "Thruwall" and "Floor Seals", or Thunderline "Link-Seals"; with modular rubber sealing elements, nonmetallic pressure plates, and galvanized bolts.



Pipe Sleeve Sealant Polysulfide or urethane, as specified in the Caulking section or as indicated on the Drawings.

Protective Coatings

Tape Wrap ANSI/AWWA C209, except single ply tape thickness shall not be less than 30 mils; Protecto Wrap "200" or Tapecoat "CT".

Primer As recommended by the tape manufacturer.

Coal Tar Epoxy High-build coal tar epoxy; PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline "Bitumastic 300 M", Tnemec "46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy".

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. All piping components shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and recleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by Owner or his representative before its use. 3-2. PREPARATION. 3-2.01. Field Measurement. Pipe shall be cut to measurements taken at the site, not from the Drawings. All necessary provisions shall be made in laying out piping to allow for expansion and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of contact with building construction to avoid transmission of noise resulting from expansion. 3-3. INSTALLATION. 3-3.01. General. All instruments and specialty items shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions and with sufficient clearance and access for ease of operation and maintenance. Flat faced wrenches and vises shall be used for copper tubing systems. Pipe wrenches and vises with toothed jaws will damage copper materials and shall not be used. Bends in soft temper tubing shall be shaped with bending tools.



3-3.02. Pipe Sleeves. Piping passing through concrete or masonry shall be installed through sleeves that have been installed before the concrete is placed or when masonry is laid. Pipe sleeves installed through floors with a special finish, such as ceramic or vinyl composition tile, shall be flush with the finished floor surface and shall be provided with nickel or chromium plated floor plates. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, in all other locations where pipes pass through floors, pipe sleeves shall project not less than 1 inch nor more than 2 inches above the floor surface, with the projections uniform within each area. In the case of insulated pipes, the insulation shall extend through pipe sleeves. Where the Drawings indicate future installation of pipe, sleeves fitted with suitable plastic caps or plugs shall be provided. Holes drilled with a suitable rotary drill will be considered instead of sleeves for piping which passes through interior walls and through floors with a special finish. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all pipes passing through walls or slabs which have one side in contact with earth or exposed to the weather shall be sealed watertight with special rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies, or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements. 3-3.03. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the indicated requirements. 3-3.03.01. Threaded. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT, and shall be fully and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed after threading and before assembly to remove all burrs. Unless otherwise indicated, threaded joints shall be made up with teflon thread tape, thread sealer, or a suitable joint compound. Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. Threaded joints in stainless steel piping shall be made up with teflon thread sealer and teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. Threaded joints in steel piping for chlorine service shall be made up with teflon thread tape or litharge and glycerine paste applied to all male threads. 3-3.03.02. Compression. Ends of tubing shall be cut square and all burrs shall be removed. The tubing end shall be fully inserted into the compression fitting and the nut shall be tightened not less than 1-1/4 turns and not more than 1-1/2 turns past fingertight, or as recommended by the fitting manufacturer, to produce a leaktight, torque-free connection. 3-3.03.03. Flared. Ends of annealed copper tubing shall be cut square, and all burrs shall be removed prior to flaring. Ends shall be uniformly flared without



scratches or grooves. Fittings shall be tightened as needed to produce leaktight connections. 3-3.03.04. Soldered and Brazed. Where solder fittings are specified for lines smaller than 2 inches, joints may be soldered or brazed at the option of Contractor. Brazing alloy shall contain no tin. Surfaces to be joined shall be thoroughly cleaned with flint paper and coated with a thin film of flux. At each joint, tubing shall enter to the full depth of the fitting socket. Care shall be taken to avoid overheating the metal or flux. Each joint shall be uniformly heated to the extent that filler metal will melt on contact. While the joint is still hot, surplus filler metal and flux shall be removed with a rag or brush. 3-3.03.05. Solvent Welded. Solvent welded connections shall only be used for PVC or CPVC pipe. All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing procedures shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to the dimensions recommended by the manufacturer. Newly assembled joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the setting time recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure testing of solvent welded piping systems shall not be performed until the applicable curing time, as set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D2855, has elapsed. Solvent welding shall be performed by bonding operators who have met the requirements of ASME B31.3 and A328. 3-3.03.06. Epoxy and Adhesive Bonded. Epoxy and adhesive bonded joints shall only be used for FRP pipe. All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing procedures shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Adhesive shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. After joining, either the pipe or the fitting shall be rotated approximately one-half turn to uniformly distribute adhesive. A slight fillet of adhesive at the bond line is desirable, but all excess adhesive shall be wiped off immediately. Newly assembled joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the curing period recommended by the manufacturer. 3-3.03.07. Flanged. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but shall not be torqued less than the minimum value required by the gasket manufacturer. Flange bolts shall not be so tight as to fracture or distort the flanges. A plain washer shall be installed under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. Flange bolt holes shall be oriented as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the spool drawings:



Vertical flange face: Bolt holes to straddle the vertical centerlines.

Horizontal flange face: Bolt holes shall be aligned with connecting pipe.

Pipe sealants, thread compounds, or other coatings shall not be applied to flange gaskets unless recommended by the gasket manufacturer for the specified service and approved by Engineer. Welds at orifice flanges shall have internal surfaces ground smooth to the pipe wall. Slip-on flanges shall be welded inside and outside. There shall be a distance of approximately 1/16 to 1/8 inch between the edge of the fillet weld and the face of the flange. The seal weld shall be applied so that the flange face shall be free of weld spatter and does not require refacing. Flat-faced flanges shall be used when mating to Class 125 flanges. Full-face gaskets shall be used with flat-faced flanges and ring gaskets shall be used with raised faced flanges. Weld neck flanges shall be used with butt-weld fittings. The bore of weld neck flanges shall match the pipe wall thickness. Insulating joints connecting submerged (buried) piping to exposed piping shall be installed above the maximum water surface elevation and before the first pipe support not having coated anchor bolts or adhesive-bonded concrete anchors. All submerged (buried) metallic piping shall be isolated from the concrete reinforcement. Insulating flanges shall be tested for electrical isolation after installation and bolt-up but prior to introduction of conducting fluid. 3-3.03.08. Welded. Welding shall conform to the specifications and recommendations contained in the "Code for Pressure Piping", ANSI B31.1. Weld cross-sections shall be equal to or greater than the pipe wall thickness. Welds shall be smooth and continuous and shall have interior projections no greater than 1/16 inch. Backing strips or rings shall not be used except with specific prior review by Engineer as to use, material, and design. Root gap inserts that are completely melted and consumed in the weld bead are acceptable only when reviewed in advance by Engineer. Stainless steel welding shall be inert gas tungsten arc (TIG) or the direct current, straight polarity, inert gas metal arc process (MIG). Carbon steel welding shall be made by the shielded metal arc process.



For socket weld joints, fully engage the two pipe ends, then separate them by 1/16 inch prior to welding to all space for shrinkage.

3-3.03.09. Grooved Couplings. Grooves for grooved couplings shall be cut with a specially designed grooving tool. Grooves cut in steel pipe shall conform to flexible grooving dimensions, as set forth in AWWA C606, and shall be clean and sharp without burrs or check marks. 3-3.03.10. Rubber-Gasketed. Rubber-gasketed joints for hub and spigot type cast iron soil pipe shall have plain spigot ends, without beads. Cut ends of all pipe shall be cut square, beveled, and all burrs shall be removed. Spigot ends shall be coated with a lubricant recommended by the gasket manufacturer and fully seated in the gasket. Clamps for hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3-3.04. Pipe. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the Drawings, or, in the absence of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner which would induce stresses in the pipe, valves, or connecting equipment. Piping shall be supported in conformance with the Pipe Supports section. Piping shall be connected to equipment by flanges or unions as specified in the various piping sections. Piping connecting to equipment shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment. Water, gas, and air supply piping shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union at each fixture or unit of equipment, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, to permit isolation and disconnection of each item without disturbing the remainder of the system. Air supply piping shall be provided with sectionalizing valves and valved air inlet connections as needed for isolation of portions of the system for periodic testing. Gas supply lines to buildings shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union located above grade immediately outside the building. A capped drip leg shall be provided at the bottom of the vertical riser of gas supply piping adjacent to gas-fired appliances. A union shall be provided within 2 feet of each threaded-end valve unless there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in piping adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and where required by the Drawings or the Specifications. Water supply piping within structures shall be arranged, and facilities provided, for complete drainage. All piping serving metering equipment shall be uniformly graded so that air traps are eliminated and complete venting is provided.



Yard pipe chases shall drain to French drains at their low points as shown on drawings. Taps for pressure gauge connections on the suction and discharge of pumping units shall be provided with a nipple and a ball type shutoff valve. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls for installation of pressure gauges or switches will not be permitted.

In all piping, insulating fittings shall be provided to prevent contact of dissimilar metals, including but not limited to, contact of copper, brass, or bronze pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances, or stainless steel pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances with iron or steel pipe, fittings, valves, or appurtenances. Insulating fittings shall also be provided to prevent contact of copper, brass, or bronze pipe, tubing, fittings, valves or appurtenances with stainless steel pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances. Branch connections in horizontal runs of steam, air, and gas piping shall be made from the top of the pipe. Buried PVC piping shall be "snaked" in the pipe chase and shall be kept as cool as possible during installation. PVC pipe shall be kept shaded and shall be covered with backfill immediately after installation. Polyethylene piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A continuous 12 AWG THHN insulated copper tracer wire shall be placed 6 inches above all portions of the buried pipe, but no more than 18 inches below the ground surface. Where the pipe extends above grade, a 2 foot length of wire shall be coiled and attached to the pipe. Piping adjacent to flow sensors shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of the flow sensor and commonly accepted design practices of the appropriate straight pipe runs both upstream and downstream. Drains required for operation are shown on the Drawings. However, vents at all high points and drains at all low points in the piping that are required for complete draining for pressure test may not be shown on these Drawings. Contractor shall add such items as found to be necessary during detail piping design and/or piping installation. 3-3.05. Valves. Isolation valves provided with equipment and instruments shall be located in a manner which will allow ease of access and removal of the items to be isolated. Prior to soldering or brazing valves, teflon and elastomer seats and seals shall be removed to prevent damage.



3-4. PIPING ASSEMBLY. 3-4.01. General. Contractor shall only use labor that has been qualified by training and experience to capably perform the specified activities required to accomplish the work in a satisfactory manner Any deviations from the Specifications or piping locations shown on the Drawings require prior review and approval by Engineer.

3-4.02. Buttwelded Piping. The specification and qualification of weld joints and welders for buttwelded piping shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing. Weld procedure specifications (WPS) and procedure qualification reports (PQR) shall be submitted to Engineer for review and validation of joint design, efficiencies and strength before installation begins. Nondestructive examination (NDE) shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, Nondestructive Examination. The minimum level of NDE shall be as follows:

(1) 100 percent visual examination of welds by a qualified examiner (per ASME B31.1), and

(2) Radiographic testing (RT) of 10 percent random sampling of welds.

If the Contractor wants to use alternative techniques or intends to apply alternative methods considered equivalent to those indicated herein, a proposal on such techniques or methods shall be submitted in writing to Engineer for review and approval at least 14 days before intended date of use. Welding shall not begin until weld joint and welder qualification submittals have been reviewed and approved. NDE shall be performed before the pressure and leakage testing of the piping. Weld acceptance standards shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1, Chapter VI. If a weld fails the NDE, it shall be repaired and the test repeated at no additional cost to the Owner.

3-5. PROTECTIVE COATING. Standard weight steel pipe in buried locations will have exterior surfaces protected with a shop applied plastic coating. Where specified in the Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories section, extra strong steel pipe in buried locations will have exterior surfaces protected with a shop applied plastic coating or a shop applied tape wrap. Where not specified to be shop coated or wrapped in the Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing and Accessories section, a tape wrap shall be field applied. The



exterior surfaces of all fittings, couplings, specials, and other portions of buried piping not protected with plastic coating shall be tape-wrapped in the field. All surfaces to be tape-wrapped shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations immediately before wrapping. The tape shall be applied by two-ply (half-lap) wrapping or as needed to provide a total installed tape thickness of at least 60 mils. Joints in plastic-coated pipe shall be cleaned, primed, and tape-wrapped after installation. Joints in galvanized steel piping in underground locations shall be field painted with two coats of coal tar epoxy coating. 3-5.01. Inspection. All shop-applied plastic coatings and tape wrap on pipe or fittings shall be inspected for holidays and other defects after receipt of the pipe or fitting on the job and immediately before installation. All field-applied tape wrap on pipe, joints, fittings, and valves shall be inspected for holidays and other defects following completion of wrapping. Inspection of plastic coatings after installation of the pipe or fitting in the pipe chase shall be made where, in the opinion of Engineer, the coating may have been damaged during installation. Holidays and defects disclosed by inspection shall be repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the coating or tape wrap manufacturer, as applicable. The inspection shall be made using an electrical holiday detector. The detector and inspection procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.4 of ANSI/AWWA C209. 3-6. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING. All specified tests shall be made by and at the expense of Contractor in the presence, and to the satisfaction of Engineer. Each piping system shall be tested for at least 1 hour with no loss of pressure. The Contractor shall coordinate this section with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. Piping shall be tested at the indicated pressures:

Service Test Pressure Test Medium

Water supply 1-1/2 times working pressure but not less than 120 psi

Water

Other piping 1-1/2 times working pressure but not less than 50 psi

Suitable fluid or gas; for distilled water piping, distilled water or filtered oil-free compressed air may be used

Compressed air or pressurized gas shall not be used for testing plastic piping unless specifically recommended by the pipe manufacturer.



Leakage may be determined by loss-of-pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method acceptable to Engineer. All fixtures, devices, or accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure shall be disconnected and the ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as needed during the testing. Unless otherwise required by the applicable codes, drainage and venting systems shall be water tested. For water testing, the drainage and venting system shall be filled with water to the level of the highest vent stack. For air testing, the system shall be charged with air to a minimum pressure of 5 psig. Openings shall be plugged as necessary for either type of test. To be considered free of leaks, the system shall hold the water or air for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level or air pressure. All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances and devices, shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of Contractor. Contractor shall give Engineer 5 working days advanced notice of scheduled testing. All joints in piping shall be tight and free of leaks. All joints which are found to leak, by observation or during any specified test, shall be repaired, and the tests repeated. 3-7. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free of blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when installed. Before being placed in service, the interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of Engineer. 3-8. ACCEPTANCE. Owner reserves the right to have any section of the piping system which he suspects may be faulty cut out of the system by Contractor for inspection and testing. Should the joint prove to be sound, Owner will reimburse Contractor on a time-and-material basis as specified in the Contract. Should the joint prove to be faulty, the destructive test will continue joint by joint in all directions until sound joints are found. Costs for replacement of faulty work and/or materials shall be the responsibility of Contractor.

End of Section



Section 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers general mechanical building system requirements for the HVAC, plumbing, and hydronic systems as referenced from other sections and furnishing and installation of:

Mechanical identification

for the plumbing and heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Protective coatings for ductwork and equipment without special coatings shall be as specified in the Protective Coatings sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. Where two or more units of the same class of materials are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable local codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations which pertain to such work. In case of a conflict between these specifications and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern. 1-2.04. Metal Thickness. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete information, detailed specifications, and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the



materials furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section.

Number Plates Product data on number plates. A listing of equipment to receive number plates shall be submitted.

Equipment Motors Name of Manufacturer. Type and Model. Horsepower (kW) rating and service factor. Temperature rise and insulation rating. Full load rotative speed. Type of bearings and method of lubrication. Net weight. Overall dimensions. Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 loads. Full load current and power factor. Locked rotor current. Adjustable Frequency Drives Type and model. Name of manufacturer. Operating speed range, rpm. Rated bhp [kW] at maximum speed. Efficiency at maximum speed, percent. Maximum heat output, BTUH [kW]. Speed at maximum heat output, rpm. Dimensions and net weight of complete panel. Catalog and data sheets on all components. Electrical schematics and wiring diagrams.

1-3.02. Samples. Samples shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section.

1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Welding Qualifications. All welding procedures and welding operators shall be qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be in written form and subject to Engineer's review. Accurate records of operator and procedure qualifications shall be maintained by Contractor and made available to Engineer upon request. 1-4.02. Manufacturer's Experience. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in this section, the manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years.



1-5. EXTRA MATERIALS. The following extra materials shall be furnished for the listed equipment: Touchup special coating material Extra materials shall be packaged in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Each label shall indicate manufacturer's name, equipment name, equipment designation, part nomenclature, part number, address of nearest distributor, and current list price. Extra materials shall be delivered to Owner as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. All equipment shall be designed and selected to meet the specified conditions. Where equipment is provided with special coatings, unit capacities shall be corrected to account for any efficiency losses from the selected special coating. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. 2-2.01. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values of the first manufacturer listed. Contractor shall review the contract Drawings, the manufacturer’s layout drawings, and installation requirements and shall make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. 2-2.02. Elevation. Equipment shall be designed to operate at the elevation indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. All equipment furnished for sites above 2000 feet [610 m] above sea level shall be properly derated to operate and meet the specified capacities at the site conditions. 2-2.03. Equipment Efficiencies. Unless otherwise indicated in the respective equipment paragraph, the equipment efficiency shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE Energy Standard 90.1. 2-2.04. Drive Units. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hour continuous service. 2-2.04.01. V-Belt Drives. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable belt tension adjustment. V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.5 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower [kW] of the drive motor unless otherwise indicated in the specific equipment paragraph.



Multiple belts shall be provided in matched sets and shall be oil resistant, non-static type. External belts and drive assemblies shall be protected by a belt safety guard constructed in accordance with OSHA requirements. The guard shall be provided with a tachometer opening. Unless otherwise indicated in the specific equipment paragraph, equipment with smaller than 10 horsepower [7.5 kW] motors shall have adjustable pitch sheaves and equipment with 10 horsepower [7.5 kW] and larger motors shall have fixed sheaves. Adjustable sheaves shall be selected so that the fan speed at the specified conditions is selected at the mid-position of the sheave range. Fixed sheaves shall be replaced as necessary with sheaves of the proper size during the air system balancing to provide the required speed for the specified airflow. 2-2.04.02. Electric Motors. Motor horsepower scheduled on the Drawings are minimum motor horsepower. Larger motors shall be provided if required to meet the specified capacities for the equipment furnished. Motors furnished with equipment shall meet the following requirements.

a. Premium efficient motors with a minimum efficiency of at least that specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section shall be provided where available as a standard option. All other motors shall meet the minimum efficiency standards required by the Energy Policy Act (EPACT) of 1992.

b. Designed and applied in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, AFBMA, and NEC for the duty service imposed by the driven equipment, such as frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment.

c. Rated for continuous duty at 40°C ambient.

d. Motors used in applications which exceed the usual service conditions as defined by NEMA, such as higher than 40°C ambient, altitude exceeding 3,300 feet [1005 m], explosive or corrosive environments, departure from rated voltage and frequency, poor ventilation, frequent starting, or adjustable frequency drive applications, shall be properly selected with respect to their service conditions and shall not exceed specified temperature rise limits in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.



e. To ensure long life, motors shall have nameplate horsepower [kW] equal or greater than the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment and shall carry a service factor rating as follows:

Motor Size Enclosure Service Factor

Fractional hp [kW] Open 1.15

Other Than Open 1.0

Integral hp [kW] Open 1.15

Other Than Open 1.0

Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall have a 1.15 service factor on sine wave power and a 1.0 service factor on drive power.

f. Designed for full voltage starting.

g. Designed to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5 percent voltage distortion according to IEEE 519.

h. Totally enclosed motors shall have a continuous moisture drain that also excludes insects.

i. Bearings shall be either oil or grease lubricated.

j. Motor nameplates shall indicate as a minimum the manufacturer name and model number, motor horsepower, voltage, phase, frequency, speed, full load current, locked rotor current, frame size, service factor, power factor, and efficiency.

k. Dripproof motors, or totally enclosed motors at Contractor's option, shall be furnished on equipment in indoor, above-grade, clean, and dry locations.

l. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished on:

(1) Outdoor equipment.

(2) Equipment for installation below grade.

(3) Equipment operating in chemical feed and chemical handling locations.

(4) Equipment operating in wet or dust-laden locations.

m. Explosionproof motors shall be furnished as specified by applicable codes or as specified in other sections.



n. A manufacturer's standard motor may be supplied on packaged equipment and fans in which case a redesign of the unit would be required to furnish motors of other than the manufacturer's standard design. However, in all cases, the motor types indicated are preferred and shall be furnished if offered by the manufacturer as a standard option.

o. Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall have insulation system meeting the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31.

2-2.05. Adjustable Frequency Drives. Adjustable frequency drives shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings and shall be coordinated with the requirements of the associated equipment. The equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for furnishing the adjustable frequency drive, for matching the motor and the drive, and for coordinating the collection of data and the design to limit harmonics to the levels specified. Adjustable frequency drives shall be as covered in the Adjustable Frequency Drives section. 2-3. MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION. 2-3.01. Welding. All welds shall be continuous (seal type) on submerged or partially submerged components. 2-3.02. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, expansion anchors, nuts, and washers shall be as indicated in the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2-3.03. Edge Grinding. Sharp corners of cut or sheared edges which will be submerged in operation shall be dulled by at least one pass of a power grinder to improve paint adherence. 2-3.04. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors, shall be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is applied. 2-4. MATERIALS. 2-4.01. Mechanical Identification. Mechanical identification consisting of equipment number plates, equipment information plates, valve tags, and ductwork identification shall conform to the requirements of the Equipment and Valve Identification section and as indicated herein. 2-4.01.01. Number Plates. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable.



Number plates for control equipment such as but not limited to thermostats, control stations, and emergency ventilation shutoff switches shall in addition to the specific device identification list the controlled equipment in parenthesis below the device number. 2-4.01.02. Piping. Piping identification shall be as specified in the Protective Coatings section. The lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1. 2-4.01.03. Valves. Valve tags shall indicate if the valve is normally open or normally closed. 2-4.01.04. Ductwork. Ductwork shall be identified with nameplates as specified herein, or stenciled painting. Ductwork shall be identified with the equipment number and area served, direction of airflow, and service (supply, return, mixed, exhaust, and outside air). The identification shall be located at equipment, at each side of structure or enclosure penetrations, and at each obstruction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. The installation of identifying devices shall be coordinated with the application of covering materials and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. All surfaces to receive adhesive number plates shall be cleaned before installation of the identification device. End of Section



Section 15061

DUCTILE IRON PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of ductile iron pipe. Ductile iron pipe shall be furnished complete with all fittings, specials, adapters, closure pieces, outlets, caps and plugs, temporary bulkheads, access manholes, jointing materials, pipe hangers and supports, anchors, blocking, encasement, appurtenances, and accessories specified and indicted on the Drawings, and as required for proper installation and functioning of the piping. Piping within the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank shall receive a field applied coating as specified in Section 09940, all other ductile iron pipe shall be shop coated as specified herein.

Piping furnished hereunder shall be complete with all joint gaskets, bolts, nuts and other jointing materials required for installation of any valves and equipment furnished by Owner or others for installation under this Contract. Pipe hangers and supports, pressure and leakage testing, and cleaning and disinfection are covered in other sections. 1-1.01. Pipe Manufacturer’s Experience and Field Services. All ductile iron pipe, fittings, specials, bolts, gaskets, other jointing materials, and appurtenances shall be fabricated, lined, coated, and furnished under the direction and management of one pipe manufacturer. The pipe manufacturer responsibilities, which shall include, at a minimum; coordinating and furnishing all pipe materials, gaskets, bolts, and other jointing materials, and pipe appurtenances (except for furnished coupled joints and other similar products by a specified manufacturer) for a complete piping system that meets the specified test pressures and service conditions; ensuring and certifying that all pipe, fittings, specials, and other pipe materials, pipe gaskets and bolts specified herein, are being manufactured in full accordance with the Contract Documents; preparing and submitting all submittal information and shop drawings; and making any corrections that may be required to submittal information and shop drawings. The pipe manufacturer’s minimum required experience qualifications shall include manufacture of interior and buried plant piping of similar diameters of at least two water or wastewater plants with joints, linings, and coatings suitable for the same or higher pressure rating, which has performed satisfactorily for the past 5 years.



All ductile iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.

1-2. SUBMITTALS. Drawings, details, specifications, and installation schedules covering all ductile iron pipe and accessories shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Certification by manufacturer for each item furnished in accordance with the ANSI/AWWA Standards.

Restrained joints details.

Certification of pipe manufacturer’s field services, including a copy of the initial services, and all subsequent inspection reports.

Certification of gaskets by pipe manufacturer, certifying that gasket material is suitable for test pressures and services intended.

Certification of joint lubricant.

Certification of proof-of-design tests for joints, including restrained joints.

Certification of pipe manufacturer or fabricator and certification of proof-of-design tests for welded-on outlets.

Pipe laying schedule complete with a sequence of laying and an explanation of all abbreviations used in the schedule. For long, straight pipe runs, the pipe laying schedule shall list the pipeline station and either the pipe centerline or invert elevation coordinated with the Drawings at least every 100 feet.

Two samples of the polyethylene encasement, each sample clearly identified as required by the Governing Standards and test results from an independent third party laboratory of the requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.

The method that the Contractor proposes to use for measuring deflection of pipe joints.

Submittal data shall clearly indicate the country of origin of pipe, fittings, flanges, restraining devices, and accessories.

1-2.01. Emergency Repair Manual. Contractor shall submit an emergency repair manual prepared and furnished by the pipe manufacturer. The manual shall include procedures for handling emergency calls and repairs; a list of stock replacement pipe sections, closures, and other parts needed for emergency repairs; names and emergency telephone numbers of pipe manufacturer’s engineering staff and factory-trained field service representatives who can be



contacted day or night during an emergency; response and delivery times; and installation instructions for the materials and methods used in making repairs.

1-3. SHIPPING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section, and as specified herein. Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in a manner that will ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Equipment, tools, and methods used in handling and installing pipe and fittings shall not damage the pipe and fittings. Hooks inserted in ends of pipe shall have broad, well-padded contact surfaces. Unpadded hooks, wire brushes or other abrasive tools shall not be permitted to come into contact with polyethylene lining if such lining is specified.

Contractor-furnished pipe and fittings in which the lining has been damaged shall be replaced by and at the expense of Contractor. With the concurrence of Engineer, small and readily accessible damaged areas may be repaired.

Contractor shall repair any damage to pipe coatings and linings before the pipe is installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. PIPE CLASS. The class of ductile iron pipe shall be as indicated in the Ductile Iron Pipe Schedule. The specified class includes service allowance and casting allowance.

Pipe Size (in) ANSI/AWWA Pressure Class

14 thru 20 250

12 and smaller 350

Pipe wall thickness for grooved and threaded end pipe shall be increased if necessary to comply with the following minimum thickness:

Pipe Size Minimum Thickness Class

inches Threaded Ends (1)

Grooved Ends (2)

4-16 53 53

18 53 54

20 53 55



Pipe Size Minimum Thickness Class

inches Threaded Ends (1)

Grooved Ends (2)

24 53 56

(1) Complies with ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 for minimum pipe wall thickness for threaded flanges.

(2) Complies with ANSI/AWWA C606 for grooved and shouldered joint ductile iron pipe.

2-2. MATERIALS.

Pipe Ductile iron, ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, Table 1 or Table 3; Victaulic, no exception.

Gaskets – All Joint Types Synthetic rubber unless otherwise specified; natural rubber will not be acceptable.

All gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer unless another manufacturer’s product is indicated.

Pipe manufacturer shall submit certificates of gasket suitability certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified, are recommended for the specified field test pressure and service conditions.

Gaskets for treated or potable water service shall be certified for chlorinated and chloraminated potable water. Gas and oil-resistant gaskets shall be made of Nitrile (NBR [Acrylonitrile Butadiene]) rubber.

The name of the material shall be permanently marked or molded on the gasket.



Gaskets – All Joint Types (continued)

Gaskets shall also be certified as suitable where soils may be contaminated with gas and oil products.

Joint Lubricant Vegetable-based lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Petroleum or animal-based lubricants will not be acceptable. Lubricants that will be in contact with treated or potable water shall be certified as being in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61.

Fittings ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 (except shorter laying lengths will be acceptable for U.S. Pipe), or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53, minimum working pressure rating as follows, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

Fitting Size in.

Material Type Min. Working

Pressure Rating, psi

4 to 24

DI Mechanical and Push-on joints

350

3 to 12 DI Grooved-end joints 350

4 to 24

DI Flanged joints, Grooved-end joints

250

14” and larger DI Grooved-end joints 250

All fittings shall be ductile iron and suitable for a factory test pressure of rated working pressure plus 100 psi or 1.5 times rated working pressure, whichever is less, without leakage or damage.

Push-on Joints ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

Restrained Push-on Joints, gaskets with stainless steel gripping segments, (4 inch through 12 inch)

American “Fast Grip” or "Field Lok 350 Gasket" manufactured by U.S. Pipe and furnished to licensed Tyton® joint manufacturer.



Push-on Joints (continued) ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

Restrained Push-on Joints, locking wedge type, (4 inch through 24 inch)

EBAA Iron "Megalug" Series 1700; U.S. Pipe “TR Flex Gripper Ring”; Star Pipe Products “StarGrip 3100”; or American “Field Flex Ring”, without exception.

Restrained Push-on Joints, positive locking segments and/or rings, (4 inch through 36 inch)

American "Flex-Ring," or "Lok-Ring"; Clow "Super-Lock"; U.S. Pipe "TR Flex" or “HP Lok”; or Griffin "Snap-Lok."

Restrained Push-on Joints, positive locking segments and/or rings, (42 inch through 60 inch)

American "Flex-Ring," or "Lok-Ring"; Clow "Super-Lock"; U.S. Pipe "TR Flex"; or Griffin "Snap-Lok."

Restrained Push-on Joints, positive locking segments and/or rings, (64 inch)

American "Flex-Ring," or "Lok Ring"; Clow "Super Lock"; or Griffin "Snap Lok."

Flanged Joints ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15.

Flanges

All Others Ductile iron, Class 125, ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15.

Flanges All flanges shall be suitable for test pressure of 1.5 times rated pressure without leakage or damage.

Bolts ASTM A307, chamfered or rounded ends projecting 1/4 to 1/2 inch beyond outer face of nut.

Nuts ASTM A563, hexagonal, ANSI/ASME B18.2.2, heavy semifinished pattern.

Gaskets ASTM D1330, Grade I rubber, full face type, 1/8 inch thick unless otherwise required by pipe manufacturer and accepted by Engineer. Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification of gaskets furnished as indicated above under Gaskets - All Joint Types.



Mechanical Joints ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11., with ductile iron glands.

Restrained Mechanical Joints (factory prepared spigot), (4 inch through 48 inch)

American "MJ coupled Joints", or Griffin "Mech-Lok".

Restrained Mechanical Joints, (field cut spigot), (4 inch through 24 inch)

EBAA Iron "Megalug" Series 1100, Sigma “One Lok” SLDE series, or Star Pipe Products “StarGrip 3000” without exception.

Wall Pipes or Castings

Mechanical joint with water stop and tapped holes; single casting or fabricated ductile iron pipe; holes sized in accordance with the details on the Drawings and provided with removable plugs.

Mechanical Joints with Tie Rods

As indicated on the Drawings.

Tie Rods

ASTM A307.

Steel Pipe ASTM A53, Schedule 40 or 80 as indicated on the Drawings.

Washers ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, plain steel.

Threaded Connections ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT; with boss or tapping saddle wherever wall thickness minus the foundry tolerance at the tapped connection is less than that required for 4-thread engagement as set forth in Table A.1, Appendix A, of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

Mechanical Couplings

Couplings Dresser "Style 38"; Smith-Blair "411 Steel Coupling"; or Romac “Style 400” or "Style 501"; without pipe stop.



Mechanical Couplings (continued)

Gaskets Oil-resistant synthetic rubber gaskets shall be as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification of gaskets furnished as indicated above under Gaskets - All Joint Types.

Restrained Mechanical Couplings

American Pipe “Restrained Coupling Gland Joint” coordinated with mechanical couplings furnished.

Grooved-End Joints AWWA C606.

Pipe Ends (rigid joints) Grooved, with dimensions conforming to AWWA C606, Table 3.

Pipe Ends (flexible joints) Shouldered, with dimensions conforming to AWWA C606, Table 4.

Couplings (non-shouldered pipe)

Tyco/Grinnell "Figure 772," or Victaulic "Style 31."

Couplings (shouldered pipe) Victaulic "Style 41" or "Style 44"

Flanged Coupling Adapters

Restrained (4 inch through 12 inch). Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, flanged coupling adapters shall be restrained.

Smith-Blair "Type 912" or Romac "Style FCA501", with anchor studs of sufficient size and number to withstand test pressures.

Unrestrained (14 inch and larger)

Smith-Blair "Type 913" or Romac "Style FC400".

Dismantling Joints

Restrained (3 inch and larger) Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, dismantling joints shall be restrained.

Romac "DJ400"; Dresser "Style 131 Dismantling Joint" or Viking Johnson. For use in potable water systems, coating to be in accordance with NSF-61.

Tapping Saddles Ductile iron, with stainless steel straps and synthetic rubber sealing gasket, 250 psi pressure rating.



2-3. SHOP COATING AND LINING. The interior of all pipe and fittings, unless noted otherwise, shall be glass lined. Glass-lined pipe buried or embedded in concrete shall be ductile iron with mechanical push-on joints; glass-lined pipe installed in interior locations shall be ductile iron with grooved-end joints except where flanges are necessary to connect pipes to equipment or valves. In locations where flanges are necessary,

Watertight/Dusttight Pipe Sleeves

PSI "Thunderline Link-Seal", insulating type with modular rubber sealing elements, nonmetallic pressure plates, and stainless steel bolts and nuts.

Shop Coating and Lining

Cement Mortar Lining with Seal Coat

ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

Protective Fusion-Bonded ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16.

Ceramic Epoxy Lining Induron "Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy".

Glass Lining Two-coat system applied over blast-cleaned surface; ground and finish coats separately fired; finished lining thickness at least 10 mils, Mohs’ Hardness 5 to 6 density as determined by ASTM D792; Fast Fabricators, Inc. "MEH 32" or "SG-14".

Universal Primer Manufacturer’s standard. If in contact with treated or potable water, certify as being in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61.

Asphaltic Coating Manufacturer’s standard.

Coal Tar Epoxy Manufacturer’s standard.

Liquid Epoxy ANSI/AWWA C210, non-coal tar modified, or when in contact with treated or potable water, certify as being in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61.

Anti-Seize Thread Lubricant Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane "Thred Gard Nickel", Bostik/Never-Seez "Pure Nickel Special" or Permatex "Nickel Anti-Seize".



glass-lined pipe may be flanged ductile iron with flanged cast or ductile iron fittings. Except for piping within the Hydrophilic HSW Storage Tank, which shall be field coated per Section 09940, the exterior surfaces of all pipe and fittings which will be exposed in both interior and exterior locations shall be shop primed. Flange faces shall be coated with a suitable rust-preventive compound. Exterior surfaces of all other pipe and fittings shall be coated with asphaltic coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects immediately before installation; pipe ends shall be examined with particular care. All defective pipe and fittings shall be removed from the site. 3-2. PROTECTION AND CLEANING. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material prior to installation and shall be kept clean until the work is completed. Before jointing, all joint contact surfaces shall be wire brushed if necessary and wiped clean. Precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. Debris, tools, clothing, or other objects shall not be placed in or allowed to enter the pipe. 3-3. CUTTING PIPE. Cutting shall be done in a neat manner, without damage to the pipe or the lining. Cuts shall be smooth, straight, and at right angles to the pipe axis. After cutting, the ends of the pipe shall be dressed with a file or a power grinder to remove all roughness and sharp edges. The cut ends of push-on joint pipe shall be suitably beveled. All field cutting of existing gray cast iron pipe shall be done with mechanical pipe cutters, except where the use of mechanical cutters would be difficult or impracticable. Ends of ductile iron pipe shall be cut with a portable guillotine saw, abrasive wheel, saw, milling cutter, or oxyacetylene torch. The use of hydraulic squeeze type cutters will not be acceptable. Field-cut holes for saddles shall be cut with mechanical cutters; oxyacetylene cutting will not be acceptable. Contractor shall use factory prepared pipe ends unless a field cut is required for connections.



3-4. FIELD JOINTS. Joints in buried and tunnel locations shall be mechanical or push-on type unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or where required to connect to existing piping or to valves. Bells on wall castings and wall sleeves shall be mechanical joint type, with tapped holes for tie rods or stud bolts. All other joints shall be flanged unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. All pipe ends shall have rigid joints unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

Certification of joint design shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, Section 4.5, Performance Requirements, as modified herein. The joint test pressure shall be not less than 2 times the working pressure or 1-1/2 times the test pressure of the pipeline, whichever is higher. The same certification and testing shall also be provided for restrained joints. For restrained joints, the piping shall not be blocked to prevent separation and the joint shall not leak or show evidence of failure. It is not necessary that such tests be made on pipe manufactured specifically for this project. Certified reports covering tests made on other pipe of the same size and design as specified herein and manufactured from materials of equivalent type and quality may be accepted as adequate proof of design. Each joint, including restrained joints, shall be checked by Contractor as recommended by the pipe manufacturer to verify that the joint and the restraints are installed properly. Restrained joints shall be extended after they are assembled to minimize further take-up. Field closure pieces shall be located away from the bends beyond the length over which joints are to be restrained.

Where acceptable to Engineer, grooved couplings may be used instead of flanges, provided that rigid grooving is used to preclude longitudinal pipe movement and angular deflection at joints. Fittings, valves, and equipment installed using grooved couplings shall be adequately supported and blocked or restrained to prevent rotation. 3-5. MECHANICAL JOINTS. Mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. If effective sealing is not obtained, the joint shall be disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to the torque values listed in Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Over tightening of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be acceptable. The holes in mechanical joints with tie rods shall be carefully aligned to permit installation of the tie rods. In flange and mechanical joint pieces, holes in the mechanical joint bells and the flanges shall straddle the top centerline for horizontal piping.



3-6. PUSH-ON JOINTS. The pipe manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for proper jointing procedures shall be followed. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with a soap solution provided by the pipe manufacturer immediately before the joint is completed. Lubricant shall be suitable for use in potable water, shall be stored in closed containers, and shall be kept clean. Each spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly. Pipe ends for restrained joint pipe shall be prepared in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. 3-7. FLANGED JOINTS. Pipe shall extend completely through screwed-on flanges. The pipe end and flange face shall be finish machined in a single operation. Flange faces shall be flat and perpendicular to the pipe centerline. When bolting flanged joints, care shall be taken to avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. One flange shall be free to move in any direction while the flange bolts are being tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually in a crisscross pattern and at a uniform rate, to ensure uniform compression of the gasket around the entire flange. All flange joint bolting procedures shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. Special care shall be taken when connecting piping to any pumping equipment to ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges. All connecting piping shall be permanently supported to obtain accurate matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire surface of flanges before any bolts are installed in the flanges. Pump connection piping shall be free to move parallel to its longitudinal centerline while the bolts are being tightened. Each pump shall be leveled, aligned, and wedged into position which will fit the connecting piping, but shall not be grouted until the initial fitting and alignment of the pipe, so that the pump may be shifted on its foundation if necessary to properly install the connecting piping. Each pump shall, however, be grouted before final bolting of the connecting piping. After final alignment and bolting, the pump connections shall be tested for applied piping stresses by loosening the flange bolts which, if the piping is properly installed, should result in no movement of the piping relative to the pump or opening of the pump connection joints. If any movement is observed, the piping shall be loosened and re-aligned as needed and then the flanges bolted back together. The flange bolts shall then be loosened and the process repeated until no movement is observed.



3-8. FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS. Flanged coupling adapters shall be provided for restrained couplings 12 inch and smaller where indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Flange coupling adapters shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. After the pipe is in place and bolted tight, the locations of holes for the anchor studs shall be determined and the pipe shall be field-drilled. Holes for anchor studs shall be drilled completely through the pipe wall. Hole diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch larger than the diameter of the stud projection. Unless indicated on the Drawings, all flange coupling adapters shall be restrained. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, all flange coupling adapters 12 inch and smaller shall be restrained. Flange coupling adapters 14 inch and larger may only be used in unrestrained pipe applications. The inner and outer surfaces of couplings, except flange mating surfaces, shall be prepared for coating in accordance with instructions of the coating manufacturer and shall then be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. The flange mating surfaces shall be cleaned and shop primed with universal primer.

3-9. DISMANTLING JOINTS. Dismantling joints shall be provided for restrained couplings 6 inch and larger piping where indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Dismantling joints shall comply with AWWA C219 and shall be restrained flange by flange couplings manufactured as a single unit. Dismantling joints shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, dismantling joints shall be restrained. The inner and outer surfaces of dismantling joints, except flange mating surfaces, shall be prepared for coating in accordance with instructions of the coating manufacturer and shall then be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. The flange mating surfaces shall be cleaned and shop primed with universal primer. 3-10. MECHANICAL COUPLINGS. Mechanical couplings shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. A space of at least 1/4 inch, but not more than 1 inch, shall be left between the pipe ends. Pipe and coupling surfaces in contact with gaskets shall be clean and free from dirt and other foreign matter during assembly. All assembly bolts shall be uniformly tightened so that the coupling is free from leaks, and all parts of the coupling are square and symmetrical with the pipe. Following installation of the coupling, damaged areas of shop coatings on the pipe and coupling shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer.



All surfaces, including the interior surfaces of the middle rings, shall be prepared for coating in accordance with instructions of the coating manufacturer and shall then be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. 3-10.01. Restrained Mechanical Couplings. Pipe restraining glands with tie bolts shall be provided to restrain mechanical coupling connections where indicated on the Drawings. The connecting pipe shall be furnished with welded retainer rings as recommended by pipe manufacturer. The pipe manufacturer shall also coordinate the restrained connection with the pressure rating, length, and diameter dimensions of the mechanical coupling being furnished to assure proper clearance is provided for completing the restrained coupling installation.

3-11. GROOVED-END JOINTS. Grooved-end joints shall be installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. Completed joints shall be rigid and shall allow no angular deflection or longitudinal movement, unless otherwise indicated. Grooved-end joints in Pipe Chases shall be flexible. Except for closure pieces, field grooving of pipe will not be acceptable. Grooved-end couplings shall not be used in the following applications: chemical service, except lime slurry piping, flammable liquid or flammable gas piping, compressed air or compressed gas piping operating at pressures above 25 psig , toxic gas piping, hot liquid with operating temperatures above 120°F, or steam piping. 3-12. OUTLETS. Where a 12 inch or smaller branch outlet is indicated and the diameter of the parent pipe is at least twice the diameter of the branch, a tee, a factory welded-on boss, or a tapping saddle will be acceptable. Where a 4 inch or larger branch outlet is indicated on the Drawings and the diameter of the branch pipe for a given diameter of parent pipe is less than or equal to the maximum diameter listed herein, a factory welded-on outlet fabricated from centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe will be acceptable.



Parent Pipe Diameter Versus Maximum Branch Pipe Diameter for Welded-On Outlets

Parent Pipe Dia inches

Max Branch Pipe Dia inches


Max Branch Pipe Dia inches

8 4 30 20

10 6 36 24

12 8 42 30

14 8 48 30

16 10 54 36

18 12 60 36

20 14 64 36

24 16

All 30 inch and smaller branch pipe diameter welded-on outlets shall be rated for a working pressure of 250 psi, 36 inch branch diameter welded-on outlets shall be rated for a working pressure of 200 psi, and all outlets shall have a minimum factor of safety of 2.0. The pipe manufacturer shall provide test data and certification of proof of design. It is not necessary that these tests be performed on pipe manufactured specifically for this project. Certified reports covering tests made on other pipe of the same size and design as specified herein and manufactured from materials of equivalent type and quality may be accepted as adequate proof of design. Welded-on outlets may be provided as a radial (tee) outlet, a tangential outlet, or a lateral outlet fabricated at a specific angle to the parent pipe (in 15 degrees increments between 45 degrees and 90 degrees from the axis of the parent pipe), as indicated on the Drawings. The fillet weld dimensions for welded-on outlets shall be as specified herein. Parent pipe and branch pipe shall meet hydrostatic test requirements in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, Sec. 5.2, prior to fabrication.



Welded-on Outlet Fillet Weld Dimensions for Specified Outlet Configurations

Radial and Lateral Outlets Tangential Outlets


Branch Pipe Dia inches

Weld Fillet Size

inches


Branch Pipe Dia inches

Weld Fillet Size

inches

24 and smaller

24 and smaller

1 x 1

8-30

24 and smaller

1-1/4 x 1-1/4

30-48

24 and smaller

1-1/4 x 1-1/4

36-54

24and smaller

1-1/2 x 1-1/2

54-64

24 and smaller

2-1/4 x 2-1/2

60-64

24 and smaller

2-1/2 x 2-1/2

42-64

30 2-1/2 x 2-1/2

42-54

30 2-1/2 x 2-1/2

54-64

36 2-3/4 x 2-3/4

60-64

30 2-3/4 x 2-3/4

All joints on welded-on branch outlets shall be made in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and/or ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15, as applicable. All outlets shall be fabricated from centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe designed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and manufactured and tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. Ni-Rod FC 55® electrodes manufactured by International Nickel Corporation (or an electrode with equivalent properties) shall be used in the manufacture of the fillet welds. Carbon steel electrodes will not be acceptable. Special Thickness Class 53 pipe shall be used for all branch pipe and parent pipe in 4 to 54 inch sizes. Pressure Class 350 pipe shall be used for 60 inch and 64 inch parent pipe. After welding, each fabricated outlet shall be subjected to a 15 psi air test. A soap and water solution shall be applied during the testing procedure to inspect the weld for leakage. Any welds that show air seepage shall be refabricated and retested. Welded-on outlets shall be fabricated by the pipe manufacturer at its production facilities. Manufacturers of welded-on outlets shall have at least 5 years of satisfactory experience in the manufacture and performance of these products. The manufacturer shall have a documented welding quality assurance system and shall maintain resident quality assurance records based on ANSI/AWS D11.2, the Guide for Welding Iron Castings. The manufacturer shall also maintain appropriate welding procedure specifications (WPS) and procedure qualification (PQR), and welder performance qualification (WPQR) records. The type of pipe end for the branch outlet shall be as specified or indicated on the Drawings. The maximum size and laying length of the welded-on branch



outlet shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer and shall be acceptable to Engineer for the field conditions and the connecting pipe or valve. Pipe embedment material and trench backfill shall be placed and compacted under and around each side of the outlet to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during the subsequent pipe jointing, embedment, and backfilling. At locations acceptable to Engineer, drilling and tapping of the pipe wall for 2 inch and smaller pipe connections will also be acceptable, provided that the wall thickness, minus the casting allowance, at the point of connection equals or exceeds the wall thickness required for 4-thread engagement in accordance with Table A.1, Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

3-13. WALL AND FLOOR PIPES Wall and floor pipes shall be installed where ductile iron pipes pass through concrete walls or floors, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Where a flange and mechanical joint pipe piece is to connect to a mechanical joint wall pipe or casting, the bolt holes in the bell of the wall pipe or casting shall straddle the top centerline of the horizontal pipe or casting and shall align with the bolt holes in the flange and mechanical joint piece. The top centerline shall be marked on the wall pipe or casting at the foundry or fabrication shop. In vertical piping, the bolt holes of flanged and mechanical joint floor pipes or castings shall be aligned with the bolt holes of the flange or mechanical joint connecting piece. The required centerline alignment and orientation of the floor pipe or casting shall be marked on the floor pipe or casting at the foundry or fabrication shop.

3-14. WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVES. Wall and floor sleeves shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings and shall be installed where ductile iron pipe passes through concrete walls and floors or masonry walls, unless otherwise noted. To minimize sleeve size, piping on either side of the sleeve shall be provided with a screw-on flange, grooved coupling, or mechanical coupling with anchor studs to allow the pipe to pass through the sleeve. Where required, sleeves in masonry walls may be enlarged enough for flange or other joint restraint to pass through the sleeve. Where specified or indicated on the Drawings, one or two sets of modular casing seals shall be installed at the face of walls to seal against soil or provide a dust or water tight seal. Contractor shall coordinate the diameter of wall or floor sleeves with the modular casing seal manufacturer. When soil may be present at wall sleeves, two sets of modular casing seals shall be installed, one at each face of the wall. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, modular casing seals shall not be used in submerged conditions unless the hydrostatic pressure is less than 20 feet and piping is less than 24 inch size.



3-15. REDUCERS. Reducers shall be eccentric or concentric as indicated on the Drawings. Reducers of eccentric pattern shall be installed with the straight side on top, so that no air traps are formed. 3-16. CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING. Connections between new work and existing piping shall be made using fittings suitable for the conditions encountered. Each connection with an existing pipe shall be made at a time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to customers, and as authorized by Owner. Facilities shall be provided for proper dewatering and for disposal of all water removed from dewatered lines and excavations without damage to adjacent property. 3-17. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. Concrete encasement shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. A pipe joint shall be provided within 12 inches of each end of the concrete encasement. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete section. All pipe to be encased shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper position, and shall be anchored to prevent flotation.

3-18. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS. After installation, pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a pressure test and a leakage test in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section.

3-19. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be kept clean of any foreign matter until the work has been accepted. All joint contact surfaces shall be kept clean until the joint is completed.

End of Section


Schedule 15061-S01Ductile Iron Pipe Schedule

Size, in Service Class Lining MaterialAll Hydrophilic HSW (HSWi) 350 GlassAll Hydrophilic HSW Tank Drawdown 350 GlassAll Hydrophilic HSW to Digesters 350 GlassAll Thickened Sludge 350 Glass

End of Schedule

Rock River Water Reclamation DistrictCo-Digestion Project - Receiving StationPhase 2

15061-S01-1-

3/11/15176424



Section 15065

MISCELLANEOUS STEEL PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous steel pipe, tubing and accessories that for pipe diameters 24 inches and smaller. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, and other accessories specified herein. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Submittals are required for all piping, fittings, gaskets, sleeves, and accessories, and shall include the following data:

Name of Manufacturer Type and model Construction materials, thickness, and finishes Pressure and temperature ratings

Contractor shall obtain and submit a written statement from the gasket material manufacturer certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified herein and are recommended for the specified field test pressures and service conditions. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. 1-4.01. Coated Pipe. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to the protective coating and shall include the use of end hooks, padded calipers, and nylon or similar fabric slings with spreader bars. Bare cables, chains, or metal bars shall not be used. Coated pipe shall be stored off the



ground on wide, padded skids. Plastic coated pipe shall be covered or otherwise protected from exposure to sunlight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-2. STEEL PIPE. Steel pipe materials and service shall be as specified herein. 2-2.01. Material Classification CS-2.

CS-2 – Standard Weight Steel with Socket Welded Fittings. Glycol supply and return piping. 2 inch and smaller.

Pipe Fittings

ASTM A53, Type E, standard weight, Grade B. Plain ends. Forged steel socket welded. Fitting shall conform to ANSI B16.11, Class 3000; Bonney, Crane, Ladish, or Vogt.

2-2.02. Material Classification CS-3.

CS-3 – Standard Weight Steel with Buttwelded Fittings. Glycol supply and return piping. 2-1/2 inch and larger.

Pipe Fittings

ASTM A53, Type E, standard weight Grade B. Bevel ends. Buttwelded. Fitting shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.9, standard weight.

2-2.03. Accessory Materials. Accessory materials for the miscellaneous steel pipe and tubing systems shall be as indicated.

Nipples ASTM A733, seamless, extra strong (Schedule 80); "close" nipples will be permitted only by special authorization in each case.

Unions (Malleable Iron) Fed Spec WW-U-53l, Class 2; Type B (galvanized) for galvanized pipe or Type A (black) for ungalvanized pipe.

Flanges

Standard Weight Pipe ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150, flat faced when connected to flat faced flanges; otherwise, raised face.



Extra Strong Pipe

Other services ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 300, raised face.

Flange Bolts and Nuts ASTM A193, Grade B7 with ASTM A194 Grade 2H nuts. Length such that, after installation, the bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch beyond outer face of the nut.

Flange Gaskets

For Glycol Service Non-asbestos inorganic fiber with nitrile binder; dimensions to suit flange contact face, 1/16 inch minimum thickness for plain finished surfaces, 3/32 inch minimum thickness for serrated surfaces; Garlock "IFG 5500".

For Other Services

Flat Faced Flanges Non-asbestos filler with neoprene or nitrile binder; dimensions to suit flange contact face; 1/16 inch minimum thickness for plain finished surfaces, 3/32 inch minimum thickness for serrated surfaces.

Raised Face Flanges

Continuous stainless steel ribbon wound into a spiral with non-asbestos filler between adjacent coils with a carbon steel gauge ring. Compressed gasket thickness shall be 0.095 inch ±0.005 inch.

Mechanical Couplings

Dresser "Style 38" or Smith-Blair "Type 411 Flexible Coupling"; without pipe stop.

Expansion Joints

Glycol solution, and other services not specified.

Flexonics "Model H Expansion Compensators" for 3 inch or smaller; Flexonics "Mid-Corr, Series MCB" with flanged ends and stainless steel bellows for 4 inch or larger. Expansion joints shall be suitable for working pressures up to 150 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance with the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section.

End of Section



Section 15067

MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous plastic pipe, tubing, and accessories. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, jointing materials and other necessary appurtenances. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. 1-2.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Submittals are required for all piping, fittings, gaskets, sleeves, and accessories, and shall include the following data:

Name of Manufacturer Type and model Construction materials, thickness, and finishes Pressure and temperature ratings

Contractor shall obtain and submit a written statement from the gasket material manufacturer certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified herein and are recommended for the specified field test pressures and service conditions. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. Pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. PE PIPE. PE pipe materials and services shall be as specified herein.



2-1.01. Material Classification PE-6.

PE-6 – Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. Glycol heat trace piping for HSW and Thickened Sludge piping.

Tubing Fittings

3/8 through 1 inch OD, SDR9 pressure class, oxygen barrier type, rated for 79 psi at 200°F. ASTM F2098 stainless steel clamp type fittings, rated for 200 psi and 200°F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance with the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section.

End of Section



Section 15091

MISCELLANEOUS BALL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of manually operated or remote activated two position (open-close) ball valves as specified herein. Miscellaneous ball valves shall be provided where AWWA type ball valves are not required. Piping, pipe supports, insulation, and accessories that are not an integral part of the valves or are not specified herein are covered in other sections. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If the requirements in this section are different from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements in the section shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Identification. Valves specified herein shall be tagged in accordance with the Equipment and Valve Identification section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the valves and their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Included in the submittal shall be drawings by the valve manufacturer to indicate the position of the valve actuator and valve shaft.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. CONSTRUCTION. Ball valves shown on the drawing, but not specified herein, shall be selected to match piping material they are installed in.

2-1.01. Valves Type VB-1.

VB-1

Heating water, systems with

copper pipe, ball valves indicated

on the mechanical

drawings as part of plumbing systems for

water service in metallic piping

systems.

2 inch and smaller

Rating Code Type Body/Bonnet Trim Seat Ball Stem Thrust Washer Stem Seal End Connection Temp. Limitations Valve Operator Manufacturers

500 psi nonshock cold WOG MSS SP-110 In-line, two piece, end entry, full port ASTM B584–C84400 bronze Reinforced Teflon Brass, or chrome plated brass Brass or bronze Reinforced Teflon Teflon or Viton Threaded End -20 to 400°F Lever Conbraco Industries "Apollo 77-100 Series"; Powell "Fig 4210T"




VB-7

Heating water with steel pipe

2 inch and

smaller

Rating Code Type Body/Bonnet Trim Seat Ball Stem Thrust Washer Stem Seal End Connection Temp. Limitations Valve Operator Manufacturers Valve Operator Lever

800 psi nonshock cold WOG ASME B16.34 In-line, three piece, bolted body, full port ASTM A105, forged steel or ASTM A216-WCB, cast steel Reinforced Teflon ASTM A108-CS, chrome plated ASTM A108-CS Reinforced Teflon Reinforced Teflon Socket weld -20 to 400°F Lever or Electric Contromatics "C-1122-BB-DL", Conbraco Industries "Apollo 83-200 Series", Neles-Jamesbury "4DX2200TT" Contromatics “C-1122-BB-DLConbraco Industries “Apollo 83R-200 Series”, Neles-Jamesbury “4DX2200TT”




VB-8

Heating water with steel

pipe. 2-1/2 inch

through 4 inch

Butt weld

Rating Code Type Body/Bonnet Trim Seat Ball Stem Thrust Washer Stem Seal End Connection Temp. Limitations Valve Operator Manufacturers

800 psi nonshock cold WOG ASME B16.34 In-line, three piece, bolted body, regular port ASTM A105, forged steel or ASTM A216-WCB, cast steel Reinforced Teflon Nickel or hard chrome plates carbon steel Nickel or hard chrome plated carbon steel Reinforced Teflon Reinforced Teflon Butt weld -20 to 400°F Lever Worcester Controls “4546TTBW4”




VB-10

Service as specified in

Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

section

4 inch and smaller

Socket

Rating Type Body/Bonnet Trim Seat Ball Stem Thrust Washer Stem Seal Body Seals End Connection Temp. Limitations Valve Operator Manufacturers

150 psig nonshock cold WOG In-line, true union, full port (Schedule 80) PVC or CPVC to match piping system Teflon PVC or CPVC to match piping system PVC or CPVC to match piping system Teflon Viton O-ring Viton O-rings Socket 0 to 140°F Lever Hayward Plastic Products "True Union Ball Valve"; Nibco "Chemtrol TU Series Tru-Bloc Ball Valve"; Spears Manufacturing Co "True Union 2000 Standard Series 3600 Ball Valve"

2-1.05. Length Tolerance. Unless otherwise specified, the actual length of valves shall be within plus or minus 1/16 inch of the specified or theoretical length. 2-1.06. Shop Coatings. All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, both interior and exterior, shall be shop coated for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer’s standard coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating.



Coating Materials

Coal Tar Epoxy High-build coal tar epoxy; Ameron "Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline "Bitumastic 300 M", Tnemec "46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy".

Epoxy Enamel (for liquid service) Ameron "Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy Coating", Carboline "Carboguard 891", or Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus".

Rust-Preventive Compound As recommended by the manufacturer.

Surfaces To Be Coated

Unfinished Surfaces

Interior Surfaces

Liquid Service Epoxy enamel.

Exterior Surfaces of Valves To Be Buried, Submerged, or Installed in Manholes or Valve Vaults

Coal tar epoxy.

Exterior Surfaces of all other valves

Universal primer.

2-2. VALVE ACTUATORS. Ball valves shall be provided with manual actuators. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, each manual actuator shall be equipped with a lever operator. Ball valves with center lines more than 7’-6” above the floor shall be provided with chain levers. 2-3. ACCESSORIES. If the drawings indicate the need for extension stems, stem guides; position indicator; floor boxes; valve boxes; or operating stands, refer to the Valve and Gate Actuator section.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in accordance with the Valve Installation section.

End of Section



Section 15102

ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing all eccentric plug valves as required by the Work and as indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule. Plug valves shall be furnished complete with actuators and accessories as specified herein, as indicated in the schedule, and as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuators section. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Valves shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on the Drawings, specified, or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of valves. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If the requirements in this section are different from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements in the section shall take precedence.

1.2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all eccentric plug valves and manual actuators shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C517.

1-2.03. Marking. Each valve shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, valve size, and pressure rating, and the country of origin of the body casting. All markings shall be cast on the exterior surface of the valve body. An identifying serial number shall be stamped on a corrosion-resistant plate attached to the valve body.

1-2.04. Temporary Number Plates. Each eccentric plug valve with an identifying number listed in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule, shall be tagged or marked in the factory with the identifying number.

1-2.05. Identification. Eccentric plug valves shall be identified in accordance with the Equipment and Valve Identification section.



1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the valves and their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section.

Drawings shall include separate wiring diagrams for each electrically operated or controlled valve and the electrical control equipment. Each drawing shall be identified with the valve number or name as specified in this section.

Certified copies of test reports for tests described in Section 5. of governing standard, with an affidavit of compliance as indicated in Section 6.3 of governing standard, shall be submitted to Engineer before the valves are shipped. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Eccentric plug valves furnished under this section shall be manufactured by DeZurik, without exception. 2-2. MATERIALS. Materials used in the manufacture of eccentric plug valves shall be as indicated:

Body Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.

Plug Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.

Plug Facing Chloroprene, Neoprene or Buna-N, 70 Type A durometer hardness in accordance with ASTM D2240.

Body Seat Welded nickel overlay.

Upper and Lower Trunnion Bearings

Sleeve type; stainless steel or bronze.

Upper Thrust Bearing TFE, Nylatron, or Delrin.

Stem Seal V-type packing or U-cups, Buna-N or TFE.

The following are acceptable shop coatings.

Epoxy

For Liquid Service other than in PPG Amercoat “Amercoat 385 Epoxy”, Carboline “Carboguard



potable water facilities 890”, Sherwin-Williams "Macropoxy 646".or Tnemec “Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II”.

2-3. VALVE CONSTRUCTION. 2-3.01. Valve Body. The valve port area of each valve shall be at least 80 percent of the cross section of the connecting piping for 20 inch and smaller valves and 70 percent for 24 inch and larger valves. Valves shall provide tight shutoff at the rated pressure from either direction. An adjustable closed position plug stop shall be provided.

Each valve body shall be plainly marked to indicate the seat end. The actual length of 10 inch and smaller valves shall be within plus or minus 1/16 inch of the theoretical length. The actual length of 12 inch and larger valves shall be within plus or minus 1/8 inch of the theoretical length.

Valve ends shall be compatible with connecting piping. All valves shall have flanged, grooved or mechanical joint ends as indicated on the Drawings. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Flanges shall be flat faced and finished to true plane surfaces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. The finished face shall be normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular variation tolerance of 0.002 inch per foot of flange diameter. Grooved end dimensions shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C606, Table 5, for rigid joints. When grooved end valves are to be installed in flanged piping, two flange adapters compatible with the connecting piping shall be provided with each valve. Mechanical joint ends shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

2-3.02. Plug. The plug shall be of one-piece construction and shall have a cylindrical or spherical seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the plug shaft. The interference between the plug face and the body seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall be externally adjustable in the field with the valve in the line under pressure. Plug surfaces shall be faced with a resilient material.

2-3.03. Seats. Seats shall be cast in the body and shall have raised, welded-in nickel overlay not less than 0.050 inch thick on all surfaces in contact with the plug face. The overlay shall be at least 90 percent nickel and have a Brinell hardness of 200 or greater. 2-3.04. Stem Seals. The valve shaft shall be sealed by U-cups or by at least four self-adjusting chevron type packing rings.

2-3.05. Working Pressure. Valves shall be rated for a minimum working pressure as specified below, except where otherwise indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule.



Size in inches Pressure Rating in psi 3 to 12 175 14 to 72 150

2-4. VALVE ACTUATORS. Requirements for valve actuators shall be as specified herein, as indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule, and as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuators section. Valve actuators types shall be manual, and electric types.

Geared actuators shall be used for manually operated valves in the following applications:

a. For all 4 inch and larger buried valves.

b. For all 8 inch and larger valves.

c. For all 6 inch and larger valves in throttling or free discharge applications.

d. For all 6 inch and larger valves where the unseating pressure exceeds 25 psi

e. For all chainwheel operated valves.

f. For all valves in gas service.

Geared actuators for plug valves unless otherwise specified or listed in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule shall be rated for a differential pressure across the valve, on the seating side, of 100 psi for 4 inch to 8 inch valves, 50 psi for 10 inch and larger valves, and 25 psi for gas service valves and a maximum flow of 8 ft/s

2-5. SHOP PAINTING. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces, except bearing and finished surfaces and stainless steel components of valves and accessories, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible with the specified field painting. Surfaces shall be painted as follows:

Unfinished Surfaces

Interior Surfaces

For Liquid Service Epoxy.

For Gas Service Epoxy.



Exterior Surfaces of Valves to be Buried

Epoxy.

Exterior Surfaces of All Other Valves Universal primer.

Polished or Machined Surfaces Rust-preventive compound.

Interior epoxy coatings shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C550 and shall be free of holidays. The total dry film thickness of shop-applied coatings shall be not less than:

Type of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness

Epoxy 10 mils

Universal Primer 3 mils

2-6. ACCESSORIES. Requirements for extension stems and stem guides, position indicators, floor boxes, operating stands, and valve boxes shall be as indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule, as specified herein and as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuators section. 2-7. TESTING. Except as modified herein, eccentric plug valves shall be tested in accordance with Section 5 of the governing standard. Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Section 5.2 of the governing standard. The leakage test shall be applied to the seating face of the plug (tending to unseat the plug) at the rated pressure of the valve. Each valve shall be leaktight in both directions when closed by the actuator with the maximum differential pressure applied to the plug as specified herein and in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Valves shall be installed in accordance with Valve Installation section. 3-1.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with Startup Requirements section, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until any problems are corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer.



The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping and appurtenances; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it has operated satisfactorily.

All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price.

End of Section


Schedule 15102-S01Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule

Manual Actuators1

.01

0

1.0

20

1.0

30

1.0

41

1.0

50

1.0

60

1.0

80

1.0

90

2.0

10

2.0

20

8.0

10

8.0

20

8.0

40

8.0

41

Tag Number Siz

e

Ra

ted

Wo

rkin

g

Pre

ssu

re

Ap

plic

ati

on

Typ

e o

f In

sta

llati

on

(2)

En

ds

(3)

Ma

xim

um

D

iffe

ren

tia

l Pre

ss

ure

A

cro

ss V

alve

Hig

h P

ress

ure

Sid

e o

f P

lug

(5)

Typ

e o

f M

anu

al

Ac

tua

tor(

4)

Lim

it S

wit

ch

es

(6)

Ex

ten

sio

ns

Ste

ms

Po

siti

on

Ind

icat

or

for

Bu

ried

Va

lve

Ac

tua

tors

Cas

t Ir

on

Flo

or

Sta

nd

s

Fab

rica

ted

Ste

el

Op

erat

ing

Sta

nd

s

(in) (psi) (psi)

PV-311 6 175Hydrophilic HSW Recirculation

Discharge IP F 100 S CW No No No No No

PV-313 10 150 Hydrophilic HSW Recirculation Suction IP F 15 U HW No No No No NoPV-313A 10 150 Hydrophilic Tank Isolation IP F 15 U HW No No No No No

PV-314 8 175Hydrophilic HSW Recirculation

Discharge IP F 100 S HW No No No No NoPV-314A 10 175 Hydrophilic Tank Isolation IP F 15 U HW No No No No No

End Schedule


15102-S01-1-

3/11/15176424


Schedule 15102-S02Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule

Electric Actuators

1.01

0

1.02

0

1.03

0

1.04

0

1.04

1

1.05

0

1.06

0

1.08

0

1.09

0

3.00

1

3.01

0

3.02

0

3.03

0

3.04

0

4.04

0

4.05

0

4.08

0

8.01

0

8.02

0

8.04

0

8.04

1

Tag Number Siz

e

Rat

ed W

ork

ing

P

ress

ure

Typ

e o

f S

ervi

ce(1

)

Ap

plic

atio

n

Typ

e o

f In

stal

lati

on

(2)

En

ds(

3)

Max

imu

m D

iffe

ren

tial

P

ress

ure

Acr

oss

V

alve

Hig

h P

ress

ure

Sid

e o

f P

lug

(5)

Typ

e o

f E

lect

ric

Act

uat

or(

10)

Typ

e o

f H

ou

sin

g(7

)

Op

erat

ing

Tim

e

Po

wer

fo

r E

lect

ric

Act

uat

or

Mo

tor

Act

uat

or

Pro

vid

es 1

20

VA

C F

or

rem

ote

co

ntr

ols

Nu

mb

er o

f L

imit

S

wit

ch A

ssem

blie

s

Po

siti

on

Tra

nsm

itte

r

Co

ntr

ol D

evic

es(8

)

Ext

ensi

on

s S

tem

s

Po

siti

on

Ind

icat

or

for

Bu

ried

Val

ve

Act

uat

ors

Cas

t Ir

on

Op

erat

ing

S

tan

ds

Fab

rica

ted

Ste

el

Op

erat

ing

Sta

nd

s

(in) (psi) (psi) (s) (V/PH)

PV-340A 4 175 O-C Hydrophobic HSW IP F 50 U IE EXP 60480 V, 3 phase ac Yes 2 No C No No No No

End Schedule


15102-S02-1-

3/11/15176424


Notes:(1) Actuators designated "O-C" are for "Open-Close" service. Actuators designated"M" are for "Modulating" service.

(2) Abbreviations for installation types are as follows:

B4 Buried, depth of 4 feet or lessB20 Buried, depth greater than 4 feet but 20 feet or lessB Buried, depth greater than 20 feet, actual depth of xx feetSV20 Submerged or vaulted, depth 20 feet or lessSV Submerged or vaulted, depth greater than 20 feet, actual depth of xx feetIP In plant

(3) Abbreviations for valve ends are as indicated:

F FlangedMJ Mechanical jointP Push-on jointG Grooved

(4) Abbreviations for manual actuator types are as indicated:

WN Wrench NutLVR LeverCW ChainWheelHW HandWheel

(5) Abbreviations for high pressure side of plug are as indicated:

S Seating (plug shaft side)U Unseating (plug seat side)

(6) Abbreviations for limit switches on manual and cylinder operated valves.

EOT End of travel (open - close)PSS Pump start - stop (two intermediate positions)ELSCH See electrical schematics

(7) Abbreviations for electronic or electric actuator housing.

WP WeatherproofSUB Submersible [xx = depth of submergence]EXP Explosion proof


15102-Notes-1

3/11/15176424


(8) Abbreviations for control devices are as indicated.

A Required Required RequiredB Required RequiredC Required Required RequiredD Required RequiredE RequiredF RequiredG Required RequiredH Required Required

(10) Abbreviations for electric actuator types are as follows:SE Standard ElectricIE Intelligent ElectricNE Networked Electric

(11) Abbreviations for remote control station types:CS Control Station without indicating lights.

CIS Control Station with indicating lights.

END OF SCHEDULE

Table 1: Control DevicesOpen-Close Push Button

Open-Stop-Close Push Button

Local-Off-Remote

Red and Green Indicator LightsAbbreviations


15102-Notes-2

3/11/15176424



Section 15140

PIPE SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of pipe hangers, brackets, supports, bracing, anchorage, and the design for the pipe support system for pipes 12 inches and smaller. Pipe supports shall be furnished complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories. This section also covers the spacing of expansion joints in pipes 12 inches in diameter and smaller. Expansion joint products and materials are covered in the respective piping sections. This section covers pipe supports for the following pipe materials:

Cast or ductile iron Glass lined cast or ductile iron Steel (hot water, glycol) Copper (other) PVC/CPVC Schedule 80 PVC Schedule 40 FRPA Tempered glass Polypropylene DWV PVDF DWV Cast iron soil pipe

1-2. GENERAL. The Contractor shall provide pipe supports, anchors, flexible couplings, and expansion joints for all piping systems. The Drawings indicate pipe supports, anchors, flexible couplings, and expansion joints for pipes larger than 12 inches in diameter, and in special cases for pipes that are 12 inches and smaller. The Contractor shall design anchors, pipe supports, expansion joints, and flexible couplings not already shown on the Drawings, in accordance with the requirements specified herein. The Contractor’s design shall include pipe supports, bracing, and anchorage adjacent to expansion joints, couplings, valves, in-line devices, equipment, wyes and tees, or changes in direction as required for dismantling piping, removing valves or other in-line devices, disconnecting piping from equipment, and pipe support, in addition to supports in accordance with the maximum spacing specified herein. The pipe support system design by the Contractor shall rigidly support pipe so there is no visible movement or visible sagging between supports. The system shall comply with specified piping code requirements.



Contractor shall not delete or relocate the supports, expansion joints, or couplings indicated on the Drawings without written approval of the Engineer. Pipe supports and expansion joints are not required in buried piping, but concrete blocking or other suitable anchorage shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or specified in other sections. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all supports furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete data, catalog information, and drawings covering fabricated pipe supports, fabricated inserts, and stainless steel, galvanized, and copper-plated and plastic-coated pipe supports shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Data shall include a listing of the intended use and general location of each item submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe supports shall comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Materials of construction for fabricated steel supports are covered in the Structural and Miscellaneous Metals section. All pipe support materials shall be packaged as necessary to ensure delivery in satisfactory condition. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, pipe supports shall be fabricated of manufacturer's standard materials and provided with manufacturer's standard finish. Design loads for inserts, brackets, clamps, and other support items shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended loads.

Pipe supports shall be manufactured for the sizes and types of pipe to which they are applied. Strap hangers will not be acceptable. Threaded rods shall have sufficient threading to permit the maximum adjustment available in the support item. Continuously threaded rod is not acceptable for hanger rods over 12 inches in length. Unless accepted by the Engineer, the use of supports which rely on stressed thermoplastic components to support the pipe will not be permitted.



Contact between dissimilar metals, including contact between stainless steel and carbon steel, shall be prevented. Portions of pipe supports which come into contact with other metals that are dissimilar shall be rubber or vinyl coated. Supports for brass or copper pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated.

Pipe support types and application shall comply with Table 1. 2-2. SEISMIC LOADS. Seismic loads for worst case conditions of either full, partially full, or empty pipes shall be considered in the design. The applicable building code and design criteria are included in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. APPLICATION. Concrete inserts or anchor bolts shall be used to support piping from new cast-in-place concrete. Fastening of supports to existing concrete and masonry shall be in accordance with the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section. Anchorage shall be provided to resist thrust due to temperature changes, changes in diameter or direction, or dead-ending. Anchors shall be located as specified to force expansion and contraction movement to occur at expansion joints, loops, or elbows, and as needed to prevent excessive bending stresses and opening of mechanical couplings. Anchorage for temperature changes shall be centered between elbows and mechanical joints used as expansion joints. Anchorage for bellows type expansion joints may be located adjacent to the joint. When expansion joints are required, pipe guides shall be provided adjacent to bellows type expansion joints. Guides will not be required where mechanical couplings are permitted as expansion joints. Guides shall be located on both sides of expansion joints, except where anchors are adjacent to the joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, one guide shall be within four pipe diameters from the joint and a second guide within 14 pipe diameters from the first guide. Pipe supports shall allow adequate movement; pipe guides shall not be used for anchoring pipe against longitudinal forces. Pipe guides shall be provided at locations as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe supports for insulated cold piping systems shall be sized for the outside diameter of the insulated pipe, and an insulation protection shield shall be installed between the support and the insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed between the pipe and the insulation shields for piping larger than 2 inches or when needed to prevent crushing of the insulation. Inserts shall be of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed.



Insulated hot piping systems shall be supported by clevises, clamps, support saddles, or rollers. Pipe clamps shall be attached directly to the pipe. Support saddles and rollers shall be sized for the outside diameter of the insulated pipe, and an insulation protection saddle shall be installed at the support. When supports for the FRP piping systems are in contact with less than 180 degrees of the pipe surface or when the width of the support is less than one-third the nominal pipe diameter (4 inches minimum), an FRP or steel saddle, shaped to the outside diameter of the pipe, shall be bonded to at least the bottom 120 degrees of the pipe.

3-2. TYPES OF SUPPORTS. The products for pipe supports shall be as indicated in Table 1 for the specified type and size of support. Where stainless steel is specified for pipe supports but is not available from the name suppliers for the model specified in Table 1, Contractor shall provide a heavier duty support that is available in stainless steel.

TABLE 1 - TYPES OF SUPPORTS

Description and Service

MSS SP 69 Type (Note 1) Specification

Hangers 2-1/2 inch and smaller

pipe

For hot and cold insulated piping

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100", Anvil "260" Piping Technology & Products Fig. 83.

Other services J-style 5 B-Line "B3690", Anvil "67",

Unistrut "J Hanger", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 67.

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3104", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83.

3 Through 12 inch pipe (Note 3)

For hot insulated piping

Double bolt 3 B-Line "B3144", Anvil "295", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 70.






For cold insulated piping

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83 .

For uninsulated cold piping

Clamp 4 B-Line "3140", Anvil "212", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 50.

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83.

Other services Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100" or Anvil "260"

for steel pipe; B-Line "B3102", Anvil "590", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 83 C. L. for cast iron pipe.

Concrete Inserts, Steel 12 inch and smaller

pipe 18 Channel 12 ga , galv, 1-5/8 by

1-3/8 inches , min. 8 inches long, anchor lugs on 4 inch centers, at least three lugs, end caps, and filler strip.

Beam Clamps, Malleable Iron or Steel, 12 inch and smaller pipe

21 B-Line "3050" and "3055", Anvil "133" and "134", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 130 and Fig. 130 (SP).

28, 29 Anvil "292" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 140.

30 B-Line "3054", Anvil "228", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 140.

Side Beam Bracket 34 B-Line "B3062", Anvil "202", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 20L.






Wall Supports and Frames, Steel, 12 inch and smaller pipe (Note 2)

Brackets 32 B-Line "B3066", Anvil "195", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 76.

33 B-Line "B3067", Anvil "199", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 76.

Prefabricated channels -- 12 ga , galv, 1-5/8 inches , with suitable brackets and pipe clamps.

Offset pipe clamp, 1-1/2 inch and smaller pipe

-- Galv, 1-1/4 by 3/16 inch steel, with 3/8 inch bolts.

Offset pipe clamp, 2 to 3-1/2 inch pipe

-- Galv, 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch steel, with 3/8 inch bolts.

Floor Supports, Steel or Cast Iron

6 inch and smaller pipe

37 (with base)

B-Line "B3090", Anvil "259" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 48.

8 through 12 inch pipe

38 B-Line "B3093", Anvil "264" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 46.

Pipe Alignment Guides -- B-Line "B3281" through "B3287", Anvil "255", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 6.

Turnbuckles Steel 13 B-Line "B3202", Anvil "230", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 30.

Hanger Rods, Carbon Steel, Threaded Both Ends, 3/8 inch minimum size

-- B-Line "B3205", Anvil "140", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 128.

Weldless Eye Nut, steel 17 B-Line "B3200", Anvil "290", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 40.






Insulation Protection Saddle 39 B-Line "B3160 Series", Anvil "160 Series", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 184.

Insulation Protection Shield 40 B-Line "B3151", Anvil "167", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 183.

Table 1 Notes:

1. MSS SP-69 supports and hangers are illustrated on Figure 1-15140. 2. Pipe clamps or other devices which rely on the application of a

clamping force to the supported pipe in order to maintain the clamp position or location in a prefabricated channel or track will not be acceptable for use with nonmetallic pipe or tubing.

3. Alternatively, pipe hangers for 12 inch pipe may be saddle type as indicated on the Drawings.

3-3. SUPPORT SPACINGS. Pipe supports and expansion joints shall be spaced in accordance with Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5. The types of pipes to be supported are as specified herein. Table 2 covers spacings for the standard operating conditions specified for each pipe material. Tables 3 and 4 cover PVC and FRP pipe spacings where operating conditions are in excess of the temperature and specific gravity requirements covered in Table 2. Table 5 covers PVC and FRP pipe which carries air or liquids with a specific gravity other than 1.0. Spacing in the tables is the maximum spacing considering gravity loads. Where the Contractor’s design includes lateral and longitudinal forces due to seismic loads, wind loads, and other forces, the spacing requirement may be less than that indicated in the tables. Required lateral and longitudinal bracing shall be in accordance with the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.



TABLE 2 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING AT STANDARD TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES

Type of Pipe

Pipe Support Max

Spacing

Max Run Without

Expansion Joint, Loop, or

Bend (Note 1)

Expansion Joint Max Spacing (Note 2)

Type of Expansion

Joints feet feet feet Cast iron or Ductile iron

15 80 80 Note 6

Cast iron or Ductile iron, glass-lined

12 80 80 Note 6

Steel, for hot water heating 1-1/4 inch and

smaller 7 30 100 Note 3

1-1/2 to 4 inch 10 30 100 Note 3 Over 4 inch 15 30 100 Note 3 Steel, for other services 1-1/4 inch and

smaller 7 30 100 Note 3

1-1/2 to 4 inch 10 30 100 Note 3 Over 4 inch 15 80 80 Note 6 Copper, for services other than hot water 1 inch and

smaller 5 -- -- Note 7

Over 1 inch 7 50 100 Note 3 PVC, Schedule 80, for other services at a maximum temperature of 100°F and a maximum specific gravity of 1.0. 1/8 and

1/4 inch Continuous

Support 20 60 Note 3

1/2 inch 4 20 60 Note 3 3/4 inch 4-1/2 20 60 Note 3 1 and

1-1/4 inch 5 20 60 Note 3

1-1/2 and 2 inch

5-1/2 20 60 Note 3

2-1/2 inch 6 20 60 Note 3 3 inch 7 20 60 Note 3 4 inch 7-1/2 20 60 Note 3 6 inch] 8-1/2 20 60 Note 3 8 inch 9-1/2 20 60 Note 3 10 inch 10 20 60 Note 3 12 inch 11 20 60 Note 3 FRP, for low pressure and odor control pipe at a maximum temperature of 150°F and a maximum specific gravity of 1.0.



TABLE 2 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING AT STANDARD TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES

Type of Pipe

Pipe Support Max

Spacing

Max Run Without

Expansion Joint, Loop, or

Bend (Note 1)

Expansion Joint Max Spacing (Note 2)

Type of Expansion

Joints feet feet feet 1 inch 4 60 100 Note 3 1-1/2 inch 4-1/2 60 100 Note 3 2 inch 5-1/2 60 100 Note 3 3 inch 6 60 100 Note 3 4 inch 6-1/2 40 100 Note 3 6 inch 7-1/2 40 100 Note 3 8 inch 8-1/2 40 100 Note 3 10 inch 9-1/2 40 100 Note 3 12 inch 10 40 100 Note 3 Polypropylene DWV

6 -- -- Note 7

PVDF DWV 6 -- -- Note 7 Cast iron soil pipe 10 -- -- Notes 7, 8PVC, Schedule 40, for services at a maximum temperature of 100°F, and a maximum specific gravity of 1.0. 1/8 and

1/4 inch Continuous

Support 20 60 Note 3

1/2 inch 3-1/2 20 60 Note 3 3/4 and

1 inch 4 20 60 Note 3

1-1/4 and 1-1/2 inch

4-1/2 20 60 Note 3

2 inch 5 20 60 Note 3 2-1/2 inch 5-1/2 20 60 Note 3 3 inch 6 20 60 Note 3 4 inch 6-1/2 20 60 Note 3 6 inch 7-1/2 20 60 Note 3 8 inch 8 20 60 Note 3 10 inch 8-1/2 20 60 Note 3 12 inch 9-1/2 20 60 Note 3

Table 2 Notes:

1. Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, an expansion joint shall be provided in each straight run of pipe having an overall length between loops or bends exceeding the maximum run specified herein.



2. Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, the spacing between expansion joints in any straight pipe run shall not exceed the maximum spacing specified herein.

3. Expansion joint fittings are specified in the respective piping sections. 4. At least two properly padded supports for each pipe section. 5. At least one support for each pipe section. 6. Expansion joints shall be mechanical couplings. 7. No expansion joints are required. 8. Supports for 5 and 10 foot long pipe sections shall be located within

18 inches of each joint. Supports shall be positioned to maintain the piping alignment and to prevent the piping from sagging.

3-3.01. Temperature Adjustments for PVC Pipe. PVC pipe at a temperature above 100°F shall have maximum support spacing in accordance with the following table. For insulated lines, reduce the support spacing to 70 percent of the listed values.

TABLE 3 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING FOR PVC PIPE AT NON-STANDARD TEMPERATURES

feet

Nominal Size Schedule 40 Schedule 80

inches 120°F 140°F 120°F 140°F 1/4 Continuous Support Continuous Support 1/2 3 2-1/2 3-1/2 3 3/4 3-1/2 3 4 3 1 3-1/2 3 4-1/2 3-1/2

1-1/4 4 3-1/2 4-1/2 4 1-1/2 4 3-1/2 5 4

2 4-1/2 3-1/2 5 4-1/2 2-1/2 4-1/2 4 5-1/2 4-1/2

3 5 4 6 5 4 5-1/2 4-1/2 6-1/2 5-1/2 6 6-1/2 5 8 6-1/2 8 7 5-1/2 8-1.2 7 10 7-1/2 6 9 7-1/2 12 8 6-1/2 10 8-1/2

3-3.02. Temperature Adjustments for FRP Pipe. FRP pipe at a temperature above and below 150°F shall have maximum support spacing in accordance with the following table.



TABLE 4 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING FOR FRP PIPE AT NON-STANDARD TEMPERATURES

feet

Nominal Size inches

Temperature 75°F 175°F 200°F

1 5 3 2 1-1/2 6 3-1/2 2-1/2

2 7 4 3 3 7-1/2 4-1/2 3-1/2 4 8 5 4 6 10 6 4-1/2 8 11 6-1/2 5 10 12-1/2 7-1/2 5-1/2 12 13 8 6

3-4. INSTALLATION. 3-4.01. General. All piping shall be supported in a manner which will prevent undue stress on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, and adjacent to flexible couplings. Pipe supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas. Where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines, trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers. Trapeze assembly shall consist of structure attachments as previously specified with rod size dependent upon total weight supported. Spacing of assemblies shall be determined by the minimum pipe size included in the group supported. Trapeze horizontal assemblies shall be structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent measurable sag between rods when pipes are full. All lines shall be attached to the horizontal with intermediate pipe guides and U-bolts or one-hole clamps. Pre-engineered support equipment may be used when selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where copper pipe is installed on a support system of dissimilar metal with other pipes, the copper pipe shall be galvanically isolated from the support using Neoprene strips or other material acceptable to the Engineer. No piping shall be supported from the pipe above. Horizontal piping hanger support rods shall attach to steel beams with center-loading I-clamps, or welded beam clips. Hanger support rods shall attach to concrete slabs or beams with inserts. Anchorage shall be provided to resist both lateral and longitudinal seismic forces.



3-4.02. Inserts. Reference building structural concrete Drawings for concrete inserts. When not provided as part of the building concrete structure, provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts flush with the slab surface. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. NDE (Non-Destructive Evaluation) shall be used to locate existing reinforcing rods before drilling. 3-4.03. Pipe Hangers and Supports. Hanger rod sizes for copper pipe and plastic pipe shall be the size of hanger rods for steel pipe. Install hangers to provide a minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. A hanger shall be placed within 18 inches of each horizontal elbow, and on both sides of all piping accessories and valves weighing 20 lbs or more. Hangers shall have 1-1/2 inches minimum vertical adjustment. Support horizontal cast iron, ductile iron and no-hub piping systems adjacent to each joint. Support vertical piping at every floor using riser clamps. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Hanger and hanger components shall be sized specifically for the pipe size it is to be used on.

3-5. PLACEMENT. The maximum spacing for pipe supports and expansion joints shall be as indicated in Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5. Rubber hose and flexible tubing shall be provided with continuous angle or channel support. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to Engineer, piping shall be supported approximately 1-1/2 inches out from the face of walls and at least 3 inches below ceilings.

End of Section



Section 15180

VALVE ACTUATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing manual and powered valve actuators and accessories as specified herein. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with Drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Actuators shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on the Drawings, specified, or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of actuators. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, cylinder and vane type actuators shall conform to applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C541. Except as modified or supplemented herein, electric motor actuators shall conform to applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C542. Except as modified or supplemented herein, actuators for butterfly and eccentric plug valves shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C504. Except as modified or supplemented herein, manual actuators for ball valves shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C507. 1-2.03. Power Supply. Power supply to electric actuators will be as indicated in the valve schedules. 1-2.04. Marking. Each actuator shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, model number, and the country of origin. An identifying serial number shall be stamped on a corrosion-resistant plate attached to the actuator.



1-2.05. Temporary Number Plates. Each actuator shall be factory tagged or marked to identify the actuator and the applicable valve by number or service as indicated in the valve or gate schedule. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the actuators and their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittal Procedures section. Submittal drawings shall clearly indicate the country of origin of each actuator and its components. Submittal drawings shall include separate wiring diagrams for each electrically operated or controlled actuator and the electrical control equipment. Each actuator drawing shall be identified with the respective valve number or name. For electric or cylinder actuators, certified copies of reports covering proof-of-design testing of the actuators as set forth in Section 5 of ANSI/AWWA C541 or ANSI/AWWA C542 respectively, together with an affidavit of compliance as indicated in Section 6.3 of ANSI/AWWA C541 or ANSI/AWWA C542 respectively, shall be submitted to Engineer before the actuators are shipped. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. 2-1.01. General. Actuators and appurtenances shall be designed for the conditions and requirements as indicated in the respective valve sections. Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout the design, especially in the design of parts subject to intermittent or alternating stresses. In general, working stresses shall not exceed one-third of the yield point or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of each material. 2-1.02. Valve Actuators. Each actuator shall be designed to open or close the valve under all operating conditions. Actuators shall be designed for the maximum pressure differential across the valve and maximum velocities through the valve where indicated in the respective valve schedules. Valve actuators shall be provided and adjusted by the valve manufacturer. Actuator mounting arrangements and positions shall facilitate operation and maintenance and shall be determined by the valve manufacturer unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings or directed by Engineer.

2-1.03. Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or in the valve and gate schedules.



Limit switches for intelligent and standard electric actuators shall be as indicated in their respective paragraphs. 2-2. MATERIALS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials used in the manufacture of actuators shall conform to the requirements of the applicable governing standard(s). 2-3. VALVE MANUAL ACTUATORS. 2-3.01. General. Manual actuators of the types listed in the valve specifications or schedules shall be provided by the valve manufacturer. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, each geared manual actuator shall be equipped with an operating handwheel.

The direction of rotation of the wheel, wrench nut, or lever to open the valve shall be to the left (counterclockwise). Each valve body or actuator shall have cast thereon the word "Open" and an arrow indicating the direction to open. The housing of traveling-nut type actuators shall be fitted with a removable cover which shall permit inspection and maintenance of the operating mechanism without removing the actuator from the valve. Travel limiting devices shall be provided inside the actuator for the open and closed positions. Travel limiting stop nuts or collars installed on the reach rod of traveling-nut type operating mechanisms shall be field adjustable and shall be locked in position by means of a removable roll pin, cotter pin, or other positive locking device. The use of stop nuts or adjustable shaft collars which rely on clamping force or setscrews to prevent rotation of the nut or collar on the reach rod will not be acceptable. Each actuator shall be designed so that shaft seal leakage cannot enter the actuator housing. Valves for throttling service shall be equipped with an infinitely variable locking device or a totally enclosed gear actuator. Actuators shall produce the required torque with a maximum pull of 80 lbs on the lever, handwheel, or chain. Actuator components shall withstand, without damage, a pull of 200 lbs on the handwheel or chainwheel or an input of 300 foot-lbs on the operating nut. 2-3.02. Handwheels. Handwheel diameters shall be at least 8 inches but not more than 24 inches for 30 inch and smaller valves and not more than 30 inches for 36 inch and larger valves. 2-3.03. Chainwheels. Unless otherwise specified in the valve schedules, all valves with center lines more than 7'-6" above the floor shall be provided with



chainwheels and operating chains. Each chainwheel operated valve shall be equipped with a chain guide which will permit rapid handling of the operating chain without "gagging" of the wheel and will also permit reasonable side pull on the chain. Suitable extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to prevent interference of the chain with adjacent piping or equipment. Operating chains shall be hot-dip galvanized or zinc plated carbon steel and shall be looped to extend to within 4 feet of the floor below the valve. 2-3.04. Levers. Levers shall be capable of being locked in at least five intermediate positions between fully open and fully closed. In any building or structure containing lever operated valves, at least two operating levers shall be provided for each size and type of lever operated valve. 2-3.05. Chain Levers. Suitable actuator extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to prevent interference of the chain with adjacent piping or equipment. Operating chains shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel and shall be looped to extend to within 4 feet of the floor below the valve. 2-3.06. Wrench Nuts. Unless otherwise specified in the valve schedules or on the Drawings, wrench nuts shall be provided on all buried valves and on all valves that are to be operated through floor boxes. Unless otherwise directed by Owner, all wrench nuts shall comply with Section 4.4.13 of ANSI/AWWA C500. At least two operating keys shall be furnished for operation of the wrench nut operated valves.

2-3.07. Floorstands. Floorstands shall be provided in the locations indicated on the Drawings or as indicated in the valve schedule. Floorstands shall be designed to transfer operating thrusts to the supporting structure. Each floorstand shall be designed to position the crank or the handwheel approximately 36 inches above the frame yoke, supporting surface, or adjacent operating floor or platform. Floorstands shall be of the standard or offset type, as indicated on the Drawings. For standard types, a sleeve made from standard weight galvanized steel pipe shall be provided for the opening in the floor beneath each stand. Vertical bracing of shafts shall be provided where recommended by the manufacturer. 2-3.08. Wall Brackets. Wall brackets shall be provided to support manual actuators in the locations indicated on the Drawings or in the respective valve schedules. The horizontal face of the bracket shall be predrilled to accept the actuator and the stem without modification. The top of the bracket shall extend sufficiently to bear on and transfer thrust loads to the top of the supporting structure.

2-4. INTELLIGENT ELECTRIC ACTUATORS.



2-4.01. General. Intelligent electric actuators as listed in the valve schedules shall be provided by the valve or gate manufacturer. Actuators provided shall be of the latest, most current model. Intelligent electric actuators with torque output requirements of 750 ft-lbs and less for butterfly valves and eccentric plug valves shall be quarter-turn type and shall be Rotork “IQT Series”, without exception. All other intelligent electric actuators for open-close service shall be multi-turn type and shall be Rotork "IQ Series", without exception. Intelligent electric actuators for modulating service shall be Rotork “IQ Series”, without exception. Intelligent electric actuators for explosion proof service shall be Rotork “IQ Series” without exception. Intelligent electric actuators produced by other manufacturers are not acceptable. Intelligent electric actuators shall be capable of non-intrusive configuration without requiring removal of any actuator covers. Configuration of actuator functions shall be by use of a hand held infrared linked device, laptop or PDA with compatible wireless communication capability, or by local control switches and 32-character LCD display mounted on the actuator housing. The display language shall be English .

Each intelligent electric actuator shall be furnished complete with a motor, gearing, handwheel, configurable output relays, torque sensors, lubricants, wiring, and terminals. Each actuator shall be constructed as a self-contained unit with a ductile iron or aluminum alloy housing, of a type as indicated in the valve and gate schedules, and shall be integrally assembled on the applicable valve or gate by the valve or gate manufacturer. Housings shall have two O-ring seals, one on the controls compartment and one on the terminal cover. Actuators shall be designed to cycle the valve or gate from the fully open to the fully closed position or the reverse in approximately 60 seconds or as indicated in the valve and gate schedules. Actuator motors may be mounted horizontally adjacent to or vertically above the reduction gearing. All gearing shall be oil or grease lubricated. 2-4.02. Motors. Motors shall be totally enclosed, high torque design made expressly for valve and gate actuator service, capable of operating the valve or gate under full differential pressure for two complete strokes or one complete cycle of travel without overheating. Motors shall be designed in accordance with NEMA standards and shall operate successfully at any voltage within 10 percent



above or below rated voltage. Motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. Motors shall be provided with stall, temperature, loss of phase, and reverse phase protection. Actuators shall be capable of indicating phase loss. 2-4.03. Power Gearing. Power gearing shall consist of hardened steel spur or helical gears and alloy bronze or hardened steel worm gear, all suitably lubricated, designed for 100 percent overload, and effectively sealed against entrance of foreign matter. Steel gears shall be hardened to at least 350 Brinell. Planetary or cycloidal gearing, aluminum, mild steel, or nonmetallic gears will not be acceptable. Gearing shall be designed to be self-locking so that actuation of a torque switch or electronic torque protection device by a torque overload condition will not allow the actuator to restart until the torque overload has been eliminated. If a secondary gearbox is required, it shall be designed to withstand the locked rotor torque of the actuator.

2-4.04. Handwheel Mechanism. The handwheel shall not rotate during motor operation. During handwheel operation the motor shall not affect the actuator operation. The actuator shall be responsive to electrical power and control at all times and, when under electrical control, shall instantly disengage the handwheel. The handwheel shall rotate counterclockwise to open the valve. An arrow indicating the opening direction and the word "Open" shall be cast on the handwheel. The force required to operate the handwheel shall not exceed 80 lbs. The handwheel shall have a padlockable declutch lever. 2-4.05. Torque Sensing. Torque and thrust loads in both closing and opening directions shall be limited by a torque sensing device. Torque settings shall be adjustable and shall be indicated locally. The adjustment shall permit a variation of 40 to 100 percent of rated torque. 2-4.06. Terminal Facilities. Terminal facilities for connection to motor leads, switches, and control and indication signals shall be provided in a readily accessible terminal compartment. The terminal compartment shall have at least two openings for external electrical conduits, one sized at least 3/4 inch and the other at least 1-1/4 inches. Each terminal compartment shall be large enough to allow easy routing and termination of fifteen 12 AWG conductors.

2-4.07. Controls Compartment. Each actuator shall be furnished with a sealed compartment containing a reversing controller, multi tap transformer, electronic controls, and monitoring and protection modules. Reversing controllers shall be both mechanically and electrically interlocked and provided with the necessary direct-operated auxiliary contacts for required interlocking and control. The multi tap transformer shall provide power for all internal circuits, and shall provide 120 VAC supply for remote controls as indicated in the valve and gate schedules, or in the schematics on the Drawings.



Where not networked, actuators for valves or gates listed for modulating service in the valve and gate schedules shall be provided with a control module for position modulating type service. The control module shall be mounted within the controls compartment. The module shall accept a standard 4-20 mA dc analog input signal with a load impedance of not greater than 400 ohms. The control module shall contain adjustments for span, zero, gain, and deadband. Non-networked modulating actuators shall have a 4 to 20 mA output signal proportional to valve or gate position. 2-4.08. Local Controls. Each actuator shall have controller devices mounted on the actuator as indicated in the valve and gate schedules. 2-4.09. Remote Indication and Controls. Valve or gate position and actuator status indication for non-networked valves shall be provided by four configurable output relay contacts which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve or gate. Relays shall be configurable to the normally open or normally closed states. Relays shall maintain and update position indication during handwheel operation. Contacts shall be rated 5 A, 250 VAC, 30 VDC. When not used for position indication, any of the four configurable relays shall be selectable to signal one of the following:

Valve or gate opening, closing, or moving. Thermostat tripped, phase loss. Motor tripped on torque in mid travel, motor stalled. Remote mode selected. Local mode selected.

2-4.10. Remote Electric Actuator Control Station. Each actuator shall be furnished with a remote control station as indicated in the valve schedules and on the Drawings. The control station shall include red and green indicating lights for valve position status, and Local-Off-Remote and Open-Close selector switches for control. Power for the remote control station shall be provided from its respective actuator unit. The remote control station shall be rated NEMA 4X. Each device mounted on the remote control station shall have an engraved label or escutcheon plate indicating its respective function. The remote control station shall have an engraved tag indicating the tag number or description of the respective actuated valve or gate. 2-5. ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES.

2-5.01. Extension Stems. Extension stems and stem guides shall be furnished when indicated in the respective valve schedules, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise required for proper valve operation. Extension stems shall be of solid steel and shall be not smaller in diameter than the stem of the actuator shaft.



Extension stems shall be connected to the actuator with a single Lovejoy "Type D" universal joint with grease-filled protective boot. All stem connections shall be pinned. At least two stem guides shall be furnished with each extension stem, except for buried valves. Stem guides shall be of cast iron, bronze bushed, and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide spacing shall not exceed 100 times the stem diameter or 10 feet, whichever is smaller. The top stem guide shall be designed to carry the weight of the extension stem. The extension stem shall be provided with a collar pinned to the stem and bearing against the stem thrust guide. Extension stems for chemical resistant butterfly valves located in drainage sumps shall be the two-piece type with stainless steel stem, PVC housing, wall support, and collar. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the length of the stem extension shall be as necessary to position the valve operator 12 inches above the maximum liquid level in the immediate area. Extension stems for buried valve actuators shall extend to within 6 inches of the ground surface, shall be centered in the valve box using spacers, and shall be equipped with a wrench nut. Extension stems for buried valve actuators shall be provided with position indicators as specified in the valve schedules.

2-5.02. Position Indicators. Unless otherwise specified, each valve actuator shall be provided with a position indicator to display the position of the plug or disc relative to the body seat opening. For quarter turn plug, ball, or cone type valves installed in interior locations, the indicating pointer shall be mounted on the outer end of the valve operating shaft extension and shall operate over an indicating scale on the operating mechanism cover. Where the shaft passes through the cover, a suitable stuffing box or other seal shall be provided to prevent the entrance of water. Each actuator for butterfly valves, except where located in manholes, buried, or submerged, shall have a valve disc position indicator mounted on the end of the valve shaft. A disc position indicator shall also be provided on each operating stand or the actuator mounted thereon.

2-5.03. Torque Tubes. Torque tube shall utilize pipe rather than solid shafting between the valve input shaft and the output shaft of the valve floorstand operator. An adjustment of 2 inches shall be provided in the torque tube installation. Torque tube shall be coated with the same material as the submerged valve.



2-6. SHOP PAINTING. All ferrous metal surfaces, except bearing and finished surfaces and stainless steel components of valve actuators and accessories, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible with the specified field painting. The following surfaces shall be painted:

Polished or Machined Surfaces Rust-preventive compound.

Other Surfaces Epoxy.

Actuators and Accessories Universal primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Actuators will be installed on the valves in accordance with the Valve Installation section and on gates in accordance with the Gate Installation section.

End of Section



Section 15250

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of insulation, jackets, and accessories for mechanical piping systems.

Insulation for mechanical equipment which is to be applied at the factory prior to shipment is specified in the individual equipment sections.

1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of insulation with the installation of the items or systems to be insulated. Each item or system shall be tested and accepted by Engineer before installation of the insulation materials. Contractor shall verify that each component of the insulation systems is compatible with all other parts of the system; that all insulation materials are appropriate for the intended applications; and that all necessary devices and accessories have been provided. All insulation of the same class shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the insulation types need not be the products of one manufacturer. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern. All work shall comply with UL, NFPA, and ASTM safety requirements. 1-2.04. Metal Thickness. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage.



1-2.05. Surface Burning Characteristics. Insulation, jackets, tapes, and adhesives to be used indoors shall have a composite flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and a composite smoke developed rating of 50 when tested by UL 723, NFPA 255, or ASTM E84. All testing shall be done on materials of the same densities and installed thicknesses as the materials being installed. Insulation materials which have been treated with a flame retardant additive to meet the required flame spread and smoke developed ratings are not acceptable. 1-2.06. Painting and Identification. Field painting and identification shall be as specified in the Protective Coatings section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. A complete list of materials and catalog cuts, together with detailed specifications, materials performance data, installation instructions, parts, devices, and accessories furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Information shall include certified test results to show compliance with UL, NFPA, and ASTM safety requirements. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Manufacturer Experience. A manufacturer shall have furnished material of the type specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed in the respective product description paragraphs. 2-2. MATERIALS. Insulation, vapor retarders, and field applied jackets shall be installed to cover piping, ductwork, equipment, fittings, and appurtenances as indicated in the Insulation Schedule. All insulation shall be Velcro-jacketed removable type. 2-2.01. Pipe Insulation. 2-2.01.01. Type PMF1 Insulation. Type PMF1 mineral fiber pipe insulation shall be Johns Manville "Micro-Lok", Knauf "Pipe Insulation" or Owens-Corning.



Type PMF1 pipe insulation shall be a one-piece molded glass fiber material with all-purpose removable Velcro jacket. The all-purpose jacket shall be factory-applied, fiberglass reinforced vapor barrier type, with white kraft bonded to aluminum foil and self sealing adhesive lap. The insulation shall be suitable for a temperature range of 0°F to 850°F, shall have a maximum thermal conductivity (k) of 0.24 Btu in/hr ft2 °F at 75°F, and shall conform to ASTM C547. 2-3. ACCESSORIES. 2-3.01. PVC Insulation Jackets. PVC insulation jackets for piping systems shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. All fittings in piping systems insulated with mineral fiber shall be jacketed with a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing material. Piping systems where indicated to have PVC jackets shall be jacketed with the same PVC jacketing material. Jackets for fittings shall be one piece, factory molded to the contour of the fitting. The PVC jacket and fitting covers shall have a minimum thickness of 0.020 inches when installed indoors and 0.030 inches when installed outdoors. PVC jacketing shall be Johns Manville "Zeston 2000 Series".

2-3.02. Aluminum Insulation Jackets. Aluminum insulation jackets for insulated piping systems shall be furnished and installed as indicated in the insulation schedule herein and where indicated on the Drawings. Aluminum jackets shall be manufactured from alloys 3003 and 3105 conforming with ASTM B209. The aluminum jacket shall have a nominal thickness of 0.020 in., with an embossed finish. Fittings in insulated piping systems and equipment where indicated in the insulation schedule shall be provided with aluminum jackets of the same aluminum jacketing material as the piping systems. The jacket shall have a factory-applied moisture retarder of at least 3 mils permanently bonded to the interior surface and extending the full width of the jacket. The retarder shall consist of Polysurlyn or polyethylene film and kraft paper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. 3-1.01. General. Contractor shall install all insulation materials as specified herein for the piping systems, ductwork, and equipment that are not factory insulated. Insulation materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Surfaces to be insulated shall be cleaned and dried. All work shall be performed within the temperature ranges recommended by the insulation product manufacturer.



Insulation shall be kept clean and dry and shall remain in the factory container until it is installed. Packages or factory containers shall bear the manufacturer's stamp or label with the name of the manufacturer and description of materials.

Seams of exposed insulation and jackets shall be in the least visible location. 3-1.02. Piping Insulation. 3-1.02.01. Type PMF1 Insulation. Pipe insulation, vapor retarders, and field applied jackets shall be installed to cover system piping, fittings, and appurtenances. Insulation shall be full factory unit lengths using a single cut piece to complete the run. Abutting cut pieces or scraps shall not be used. End joints and longitudinal seams shall be tightly butted. Insulation for fittings shall be of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation. Insulated piping conveying fluids at lower than ambient temperatures shall be jacketed with a continuous vapor barrier. The insulation shall be continuous through hangers and penetrations, except at firewall penetrations, and shall be sealed with vapor barrier coating. The vapor barrier coating shall be applied at intervals not exceeding 15 feet for straight runs and not more that 6 inches from fittings. Fibrous insulation laps and butt strips that are not self-sealing shall be secured with adhesive and stapled. Staples and seams shall be coated with vapor barrier material. On piping 2 inches and larger where the insulation is continuous through the hanger, an insert shall be installed between the support shield and piping. The insert shall be of the same thickness and contour as the adjacent insulation and installed to maintain a continuous vapor barrier through the support. The insert shall be constructed of wood or heavy density insulating material suitable for the system operating temperatures. 3-1.03. PVC Jacketing. PVC jacketing for piping systems shall be installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. End joints and longitudinal seams on piping systems conveying fluids at lower than ambient temperatures shall be vapor-sealed, and covered with vapor-barrier tape to ensure a continuous vapor seal. Fittings shall be insulated with glass fiber material. 3-1.04. Aluminum Jacketing. Aluminum jacketing for piping systems shall be installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Jacketing shall be held in place with stainless steel securing bands uniformly spaced at not more than 18 inches to produce tight joints without "bulging". The jacket shall overlap at least 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints. Joints shall be overlapped and sealed with caulk to prevent moisture penetration, and longitudinal joints shall be placed to shed water. Exposed ends of pipe insulation shall be provided with covers constructed of the same material as the jacketing.



Elbows shall be jacketed with spirally wrapped aluminum strips or individual mitered segments or gores cut to fit the insulation.

3-2. INSULATION SCHEDULE.

INSULATION SCHEDULE

Service Size Inches

Mechanical Insulation

Notes

Type Thickness Inches

PIPING - INDOOR (CONCEALED OR EXPOSED)

Glycol Supply and Return

Up to 1-1/2

2 to 4

6 & 8

10 & larger

PMF1

PMF1

PMF1

PMF1

1-1/2

2

2-1/2

3

(2)

Thickened Sludge and Hydrophilic HSW

4

6 & 8

PMF1

PMF1

2

2-1/2

(2)

(8)

Mechanical Insulation Types: FC - Flexible Cellular MF - Mineral Fiber MW - Mineral Wool



Notes:

(1) Aluminum jacket.

(2) PVC jackets shall be provided on exposed portions of insulated piping located less than 8 feet above finished floor. On all other portions of the insulated piping system PVC jackets shall be provided only for fittings.

(3) Insulation shall be provided for portions of the piping system which pass through space above finished ceilings or is exposed above equipment, electrical panels, or cabinets.

(4) Insulation shall be provided for exposed portions of the piping system located less than 8 feet above the finished floor or grade.

(5) Insulation shall be provided for outside air plenums and ducts, air conditioning supply and return ducts, and dehumidifier reactivation air discharge ducts, unless indicated to be internally lined.

(6) Insulation thickness shall be sufficient to provide a cold face temperature not to exceed 150°F.

(7) Includes 8 feet of the cold water inlet piping to the water heater storage tank.

(8) Oversized to fit Thickened Sludge and Glycol Supply and Return piping

Unless otherwise indicated in the insulation schedule, all mechanical piping, ductwork, equipment, and accessories with an operating temperature in excess of 140°F and below 60°F shall be insulated.

End of Section



Section 15400

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of materials, appliances, fixtures, equipment, and appurtenances associated with the plumbing systems as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Additional requirements for plumbing systems shall be as indicated in the schedules on the Drawings. Suitable connections shall be provided for each fixture, piece of equipment, and appurtenance. Pipe materials, valves, thermal insulation, and pipe supports which are not an integral part of the fixture or piece of equipment and are not specified herein are covered in other sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall verify that each component of the plumbing system is compatible with all other parts of the system; that all piping and appurtenances are appropriate; and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning system have been provided. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer. Where several manufacturers' names have been listed in this section as possible suppliers, only the products of the first manufacturer listed have been checked for size, functions, and features.

1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern.



All work shall conform to the requirements of AGA, ASTM, NFPA, and UL safety requirements. 1-2.04. Power Supply. Unless otherwise specified, power supply to equipment with motors shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Power supply for controls shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase unless otherwise required for a properly operating system. 1-2.05. Metal Thickness. Metal thicknesses and gages specified herein are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage. 1-2.06. Mechanical Identification. Mechanical identification shall conform to the requirements of the Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly and installation drawings, and wiring and schematic diagrams, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Device tag numbers indicated on the Drawings shall be referenced on the wiring and schematic diagrams where applicable. The data and specifications to be submitted for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Equipment, Piping Accessories, and Appurtenances Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Construction materials, thicknesses, and finishes. Capacities. Pressure and temperature ratings. Overall dimensions. Piping connection sizes and locations. Net weight. Horsepower [kW]. Power requirements. Wiring diagrams. Piping schematics. Plan layout of system for each of the systems. Piping connection sizes and locations. Piping installation details Net weight. Power requirements. Wiring diagrams.



1-3.02. Operations and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied as required in the Submittals Procedures section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Welding Qualifications. All welding procedures and welding operators shall be qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be in written form and subject to Engineer’s review. Accurate records of operator and procedure qualifications shall be maintained by Contractor and made available to Engineer upon request. 1-4.02. Qualification. The plumbing system installer shall be licensed as stipulated by the authority having jurisdiction. 1-4.03. Manufacturer's Experience. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in this section, the manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be designed and selected to meet the specified conditions. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. All fixtures and equipment shall be designed to meet the performance and design conditions specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. 2-2.01. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. Contractor shall review the contract Drawings, the manufacturer’s layout drawings, and installation requirements and shall make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. 2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed in the respective product description paragraphs. 2-4. MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION.



2-4.01. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, expansion anchors, nuts, and washers shall be as indicated in the Anchorage In Concrete and Masonry section unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2-4.02. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors and speed reducers, shall be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is applied. 2-4.03. Shop Painting. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with an oil-resistant enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system. Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of the specified primer. Surface finish damaged during installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer. Field painting shall conform to the requirements of the Protective Coatings section. 2-4.04. Piping Systems. Unless otherwise specified herein, piping system materials shall be as specified in other sections. 2-4.05. Valves. Unless otherwise specified herein, valves indicated to be a part of the plumbing systems shall be as specified in other sections. 2-7. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES. 2-7.01. General. Plumbing fixtures shall be provided with all required supports, fasteners, supply and drain fittings, gaskets, and escutcheons required for a complete installation. 2-8. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.

2-08.01. Heat Trace Piping. Duplicate existing 8 port manifold for new heat trace connections, cap unused connection points for future use. Heat trace piping shall be of cross-linked polyethylene as specified in the Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe section. Minimum loop pipe size shall be 5/8” diameter. Distribution



manifolds shall be of stainless steel or cast brass construction and manufactured of alloys to prevent dezincification. Distribution manifolds shall have integral circuit balancing valves and shall be able to vent air from the system. Distribution manifolds shall be provided with support brackets and tube bend supports. They shall be located as indicated on the drawings. Fittings shall be manufactured of dezincification resistant brass. The fittings shall consist of compression fitting with insert, compression ring and a compression nut. 2-9. COLOR. Plumbing equipment shall have the manufacturer's standard color and finish unless otherwise indicated in the schedules. 2-10. ELECTRICAL. Electrical controls and disconnects shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical section, except where specified herein. All electrical controls shall have enclosures suitable for the environment and NEMA rating as indicated on the electrical Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. Equipment installed in existing facilities with limited access shall be suitable for being installed through available openings. Contractor shall field verify existing opening dimensions and other provisions for installation prior to submittal of bids. 3-2. PREPARATION. 3-2.01. Surface Preparation. All surfaces to be field painted shall be dry and free of dirt, dust, sand, grit mud, oil, grease, rust, loose mill scale, or other objectionable substances, and shall meet the recommendations of the paint manufacturer for surface preparation. Cleaning and painting operations shall be performed in a manner which will prevent dust or other contaminants from getting on freshly painted surfaces. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. The gloss of previously painted surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of top coats. 3-3. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be provided for all pipe penetrations through concrete and masonry walls. Sleeves and sealing requirements shall be as indicated in the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section and as indicated on the Drawings.



Not all required reducing fittings and unions are indicated. Additional fittings and unions shall be provided as needed to connect all equipment and appurtenances. Insulating fittings shall be provided to prevent the contact of dissimilar metals in piping systems. Piping shall not be routed over or in front of electrical switchboards or panels unless acceptable to Engineer. 3-3.01. Plumbing Equipment. Plumbing equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adequate clearance shall be provided for access to all components which may require adjustment, servicing, or replacement. 3-4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-4.01. Installation Check. An installation check by an authorized representative of the manufacturer of equipment specified herein is not required. 3-4.02. Startup and Testing. Field performance tests shall be conducted to demonstrate that each system is functioning as specified and to the satisfaction of Engineer. If inspection or tests indicate defects, the defective work or material shall be replaced, and inspection and tests repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of threaded joints or holes will not be acceptable. 3-5. ADJUSTING. All devices shall be adjusted for proper flow and quiet operation. All drains shall be checked for proper operation. 3-6. PROTECTION. Plumbing equipment and appurtenances shall be protected from damage immediately after installation. 3-7. CLEANING. After completion of testing and immediately before the final inspection, plumbing fixtures, equipment, piping, and appurtenances shall be thoroughly cleaned. Cleaning materials and methods shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings shall be repaired at no additional cost to Owner.

End of Section



Section 16050

ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of all equipment and materials needed for the electrical requirements of this Contract. It also covers conduit, wiring, and terminations for electrical equipment installed under Electrical Equipment Installation section. This section covers the installation and interconnection of electrical equipment furnished under other sections, except electrical items designated to be installed under those sections. This section covers installation of equipment furnished by Owner. 1-2. GENERAL. Electrical apparatus on all equipment shall be installed complete and placed in readiness for proper operation. Electrical materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all equipment provided under this section. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence 1-2.02. Coordination. Electrical work shall conform to the construction schedule and the progress of other trades. 1-2.03. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. All anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and expansion anchors shall comply with Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section, except smaller than 3/4 inch will be permitted to match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and electrical equipment. 1-2.04. Drawings. Supplementing this section, the Drawings indicate locations of equipment and enclosures and provide one-line and schematic diagrams regarding the connection and interaction with other equipment.



1-3. CODES AND PERMITS. All work shall be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with the NEC - National Electrical Code, the NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, and the following standards where applicable:

ANSI American National Standards Institute.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

AWG American Wire Gauge.

Fed Spec Federal Specification.

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

NEIS National Electrical Installation Standards

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

UL Underwriters' Laboratories. Equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL, or by a nationally recognized third party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of Contractor. If no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test shall be performed at Contractor’s expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure to be used. 1-4. IDENTIFICATION. 1-4.01. Conduit. Conduits in manholes, handholes, building entrance pull boxes, junction boxes, and equipment shall be provided with identification tags. Identification tags shall be 19 gage stainless steel, with 1/2 inch stamped letters and numbers as indicated on the Drawings. Identification tags shall be attached to conduits with nylon tie wraps and shall be positioned to be readily visible. 1-4.02. Conductors. All conductors in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be identified and color coded as described herein. 1-4.02.01. Conductor Identification Number. Except for lighting and receptacle circuits, each individual conductor in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with wire identification markers at the point of termination. The wire markers shall be of the heat-shrinkable tube type, with custom typed identification numbers.



The wire numbers shall be as indicated on the equipment manufacturer's drawings. The wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection. 1-4.02.02. Conductor Color Coding. Power conductors shall be color coded as indicated below. For conductors 6 AWG and smaller, the color coding shall be the insulation finish color. For sizes larger than 6 AWG, the color coding may be by marking tape. The equipment grounding conductor shall be green or green with one or more yellow stripes if the conductor is insulated. The following color coding system shall be used:

120/240V single-phase — black, red, and white 120/208V, three-phase — black, red, blue, and white 120/240V, three-phase — black, orange, blue, and white 277/480V, three-phase — brown, orange, yellow, and gray

Where 120/240 and 120/208 volt systems share the same conduit or enclosure, the neutral for either the 120/240 volt system or the 208 volt system shall be white with a permanent identifiable violet stripe. Control and instrumentation circuit conductors shall be color coded as indicated in the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section. 1-4.03. Motor Starters. Motor starters shall be provided with nameplates identifying the related equipment. Pilot controls and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends ("start", "stop", etc.) as indicated on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the motor starters. 1-4.04. Control Stations. Control stations shall be provided with nameplates identifying the related equipment. Pilot controls and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends ("start", "stop", etc.) as indicated on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the control stations. 1-4.05. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be provided with nameplates identifying related equipment. Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the circuit breakers. 1-4.06. Disconnect Switches. All switches shall have front cover-mounted permanent nameplates that include switch type, manufacturer's name and catalog number, and horsepower rating. An additional nameplate, engraved or etched, laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch letters, shall be provided



to identify the associated equipment. Both nameplates shall be securely fastened to the enclosure. 1-4.07. Arc Flash Hazard Labels. Lighting panels, power panels, power centers, and meter socket enclosures shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998 and shall include the following:

WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. SEE NFPA 70E.

Equipment must be accessed by qualified personnel only. Turn off all power sources prior to working on or inside equipment.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the Arc Flash and coordination study and to provide associated equipment labels. 1-5. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the work performed by the Contractor, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Drawings and data. Operating manuals. Samples.

1-5.01. Submittal Identification. Information covering all materials and equipment shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment as follows:

a. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the specification paragraph for which the equipment applies.

b. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out.

c. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and materials descriptive literature not readily cross-referenced with the Drawings or Specifications.



d. Schematics and connection diagrams for all electrical equipment shall be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted, unless it is clearly marked to show the intended connections.

Within 90 days after the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall furnish a submittal for all types of cable and conduit to be provided. The submittal shall include the cable manufacturer and type, and sufficient data to indicate that the cable and conduit meet the specified requirements. In addition to the complete specifications and descriptive literature, a sample of the largest size of each type of cable shall be submitted for review before installation. Each sample shall include legible and complete surface printing of the cable identification. 1-6. PROTECTION AND STORAGE. During construction, the insulation on all electrical equipment shall be protected against absorption of moisture, and metallic components shall be protected against corrosion by strip heaters, lamps, or other suitable means. This protection shall be provided immediately upon receipt of the equipment and shall be maintained continuously. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. CABLE. All cables of each type (such as lighting cable or 600 volt power cable) shall be from the same manufacturer. 2-1.01 All types of cable shall conform to the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section and as described herein. 2-1.02. 600 Volt Power Cable. Cable in power, control, indication, and alarm circuits operating at 600 volts or less, except where lighting, multiconductor control, and instrument cables are required, shall be 600 volt (Figure 3-16050 THHN-THWN) power cable. 2-1.03. Instrument Cable. Cable for electronic circuits to instrumentation, metering, and other signaling and control equipment shall be two- or three-conductor instrument cable twisted for magnetic noise rejection and protected from electrostatic noise by a total coverage shield. Types of instrument cables shall be (Figure 4-16050 single pair). 2-2. CONDUIT. Conduit and raceways shall be as described in the following paragraphs:



2-2.01. Rigid Steel Conduit. Rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall, hot-dip galvanized, shall conform to ANSI C80.1, and shall be manufactured in accordance with UL 6. 2-2.02. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). Not used. 2-2.03. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized steel, shall be covered with a moistureproof polyvinyl chloride jacket, and shall be UL labeled. 2-2.04. Utility (PVC) Duct. Utility duct with concrete encasement shall be polyvinyl chloride (ASTM F-512 designation DB-120) and shall conform to NEMA TC-6, NEMA TC-8, and ASTM F-512. 2-2.05. Rigid Nonmetallic (PVC) Conduit. PVC conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40, UL labeled for aboveground and underground uses, and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL 651. 2-2.06. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. The conduit shall be rigid steel. Before the PVC coating is applied, the hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with a primer to obtain a bond between the steel substrate and the coating. The PVC coating shall be bonded to the primed outer surface of the conduit. The bond on conduit and fittings shall be stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC coating. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be at least 40 mils. A chemically cured two-part urethane coating, at a nominal 2 mil thickness, shall be applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. The coating shall be sufficiently flexible to permit field bending the conduit without cracking or flaking of the coating. Every female conduit opening shall have a PVC sleeve extending one conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, beyond the opening. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit before coating. The wall thickness of the sleeve shall be at least 40 mils. All fittings, condulets, mounting hardware, and accessories shall be PVC-coated. All hollow conduit fittings shall be coated with the interior urethane coating described above. The screw heads on conduets shall be encapsulated by the manufacturer with a corrosion-resistant material. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured by Ocal, Perma-Cote, or Robroy. 2-3. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND WIRING GUTTERS. Indoor boxes (larger than switch, receptacle, or fixture type) and gutters shall be



constructed of sheet steel, shall be galvanized after fabrication, and shall be rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts. Indoor boxes and gutters in corrosive areas indicated on the Drawings and outdoor boxes and gutters shall be NEMA Type 4X, ABS or stainless steel and shall be rigidly supported by PVC-coated or stainless steel framing materials. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's instructions. Boxes in classified areas shall be NEMA type 7. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 lbs, shall have rigid handles. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet shall be split. Where indicated on the Drawings, junction and pull boxes with a removable side opposite the underground conduits shall be provided over building ends of underground conduit banks. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code, including space for full size continuations of all underground conduits not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space for future conduits. 2-4. CONTROL STATIONS. Control stations shall be provided as indicated on the drawings, one-line diagrams or schematics or as required by the equipment furnished. Pilot devices shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oiltight construction, and shall perform the functions indicated. Pilot lights shall be full voltage type with LED lamps. Indoor control stations shall have NEMA Type 13 enclosures. Control stations outdoors or indicated to be weatherproof shall have NEMA Type 4X stainless steel enclosures with protective caps on the control devices. Control stations in NEC Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Group D hazardous areas shall have NEMA Type 7 enclosures, or be factory sealed type, Appleton “Contender Series” or Killark “Seal-X Series”. 2-5. DISCONNECT SWITCHES. Unless otherwise specified, each disconnect switch shall be 3 pole, nonfusible, 600 volts, with a continuous current rating as indicated on the Drawings. Switches located indoors shall have NEMA type enclosure designations as required by the locations where they will be installed. Switches located outdoors shall have NEMA Type 4X enclosures. Switches in chlorine rooms, or in other areas where contact with caustic substances may occur, shall have NEMA Type 4X enclosures of molded reinforced polyester. Switches in classified areas shall be NEMA type 7. Switches shall have high conductivity copper, visible blades; nonteasible, positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. Each switch shall



have a handle whose position is easily recognizable and which can be locked in the "Off" position with three padlocks. The "On" and "Off" positions shall be clearly marked. All switches shall be UL listed and horsepower rated, and shall meet the latest edition of NEMA KS1. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from being opened while the operating handle is in the "On" position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. All material, equipment, and components specified herein shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA 1000 – NEIS Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000, testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment. 3-2. CABLE INSTALLATION. 3-2.01. General. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, cable shall be installed according to the following procedures, taking care to protect the cable and to avoid kinking the conductors, cutting or puncturing the jacket, contamination by oil or grease, or any other damage. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices, communication and signal circuits as indicated on the one-line diagrams shall be installed continuous and may not be spliced unless approved by the Engineer.

a. Stranded conductor cable shall be terminated by lugs or pressure type connectors. Wrapping stranded cables around screw type terminals is not acceptable.

b. Stranded conductor cable shall be spliced by crimp type connectors. Twist-on wire connectors may be used for splicing solid cable and for terminations at lighting fixtures.

c. Splices may be made only at readily accessible locations.

d. Cable terminations and splices shall be made as recommended by the cable manufacturer for the particular cable and service conditions. All shielded cable stress cone terminations shall be IEEE Class 1 molded rubber type. Shielded cable splices shall be tape or molded rubber type as required. Shielded cable splices and stress cone terminations shall be made by qualified splicers. Materials shall be by 3M Company, Plymouth/Bishop, or Raychem Electric Power Products.

e. Cable shall not be pulled tight against bushings nor pressed heavily against enclosures.



f. Cable-pulling lubricant shall be compatible with all cable jackets; shall not contain wax, grease, or silicone; and shall be Polywater "Type J".

g. Cables operating at more than 2000 volts shall be fireproofed in all cable vaults, manholes, and handholes. Fireproofing shall be applied with a half-lapped layer of 3M "Scotch 77 Arc-Proofing Tape", anchored at each end with a double wrap of 3M "Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Tape" or with equivalent tape by Anixter or Plymouth/Bishop.

h. Where necessary to prevent heavy loading on cable connections, in vertical risers, the cable shall be supported by Kellems, or equal, woven grips.

i. Spare cable ends shall be taped, coiled, and identified.

j. Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer. For cables rated higher than 600 volts, the minimum radius shall be 8 diameters for nonshielded cable and 12 diameters for shielded cable.

k. All cables in one conduit, over 1 foot long, or with any bends, shall be pulled in or out simultaneously.

l. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices are indicated on the one-line diagrams. Conductors in designated numbers and sizes shall be installed in conduit of designated size. Circuits shall not be combined to reduce conduit requirements unless acceptable to Engineer.

3-2.02. Underground Cable Pulling Procedure. Care shall be taken to prevent excessive physical stresses that would cause mechanical damage to cables during pulling. Before pulling cables into the underground duct system the Contractor shall submit a pulling procedure for the feeder cables from the Switchboards to the motor control center. The procedure shall include the following information:

a. Point of cable entrance into the duct system.

b. Point of cable exit from the duct system.

c. Type of cable grip to be used.

d. Type of pulling device to be used.

e. Method of continuously monitoring cable tension during pulling.

f. Identification of manholes through which cable will be pulled or where splices will be made.

g. Size and type of cable sheave assemblies to be used.



3-3. CONDUIT INSTALLATION. Contractor shall be responsible for routing all conduits. This shall include all conduits indicated on the one-lines, riser diagrams, and home-runs shown on the plan Drawings. Conduits shall be routed as defined in these Specifications. Where conduit routing is shown on plans, it shall be considered a general guideline and shall be field verified to avoid interferences. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, conduit installation and identification shall be completed according to the following procedures. 3-3.01. Installation of Interior and Exposed Exterior Conduit. This section covers the installation of conduit inside structures, above and below grade, and in exposed outdoor locations. In general, conduit inside structures shall be concealed. Large conduit and conduit stubs may be exposed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. No conduit shall be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Contractor shall be responsible for routing the conduit to meet the following installation requirements:

a. Conduit installed in all exposed indoor locations, except corrosive areas indicated on the Drawings, and in floor slabs, walls, and ceilings of hazardous (classified) locations, shall be rigid steel metal. Exposed conduit shall be rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts.

b. Conduit installed in floor slabs and walls in non-hazardous locations shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

c. Conduit installed in all exposed outdoor locations shall be PVC-coated rigid steel, rigidly supported by PVC-coated framing materials. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's instructions.

d. Final connections to dry type transformers, to motors without flexible cords, and to other equipment with rotating or moving parts shall be liquidtight flexible metal conduit with watertight connectors installed without sharp bends and in the minimum lengths required for the application, but not longer than 6 feet unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer.

e. Terminations and connections of rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit shall be taper threaded. Conduits shall be reamed free of burrs and shall be terminated with conduit bushings.



f. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces.

g. Two or more conduits in the same general routing shall be parallel, with symmetrical bends.

h. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues.

i. Conduit installed in corrosive chemical feed and storage areas as indicated by Area Type on the Drawings shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

j. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall have supports and provisions for expansion as required by NEC Article 352.

k. Metallic conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures shall be securely fastened by locknuts inside and outside.

l. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be secured to sheet metal device boxes using a male terminal adapter with a locknut inside or by using a box adapter inserted through the knockout and cemented into a coupling.

m. Conduits in walls or slabs, which have reinforcement in both faces, shall be installed between the reinforcing steel. In slabs with only a single layer of reinforcing steel, conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement. Conduits larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness shall be concrete encased under the slab.

n. Conduits that cross structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall be fitted with concretetight and watertight expansion/deflection couplings, suitable for use with metallic conduits and rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduits. The couplings shall be Appleton Type DF, Crouse-Hinds Type XD, or O-Z Type DX.

o. Conduit shall be clear of structural openings and indicated future openings.

p. Conduits through roofs or metal walls shall be flashed and sealed watertight.

q. Conduit installed through any openings cut into non-fire rated concrete or masonry structure elements shall be neatly grouted. Conduit penetrations of fire rated structure elements shall be sealed in a manner that maintains the fire rating as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.

r. Conduits shall be capped during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water.



s. Exposed conduit stubs for future use shall be terminated with galvanized pipe caps.

t. Concealed conduit for future use shall be terminated in equipment or fitted with couplings plugged flush with structural surfaces.

u. Where the Drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired hereunder, concealed portions of conduits for future equipment shall be provided.

v. Horizontal conduit shall be installed to allow at least 7 feet of headroom, except along structures, piping, and equipment or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained.

w. Conduit shall not be routed across the surface of a floor, roof, or walkway unless approved by Engineer.

x. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall be threaded and installed as recommended by the conduit manufacturer's installation procedure using appropriate tools.

y. All conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated with acceptable fittings that will not affect the NEMA rating of the enclosure.

z. Nonmetallic conduit, which turns out of concrete slabs or walls, shall be connected to a 90 degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before it emerges. Conduits shall have PVC-coated rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from slabs or walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall.

aa. Conduit for Heliax type foam dielectric coaxial cable shall be installed as follows:

Heliax Size

inches

Minimum Conduit Size inches

Minimum Conduit Bend Radius

inches

1/2 1-1/2 10

7/8 2 18

1-1/4 4 22

1-5/8 4 28

ab. Power conductors to and from adjustable frequency drives shall be installed in steel conduit.

3-3.02. Underground Conduit Installation. All excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to the respective sections of these Specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements:



a. All underground conduits shall be concrete encased unless

indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Concrete encasement within 15 feet of building entrances, under and within 5 feet of roadways, and within 10 feet of indicated future excavations shall be reinforced as detailed on the Drawings.

b. Concrete encased conduit shall be PVC utility schedule 40 PVC. Conduits shall have PVC-coated rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall. All PVC joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

c. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall continue to 6 inches above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered.

d. Conduit and concrete encasement installed underground for future extension shall be terminated flush at the bulkhead with a coupling and a screw plug. The termination of the duct bank shall be reinforced with bars 100 diameters long that shall be terminated 2 inches from the bulkhead. Matching splice bars shall be 50 bar diameters long. Each longitudinal bar shall be provided with a Lenton "Form Saver" coupler and plate or a Dayton "Superior DBR" coupler at the bulkhead. The coupler shall be threaded to accept a dowel of like diameter in the future. Threads shall be protected with screw-in plastic caps. A 1-3/4 by 3/4 inch deep horizontal shear key shall be formed in the concrete encasement above and below the embedded conduits. After concrete placement, conduit and bar connector ends shall be cleaned and coated with two coats of thixotropic coal tar.

e. Underground conduits indicated not to be concrete encased shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

f. Underground conduit bend radius shall be at least 2 feet at vertical risers and at least 3 feet elsewhere.

g. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have at least 2 feet of earth cover, except where indicated otherwise.

h. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in place, or concreted into boxouts, with water stops on all sides of the boxout. Water stops are specified in the Cast-In-Place Concrete section.

i. Underground nonmetallic conduits, which turn out of concrete or earth in outdoor locations, shall be connected to 90 degree elbows of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before they emerge.



j. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls, which have one side in contact with earth, shall be sealed watertight with special rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

k. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings to manholes.

l. Not Used.

m. Telephone cables shall not be installed in raceways, conduits, boxes, manholes, or handholes containing other types of circuits.

n. Intercommunication and instrument cables shall be separated the maximum possible distance from all power wiring in pull-boxes, manholes, and handholes.

3-3.03. Sealing of Conduits. After cable has been installed and connected, conduit ends shall be sealed by forcing nonhardening sealing compound into the conduits to a depth at least equal to the conduit diameter. This method shall be used for sealing all conduits at handholes, manholes, and building entrance junction boxes, and for 1 inch and larger conduit connections to equipment. Conduits entering chlorine feed and storage rooms shall be sealed in a junction box or conduit body adjacent to the point of entrance. Conduits entering hazardous (classified) areas and submersible or explosion proof enclosures shall have Appleton "Type ESU" or Crouse-Hinds "EYS" sealing fittings with sealing compound. 3-3.04. Reuse of Existing Conduits. Existing conduits may be reused subject to the concurrence of Engineer and compliance with the following requirements:

a. A wire brush shall be pulled through the conduit to remove any loose debris.

b. A mandrel shall be pulled through the conduit to remove sharp edges and burrs.

3-4. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, the following procedures shall be used in performing electrical work. 3-4.01. Setting of Equipment. All equipment, boxes, and gutters shall be installed level and plumb. Boxes, equipment enclosures, metal raceways, and similar items mounted on water- or earth-bearing walls shall be separated from the wall by at least 1/4 inch thick corrosion-resistant spacers. Where boxes, enclosures, and raceways are installed at locations where walls are not suitable



or available for mounting, concrete equipment pads, framing material, and associated hardware shall be provided. 3-4.02. Sealing of Equipment. All outdoor substation, switchgear, motor control center, and similar equipment shall be permanently sealed at the base, and all openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed with concrete grout to keep out rodents and insects the size of wasps and mud daubers. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with silicone sealant, Dow-Corning "795" or General Electric "SCS1200". 3-5. GROUNDING. 3-5.01. General. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the following requirements:

a. All ground conductors shall be at least 12 AWG soft drawn copper cable or bar, bare or green-insulated in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

b. Ground cable splices and joints, ground rod connections, and equipment bonding connections shall meet the requirements of IEEE 837, and shall be exothermic weld connections or irreversible high-compression connections, Cadweld "Exothermic" or Burndy "Hyground". Mechanical connectors will not be acceptable. Cable connections to bus bars shall be made with high-compression two-hole lugs.

c. Ground cable through exterior building walls shall enter within 3 feet below finished grade and shall be provided with a water stop. Unless otherwise indicated, installation of the water stop shall include filling the space between the strands with solder and soldering a 12 inch copper disc over the cable.

d. Ground cable near the base of a structure shall be installed in earth and as far from the structure as the excavation permits, but not closer than 24 inches. The tops of ground rods and ground cable interconnecting ground rods shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches below grade, or below the frost line, whichever is deeper.

e. All powered equipment, including lighting fixtures and receptacles, shall be grounded by a copper ground conductor in addition to the conduit connection.



f. Ground connections to equipment and ground buses shall be made with copper or high conductivity copper alloy ground lugs or clamps. Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be made with irreversible high-compression type lugs inserted under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and inserted through enclosures, other than explosion proof enclosures, or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable access covers will not be acceptable.

g. The grounding system shall be bonded to the station piping by connecting to the first flange inside the building, on either a suction or discharge pipe, with a copper bar or strap. The flange shall be drilled and tapped to provide a bolted connection.

h. Ground conductors shall be routed as directly as possible, avoiding unnecessary bends. Ground conductor installations for equipment ground connections to the grounding system shall have turns with minimum bend radii of 12 inches.

i. Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long, with a copper jacket bonded to a steel core.

j. Test wells and covers for non-traffic areas shall be molded high density polyethylene. Test wells for traffic areas shall be precast concrete construction rated for traffic duty with concrete or cast iron covers.

3-5.02. Grounding System Resistance. The ground system resistance shall comply with National Electrical Code.The grounding system design depicted on the Contract Drawings is the minimum design required for each building or structure. Each system shall comply with the maximum resistance of 5 ohms to ground. Contractor shall confirm the system grounding resistance with the results of the testing specified herein. Systems exceeding the maximum resistance specified shall be supplemented with additional grounding provisions and retested until the maximum specified resistance is achieved. 3-5.03. Grounding System Testing. The grounding system of each new building or structure, shall be tested to determine the resistance to earth. Testing shall be performed by an independent electrical or grounding system testing organization. Testing shall be completed after not less than three full days without precipitation and without any other moistening or chemical treatment of the soil. 3-5.03.01. New Grounding Systems. Grounding systems of each new building or structure shall be tested for resistance to earth utilizing the three-point fall of potential test as defined by IEEE 81. Testing shall be completed prior to



installation of the electrical distribution equipment to ensure the grounding system is isolated from the utility grounding system and the systems of other structures. The current source probe for the test shall be placed in soil at a distance of 5 to 10 times the distance of the widest measurement across the grounding system ring or grid to ensure adequate measurements outside of the grounding system’s sphere of influence. Test probe measurements shall be taken at a distance of one foot from the grounding system reference connection and at each 10 percent increment from the grounding system reference connection to the current source probe location. Test results shall be documented on a graphical plot with resistance in ohms on the vertical axis and distance in feet on the horizontal axis. The results shall clearly indicate a system resistance plateau which confirms a valid test procedure. 3.5.03.02. Existing Grounding Systems. Not used. 3.5.03.03. Grounding System Test Report. A report certified by the testing organization shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The final report shall include complete testing results for each building or structure, graphical representation of the test point results for the three-point fall of potential method, and complete observations of all site weather conditions and other environmental conditions that may affect the test results. Final acceptance of the results reported shall be subject to the review and approval of Engineer. 3-6. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT. Modifications to existing equipment shall be completed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. All existing facilities shall be kept in service during construction. Temporary power or relocation of existing power and control wiring, equipment, and devices shall be provided as required during construction. Coordination and timing of outages shall be as specified in other sections of these Specifications. Electrical power interruptions will only be allowed where agreed upon in advance with Owner, and scheduling at times of low demand may be required. 3-6.01. Demolition. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all cable and all exposed conduit for power and control signals of equipment indicated to be removed shall be demolished. Conduit supports and electrical equipment mounting hardware shall be removed, and holes or damage remaining shall be grouted or sealed flush. Conduit partially concealed shall be removed where exposed, and plugged with expanding grout flush with the floor or wall. Repairs shall be refinished to match the existing surrounding surfaces. Demolished equipment shall be discarded or salvaged as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in other sections of these Specifications.

End of Section


STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE: UL 83, ICEA S-95-658 (NEMA WC70). CONDUCTOR: Solid, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90°C dry, 75°C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, UL 83, Type THHN and THWN, ICEA S-95-658. SHIELD: None. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness, UL 83. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of UL 83 for Type THHN and THWN.

Cable Details

Size Number of

Strands Conductor Insulation

Thickness* Maximum Outside Diameter

AWG or kcmil mm2 in. µm in. mm

12 4.0 1 0.015 380 0.17 4.32

10 6.0 1 0.020 510 0.20 5.08

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, THWN or THHN, conductor size, and 600 volt.

600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting Cable (600-1-PVC-THHN-THWN)

BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 1-16050


STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE: ICEA S-95-658 (NEMA WC 70). CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Wet/dry maximum operating temperature 90°C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-95-658, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658.

Cable Details

Size Number of Strands

Conductor Insulation Thickness*

Maximum Outside Diameter

AWG or kcmil

mm2

in.

µm

in.

mm

14 2.5 7 0.030 760 0.17 4.32

12 4.0 7 0.030 760 0.19 4.83

10 6.0 7 0.030 760 0.21 5.33

8 10.0 7 0.045 1140 0.27 6.86

6 16.0 7 0.045 1140 0.31 7.87

4 25.0 7 0.045 1140 0.36 9.14

2 35.0 7 0.045 1140 0.42 10.67

1 40.0 19 0.055 1400 0.48 12.19

1/0 50.0 19 0.055 1400 0.52 13.21

2/0 70.0 19 0.055 1400 0.57 14.48

4/0 95.0 19 0.055 1400 0.68 17.27

250 120.0 37 0.065 1650 0.75 19.05

350 185.0 37 0.065 1650 0.85 21.59

500 300.0 37 0.065 1650 0.98 24.89

750 400.0 61 0.080 2030 1.22 31.00

1,000 500.0 61 0.080 2030 1.37 34.80

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 90 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, XLP, XHHW-2, conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW-2)



STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE: ICEA S-66-524 (NEMA WC 7). CONDUCTOR: Stranded, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90C. INSULATION: Cross-linked polyethylene, ICEA S-66-524. GROUND: Copper conductor sized per NEC with green insulation. SHIELD: Cable assembly: Copper tape or aluminum foil-polyester tape, shield applied to achieve 100 percent

cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable

core. FACTORY TEST: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-66-524, UL1277 and IEEE Standard 1202 ribbon burner

flame test. Cable Details

Size

Number

of Strands

*Conductor Insulation Thickness

**Assembly Jacket

Thickness

Maximum Outside

Diameter

AWG or kcmil

mm2

in.

mm

in.

µm

in.

mm

12 4 7 0.060 1.52 0.060 1520 0.66 16.80

10 6 7 0.060 1.52 0.060 1520 0.71 18.14

8 10 7 0.070 1.78 0.060 1520 0.93 23.74

6 16 7 0.070 1.78 0.080 2030 1.04 26.40

4 25 7 0.070 1.78 0.080 2030 1.21 30.67

2 35 7 0.070 1.78 0.080 2030 1.35 34.40

1 40 7 0.070 1.78 0.080 2030 1.35 34.40

1/0 50 19 0.090 2.29 0.080 2030 1.70 43.07

2/0 70 19 0.090 2.29 0.080 2030 1.77 44.94

4/0 95 19 0.090 2.29 0.110 2800 2.02 51.34

250 120 37 0.105 2.67 0.110 2800 2.30 58.49

350 185 37 0.105 2.67 0.110 2800 2.63 66.70

500 300 37 0.105 2.67 0.110 2800 3.12 79.26

*The average thickness shall be not less than indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 90 percent of the values indicated above. **The average thickness shall be not less than indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, XLP, RHW, Type TC, conductor size, and voltage class.

2000 Volt, 3 Conductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Cable (2000-3-AFD-XLP-PVC-SH-TC)




Section 16150

ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers pulse width modulated (PWM) type adjustable frequency drives (AFD) for the equipment and locations as specified. AFDs shall meet the design conditions and features specified herein.

Driven equipment Specification number.

11331

Unit designations. PCL-313 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated as specified in this section and as shown on the schematics and one line diagrams on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, one adjustable frequency drive, complete with all required control components, shall be furnished for each motor. AFDs shall be manufactured and assembled in their entirety at the manufacturer's factory. Systems fabricated or assembled in whole or in part by parties other than the drive manufacturer will not be acceptable. 1-2.01. Coordination. The design of the adjustable frequency drive shall be coordinated with the driven equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the collection of data and the design effort to limit harmonics to the levels specified. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.03. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The supplier shall review the Drawings, the manufacturer's layout



drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. 1-2.04. Workmanship and Materials. Equipment supplier shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with applicable governing standards. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. 1-2.05. Governing Standards. The adjustable frequency drive shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI, UL, and IEEE, and shall be designed for installation in accordance with the NEC. The equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL or a nationally recognized third-party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of Contractor. In the event no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test shall be conducted at Contractor’s expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure to Engineer. 1-2.06. Nameplates. Nameplates with the description and designation of each control or indicating device shall be provided. Unless specified otherwise, each drive enclosure shall be provided with a nameplate bearing the unit designation as indicated above. Nameplates shall be black and white laminated phenolic material of suitable size, and shall be engraved with 3/8 inch [10 mm] high letters for the drive designation and 3/16 inch [5 mm] letters for other information. The engraving shall extend through the black exterior lamination to the white center. Each control device and each control wire terminal block connection inside the enclosure shall be identified with permanent nameplates or painted legends to match the identification on the manufacturer's wiring diagram. 1-3. DESCRIPTION. The AFD shall produce an adjustable ac voltage/frequency output and shall be equipped with an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz despite incoming voltage variations. 1-3.01. Six-Pulse Drives. Drives for motors rated below 100 horsepower, shall be of the pulse-width modulated type and shall consist of a full-wave diode or



gated-open SCR bridge. The rectifier shall convert incoming fixed voltage and fixed frequency to a fixed dc voltage. The pulse-width modulation technology shall be of the space vector type, implemented in a microprocessor that generates a sine-coded output voltage. The drive inverter output shall be generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) which shall be controlled by six identical base driver circuits. The drive shall not induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst case RMS motor line current measured at rated speed, torque, and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for pure sine wave operation. 1-3.02. Eighteen-Pulse Drives. Not used. 1-4. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the drive shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

a. Name of manufacturer. b. Types and model numbers. c. Rated drive input kVA and output kVA. d. Percent efficiency at 100 percent speed and 60 percent speed. e. Maximum Btu [kJ] heat release data and verification of the drive

cooling requirements. f. Total weight and lifting instructions, height, mounting, and floor

space required. g. Panel interior and front and side exterior view details showing

maximum overall dimensions of all transformer, ac line filter, ac line reactor, and drive compartments.

h. Schematics, including all interlocks. I. Wiring diagrams, including all internal and external devices and

terminal blocks. j. Locations and sizes of electrical connections, ground terminations,

and shielded wires. k. List of diagnostic indicators. l. List of fault and failure conditions that the drive can recognize and

indicate for simultaneous occurrence. m. List of standard features and options. n. List of spare parts to be furnished. o. Input line protection model numbers and manufacturer's data sheets.p. Output filter model number and manufacturer's data sheets. q. UL 508C Certificate of Compliance for short circuit current rating. r. Seismic certification, when applicable. s. Not used. t. Not used.



u. Submit a detailed harmonic testing plan. The test plan should include instruments to be used, verification of testing locations for voltage and current harmonic metering, verification of maximum allowable voltage and current distortion, and drive load and speed test parameters.

1-5. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual for each size of adjustable frequency drive.

b. Manufacturer's standard manuals for each size and type of bypass contactor, transformer, line reactor, and filter.

c. Schematics, wiring diagrams, and panel drawings in conformance with construction record.

d. Model numbers and up-to-date cost data for spare parts. e. Troubleshooting procedures, with a cross-reference between

symptoms and corrective recommendations. f. Connection data to permit removal and installation of

recommended smallest field-replaceable parts. g. Information on testing of power supplies and printed circuit

boards and an explanation of the drive diagnostics. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. 1-6. SPARE PARTS None. 1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Shipping section. Handling and Storage shall be in accordance with the Handling and Storage section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. All drives shall be pulse-width modulated type, as manufactured by Danfoss or ABB without exception. The products of other manufacturers will not be acceptable. All adjustable frequency drives shall be a product of the same manufacturer.



2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. 2-2.01. Performance. The adjustable frequency drive controller shall be of sufficient capacity and shall produce a quality output waveform for stepless motor control from 10 to 100 percent of base speed. The adjustable frequency drive shall be suitable for loads and shall have voltage ratings as follows:

Unit designations PCL-313

Load type Variable torque (VT)

Input voltage 480 volt, 3 phase The adjustable frequency drive shall be suitable for operation at an elevation below 3300 ft, and shall meet the following ratings and parameters:

Input frequency 60 Hz

Input voltage and frequency variation

10 percent voltage variation, ±2 Hz; imbalance, 2 percent maximum.

Continued operation with additional momentary 25 percent voltage dip of 0.5 second duration from nominal input voltage level.

Minimum drive efficiency 95 percent at 100 percent speed, 90 percent at 60 percent speed.

Ambient temperature 0 to 40C.

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 percent non-condensing.

Displacement Power Factor 95 percent or higher throughout the entire operating speed range, measured at drive input terminals.

Drive service factor 1.0.

Overcurrent capability 110 percent for 1 minute for variable torque; 150 percent for 1 minute for constant torque.

Volts/Hz ratio Voltage varies as the square of frequency over the entire range of the unit for variable torque drives, linear over the entire range of the unit for constant torque drives; except under voltage boost condition.



Acceleration/deceleration time Adjustable over a range that meets the requirements of the drive equipment.

Output speed regulation 0.5 percent.

Output frequency stability 0.5 percent of nominal. 2-2.02. Adjustments. The following drive adjustments shall be provided:

Maximum speed.

Minimum speed.

Linear acceleration time.

Linear deceleration time.

Volts/Hz ratio; linear, squared, and automatic settings.

Voltage boost.

Process follower gain, offset, and bias.

Torque limit.

Critical frequency avoidance with adjustable bandwidth. 2-2.03. Fault Protection. Design of the power circuit shall include provisions for protection against fault conditions as follows. 2-2.03.01. Input Protection.

The drive assembly shall be UL 508C listed. A UL Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted to confirm product compliance with UL 508C and to indicate the short circuit current rating. The short circuit current rating shall meet or exceed the available short circuit current indicated on the Drawings.

Solid state instantaneous overcurrent trip set at 180 percent.

Adjustable overvoltage and undervoltage protection with automatic restart.

Phase loss and reverse phase trip with manual restart. 2-2.03.02. Internal Protection.

AC line, phase-to-phase transient voltage surge suppression utilizing metal oxide varistors. Drive shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62.41.

Power device snubbers.

Power devices rated 2.5 times line voltage.

Instantaneous overcurrent.



Static overspeed (overfrequency) protection.

DC bus overvoltage trip.

Components and labeling that comply with UL 508 requirements. Drives shall be equipped with an automatic discharge circuit to deplete the charge on the DC capacitor bank to less than 50 volts within 60 seconds after main input power is removed. Labels indicating derivative voltage sources and required wait time for servicing after power removal shall be placed on all applicable enclosures.

Individual transistor overtemperature and overcurrent protection.

Control logic circuit malfunction indication. 2-2.03.03. Output Protection.

Inverse-time motor overload protection adjustable from 10 percent to 100 percent.

Overvoltage protection.

Overfrequency protection.

Short circuit protection (three phase, phase to phase, and ground fault protection).

Protection against opening or shorting of motor leads.

Static overspeed protection.

Stall protection on overload with inverse time overcurrent trip, adjustable current limit from 10 percent to 120 percent.

2-2.04. Harmonic Distortion Abatement. The electrical system shall be provided with the necessary equipment to protect the drive and the power system ahead of the drive from harmonic distortion, as described below. The harmonic distortion abatement analysis shall be based on the information on the Drawings and on the following:

Existing facility loads to be included in the analysis

Switchboard SWB-1-1, SWB-1-2

Short circuit current at MCC Source (assumed)

34000 amps

Total maximum running amperes of all equipment powered from the utility connection (assumed)

1450_ amps

The drive shall operate satisfactorily when connected to a bus supplying other solid-state power conversion equipment which may be causing up to 10 percent



total harmonic voltage distortion and commutation notches up to 36,500 volt-microseconds. Harmonic distortion abatement equipment shall be provided to bring the facility and its electrical system into compliance with IEEE 519, 1992 at the points of analysis defined below and indicated on the Drawings. The supplier shall review the existing facility loads and shall take note of the equipment listed above. All distortion reports and/or testing shall include the existing facility loads. The maximum total harmonic distortion (THD and TDD) allowed at the points of analysis shall include harmonics from the existing equipment as well as the harmonics from equipment provided under this section. 2-2.04.01. Current Distortion Limits. Maximum allowable total and individual harmonic current distortion limits for each odd harmonic shall not exceed limits set forth in IEEE 519, 1992. The utility connection shall be the primary point of analysis for current distortion. The values of utility short circuit current at the utility interface and the total maximum running amperes of all equipment powered from the utility connection shall be as indicated above. 2-2.04.02. Voltage Distortion Limits. Individual or simultaneous operation of the drives shall result in a maximum total harmonic voltage distortion of 5 percent on the bus feeding the drives. Individual or simultaneous operation of the drives shall not add more than 10 percent total harmonic voltage distortion to the bus feeding the drives while operating from a standby generator. The point(s) of analysis for harmonic voltage distortion testing shall be the nearest electrical bus on the supply side of each drive. The three phase fault current at the bus feeding the drives is 34000 (assumed) amps. 2-3. CONSTRUCTION. Construction requirements shall be as follows and as specified below:

Unit designations PCL-313

Cable entry Top or Bottom

Cable exit Top or Bottom

Enclosure type NEMA Type 1 with fans, filters, and gasketed doors

Maximum drive dimensions

_9.5_ Wide, _10.2 Deep,

_18.9 High

in

2-3.01. Fabrication and Assembly. The adjustable frequency drive system shall be shop assembled in a single enclosure using interchangeable plug-in printed circuit boards and power conversion components wherever possible. Shop



assembly shall be performed by the drive manufacturer; systems fabricated or assembled in whole or in part by parties other than the drive manufacturer will not be acceptable. Changes to the drive manufacturer's product by a distributor or system integrator are not allowed. Input line reactors, fuses, circuit breakers, and filters, where required, shall be mounted within the drive enclosure, without exception. Isolation/voltage matching transformers, where required, may be enclosed separately from the remaining drive equipment. The adjustable frequency drive system shall be designed to fit in the space indicated on the Drawings. 2-3.02. Wiring. Internal cabinet wiring shall be neatly installed in wireways or with wire ties where wireways are not practical. Where wireway is used, they are to be mounted to the panel surface with a continuous run of 3M brand, or equal, industrial two-sided adhesive strip. For 12 AWG wire sizes and smaller, and in bundles of six or less, wire tie-down square mounting straps shall be permitted. Tie-down mounts shall be installed at 8” increments or less. All mounting surfaces shall be pre-cleaned with isopropyl alcohol to ensure proper adhesion over the life of the equipment. Terminal blocks shall be nonbrittle, interlocking, track-mounted type, complete with a marking strip, covers, and pressure connectors. Screw terminals will not be acceptable. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits, plus one ground for each shielded cable. In freestanding panels, 8 inches [200 mm] of clearance shall be provided between terminals and the panel base for conduit and wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with the identification on the submittal drawings. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, clearly labeled, and located for ease of maintenance. All grounding wires shall be attached to the sheet metal enclosure with a ring tongue terminal. The surface of the sheet metal shall be prepared to ensure good conductivity and corrosion protection. Wires shall not be kinked or spliced and shall be color coded or marked on both ends. The markings or color coding shall agree with the submittal drawings. With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be stranded copper, insulated for at least 600 volts, with a moisture-resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for at least 90C. 2-3.03. Enclosures. The drive shall consist of factory mounted and wired components within an enclosure, arranged so no electrically live components,



terminals, or conductors are accessible on the front panel or door when the enclosure door is open. The complete drive package, including accessories, shall fit into the space indicated on the Drawings. Freestanding panels shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete pad and shall include provisions for anchoring to the supporting structure. Suitable lifting facilities shall be provided for handling and shipment. Relays, terminals, and special devices inside the control enclosure shall have permanent markings to match the identification on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 2-3.04. Printed Circuit Boards. All printed circuit boards shall be sprayed on both sides with a conformal coating. The conformal coating shall be a part of the AFD manufacturing process and shall be selectively applied to the circuit board connections only. Heat sinks and resistors on the circuit board shall not be coated. Conformal coating shall be Konform "C416", HumiSeal, or equal. All plug-in type boards shall be mechanically held at the circuit board connector. Compression fit only at the connector will not be acceptable. 2-3.05. Shop Painting. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined surfaces and stainless steel, shall be shop cleaned in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations, and finished with the drive manufacturer's standard coating. Finish color shall be manufacturer's standard color. Dry film thickness of the finish coat shall be at least 4 mils [100 μm]. Field painting, other than touch up, will not be required. A sufficient quantity of additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished for field touch up of damaged coatings. A corrosion resistant coating shall be furnished. All intermediate and finish coating materials shall be fumeproof and suitable for a wastewater treatment plant atmosphere that contains hydrogen sulfide. Documentation verifying that the coating material is fumeproof shall be submitted. Coatings shall be lead-free and mercury-free. 2-4. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT. 2-4.01. Bypass Switch. Not used. 2-4.02. AC Line Reactors. Each six-pulse AFD, where isolation/voltage matching transformers are not used, shall be supplied with an input ac line reactor. AC line reactors shall be designed to address performance issues of NEMA MG1-20.55 and to provide proper transient protection of the AFD input power devices. AC line reactors shall be factory mounted and wired within the



AFD enclosure. AC line reactors shall be K-rated per IEEE C57-110 and shall be TCI Model KLR, or equal. 2-4.03. Harmonic Filters. When harmonic filters are required to comply with the total harmonic distortion limits specified herein, the AFD manufacturer shall design and provide the required filters. The harmonic filters shall utilize an interlocking contactor that shall be automatically operated by the AFD run circuit. The AFD manufacturer shall be responsible for the complete filter unit, including the filter contactor. Harmonic filters shall be TCI Harmonic Guard HG7 Series, or equal. 2-4.04. Output dV/dt Filters. .Output filters shall be installed inside the drive enclosure on the inverter output where feed distances exceed motor limitations. Output filters shall consist of a minimum 1.5 percent impedance reactor, in conjunction with a resistor and capacitor network, to form a damped low-pass filter. Use of output reactors alone is not acceptable. Output filters shall be TCI Model V1000 KLC, or equal. 2-5. CONTROLS. 2-5.01. Features. Each drive shall include the following features in addition to those indicated on the Drawings:

a. A door mounted membrane keypad with integral two-line, 24 character minimum LCD display that is capable of controlling the AFD and setting drive parameters. The keypad module shall be programmed with factory set drive parameters in nonvolatile EEPROM or FLASH memory and shall be resettable in the field through the keypad.

b. Control switches and pilot lights shall be provided as indicated on the schematic diagrams. Manual-automatic and start-stop controls included as features of the drive keypad shall be password protected or disabled to prevent override of control switches and safety interlocks shown on the schematic diagrams.

c. Control switches and pilot lights shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oiltight construction. Pilot lights shall be full voltage type with LED lamps.

d. Microprocessor-based regulator. Nonvolatile memory modules shall have a useful life of at least 20 years without requiring battery or module replacement.

e. Input thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit breaker disconnect with interrupting capacity rated in RMS symmetrical amperes as required, and labeled in accordance with UL standard 489. The disconnect shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and shall have door interlocks and a handle with provisions for padlocking in the "Off" position.



f. Manual speed adjustment. g. Indications of power "On", drive "Run", and drive "Fault". Indication

of these parameters shall be provided by full voltage type LED pilot lights. Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the indicating light.

h. Not used. i. Speed indication - calibrated in percent rpm. j. Control circuits of not more than 115 volts supplied by internal

control power transformers. Control power transformers shall have additional capacity as required by external devices indicated on the Drawings. Control power transformers shall be equipped with two primary leads fused, one secondary lead fused, and one secondary lead grounded.

k. Automatic controller shutdown on overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, motor overtemperature and other drive fault conditions. Controller shutdown shall be manually reset type. Terminals shall be provided for control wiring from motor temperature switches, or a motor protection relay located in the drive enclosure.

l. Diagnostic indicators that pinpoint failure and fault conditions. Indicators shall be manually reset to restore operation after abnormal shutdown.

m. Accept a remote 4-20 mA speed control signal. n. Process control output for remote 4-20 mA speed indication, rated

0 to 100 percent speed. o. Spare interlock contacts rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac, wired

separately to the unit terminal board. One NO and one NC isolated spare interlock shall be furnished with each drive. Additional interlock contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.

p. Drive fault and run status contacts for remote indication, rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac.

q. Speed droop feature, which reduces the speed of the drive on transient overloads. The drive shall return to set speed after the transient is removed. If the acceleration or deceleration rates are too rapid for the moment of inertia of the load, the drive shall automatically compensate to prevent drive trip.

r. Individual adjustable speed profile settings for start, stop, entry, slope, and minimum and maximum speed points.

s. Coast, controlled ramp, or dc injection selectable modes of stopping.

t. Not used.PID setpoint control selection. u. Adjustable PWM carrier frequency. The inverter output section

shall be provided with adjustable PWM carrier frequency from 500 Hz to at least 8 kHz.

v. Noise level of installed equipment shall not exceed 85insert alternative dB, as measured by an appropriate calibrated



instrument. The required sound level limit shall be met at a minimum of four locations, each not more than 3 feet [0.9 m] above the floor and not more than 10 feet [3 m] from the equipment. This requirement shall apply to all drives, motors, filters, reactors, and transformers supplied with the drive.

2-5.02. Diagnostics. Diagnostic indicators on the face of the drive shall display the type of fault responsible for drive shutdown, warning, or failure. If two or more faults occur simultaneously, the diagnostic segment shall record or indicate each condition. The drive shall be capable of storing 6 events. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Installation will be in accordance with Electrical Equipment Installation section. 3-2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-2.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, set all relays in accordance with the settings designated in the coordination study, and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with Startup Requirements section, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price. 3-2.02. Installation Supervision. Installation supervision by the manufacturer is not required.The equipment manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the equipment installation. Such services shall be included in the Contract price. 3-3. FIELD HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST. Not used. 3-4. TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL. Up to _4_ employees of Owner, shall be trained in the proper operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance of the equipment. Training shall be conducted by a qualified representative, and shall



consist of combined classroom and hands-on instruction. Training shall be conducted at a place and time mutually agreeable to Owner and the drive manufacturer. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price. Contractor shall include a minimum of _1_ day and _1_ trip to the site.

End of Section



Section 16220

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers single and three-phase, small (fractional) and medium (integral) horsepower, alternating current motors rated 500 horsepower and less (NEMA MG1). Motors shall be designated and coordinated with the driven equipment and shall be located as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2. GENERAL. Motors furnished under driven equipment Specification sections shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. Where applicable, individual motor data sheets have been developed which specify additional requirements for specific motors. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all motors, unless otherwise specified. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Governing Standards. Motors furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the latest version of NEMA MG 1, NEMA MG 10, and IEEE 112, Test Method B. 1-2.03. Nameplates. All motor nameplate data shall conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the motor shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Motors Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Type of bearing and method of lubrication. Rated size of motor, hp, and service factor. Temperature rise and insulation rating.



Full load rotative speed. Net weight. Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load. Full load current. Locked rotor current. Space heater wattage, where applicable. Motor temperature switch data, where applicable. RTD data, where applicable.

1-4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the SubmittalsSubmittals Procedures section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

b. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

c. Guide to troubleshooting.

d. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

e. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring diagrams.

f. Test data and performance curves, where applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Service conditions for motors shall be as specified in the driven equipment Specification sections. Motors shall be designed for special conditions such as area classification, altitude, frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment. Where site elevation and ambient temperature is not specified in the driven equipment Specification sections, the motors shall be designed for the following.

Site elevation Below 3,300 ft

Ambient temperature 40°C Unless specified otherwise, all motors shall be designed for full voltage starting and to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5 percent voltage distortion according to IEEE 519.



Motors utilizing a reduced-voltage, autotransformer starter shall be capable of reduced-voltage starting at a 65 percent tap setting. Motors utilizing a reduced voltage solid state starter shall be capable of starting at 50% of the specified voltage. When powered from an adjustable frequency drive (AFD), motors shall be inverter duty and specifically selected for service with an adjustable frequency type speed controller and shall be derated as required to compensate for harmonic heating effects and reduced self-cooling capability at low speed operation. Each motor shall not exceed a Class B temperature rise when operating in the installed condition at load with power received from the adjustable frequency drive. All motors driven by AFDs shall be supplied with full phase insulation on the end turns and shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31. In addition to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, motors shall be designed to be continually pulsed at the motor terminals with a voltage of 1600 volts ac. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified in the attached motor data sheet(s), design and construction of each general-purpose motor shall be as specified herein. Motor voltage, frequency, speed, service factor, and insulation class shall be as follows.

Motor voltage. 460, 3 phase for ½ horsepower and larger, 120, single phase for smaller than ½ horsepower

Frequency. 60 Hz Speed. Constant speed Service factor. 1.0 , except for AFD driven motors

which shall be 1.15 Insulation class and temperature rise above 40o C design ambient (by resistance method.

Class F with 80o C rise at 1.0 S.F.

Enclosure. Totally enclosed fan cooled Main conduit box sized to include.

Main motor leads and space heater leads where space heaters are specified

2-2.01. Nameplate Horsepower. Motor nameplate horsepower shall be equal to or greater than the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment. 2-2.02. Enclosures. All motors shall be self-ventilated. All self-ventilated open type motors, including those with dripproof, splashproof, and weather protected enclosures, and the fan covers of totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall meet NEMA MG 1 requirements for a fully guarded machine.



2-2.02.01. Totally Enclosed Motors. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished with drain holes and rotating shaft seals. Frames, bearing brackets, external terminal housings, and fan covers for fan cooled motors shall be cast iron. External cooling fans for fan cooled motors shall be fabricated of brass, bronze, aluminum alloy containing not more than 0.2 percent copper, malleable iron, or plastic. All plastic fans shall be fabricated of a reinforced thermosetting plastic and shall be UL approved. 2-2.02.02. Outdoor Motors. Outdoor motors shall have NEMA weather protected enclosures. All exposed metal surfaces shall be protected, where practical, with a corrosion resistant polyester coating. Exposed uncoated surfaces shall be of a corrosion resistant metal. Enclosure exterior and interior surfaces, air gap surfaces, and windings shall be protected with a corrosion resistant polyester, polyurethane or epoxy coating. 2-2.02.03. Motors for Hazardous Locations. Motors for hazardous locations shall be in accordance with the NEC and of the correct type enclosures for the particular service as specified in NEMA MG 1. Motors shall meet the requirements of UL 674. 2-2.03. Main Conduit Boxes. The main conduit box shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1. The main conduit boxes shall be diagonally split for easy access to the motor leads, and designed for rotation in 90-degree increments. A gasket shall be furnished between the halves of the box. Conduit openings in the main conduit box shall match the size and quantity of conduits indicated on the one line Drawings. The main conduit box shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard. The main conduit box shall be sized for all indicated accessory leads. Motors furnished in NEMA 320 frame series and larger shall have conduit boxes designed and constructed to permit motor removal after installation without disconnecting raceways. 2-2.04. Leads. Motor power leads shall be wired into the main conduit box. Unless otherwise specified, space heater leads shall be wired into the main conduit box. All motor leads and their terminals shall be permanently marked in accordance with the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 2. Each lead marking shall be visible after taping of the terminals. All motors rated 100 horsepower and larger, and all vertical motors shall have the direction of rotation marked by an arrow mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal housing, or on the nameplate, and the leads marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond to the direction of rotation and supply voltage sequence.



Leads for dual-voltage rated or for multispeed motors shall be easily connected or reconnected in the main conduit box for the operating voltage or for the specified speeds. Permanent instructions for making these connections shall be furnished inside the main conduit box or on the motor frame or nameplate. 2-2.05. Terminals. Cable type leads shall be provided with Burndy Type YA or acceptable equal compression type connectors. 2-2.06. Grounding Connections. All motors shall be furnished with a ground connection. 2-2.07. Bearings. All bearings shall be self-lubricating, shall have provisions for relubrication, and shall be designed to operate in any position or at any angle. Motor bearings shall be antifriction type with L10 life rating of 40,000 hours in accordance with ABMA Standards. All bearing mountings shall be designed to prevent the entrance of lubricant into the motor enclosure or dirt into the bearings, and shall be fitted with pipes, drain plugs, and fittings arranged for safe, easy relubrication from the outside of the motor while the motor is in service, as necessary. 2-2.08. Rotors. All induction motors shall have squirrel-cage rotors adequately sized to avoid overheating during acceleration of the motor and driven equipment. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced to 0.08 in./sec or less. 2-2.09. Shafts. Shafts shall be furnished with corrosion resistant treatment or shall be of a corrosion resistant material. 2-2.10. Torque Characteristics. Motors rated 200 horsepower and less shall have torques and locked-rotor current in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 12. 2-2.11. Motor Space Heaters. Unless otherwise specified in the attached motor data sheet(s), motors 1 horsepower and larger shall be provided with a space heater element sized to prevent condensation on the core and windings. The space heaters shall be isolated or so located as to prevent heat damage to adjacent painted surfaces and shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power supply. 2-2.12. Temperature Sensing Devices. Each motor controlled by an adjustable frequency drive shall be furnished with at least one automatic reset winding temperature switch per phase. Temperature switch contacts shall be normally closed and rated 5 amps at 120 volts ac. The contacts shall be wired in series with the end leads brought out to the motor terminal box.



An auxiliary conduit box shall be provided for termination of RTD or temperature switch wiring. 2-2.13. Assembly. All motors shall be completely assembled with the driven equipment, lubricated, and ready for operation. 2-2.14. Efficiency. Unless otherwise specified in the attached motor data sheet(s), motors shall be premium efficiency type and shall have a NEMA nominal efficiency nameplate value equal to or greater than values indicated in the following table. Efficiency shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B. Vertical motors shall have efficiency values equal to or greater than those indicated in the following table minus 0.50.

Motor Nominal Efficiency Values Nominal Efficiency Values

kW hp

Open Drip Enclosure TEFC Enclosure

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

0.7 1 84.0 85.5 82.5 75.0 77.0 85.5 82.5 75.5

1.1 1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 78.0 84.0 86.5 87.5 80.0

1.5 2 85.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 85.5

2.2 3 85.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 87.0 89.5 89.5 86.5

3.7 5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 85.5

5.6 7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 88.5 90.0 91.7 91.0 86.5

7.5 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.0 91.7 91.0 91.0

11.2 15 90.2 93.0 91.7 91.0 91.0 92.4 92.0 91.0

14.9 20 91.7 93.0 92.4 92.0 92.0 93.0 92.0 91.0

18.7 25 92.4 93.6 93.0 92.0 92.0 93.6 93.0 91.0

22.4 30 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 92.4 93.6 93.0 93.0

29.8 40 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.0 92.4 94.1 94.1 93.0

37.3 50 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0

44.8 60 93.6 95.0 94.5 94.0 93.6 95.0 94.5 93.0



Motor Nominal Efficiency Values Nominal Efficiency Values

kW hp

Open Drip Enclosure TEFC Enclosure

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

56 75 94.0 95.0 95.0 94.0 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.0

74.6 100 94.5 95.4 95.0 95.0 94.1 95.4 95.0 94.0

93.2 125 95.0 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.0 94.0

112 150 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.8 95.8 94.0

149 200 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.4 96.2 95.8 94.1

186 250 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.8 94.5

224 300 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8

261 350 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8

298 400 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8

336 450 95.8 96.2 96.2 95.8 96.2 95.8

373 500 95.8 96.2 96.2 95.8 96.2 95.8

2-3. ACCESSORIES. 2-3.01. Special Tools and Accessories. Motors requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Each motor shall be provided with lifting eyebolts or lugs and appropriate fittings for adding bearing lubricant. Grease lubricated units shall be provided with a means of venting the casing. Oil lubricated units shall be provided with constant level oilers or with sight glasses arranged to indicate operating and static oil levels. 2-3.02 Whenever variable frequency PWM drives are installed to control AC motors, a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring (AEGIS SGR) shall be installed on the AC motor to discharge shaft currents to ground. Recommended part: AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring

2-4. ANCHORS. Contractor shall furnish suitable anchors for each item of equipment as required for driven equipment.



2-5. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the unfiltered vibration displacement (peak-to-peak), as measured at any point on the machine, shall not exceed the limits as required .At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or its components shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Each motor will be installed in accordance with the Equipment Installation section.

End of Section



Section 16670

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing the design of lightning protection systems and the furnishing and installation of lightning protection equipment for the Hydrophilic HSW Tank. Lightning protection systems shall be furnished, installed, and tested as specified. Lightning protection equipment shall meet the requirements specified herein. Lightning protection systems shall consist of, but not be limited to, air terminals; main, bonding, and down conductors; ground terminals; and all required connectors and fittings required to complete the system. The lightning protection system shall include the bonding of all roof-mounted mechanical equipment, roof drains, roof mounted ladders, chimneys, antennas, and other roof mounted metal objects. 1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall furnish all installation drawings, tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor and obtain all inspections to complete the work as specified, and in compliance with all codes, standards, and regulations. Contractor shall provide coordination with other contractors and supervision of installation as needed during construction. The design of the system shall include determination of the overall lightning hazard for the geographic location of the project and for the structures, the selection of Class I and/or Class II materials, the need of corrosion protection for the copper and/or aluminum components used, and consideration of other pertinent factors. The design shall produce a zone of protection from lightning to prevent personal injury, structural damage, and equipment downtime. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of UL unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. The system shall be installed by an installer who has UL listing and subscribes to the UL Follow-Up Service.


rac55342

Stamp


1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Governing Standards. All system components furnished under this section shall be designed in accordance with ANSI/UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components. All lightning protection systems furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with UL 96A – Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems and ANSI/NFPA 780 – Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. Lightning protection systems shall be bonded to grounding electrode systems in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 1-2.03. Workmanship and Materials. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, unless required by tests. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete certification of design calculations; assembly, and installation drawings; together with complete engineering data covering the materials used and the parts, devices, and accessories forming the system, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. The lightning protection system shall be inspected and tested after installation by conducting continuity and ground resistance tests as well as a visual inspection. Inspection results and test data shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals Procedures section. Upon completion of the installation, Contractor shall apply for and deliver the UL Master Label Certificate of Inspection for each structure/building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The system components shall be manufactured by a company that has been specializing in the design and manufacture of UL listed lightning protection equipment for at least 5 years.


rac55342

Stamp


2-2. MATERIALS. All manufactured and fabricated components shall conform to NFPA 780 Class I or Class II as needed for the structures on which they will be installed. The system components shall be fabricated from the following metals:

Conductors Copper. Aluminum may be used where aluminum domes are installed. Transition to copper where leaving the aluminum dome

Air Terminals Copper or bronze.

Grounding Electrodes Copper clad steel.

Fasteners Copper or bronze.

Bimetallic Fasteners Bronze and aluminum. Aluminum conductors and air terminals shall be mounted on aluminum surfaces only. All materials furnished for the lightning protection system shall bear the inspection label of UL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. The lightning protection system shall be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner so all components will blend in with the appearance of the building. All conductors shall be concealed or semi-concealed during construction using methods recommended in NFPA 780 and UL 96A. Air terminals shall have base supports designed for the surface on which they are used and shall be securely anchored. All exposed metal eave troughs, roof vents, guy wires, antennas, and air handling equipment shall be bonded to the lightning protection system in such a way that two paths to ground are provided. Air terminals and conductors to be secured without damaging the integrity of the structure or its water-tightness. The lightning protection system shall be installed and tested in accordance with the grounding requirements listed in Specification Section 16050.

End of Section


rac55342

Stamp

ROCK RIVER WATER RECLAMATION DISTRICT

CO-DIGESTION RECEIVING STATION PHASE 2

CAPITAL PROJECT NO. 1155

ATTACHMENT TO THE SPECIFICATIONS

OWNER PROVIDED IN-LINE GRINDER – SUBMITTAL INFORMATION


2600 S. Garnsey Street Santa Ana, CA 92707 (800) 331-2277

February 6, 2014 JWC SO 110349

Rock River Water Reclamation DistrictPO Box 7480 Rockford, IL 61126

Attention: Steve Graceffa

Reference: JWC Muffin Monster ® Rock River Water Reclamation District

To whom it may concern:

Enclosed please find our submittal packages for the above referenced project. This package includes the engineering data, pertinent drawings and bill of material for equipment.

Review & Approval:

Once your review is complete, please return one complete copy of the approved drawings and bill of material clearly identifying any remarks or concerns that you may have. If, at anytime during the review, you have any questions or need additional information, please feel free to contact me at (714) 428-4766.

Shipping Instructions:

Please confirm the contact person, telephone number, job-site address and delivery date. Ship to: TBD

Attention: TBD Phone: TBD

Request Delivery Date: TBD

Shipping Instructions:

Upon receipt of the equipment, please check the packing list to make sure all items have been received. If there is any discrepancy, any part of the shipment appears to be damaged upon arrival or missing, you should request a carrier inspection, and notify JWC as soon as possible. Purchaser is responsible to keep equipment and/or material in a safe, dry place, protected from the elements, vandals or thieves.


2600 S. Garnsey Street Santa Ana, CA 92707 (800) 331-2277

Supply by Others: JWC SO 110349

The following items are to be supplied by others: 1. Unloading of new equipment and removing existing equipment. 2. Installation of new equipment. 3. Civil works and electrical wiring and conduit. 4. Anchor bolts.

Clarifications:

Please review the following item(s) that clarify any deviations or additional information: 1. Please notify JWC if the power supply is not 460V, 3ph, 60Hz.2. Please advise any requirement on delivery and installation dates.

Currently the project has NOT been released for manufacturing. Upon receiving approval of the submittal package, the project will be released for manufacturing. At that time, an estimated shipping schedule can be determined. We are looking forward to a successful delivery and installation of this project and other future projects.

Best regards,

Alicia Hernandez Tel: (714) 428-4766 Fax: (714) 549-4007 Email: [email protected]

Xplease sign and date to

Approve for production


Project Name: Rock River Water Reclamation District

SUBMITTAL DATA

PO Box 7480Rockford, IL 61126-7480

Rock River Reclamation District

Sales Order Number: 110349

JWC Environmental


PC2200-000-01

QTY: 1 PC2200 CONTROLLER ASSY

DRAWING

1 EXTENDED WARRANTY (JWC STANDARD WARRANTY IS EXTENDED BY 1 YEAR FOR A TOTAL OF 2 YEARS)

1

OTHER

SPARE PARTS:

3HP AT 460V-3PH-60HZ

SET OF FUSES (LOCATED IN CONTROLLER)

DWG# CF11-374

110349-2-1

INCLUDES AN IEC STARTER WITH OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION, JAM-SENSING CURRENT TRANSFORMER, FUSES AND MICRO-PLC, WITH OVERTEMP OPTION (IF APPLICABLE).

VOLTAGE

DESCRIPTION

FEATURES

QTY

SERIAL NO.

EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED:

ELECTRIC MOTOR 3HP TEFC 208-230/460V, 3PH, 60HZ, 1.15SF 182TC 29:1 REDUCER

DRIVES

DUCTILE IRON MUFFIN MONSTER, 12" CUTTING CHAMBER UNIBODY HOUSING WITH 6" DIA. FLANGE.

PROJECT NAMESOLD TO

11 TOOTH CAM 8620 ALLOY STEEL

MODEL

JWCE S.O.ROCK RIVER WATER RECLAMTION DISTRICT

LUGGED TUNGSTEN CARBIDE/BUNA-NCUTTERS

SUBMITTAL DATA

30004T-1206-DI MUFFIN MONSTER GRINDER

2/5/2014DATE

QTY: 1

ENCLOSURE

PAINT SPEC

SERIAL NO.

TNEMEC 69 GREEN EPOXY

110349

110349-1-1

ROCK RIVER WATER RECLAMTION DISTRICT

SEALS

JWC Environmental


This section of the submittal describes the sewage grinder(s) and motor controller(s). The equipment will be installed as shown on the plans, as recommended by the supplier, and in compliance with all OSHA, local, state and federal codes and regulations.

The grinder will be capable of processing 600GPM(37.9 L/S) For further information please refer to the flow curve included in this submittal.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Plate

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A536-84: Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B-16.42-1979: Standard Specification for Class 40 Grey Iron Castings

American National Standards Institute Standards (ANSI) B16.42-1979, Class 150 (Ductile Iron Class 150) Flanges.

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 303 Stainless Steel

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 8620 Heat Treated Alloy Steel

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4140 Heat Treated Hexagon Steel

Rockwell C

Grinder(s) will, as applicable, meet the requirements of the following industry

Controller(s) will, as applicable, meet the requirements of the following Regulatory Agencies.

MUFFIN MONSTER®30004T IN-LINE ELECTRIC GRINDER

A.

B.

NUMBER OF UNITS: 1

SUMMARY

REFERENCES

JWC ENVIRONMENTAL


National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Standards

National Electrical Code (NEC)

Underwriters Laboratory (UL and cUL)

Supplier will submit 6 (SIX) sets of shop drawings. Shop drawings will include equipment descriptions, specifications, dimensional and assembly drawings, parts lists, and job specific drawings.

Supplier will submit 4 (FOUR) preliminary sets & 3 (THREE) final sets with 1 CD copy of Operation and Maintenance manuals prepared using best commercial practices. The manuals will include equipment descriptions, operating instructions, drawings, troubleshooting techniques, a recommended maintenance schedule

The containers will provide adequate protection for the equipment in a dry indoor environment between +40°F (+4.5°C) and +100°F (+37.8°C) until time for

JWC Environmental® has a minimum 40 (FORTY) years experience at manufacturing, support systems, two (2)-shafted grinding equipment and motor controls with a minimum of 10,000 installations with similar equipment. JWC Environmental® will provide a list of names and dates of installations for verification by the Engineer or Owner's Representative at their request.

Each grinder and controller will be factory tested to ensure satisfactory operation.

Shop Drawing(s)

REFERENCES (Cont'd)

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

QUALITY ASSURANCE

The equipment will be packaged in containers constructed for normal shipping, handling and storage.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

DOCUMENTS

JWC ENVIRONMENTAL


The cutting chamber will be a nominal height of 12" inches.

Individual cutters and spacers will be 8620 heat treated alloy steel, surface ground for uniformity and through-hardened to a minimum 60-65 Rockwell C.

General

Components

The grinder will be of two (2)-shaft design and be capable of continuous operation, processing wet or dry.

Individual Cutters and Spacers

JWC Environmental: Muffin Monster model No. 30004T-1206-DI

Grinder(s) is in compliance with specifications and plans and will be supplied by JWC Environmental®

The cutter cartridge and drive assembly will be removable from the main housing as a complete assembly without further disassembly. The components of that assembly include cutters, spacers, shafts, reducer, motor, bearings, and seals.

Two (2) -shaft design will consist of two (2) parallel shafts alternately stacked with individual intermeshing cutters and spacers positioned on the shaft to form a helical pattern. The two (2) shafts will counter-rotate with the driven shaft operating at approximately two-thirds (2/3) the speed of the drive shaft.

Each grinder will include cutters, spacers, shafts, bearings and seals, in-line housing with pipe flanges, inspection ports, cutter stack, reducer, and motor.

MANUFACTURER

Each unit of equipment will be identified with a corrosion resistant nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. Nameplate information will include equipment model number, serial number, supplier's name, and location.

GRINDER(S)

IDENTIFICATION

JWC ENVIRONMENTAL


The inside configuration of both the individual cutters and the individual spacers will be hexagonal so as to fit the shafts with a total clearance not to exceed 0.018 inch (0.38mm) across the flats to assure positive drive, minimize wear on the cutters, and increase the compressive strength of the spacers.

Cutter configuration will consist of 11 individual cam cutter. To maintain particle size, the height of the tooth will not exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm) above the root diameter. Cutter to cutter root diameter overlap will be not less than 1/16 inch (1.6mm) or greater than 1/4 inch (6mm) to maintain the best possible cutting efficiency while incurring the least amount of frictional losses. Clearance between overlapping cutters of opposing shafts will be no greater than 0.011 inches (0.28 mm).

Grinder drive and driven shafts will be made of 4140 heat treated hexagon steel with a tensile strength rating of not less than 149,000 psi (1,027 kPa).

Each hexagonal shaft will measure a nominal two (2) inches (51 mm) across parallel surfaces.

The main housing will be a solid cast structure made of A536-84 ductile iron.The one (1)-piece flanged body will be capable of remaining in-line if removal of the cutter cartridge and drive assembly is required for service.

The inside profile of the main housing will be concave to follow the radial arc of the cutters. To direct larger particles toward the cutters and assure fineness of grind, the main housing will maintain a clearance not to exceed 5/16 inch (8 mm) between the major diameter of the cutter and the concave are of the housing.

Shafts

Main Housing and Covers

Individual Cutters and Spacers (Cont'd)

GRINDER(S) (Cont'd)

Components (Cont'd)

JWC ENVIRONMENTAL


The main housing will be provided with a covered access port for equipment inspection. Inspection port covers will be A536-84 ductile iron.

The radial and axial loads of the cutter shafts will be borne by sealed, oversized, deep-groove ball bearings at each end.

The bearings will be protected by a combination of a replaceable and independent tortuous path device and mechanical seals.

Face materials will be tungsten carbide to tungsten carbide.

O-rings will be made of BUNA-N elastomers.

The mechanical seal will be rated at 90 psi (620 kPa) continuous duty by the seal supplier.

The bearings will be housed in a replaceable cartridge that supports and aligns the bearings and seals, as well as protects the shafts and end housings. The seal elements will be independent of the stack height, therefore cutter stack tightness will not affect seal performance. The seal elements will maintain their factory set preload independent of the cutter stack tightness.

Seals will meet required pressure rating regardless of cutter stack fit. The seal cartridge will provide seal protection against axial loading on shafts and bearings during shaft deflection.

Each seal element will be positively locked to its corresponding rotating or static cartridge element. This positive lock on the seal elements is critical to long seal life in applications where grit or other abrasive materials are present.

The gear housing will be provided with a covered access port for cutter stack tightening.

Gear Housing and Cover

GRINDER(S) (Cont'd)

Components (Cont'd)

Shaft Bearings and Seals

Main Housing and Covers (Cont'd)

JWC ENVIRONMENTAL


The gear housing will be A536-84 ductile iron.

The cutter stack tightening cover will be A36 carbon steel.

The speed reducer will be a grease-filled planetary-type of reducer with a 500%shock load capacity. The reduction ratio will be 29:1.

The input shaft of the reducer will be directly coupled to the motor using a three (3)-piece coupling, and the output shaft of the reducer will be directly coupled with the grinder using a two (2)-piece coupling.

The motor will be 3HP, TEFC, 1,750 rpm, 208-230/460V, 3PH, 60HZ.

Motor service factor will be 1.15, the efficiency factor not less than 87.5% atfull load and the power factor not less than 78% at full load.

GRINDER(S) (Cont'd)

Components (Cont'd)

Motor

Reducer

Gear Housing and Cover

JWC ENVIRONMENTAL


MOTOR CONTROLLER(S)

General

The controller will provide independent control of the grinder.

Controller will be the supplier's standard UL/cUL listed Model PC2200.

The controller will be rated for 3hp (2.2 KW), 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

Operation

The controller will be equipped with an ON-OFF/RESET-REMOTE three (3) position selector switch.

In the ON position the grinder will run.

In the OFF/RESET position the grinder will not run.

In the REMOTE position the grinder will start and stop as controlled by a remotely-located dry contact.

The grinder will only be reset by switching the ON-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position.

Components

Enclosure

Enclosure will be NEMA 4X, fabricated of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resins, and will be suitable for wall mounting. Door will have corrosion-resistant hinges and latches.

Enclosure will house the control devices, terminal blocks and reversing motor starters.

Control Devices

Pilot devices will be mounted on the enclosure front panel door.

The controller will have indicator lights for POWER ON, RUN, and FAIL SEE O&M MANUAL.

Indicator lights will be LED type pilot lights. Lights and the selector switch will be heavy duty NEMA 4X type.

Control transformer will be protected by two (2) primary fuses and one (1) secondary fuse. The 120 volt secondary will have one (1) leg grounded.

Contacts will be included for grinder RUN and FAIL signal outputs. The contacts will be rated two (2) amperes.

Ethernet IP addresses and PLC Tags/Addresses, if applicable, will be set to JWCE standards unless otherwise specified prior to equipment release to manufacturing. JWCE does not hold


MOTOR CONTROLLER(S) (Cont'd)

Components (Cont'd)

Control Devices (Cont’d)

responsibility to change Ethernet IP addresses or PLC Tags/Addresses post equipment shipment.

Motor Starter

Starter will be a full-voltage reversing type with 120 volt operating coils.

Forward and reverse contactors on the starters will have both mechanical and electrical interlocks.

Overload relays (OL) will be adjustable so that the range selected includes the FLA (full load amperes) rating and service factor.

Safety Features

When a grinder jam condition occurs in the grinder ON or REMOTE mode the controller will stop the grinder, then reverse the grinder rotation to clear the obstruction. If the jam is cleared, the controller will return the grinder to normal operation. Up to two (2) additional reversing cycles (3 times total) may occur within 30 seconds before the controller de-energizes the grinder motor and activates the grinder fail indicator and fail contact.

If a power failure occurs while the grinder is running, operation will resume when power is restored.

If a power failure occurs while the grinder is in a fail condition the fail indicator will reactivate when power is restored.

The controller will provide overload protection for the motor through an overload relay mounted directly on the grinder motor starter.

Short-circuit protection requires that a properly-sized circuit breaker or set of fuses be installed by others.

Controller reset will be from the local panel controls only.

INSTALLATION

Grinder(s) and motor controller(s) will be installed in accordance with the supplier’s installation instructions, and in compliance with all OSHA, local, state, and federal codes and regulations.

END OF SECTION


Des

crip

tion:

300

10-0

144:

3H

P,1

750R

PM

,3P

H,6

0HZ,

182T

C,3

542M

,TE

FC,F

1

Par

t Det

ail

Rev

isio

n:D

Sta

tus:

PR

D/A

Cha

nge

#:P

ropr

ieta

ry:

No

Type

:A

CP

rod.

Typ

e:35

42M

Ele

c. S

pec:

35W

GP

797

CD

Dia

gram

:E

nclo

sure

:TE

FCM

fg P

lant

:M

ech .

Spe

c:35

L114

Layo

ut:

Fram

e:18

2TC

Mou

ntin

g:F1

Pol

es:

04C

reat

ed D

ate:

06-1

5-20

10B

ase:

NR

otat

ion :

RIn

sul a

tion:

FE

ff. D

ate:

03-1

1-20

11L e

ads:

9#18

Lite

r atu

re:

Ele

c. D

iagr

am:

Rep

lace

d B

y:

Nam

epla

te N

P12

56L

CA

T.N

O.

VM

3611

TS

PE

C.

35L1

14P

797H

1H

P3

VO

LTS

208-

230/

460

AM

P9.

1-8.

4/4.

2R

PM

1750

F RA

ME

182T

CH

Z60

PH

3S

ER

.F.

1.15

CO

DE

LD

ES

AC

LAS

SF

NE

MA

-NO

M-E

FF87

.5P

F78

RA

TIN

G40

C A

MB

-CO

NT

CC

010A

US

AB

LE A

T 20

8VD

E62

06O

DE

6203

EN

CL

TEFC

SN

Cata

log

/ Spe

c N

umbe

r: VM

3611

T

Pag

e 1

of 2


Per

form

ance

Dat

a at

460

V, 6

0Hz,

3.0

HP

(Typ

ical

per

form

ance

- N

o t g

uara

ntee

d va

lues

)G

ener

al C

hara

cter

istic

sFu

ll Lo

ad T

orqu

e:9.

08 L

B-F

TS

tart

Con

figur

atio

n:D

OL

No-

Load

Cur

rent

:2.

27 A

mps

Bre

ak-D

own

Torq

ue:

39.7

LB

-FT

Line

-line

Res

. @ 2

5°C

.:4.

59 O

hms

A P

h / 0

.0 O

hms

B P

hP

ull-U

p To

rque

:23

.2 L

B-F

TT e

mp.

Ris

e @

Rat

ed L

oad:

66 C

Lock

ed-R

otor

Tor

que:

27.3

LB

-FT

Tem

p. R

ise

@ S

.F. L

oad:

83 C

Sta

rting

Cur

rent

:36

.6 A

mps

Load

Cha

ract

eris

tics

% o

f Rat

ed L

oad

255 0

7 510

012

515

0S

.F.

Pow

er F

acto

r:37

.058

.071

.078

.082

.085

.080

.0E

ffici

ency

:79

.986

.587

.887

.586

.585

.086

.9S

peed

:17

89.0

1777

.017

64.0

1750

.017

34.0

1717

.017

40.0

L ine

Am

pere

s:2.

462.

883.

464.

164.

995.

914.

66

Des

crip

tion:

300

10-0

144:

3H

P,1

750R

PM

,3P

H,6

0HZ,

182T

C,3

542M

,TE

FC,F

1Ca

talo

g / S

pec

Num

ber:

VM36

11T

Pag

e 2

of 2


HE

AD

DR

OP

MO

DE

L3

00

04

-12

06


UN

CO

NTR

OLL

ED

CO

PY

��


UN

CO

NTR

OLL

ED

CO

PY


UN

CO

NTR

OLL

ED

CO

PY

Unc

ontro

lled

Cop

y


UN

CO

NTR

OLL

ED

CO

PY


Bulletin 1492

Screw Connection Terminal Blocks

12-8

!

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold

Standard Feed-Though Blocks

1492-J3 1492-J4 1492-J6

Dimensions are not intended to beused for manufacturing purposes.Note: Height dimension is measured

from top of rail to top of terminalblock.

0.20"(5.1 mm)

2.36" (60 mm)

1.56

" (3

9.5

mm

)

0.24"(6.1 mm)

2.36" (60 mm)

1.56

" (3

9.5

mm

)

0.319"(8.1 mm)

2.36" (60 mm)

1.56

" (3

9.5

mm

)

Specifications Feed-Through Terminal Block Feed-Through Terminal Block Feed-Through Terminal BlockCertifications CSA IEC ATEX CSA IEC ATEX CSA IEC ATEX

Voltage Rating 600V AC/DC 800VAC/DC

550VAC/DC 600V AC/DC 800V

AC/DC690V

AC/DC 600V AC/DC 800VAC/DC

550VAC/DC

Maximum Current 65 A 50 A 24 A 21 A 35 A 25 A 32 A 28 A 50 A 41 A 36 A

Wire Range (Rated Cross Section) #22…12 AWG

#26…12 AWG 2.5 mm2

2.5 mm2

(#20…14 AWG)

#22…10 AWG

#26…10 AWG 4 mm2

4 mm2

(#20…12 AWG)

#22…8 AWG 6 mm26 mm2

(#20…10 AWG)

Wire Strip Length 0.39 in. (10 mm) 0.39 in. (10 mm) 0.47 in (12 mm)Recommended Tightening Torque 4.5…7.1 lb•in. (0.5…0.8 N•m) 9.0 lb•in. (1.0 N•m) 14.2 lb•in (1.6 N•m)Density 59 pcs/ft (196 pcs/m) 49 pcs/ft (163 pcs/m) 37 pcs/ft (123 pcs/m)Housing Temperature Range –58…+248 °F (–50…+120 °C) –58…+248 °F (–50…+120 °C) –58…+248 °F (–50…+120 °C)Short-Circuit Current Rating See page 12-43

Terminal Blocks Cat. No. Pkg Qty. Cat. No. Pkg Qty. Cat. No. Pkg Qty.Color: Grey 1492-J3 100 1492-J4 100 1492-J6 100

Red 1492-J3-RE 100 1492-J4-RE 100 1492-J6-RE 100Blue 1492-J3-B 100 1492-J4-B 100 1492-J6-B 100

Black 1492-J3-BL 100 1492-J4-BL 100 1492-J6-BL 100Green 1492-J3-G 100 1492-J4-G 100 1492-J6-G 100Yellow 1492-J3-Y 100 1492-J4-Y 100 1492-J6-Y 100

Orange 1492-J3-OR 100 1492-J4-OR 100 1492-J6-OR 100Brown 1492-J3-BR 100 1492-J4-BR 100 1492-J6-BR 100White 1492-J3-W 100 1492-J4-W 100 1492-J6-W 100

Accessories Cat. No. Pkg Qty. Cat. No. Pkg Qty. Cat. No. Pkg Qty.Mounting Rails:

1 m Symmetrical DIN (Steel) 199-DR1 10 199-DR1 10 199-DR1 10

1 m Symmetrical DIN (Aluminum) 1492-DR5 10 1492-DR5 10 1492-DR5 101 m Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Aluminum) 1492-DR6 2 1492-DR6 2 1492-DR6 21 m Angled Hi-Rise Sym. DIN (Steel) 1492-DR7 2 1492-DR7 2 1492-DR7 2

End Barriers Grey 1492-EBJ3 50 1492-EBJ3 50 1492-EBJ3 50Blue 1492-EBJ3-B 50 1492-EBJ3-B 50 1492-EBJ3-B 50

Yellow 1492-EBJ3-Y 50 1492-EBJ3-Y 50 1492-EBJ3-Y 50End Anchors and Retainers:

Screwless End Retainer 1492-ERL35 20 1492-ERL35 20 1492-ERL35 20

DIN Rail — Normal Duty 1492-EAJ35 100 1492-EAJ35 100 1492-EAJ35 100DIN Rail — Heavy Duty 1492-EAHJ35 50 1492-EAHJ35 50 1492-EAHJ35 50

Jumpers:�Screw Center Jumper — 10-pole 1492-CJJ5-10 20 1492-CJJ6-10 20 1492-CJJ8-10 20

Screw Center Jumper — 4-pole 1492-CJJ5-4 50 1492-CJJ6-4 50 1492-CJJ8-4 50Screw Center Jumper — 3-pole 1492-CJJ5-3 50 1492-CJJ6-3 50 1492-CJJ8-3 50Screw Center Jumper — 2-pole 1492-CJJ5-2 50 1492-CJJ6-2 50 1492-CJJ8-2 50Plug-in Center Jumper — 50-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-50 10 1492-CJLJ6-41 (41-pole) 10 — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 10-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-10 20 1492-CJLJ6-10 20 — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 9-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-9 20 — — — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 8-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-8 20 — — — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 7-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-7 20 — — — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 6-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-6 20 — — — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 5-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-5 20 — — — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 4-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-4 60 1492-CJLJ6-4 60 — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 3-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-3 60 1492-CJLJ6-3 60 — —Plug-in Center Jumper — 2-Pole 1492-CJLJ5-2 60 1492-CJLJ6-2 60 — —Insulated Side Jumper — 24-Pole 1492-SJ5B-24 50 — — — —Insulated Side Jumper — 10-Pole 1492-SJ5B-10 50 — — — —Screw Type Jumper Notching Tool 1492-T1 1 1492-T1 1 1492-T1 1

Other Accessories:Partition Plate 1492-EBJ16 20 1492-EBJ16 20 1492-EBJ16 20

Test Plug Socket 1492-TPS23 20 1492-TPS23L 50 1492-TPS23L 50Test Plug 1492-TP23 20 1492-TP23 20 1492-TP23 20Test Plug (Stackable) 1492-TPJ5 25 1492-TPJ6 25 — —Electrical Warning Plate 1492-EWPJ5 25 1492-EWPJ5 25 1492-EWPJ8 50Group Marking Carrier 1492-GM35 25 1492-GM35 25 1492-GM35 25

Marking Systems:Snap-in Marker Cards

1492-M5X12 (144/card) 5 1492-M6X12 (120/card) 5 1492-MR8X12 (84/card) 51492-M5X5 (200/card) 5 1492-M6X5 (200/card) 5 1492-M8X5 (160/card) 5

� Use of center jumpers may affect spacings, requiring derating of terminal blocks. See page 12-78 for details.

JWCE PART# E10-003-207, PAGE 1 OF 1



Bulletin 800F

22.5 mm Push Buttons

25

Product Selection, Continued

3-Position Selector Switch Operators, Non-Illuminated

Standard KnobCat. No. 800FP-SM32

Knob LeverCat. No. 800FM-HM32

Switching AngleTarget Table and Operator Position (60° Switching Angle)

Contact TypePosition on

Mounting Latch

N.O. Left X O O

N.O. Right O O X

N.O. Center X O X

N.C. Left O X X

N.C. Right X X O

N.C. Center O X O

Note: X = Closed/O = Open

Color

Operator Type Standard Knob Knob Lever

Pkg. Quantity

Plastic Metal Plastic Metal

Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.

Black with WhiteInsert

800FP-SM32 800FM-SM32 800FP-HM32 800FM-HM321

800FP-SB32 800FM-SB32 800FP-HB32 800FM-HB32

800F P – S M3 3 –a b c d e f

aOperator Construction

Code Description

P Round plastic operator(IP66, Type 4/4X/13)

M Round metal operator(IP66, Type 4/13)

bOperator Type

Code Description

S Standard knob

H Knob lever

cOperator Function

Code Type

M3Maintained

L3Spring return from left

R3Spring return from right

B3Spring return from left and right

dKnob/Insert Color

Code Knob Color Insert Color

2 Black White

eOrientation

Code Description

Blank Standard

N 90° offset

fPackaging

Code Description

Blank 1 per package

BP 10 per package

30 mm hole spacing will not work if knob lever is used. See page 64 for recommended operatorpanel spacing.For use in vertical mount enclosures.

Specifications — Page 12Back-of-Panel — Page 44Accessories — Page 52Legend Plates — Page 59Approximate Dimensions — Page 64




Bulletin 800F


12

Overview, Continued/Specifications

3-Across x 2-Deep Back-of-Panel (6 Circuits Maximum)

Overview, Continued

Rugged snap-fit design for plastic or metal latchStackable contact blocksRotating collar for easy one-hand latch removalColor-coded contact block plungers for contact identification

Plastic Latch with Contact Block Metal Latch with Contact Block

Assembly Overview

Specifications

Front-of-Panel (Operators)

Product Certifications

Mechanical Ratings

Description Plastic (Bulletin 800FP) Metal (Bulletin 800FM)

Vibration (assembled to panel) Tested at 10…2000 Hz, 1.52 mm displacement (peak-to-peak) max./10 G max. for 3 hr duration, no damage

Shock Tested at 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11 ms; no damage at 100 G

Degree of protection IP65/66 (Type 3/3R/4/4X/12/13) IP65/66 (Type 3/3R/4/12/13)

Mechanical durability per EN60947-5-1 (Annex C)

10,000,000 Cycles Momentary Push Buttons, Momentary Mushroom

1,000,000 Cycles Multi-Function, Selector Switch, Key Selector Switch, Selector Jog, SensEjectTM Key Selector Switch

500,000 Cycles Non-Illuminated Push-Pull E-Stop

300,000 Cycles Twist-to-Release E-Stop, Illuminated Push-Pull E-Stop, Alternate Action Push Buttons

100,000 Cycles Potentiometer, Toggle Switch

Operating forces (typical with one contact block) Flush/extended = 5 N, E-stop = 36 NMushroom = 9 N

Operating torque(typical application with one contact block) Selector switch = 0.25 N•m

Environmental

Temperature range (operating) –25…+70°C (-13…158°F)‡

Temperature range (short term storage) –40…+85°C (-40…185°F)

Humidity 50…95% RH from 25…60°C (77…140°F) per: Procedure IV of MIL-STD-810C, Method 507.1 cycling test

Performance Data — see page Important-2 of the Industrial Controls catalog (A115-CA001A-EN-P).Momentary mushroom operators are IP65. Plastic keyed operators are IP66, Type 4/13; not Type 4X.

‡ Operating temperatures below 0°C (32°F) are based on the absence of freezing moisture and liquids, UL recognized to 55°C (131°F) - Incandescent moduleMax 40°C (104°F).

Certifications UR/UL, CSA, CCC, CE

Conformity to standards — CE marked NEMA ICS-5; UL 508, EN 418, EN 60947-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-4, EN 60947-5-5

Terminal identification IEC 60947-1

Shipping approvals RINA, ABS, LR




Bulletin 800F


13

Specifications , Continued

Electrical Ratings

Standard contact block ratingsA600, Q600

600V ACAC 15, DC 13 to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 and UL 508, 17V, 5 mA min.

Low voltage contact block ratings5V, 1 mA DC min.

C300, R150, AC 15, DC 13 to EN 60947-5-1 and UL 508

Nominal Voltage Range Current Draw Frequency

LED Module Ratings

24V AC24V DC120V AC240V AC

10…29V AC10…30V DC70…132V AC

180…264V AC

31 mA24 mA25 mA22 mA

50/60 HzDC

50/60 Hz50/60 Hz

Thermal current 10 A max. enclosed (40°C ambient) to UL508, EN 60947-5-1

Insulation voltage (Ui) Screw terminal = 690V, spring-clamp = 300V

Wire capacity (screw terminal) #18…12 AWG (0.75…2.5 mm2)Max. (2) #14 AWG or (1) #12 AWG

Wire capacity (spring-clamp terminal) #18…14 AWG (0.75…1.5 mm2)

Recommended tightening torque on screw terminals 0.7…0.9 N•m (6…8 lb-in.)

Dielectric strength (minimum) 2500V for one minute

External short circuit protectionStandard blocks 10 A type gL/gG cartridge fuse to EN 60269-2-1 or gN (Class J to UL 248-8 or Class C to UL

248-4)

Low voltage contact blocks 6 A type gL/gG cartridge fuse to EN 60269-2-1 or gN (Class J to UL 248-8 or Class C to UL248-4)

Electrical shock protection Finger-safe conforming to IP2X

Mechanical Ratings

Vibration (assembled to panel) Tested at 10…2000 Hz, 1.52 mm displacement (peak-to-peak) max./10 G max. 6 hr

Shock Tested at 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11 ms and no damage at 100 G max.

Contact durability per EN 60947-5-1 (Annex C) 10,000,000 cycles

Contact operation

N.O. Slow double make and break

N.C.

Slow double make and break — positive opening

N.O.E.M. Double break / double make, early make

N.C.L.B.

Double break / double make, late break — positive opening

N.C.E.B.

Double break / double make, early break — positive opening

Push button travel to change electrical stateN.C. and N.O.E.M. 1.5 mm (0.060 in.)

N.O. and N.C.L.B. 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)

Operating forces (typical)Single circuit contact block 3.4 N

Dual circuit contact block 5…6.5 N

Illumination

LED Dominant Wavelength

GreenRedYellowBlueWhite

525 nm629 nm590 nm470 nm

—

LED Luminous Intensity


890 mcd890 mcd690 mcd193 mcd412 mcd

Incandescent maximum wattage 2.6 W

Materials

Springs Stainless steel and zinc coated music wire

Electrical contactsStandard Silver-nickel

Low voltage Gold-plated over silver

TerminalsScrew Brass

Spring-clamp Silver-plated brass

Performance Data — see page Important-2 of the Industrial Controls catalog (A115-CA001A-EN-P).Low voltage contacts are recommended for applications below 17V, 5 mA.

→

→

→




Bulletin 800F


14

Specifications, Continued

Material Listing

Component For Use with Material Used

Panel gasket All operators Nitrile

Diaphragm seal Illuminated push button, non-illuminated push button Automotive industry acceptablesilicone

K-seal Selector switch, key selector switch, push/twist-to-release E-stop, key E-stop,push/pull mushroom Nitrile

Diaphragm retainer, return spring I Illuminated push button, non-illuminated push button, momentary mushroom,push/twist-to-release E-stop, key E-stop, push/pull mushroom Stainless steel

Return spring II Reset, selector switch, key selector switch, alternate action Zinc-coated music wire

Button cap/mushroom head Non-illuminated push button, momentary mushroom, reset, push/twist-to-releaseE-stop, key E-stop, push/pull mushroom, multi-function PBT/polycarbonate blend

2-color molded button cap Non-illuminated push button PBT/polycarbonate blend

Lens Multi-function Acetal

Lens, knob Illuminated push button, illuminated momentary mushroom, illuminated selector switch Polyamide

Knob Non-illuminated selector switch Glass-filled polyamide

Plastic bezel/bushing INon-illuminated push button, illuminated push button, momentary mushroom, selectorswitch, key selector switch, push/twist-to-release E-stop, key E-stop, push/pullmushroom, multi-function, reset

Glass-filled polyamide

Plastic bezel/bushing II, jam nut Pilot light, reset jam nut PBT/polycarbonate blend

Metal bezel/bushing All metal operators Zinc

Diffuser Illuminated push button, pilot light Polycarbonate

Legend frames — Glass-filled polyamide

Plastic mounting ring All plastic operators Glass-filled polyamide

Metal mounting ring All metal operators Chromated zinc

Plastic latch — Glass-filled polyamide

Metal latch — Chromated zinc + stainless steel

Plastic enclosure — PBT/polycarbonate blend

Metal enclosure — Aluminum

Terminal screws LED module, incandescent module, contact blocks Zinc-plated steel with chromate

Terminals LED module, incandescent module, contact blocks Brass with silver-nickel contacts

Spring clamps LED module, incandescent module, contact blocks Stainless steel

Lamp socket Incandescent module Brass

Housing Incandescent module, LED module Glass-filled polyamide

Low-voltage terminals Contact blocks Gold-plated silver-nickelcontacts

Low-voltage spanner Contact blocks Gold-plated silver-nickelcontacts

Spanner Contact blocks Brass with silver-nickel contacts

Boot Toggle Switch, illuminated push button, non-illuminated push button, multi-functionilluminated and non-illuminated

Automotive industry acceptablesilicone




Bulletin 800F


65

Approximate Dimensions, Continued

Dimensions in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.

Non-Illuminated 3-PositionMulti-Function Operators

Illuminated and Non-IlluminatedKnob Selector Switch andPotentiometer Operators

Non-Illuminated Knob Lever SelectorSwitch Operators

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated2-Position Multi-Function Operators

Illuminated and Non-IlluminatedPush-Pull Mushroom Operators

30 mm, 40 mm, and 60 mm

Operator A

30 mm 30.0

40 mm 40.0

60 mm 60.0

Illuminated and Non-IlluminatedTwist-to-Release Operators30 mm, 40 mm, and 60 mm

Operator A

30 mm 30.0

40 mm 40.0

60 mm 60.0

Mushroom Key Release Operator 40 mm

Selector Jog OperatorsToggle Switch Operators

73

32

Key Selector Switch and Key EjectedSensEject Operators



Programmable Controller

Introducing a New Transistor Output ModelPulse Output

4-Axis Integrated Control

14-point type 30-point type 60-point type

http://www.nais-e.com/plc/Panasonic... the new name for Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

FP-X Programmable ControllerARCT1B273E ’06.8 New

2-Axis LinearInterpolationSimultaneouslyin 2 Pairs!



AFPX-C60(Add-on cassette attached)

2

The processing speed of 0.32 μsec, sufficient for a compact PLC, is even applicable when high-speed scanning is required.

*1: A 5-kstep program consisting of 35% basic instructions and 65% applied instructions (data transfer, four operations)

Ultra High-speed Processing

Easy-to-use Temperature Control Command (F356 EZPID)

MEWTOCOL Master Function

Ethernet Add-on Unit (Available Soon)

Trace Function

High-speed scan of 0.32 μs for a basic instruction(1.9 ms scan time for 5 ksteps*1)

High SecurityProgram protection with an 8-digit password and a function prohibiting uploads

USB-port Equipped*3

Easy direct connection with a PC via a commercial USB cable (AB type)*3: Not provided with C14.

New Functions

The program capacity of 32 ksteps, exceeding the capacity of most compact PLCs, can flexibly handle a wide variety of applications requiring future equipment expansion.

*2: C14: 16 ksteps

Large Capacity with an Extra MarginProgram capacity of 32 ksteps with a sufficient comment area*2

The add-on cassette easily enables functional enhancements when slightly more features are to be added, while keeping costs down. The expansion FP0 adapter enables the connection of 3 additional FP0 expansion units.

Great Expandability with a Wide Variety of Options

Max. I/O expansion of 300 points and further expansion with a function expansion cassette



Product Lineup

4

The Highly Expandable Lineup Satisfies All Kinds of Needs.The flexible product lineup designed for rapidly responding to user needs provides a high level of satisfaction.

Control Unit

AFPX-C14R

AFPX-C14TD

AFPX-C14T

AFPX-C14PD

AFPX-C14P

Power supply (100 to 240 V AC)

DC input: 8 (24 V DC)

Relay output: 6 (250 V AC/2 A)

Program capacity: 16 ksteps

Potentiometer: 2

DC power supply, Transistor output (NPN), Input: 8-point, Output: 6-point

AC power supply, Transistor output (NPN), Input: 8-point, Output: 6-point

DC power supply, Transistor output (PNP), Input: 8-point, Output: 6-point

AC power supply, Transistor output (PNP), Input: 8-point, Output: 6-point

AFPX-C30TD

AFPX-C30T

AFPX-C30PD

AFPX-C30P









AFPX-C60TD

AFPX-C60T

AFPX-C60PD

AFPX-C60P





AFPX-E16T

AFPX-E16P

Transistor output (NPN), Input: 8-point, Output: 8-point

Transistor output (PNP), Input: 8-point, Output: 8-point

AFPX-E30TD

AFPX-E30T

AFPX-E30PD

AFPX-E30P

AFPX-C30R





Potentiometer: 2

Equipped with a USB communication port

AFPX-C60R





Potentiometer: 4

Equipped with a USB communication port

Expansion Unit

AFPX-E16R

Add-on Cassette Communication cassette Expansion FP0 Adapter

AFPX-COM1

AFPX-COM2

AFPX-COM3

AFPX-COM4

AFPX-EFP0

AFPX-IN8

AFPX-TR8

AFPX-AD2

AFPX-PLS

Communication cassette (RS232C 1 ch.)

Communication cassette (RS232C 2 ch.)

Communication cassette(RS485/422 selectable 1 ch.)

Communication cassette (RS485 1 ch + RS232C 1 ch.)

Input cassette (24 V DC , 8 input ch.)

Output cassette (NPN transistor 0.3 A, 8 output ch.)

Analog input cassette (12-bit non-insulated 0 to 10 V/0 to 20 mA, 2 ch.)

AFPX-MRTC

Master memory cassette with a real-time clock (32 ksteps program memory + real-time clock in year/month/day/hour/minute)*Real-time clock needs an option battery. (Real-time clock → Calendar timer)

AFPX-E30R

FP0 Expansion Unit

Up to 3 FP0 expansion units can be connected.

Pulse I/O cassette (High-speed counter input: single phase 80 kHz 2 ch., 2-phase 30 kHz 1 ch.) (Pulse output: 1 axis 100 kHz < cw/ccw, pulse + sign >)*Cannot be built into a transistor output type

Application cassette

AFPX-COM5(Avail. April 2007)

Communication cassette (Ethernet 1 ch + RS232C 1 ch.)

Relay output Transistor output

NEW

DC input: 8 (24 V DC)Relay output: 8 (250 V AC/2 A)

Remarks) Two or more E16R can't be connected serially because it can't supply the power to other units.

Power supply (100 to 240 V AC)DC input: 16 (24 V DC)Relay output: 14 (250 V AC/2 A)

Remarks) Addition of up to 8 units is possible including E16R and EFP0.

FP0-E8XFP0-E16XFP0-E8YTFP0-E8YRSFP0-E16TFP0-E16PFP0-E32TFP0-E32PFP0-E8RSFP0-E16RS

FP0-A21FP0-A80FP0-A04VFP0-A04IFP0-TC4FP0-TC8

FP0-IOLFP0-CCLS

FP0-E32RS*1

FP0-RTD6*1

FP0-DPS2*1

8 ch. DC input, MIL connector

16 ch. DC input, MIL connector

8 ch. transistor output, MIL connector

8 ch. relay output, screw terminal block

16 ch. transistor output, MIL connector

16 ch. PNP output, MIL connector

16 ch. DC input, 16 ch. transistor output, MIL connector

16 ch. DC input, 16 ch. PNP output, MIL connector

4 ch. DC input, 4 ch. relay output, screw terminal block

8 ch. DC input, 8 ch. relay output, screw terminal block

16ch DC input, 16ch relay output screw terminal block

6ch RTD input

PROFIBUS remote I/O unit

I/O link unit

CC-Link unit

2 ch. analog input, 1 ch. output

8 ch. analog input

4 ch. analog (voltage) output

4 ch. analog (current) output

4 ch. thermocouple input

8 ch. thermocouple input

Part number Specifications

*1 Provided from Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG

JWCE PART# E19-007-079, PAGE 3 OF 9Not be used for bidding purposes!

Control Unit(Model: Relay output type AFPX-C30R)

I/O status monitor LED

Expansion Unit(Model: Relay output type AFPX-E16R)

Add-on Cassette(Model: Analog input cassette AFPX-AD2)

Expansion cassette interface cover

Connector for add-on cassette

Connectorfor battery

Input terminals

Power terminals

Output terminals

RUN/PROG. mode selection switch

Potentiometer

RS232C tool port

(DC powered type has no service power output)

24 V DC service power output terminalsC14: 0.15 AC30, C60: 0.4 A

USB communication port (excluding C14R)

I/O status monitor LED

Connector for expansion unit

Securing hole




Connector for double-stacked mounting

* Only the communication cassette can be upper.

Input/output terminals or communication signal terminals

Input terminals

Output terminals

5

FP-X Name and Function of Each Part

* Use the two opposite diagonal holes for mounting when a communication cassette is double-stacked.



Part Number List

FP-X Control UnitProduct name Part numberSpecificationsPower supply

15

FP-X C14R

Control unit

FP-X C30R

Control unit

FP-X C60R

Control unit

FP-X C14TD

Control unit

FP-X C14T

Control unit

FP-X C14PD

Control unit

FP-X C14P

Control unit

FP-X C30TD

Control unit

FP-X C30T

Control unit

FP-X C30PD

Control unit

FP-X C30P

Control unit

FP-X C60TD

Control unit

FP-X C60T

Control unit

FP-X C60PD

Control unit

FP-X C60P

Control unit

8-point input of 24 V DC, 6-point output of 2 A relay

Program capacity 16 ksteps, 2-point potentiometer


Program capacity 32 ksteps, 2-point potentiometer, USB port



8-point of 24 V DC, 6-point output of 0.5 A transistor (NPN)




8-point of 24 V DC, 6-point output of 0.5 A transistor (PNP)













Program capacity 32 ksteps, 4-point potentiometer, USB port32-point of 24 V DC, 28-point output of 0.5 A transistor (NPN)






AFPX-C14R

AFPX-C30R

AFPX-C60R

AFPX-C14TD

AFPX-C14T

AFPX-C14PD

AFPX-C14P

AFPX-C30TD

AFPX-C30T

AFPX-C30PD

AFPX-C30P

AFPX-C60TD

AFPX-C60T

AFPX-C60PD

AFPX-C60P

Rel

ay o

utpu

tT

rans

isto

r ou

tput

100 to 240V AC

100 to 240V AC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

FP-X Add-on Cassette

FP-X COM1 Communication cassette





FP-X Input cassette

FP-X Output cassette

FP-X Analog input cassette

FP-X Pulse I/O cassette(for relay output type control unit only)

FP-X Master memory with a real-time clock

RS232C 1 ch. RS, CS control signal equipped (non-insulated)

RS232C 2 ch. (non-insulated)

RS485/422 selectable 1ch (insulated)

RS485 1 ch. (insulated) + RS232C 1 ch. (non-insulated)

Ethernet 1 ch.(10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX) + RS232C 1 ch. (non-insulated)

8 point input of 24 V DC

8 point output of NPN 0.3 A

6 point output of PNP 0.5 A

2 point 12-bit non-insulated 0 to 10 V DC/0 to 20 mA

High-speed counter: single-phase 2 ch., each 80 kHz or two-phase 1 ch., 30 kHz.Pulse output: one axis 100 kHz/ch. (Use restriction is applied for a two-unit installation)

Master memory: Capable of storing all program steps and comments simultaneously. Storage of FPWIN Pro source files.Real-time clock: Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week (optional battery required)

AFPX-COM1

AFPX-COM2

AFPX-COM3

AFPX-COM4

AFPX-COM5

AFPX-IN8

AFPX-TR8

AFPX-TR6P

AFPX-AD2

AFPX-PLS

AFPX-MRTC

Product name Part numberSpecifications

FP-X Options and Service Parts

100 to 240V AC

FP-X Backup battery

FP-X Expansion cable (8 cm)



FP-X Terminal block

Battery for backing up the operation memory and real-time clock

Expansion unit connection cable, 8 cm



Terminal block for C30, C60 and E30, 21 pins, cover with no marking, five units included

AFPX-BATT

AFPX-EC08

AFPX-EC30

AFPX-EC80

AFPX-TAN1


FP-X Expansion UnitPower supply

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DC

100 to 240V AC

24V DCExpansion FP0 Adapter

FP-X E16R Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E30R Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E16T Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E16P Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E30TD Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E30T Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E30PD Expansion I/O unit

FP-X E30P Expansion I/O unit


With an 8cm extension cable and power cableUp to 3 FP0 expansion units can be connected via an adapter.

8-point input of 24 V DC, 8-point relay output of 2 A

Remarks; Two or more E16R can't be connected serially because it can't supply the power to other units. With an 8cm extension cable

16-point input of 24 V DC, 14-point relay output of 2 A

Remarks; Possible to connect up to 8 units including E16R, EFP0. With an 8cm extension cable

8-point input of 24 V DC, 8-point transistor (NPN) output of 0.5 A

Remarks; Two or more E16T cannot be connected serially because it cannot supply the power to other units. With an 8cm extension cable

8-point input of 24 V DC, 8-point transistor (PNP) output of 0.5 A

Remarks; Two or more E16T cannot be connected serially because it cannot supply the power to other units. With an 8cm extension cable


Remarks; Possible to connect up to 8 units including E16, EFP0. With an 8cm extension cable







AFPX-E16R

AFPX-E30R

AFPX-E16T

AFPX-E16P

AFPX-E30TD

AFPX-E30T

AFPX-E30PD

AFPX-E30P

AFPX-EFP0

Rel

ay o

utpu

tT

rans

isto

r ou

tput


17

Related Products List

*The discontinuation of AFW1031 production is scheduled for August 2007.

Related Products

Product name Part number

Control CommX Ver. 1.3 (OCX for Communication)

Control CommX IBM printer port

Control CommX USB port

Product name

FP Web-Server Unit

FP Web-Server unit

FP Web Configurator Tool

AFW20011

AFW20031


Key UnitEconomical type is available for secondary key.The key unit is available for PCWAY and Control CommX.

Key unit IBM printer port version

Key unit USB port version

AFW1031*

AFW1033


FP Memory Loader

Data non-hold type

Data hold type

AFP8670

AFP8671

Part number

AFP0610

AFPS30510

PCWAY Ver. 2.7 (Operation Data Managing Software)Product name Part number

PCWAY IBM printer port version

PCWAY USB port version

PCWAY Version upgrade

AFW10011

AFW10031

AFW10401* Charged version upgrade for Ver. 2.0 to 2.6.

Specifications

1. General Specifications

2. Power Consumption, Weight

Rated voltageOperating voltage rangeRush current

Allowed momentary power off timeAmbient temperatureStorage temperatureAmbient humidityStorage humidity

Breakdown voltage

Insulation resistance

Vibration resistanceShock resistanceNoise immunityOperating conditionEC Directive Compliance StandardLevel of contaminationOver-voltage category

Item

Product name Part numberAFPX-C14❍❍

AFPX-C30❍❍

AFPX-C60❍❍

AFPX-E16❍❍

AFPX-E30❍❍

AFPX-EFP0

AFPX-COM1

AFPX-COM2

AFPX-COM3

AFPX-COM4

AFPX-COM5

AFPX-AD2

AFPX-IN8

AFPX-TR8

AFPX-TR6P

AFPX-PLS

AFPX-MRTC

26 W or less *2

52 W or less *2

64 W or less *2

8 W or less *2

42 W or less *2

0.24 W or less *3

2 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

1 W or less *2

1 W or less *2

1 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

2 W or less *2

Approx. 280 g or less





Approx. 65 g

Approx. 20 g

Approx. 20 g

Approx. 20 g

Approx. 20 g

Approx. 20 g

Approx. 25 g

Approx. 25 g

Approx. 25 g

Approx. 25 g

Approx. 25 g

Approx. 20 g

Current consumption Weight

Description100 to 240 V AC (AC power), 24 V DC (DC power)

85 to 264 V AC (AC power), 20.4 to 28.8 V DC (DC power)

40 A or less (C14), 45 A or less (C30, C60) at 25°C (AC power)

12 A or less at 25°C (DC power)

10 ms or more

0 to +55°C-40 to +70°C

10 to 95% RH (at 25 °C, non-condensing)

10 to 95% RH (at 25 °C, non-condensing)

Combined input/output terminals - Combined power and ground terminals,

2300 V AC 1 minute (AC power), 500 V AC*1 1 minute (DC power)

Input terminals - Relay output terminals, 2300 V AC*1 1 minute

Input terminals - Transistor output terminals, 500 V AC*1 1 minute

Power terminals - Ground terminals, 1500 V AC*1 1 minute (AC power), 500 V AC*1 1 minute (DC power)

Combined input/output terminals - Combined power and ground terminals, 100 MΩ or higher (500 V DC using an insulation resistance meter)

Input terminals - Output terminals, 100 MΩ or higher (500 V DC using an insulation resistance meter)

Power terminals - Ground terminals, 100 MΩ or higher (500 V DC using an insulation resistance meter)

5 to 9 Hz, single amplitude 3.5 mm/9 to 150 Hz, constant acceleration 9.8 m/s2, 1 sweep/min, 10 sweeps in each XYZ direction

147 m/s2

1500 V [P-P] pulse width 50 ns, 1 μs (AC power), 500 V [P-P] pulse width 50 ns, 1 μs (DC power) (per noise simulator method) (power terminals)

No corrosive gas and no excessive dust

Conforming to EN61131-2

2

II

Control unit

Expansion I/O unit

Expansion FP0 adapter

FP-X communication cassette

FP-X analog input cassetteFP-X input cassette

FP-X output cassette

FP-X pulse I/O cassetteFP-X master memory cassette*2 Power consumption by the AC power supply connected to the control unit *3 Power consumption by the DC power supply connected to the expansion FP0 adapter*4 Please refer to FP0 users manual for FP0 expansion units.

Please refer to the user manual and specifications for further details.

*1 Cutoff current 5 mA



Specifications

18

Item Specifications

3. Controls Specifications

Program method

Control method

Program memory

Program capacity

Operation processing speed

Basic instructions

Applied instructions

External inputs (X)

External outputs (Y)

Internal relay (R)

Special internal relay (R)

Link relay (L)

Timer/counter (T/C)

Data register (DT)

Link data register (LD)

Special data register (DT)

Index register (I0 to ID)

Master control relay (MCR)

Number of labels (LOOP)

Number of differentiations

Number of stepladders

Number of subroutines

Number of interruption programs

High-speed counter *5

Pulse output *6

Pulse catch input / interrupt input

Periodical interrupt

Potentiometer

Constant scan

Real-time clock

Flash ROM backup *9

Battery backup

Battery life (when no power is supplied)

Password

Self-diagnosis function

Comment storage

PLC link function

Rewriting in RUN mode

Relay symbol method

Cyclic operation method

Flash ROM built-in (no battery backup required)

16 ksteps (C14), 32 ksteps (C30, C60)

Basic instruction 0.32 μs/step

111

216

1760 points *4

1760 points *4

4096 points

192 points

2048 points

Total 1024 points: timer capable of counting (1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 s) x 32767

Counter capable of counting 1 to 32767

12285 words (C14), 32765 words (C3R, C60)

256 words

374 words

14 words

256 points

256 labels

Up to program capacity

1000 stages

500 subroutines

Relay output type: 15 programs (14 external, 1 constant)

Transistor output type: 9 programs (8 external, 1 constant)

Built-in (Transistor output): single-phase 8 ch (50 kHz x 4 ch + 10 kHz x 4 ch)

Built-in (Relay output): single-phase 8 ch (10 kHz x 8 ch)

Pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) for relay output type: single-phase 2 ch (80 kHz x 2 ch)

Built-in (Transistor output): 100 kHz x 2 ch + 20 kHz x 2 ch

Pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) for relay output type: One unit (one axis) 100 kHz, or two units (two axes) 80 kHz

Relay output type: Total 14 points (including the high-speed counter)

Transistor output type: Total 8 points (including the high-speed counter)

0.5 ms to 30 s

2 points (0 to 1000) (C14, C30) 4 points (0 to 1000) (C60)

Possible

Equipped (usable only when AFPX-MRTC is installed) *7

Data register (32765 words)

Counter 16 points (1008 to 1023), Internal relay 128 points (R2470 to R255F), Data register 55 words

The memory allocated in the storage area by the system register (only when a battery is installed) *8

Before installing AFPX-MRTC C14: 1230 days (actual operation 10 years at 25°C)

C30, C60: 990 days (actual operation 10 years at 25°C)

After installing AFPX-MRTC C14: 780 days (actual operation 10 years at 25°C)

C30, C60: 680 days (actual operation 10 years at 25°C)

(More than two batteries can be installed in C30 and C60. In this case, the battery life is extended several times)

Capable (4 or 8 characters selectable)

Watch dog timer, program syntax check

Capable (328 KB) (backup battery not required)

Max 16 units, link relay 1024 points, link register 128 words (No data transfer or remote programming)

Capable

Backup by F12, P13 commands

Auto-backup at power failure

*4 The actual usable number of points is restricted by the hardware.*5 Specification at the rated input voltage of 24 V DC, 25°C. Frequency may be lower due to the voltage and temperature.*6 Max frequency may vary by the method of operation. Please refer to the manual for details.*7 Calendar accuracy at 0°C: 119 sec/month or less, 25°C: 51 sec/month or less, 55°C: 148 sec/month or less (Real-time clock requires a battery.)*8 When data is stored in the storage area while the battery is not installed, the data is not cleared and the data value may be indefinite.

The same condition occurs when the battery is exhausted.*9 The number of possible rewrites is 10,000 or less.



19

Specifications

4. Input Specifications (Control unit, expansion unit)

ItemDescription

Insulation method

Rated input voltage

Operating voltage range

Rated input current

Input points per common

Min. ON voltage/ON current

Max. OFF voltage/OFF current

Input impedance

Response

time

Operating indicator

Photo-coupler

24 V DC

21.6 to 26.4 V DC

8 points/common (C14, E16) 16 points/common (C30, C60)

(Input power polarity either positive or negative)

Same as above

LED display

OFF → ON

ON → OFF

*1 Specification at the rated input voltage of 24 V DC, 25°C.

*2 Please refer to the user manual for Y0 to Y7 of the transistor output type.

5. Relay Output Specifications (Control units, Expansion units)

6. Transistor Output Specifications

Item Description

Output type

Rated control capacity (Resistive load)

Output points per common

Response time

Life time

Surge absorber

Operating indicator

1a contact

2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC (8 A or less/common)

4 points/common

Approx. 10 ms

Approx. 8 ms

20 million operations or more (Operation frequency 180 times/min)

100,000 operations or more (Operation frequency 20 times/min at the rated control capacity)

None

LED display

Mechanical

Electrical

Item Description

Insulation method

Output type

Rated loadf voltage

Load voltage allowable range

Max. load current

Max. inrush current

Output points per common

OFF state leakage current

ON state voltage drop

Response time

Voltage range for external power supply

Surge absorber

Operating indicator

Photocoupler

Open collector

NPN type: 5 to 24 V DC, PNP type: 24 V DC

NPN type: 4.75 to 26.4 V DC, PNP type: 21.6 to 26.4 V DC

0.5 A

1.5 A

8 points/common (C14, E16) 8 points/common, 6 points/common (C30, C60, E30)

1 μA or less

0.3 V DC or less

1 ms or less*2

1 ms or less*2

21.6 to 26.4 V DC

Zener diode

LED display

OFF → ON

ON → OFF

OFF → ON

ON → OFF

Relay output Transistor output

Control unit X0 to X7

0.6 ms or less: Normal input50 ms or less: High-speed counter, pulse catch, interruption input setting *1

Control unit X8 and after, expansion unit

0.6 ms or less

Control unit X0 to X3135 μs or less: Nominal input5 μs or less: High-speed counter, pulse catch, interruption input setting*1

Control unit X4 to X7135 μs or less: Nominal input50 μs or less: High-speed counter, pulse catch, interruption input setting*1

Control unit X8 and after, expansion unit0.6 ms or less

19.2 V/3 mA

2.4 V/1 mA

Approx. 5.1 kΩ (Control unit X0 to X7)Approx. 5.6 kΩ (Control unit X8 and after, expansion unit)

19.2 V/6 mA (Control unit X0 to X3)19.2 V/3 mA (Control unit X4 and after, expansion unit)

2.4 V/1.3 mA (Control unit X0 to X3)2.4 V/1 mA (Control unit X4 and after, expansion unit)

Approx. 3 kΩ (Control unit X0 to X3)Approx. 5.1 kΩ (Control unit X4 to X7)

Approx. 5.6 kΩ (Control unit X8 and after, expansion unit)

Approx. 4.7 mA (Control unit X0 to X7)

Approx 4.3 mA (Control unit X8 and after, expansion unit)

Approx. 8 mA (Control unit X0 to X3)

Approx. 4.7 mA (Control unit X4 to X7)

Approx. 4.3 mA (Control unit X8 and after, expansion unit)



FP

-XA

RC

T1B

273E

ARCT1B273E 200608-6YT

Please contact ..........

Specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan.

Automation Controls Business UnitHead Office: 1048, Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8686, JapanTelephone: +81-6-6908-1050 Facsimile: +81-6-6908-5781

http://www.nais-e.com/

All Rights Reserved © 2006 COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

These materials are printed on ECF pulp.These materials are printed with earth-friendly vegetable-based (soybean oil) ink.

Panasonic

Panasonic

Panasonic

L N

max.min.

max.min.

max.min.

max.min.

FP-X C60

V1

V3

COM

D

Y12Y1

1D

PROG.RUN

18

10

8

8

X

X1E

X1FX11

X1C

X1DX1B

X18

X19X9

X8 XA

XB XD

XCX6X4

X3

COM

X7

X0 X2

COM X5X1

Y11

C0

Y10 Y13

Y15C2

Y1CY1AY14

C1 C4 C6Y18

Y19Y17

Y1B Y1DY16C3

X1AX14X10COM

X17

X12

Y00V

COM

COM

X13

24V

C3

C0 C1 C2 Y3 Y5

Y4Y2

Y6

Y7 Y9

Y8 C4

YA YC

YB

C5

YD

NC

X16XE

XF X15

PROG.RUN ERR.

7

V2

17

V0

17

71F

Y10

0

0

18

F

X9

X8 XA

XB XD

XC XE

XF

Y1Y00V

24V

C3

C0 C1 C2 Y3 Y5

Y4Y2

Y6

Y7 Y9

Y8 C4

YA YC

YB YD

X1 X5COM

X2X0

X7

COM

X3N

X4 X6

RUN

PROG.RUN ERR.

L

V1

7

78

V0

D

0

Y

PROG.

X

FP-X C30

08 F

PROG.RUN ERR.

FP-X C14

740

0 34Y

X 3

V1

RUNPROG.

V0

5

X6X4

X3

L N

X7

X0 X2

COM X5X1

Y1Y00V

24V

Y5

C0 C1 C2 C3 Y4

Y3Y2

Panasonic

ERROR

I/F

POWER

AFPX-EFP0

2-M4 or 2- 5

±0.5

82

±0.5182

±0.592

±0.552

FP-X C60

FP-X C30

FP-X C14

●AFPX-C60 ∗ ∗

( 7 )( 0.5 )

3.5

90

6025

90

60

90

100

90190

3.5

4545

13.6

8.6

79

79

L

FP

0-A

80

4545

■ FP-X Control Unit Dimensions (Unit: mm)

■ FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter Dimensions (Unit: mm)

●AFPX-C14 ∗ ∗ (The same dimensions apply to the expansion I/O unit AFPX-E16∗)

●AFPX-C30 ∗ ∗ (The same dimensions apply to the expansion I/O unit AFPX-E30∗∗)

Status display LED

Input/output display LED

Analog volume

Tool port connector

Mode selection switchRUN/PROG.

Status display LED


Analog volume

USB connector

USB connector

Tool port connector

Tool port connector

DIN hook Power connector 24 V DC Expansion hook

Expansion connector

When the expansion connector is attached

Statusdisplay LED


Status display LED


Analog volume


Cassette attachment area 1

Communication cassette Application cassette

DIN hook

Application cassetteCommunication cassetteBatteryExpansion unit connector

Cassette attachment area 1Application cassetteCommunication cassetteBattery

Cassette attachment area 2Function cassetteBatteryExpansion unit connector

Cassette attachment area 1Application cassetteCommunication cassetteBattery

Cassette attachment area 2Application cassetteBattery

Expansion connector partBatteryExpansion unit connector

Dimensions when expansion cassettes (function and communication) are installed

Mounting dimension diagram

Appearance when mounted with a C14 control unit




Bulletin 800F


17

Quick Selection, Continued

Complete Units, Continued

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stop Operators, Ø 40 mm, Red (Screw Terminal Connections)

Pilot Lights with Integrated LED Modules (Screw Terminal Connections)

Description

Type ofContact

Construction Cat. No.Pkg.

QuantityN.O. N.C.

Twist-to-Release

— 1 Plastic Operator /Plastic Latch 800FP-MT44PX01S

1

— 1 Metal Operator /Metal Latch 800FM-MT44MX01S

1 1 Plastic Operator /Plastic Latch 800FP-MT44PX11S

Cat. No. 800FP-MT44PX01S 1 1 Metal Operator /Metal Latch 800FM-MT44MX11S

Self-monitoring contact block included when N.C. is specified.

Voltage Style Construction Cat. No.Pkg.

Quantity

24V AC/DC

Green

Plastic Operator /Plastic Latch

800FP-P3PN3G

1

Red 800FP-P4PN3R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN3Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN3B

White 800FP-P7PN3W

120V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN5G

Red 800FP-P4PN5R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN5Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN5B

White 800FP-P7PN5W

240V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN7G

Red 800FP-P4PN7R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN7Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN7B

Cat. No. 800FP-P7PN3W White 800FP-P7PN7W

For complete units not listed and configuration assistance, see RAISE product selection software.




Bulletin 800F


12



Overview, Continued



Assembly Overview

Specifications



Mechanical Ratings













Environmental













Bulletin 800F


13


Electrical Ratings






LED Module Ratings


10…29V AC10…30V DC70…132V AC

180…264V AC


50/60 HzDC

50/60 Hz50/60 Hz








248-4)



Mechanical Ratings




Contact operation


N.C.



N.C.L.B.


N.C.E.B.



N.O. and N.C.L.B. 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)



Illumination



525 nm629 nm590 nm470 nm

—





Materials







→

→

→




Bulletin 800F


14


Material Listing





































Bulletin 800F


64

Approximate Dimensions

Dimensions in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Refer to RAISE software for additionaldimensional information.

Panel Hole Spacing

Non-Illuminated and IlluminatedMomentary Flush Push Button Operators

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Momentary Extended Push Button Operators

Non-Illuminated Guarded,Illuminated and Non-Illuminated

Alternate Action Push Button Operators

Illuminated Momentary GuardedPush Button Operators

Reset Operators with Reset Rod

...

Pilot Light Operators

Illuminated and Non-IlluminatedMomentary Mushroom Operators

40 mm and 60 mm

Operator A

40 mm 39.8

60 mm 59.8




Bulletin 800F


17





Description

Type ofContact


QuantityN.O. N.C.

Twist-to-Release


1






Quantity

24V AC/DC

Green


800FP-P3PN3G

1

Red 800FP-P4PN3R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN3Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN3B

White 800FP-P7PN3W

120V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN5G

Red 800FP-P4PN5R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN5Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN5B

White 800FP-P7PN5W

240V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN7G

Red 800FP-P4PN7R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN7Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN7B






Bulletin 800F


12



Overview, Continued



Assembly Overview

Specifications



Mechanical Ratings













Environmental













Bulletin 800F


13


Electrical Ratings






LED Module Ratings


10…29V AC10…30V DC70…132V AC

180…264V AC


50/60 HzDC

50/60 Hz50/60 Hz








248-4)



Mechanical Ratings




Contact operation


N.C.



N.C.L.B.


N.C.E.B.



N.O. and N.C.L.B. 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)



Illumination



525 nm629 nm590 nm470 nm

—





Materials







→

→

→




Bulletin 800F


14


Material Listing





































Bulletin 800F


64



Panel Hole Spacing







...



40 mm and 60 mm

Operator A

40 mm 39.8

60 mm 59.8




Bulletin 800F


17





Description

Type ofContact


QuantityN.O. N.C.

Twist-to-Release


1






Quantity

24V AC/DC

Green


800FP-P3PN3G

1

Red 800FP-P4PN3R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN3Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN3B

White 800FP-P7PN3W

120V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN5G

Red 800FP-P4PN5R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN5Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN5B

White 800FP-P7PN5W

240V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN7G

Red 800FP-P4PN7R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN7Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN7B






Bulletin 800F


12



Overview, Continued



Assembly Overview

Specifications



Mechanical Ratings













Environmental













Bulletin 800F


13


Electrical Ratings






LED Module Ratings


10…29V AC10…30V DC70…132V AC

180…264V AC


50/60 HzDC

50/60 Hz50/60 Hz








248-4)



Mechanical Ratings




Contact operation


N.C.



N.C.L.B.


N.C.E.B.



N.O. and N.C.L.B. 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)



Illumination



525 nm629 nm590 nm470 nm

—





Materials







→

→

→




Bulletin 800F


14


Material Listing





































Bulletin 800F


64



Panel Hole Spacing







...



40 mm and 60 mm

Operator A

40 mm 39.8

60 mm 59.8




Bulletin 800F


17





Description

Type ofContact


QuantityN.O. N.C.

Twist-to-Release


1






Quantity

24V AC/DC

Green


800FP-P3PN3G

1

Red 800FP-P4PN3R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN3Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN3B

White 800FP-P7PN3W

120V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN5G

Red 800FP-P4PN5R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN5Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN5B

White 800FP-P7PN5W

240V AC

Green 800FP-P3PN7G

Red 800FP-P4PN7R

Yellow 800FP-P5PN7Y

Blue 800FP-P6PN7B




800FP-P5PN5A

Please note: Light colors noton the list can be ordered bysimply completing the lastpart of a part number with anabbreviation of the desiredlight color.



Bulletin 800F


12



Overview, Continued



Assembly Overview

Specifications



Mechanical Ratings













Environmental













Bulletin 800F


13


Electrical Ratings






LED Module Ratings


10…29V AC10…30V DC70…132V AC

180…264V AC


50/60 HzDC

50/60 Hz50/60 Hz








248-4)



Mechanical Ratings




Contact operation


N.C.



N.C.L.B.


N.C.E.B.



N.O. and N.C.L.B. 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)



Illumination



525 nm629 nm590 nm470 nm

—





Materials







→

→

→




Bulletin 800F


14


Material Listing





































Bulletin 800F


64



Panel Hole Spacing







...



40 mm and 60 mm

Operator A

40 mm 39.8

60 mm 59.8



� UL Listed to Standard 248-14

� CSA Certified to Standard C22.2 No. 248.14

ApprovalsAPPLICATIONS:

� Small Motors � Small Transformers� Lighting Circuits� Control Circuits

� AC: 1/10 to 30A250VAC, 10kA I.R.

RatingsHIGHLIGHTS:

� Time Delay

� 250 VAC Rated

C 5

Features/Benefits

� Numerous ratings for a wide variety of applications

� 250VAC rating in all sizes up to 30A

� Time delay for circuits with high inrushcurrrent

� Can be used with ULTRASAFE™ fuse holders

Tri-onic TRM time-delay midget fuses arerated 250 volts AC and are offered in 36ampere ratings from 1/10A to 30A. They have 12 seconds time delay at 200%rating to provide supplemental protectionof small motors, small transformers andother high inrush loads, plus many other250 volt applications. (Not for BranchCircuit Protection).

Melting Time – Current Data 1/10 - 3-1/2 Amperes, 250 Volts AC Melting Time – Current Data 4 - 30 Amperes, 250 Volts AC

Tim

e in

Sec

onds

Tim

e in

Sec

onds

Current in Amperes Current in Amperes

AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOGRATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER

1/10 TRM1/10 6/10 TRM6/10 1-6/10 TRM1-6/10 3 TRM3 5-6/10 TRM5-6/10 10 TRM1015/100 TRM15/100 8/10 TRM8/10 1-8/10 TRM1-8/10 3-2/10 TRM3-2/10 6 TRM6 12 TRM122/10 TRM2/10 1 TRM1 2 TRM2 3-1/2 TRM3-1/2 6-1/4 TRM6-1/4 15 TRM153/10 TRM3/10 1-1/8 TRM1-1/8 2-1/4 TRM2-1/4 4 TRM4 7 TRM7 20 TRM204/10 TRM4/10 1-1/4 TRM1-1/4 2-1/2 TRM2-1/2 4-1/2 TRM4-1/2 8 TRM8 25 TRM251/2 TRM1/2 1-4/10 TRM1-4/10 2-8/10 TRM2-8/10 5 TRM5 9 TRM9 30 TRM30

Standard Fuse Ampere Ratings, Catalog Numbers

1-1/2” X 13/32” MIDGET FUSES

TRI-ONIC®

TRM

C



Terminal Blocks Accessories

P-10 www.idec.com USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC

P

Part Numbers: End Plates, DIN Rail Stops, Stand-Offs, DIN Rail and Dust Covers

Description Appearance Use with Part No. Remarks

End Plates

BNH10WBNH15MWBNH15LW

BNE15W

BNH30W BNE30W

BNH10SWBNF10NWBNF10DW

BNE20

BNH50W BNE50W

BN75W BNE75W

BN150W BNE150W

BNDH15W BNDE15W

DIN Rail Stops

BNH10WBNH15MWBNH15LWBNH30WBNH50WBNF10SWBNF10NWBNF10DWBA111TU2BA211TUBA311TUBA411SUBAF111SUBAF111SDU

BNL-5(small)

1. DIN rail stops prevent side-to-side movement.

2. The BNL-5 width is 0.375" (9.5mm).

BN75WBN150W

BNL-6(medium)



3. To firmly stabilize these higher profile terminal blocks, the BNL-6 has a higher profile than the BNL-5.

BNDH15WBN200NW#BN400NW#

BNL-8(large)



3. # = number of poles.

DIN Rail Stand-Offs All series

BNS3 1.46" (37mm) height

BNS4 3.03" (77mm) height

DIN Rail All seriesBNDN1000(length 39.37" (1m) )

1. For calculating the rail lengths required, see the instructions on page P-13.

2. The DIN rail material is aluminum.

Dust Covers

BNDH15WBNH10WBNH15MWBNH15LW BNH30W

BNC230

The overall length is 39.37" (1,000mm).

The material is polycarbonate.

BNH50W BNC320

BN75W BNC420

BN150W BNC520

BN200 BAC820

BN400 BNC1000

Accessories

BNC230 BNC320 BNC420 BNC520 BNC820 BNC1000



Terminal Blocks Dimensions

www.idec.com USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC P-19

P

Dimensions: DIN Rail Stops and Stand-Offs

Part No. Dimensions

BNL-5

BNL-6

BNL-8

BNDL2

BNS3

BNS4

Dimensions: Accessories, continued

0.374" (9.5mm) Width

1.77" (45mm) Length

1.794" (46mm)0.52"

(14.1mm)

BNL8

1.17"(30mm)

1.014"(26mm)

0.51"(13mm)

1.482"(38mm)

BNDL2

1.443"

1.09"(28mm) 0.59"

(15mm)

0.101"(2.6mm)

25°3.003"0.59"(15mm)

1.014"(26mm)

(37mm)

(77mm)

BNS3

BNS4

0.49"(12.5mm)

1.17"(30mm)

2 - Ø 0.21"(5.2mm)

2 - Ø 0.20"(5mm)

2.11"(54mm)



General Accessories

149

Stahlin Enclosures • 500 Maple Street, Belding, MI 48809 • Phone: 616-794-0700 • Fax: 616-794-3378 • www.stahlin.com

Accessories

Back Panels

BKBA

HOLE

DIA.

BL

BB

"BL" IS LESS THAN 31.25"

OMIT CENTER HOLES WHEN

OMIT CENTER HOLES WHEN

"BK" IS LESS THAN 29"

End View (Formed)

BT

End View (Flat)

CATALOGSUFFIX MATERIAL GRADE FINISH MISC.

AL Aluminum 3003 H14 NoneSS Stainless Steel 304 NoneFG Fiberglass UL94-V0CS Carbon Steel 1008/1010 Painted

White EnamelNote: Available for all product families unless otherwise specified

Back Panels

JWCE PART# E01-044-002V, PAGE 1 OF 2


150

Stahlin Enclosures • 500 Maple Street, Belding, MI 48809 • Phone: 616-794-0700 • Fax: 616-794-3378 • www.stahlin.com

Acce

ssor

ies

Enclosure Specific Accessories

Weight Weight Weight Weight SIZE ID BA BB BK BL BT BT BT BT PANEL HOLE # OF (Aluminum) (Fiberglass) (Stainless) (Carbon Steel)

NUMBER (AL) (FG) (SS) (CS) TYPE DIA. HOLES Suffix: AL Suffix: FG Suffix: SS Suffix: CSBP64 4.88 2.88 4.25 2.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 2 oz. 2 oz. 5 oz. 6 oz.

(124) (73) (108) (57) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP66 4.88 4.88 4.25 4.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 3 oz. 3 oz. 6 oz. 8 oz.

(124) (124) (108) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP76 6 4.88 5.38 4.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 4 oz. 4 oz 9 oz 10 oz.

(152) (124) (137) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP86 6.88 4.88 6.25 4.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 4 oz. 4 oz. 12 oz. 12 oz.

(175) (124) (159) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP88 6.88 6.88 6.25 6.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 5 oz. 5 oz. 15 oz. 15 oz.

(175) (175) (159) (159) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP96 8.25 4.88 7.63 4.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 5 oz. 5 oz. 12 oz. 14 oz.

(210) (124) (194) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP108 8.88 6.88 8.25 6.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 8 oz. 8 oz. 1.2 lb. 1.3 lb.

(225) (175) (210) (159) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP1210 10.88 8.88 10.25 8.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 12 oz. 14 oz. 1.9 lb. 2.1 lb.

(276) (225) (260 (210) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP1212 10.88 10.88 10.25 10.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 1 lb. 1.1 lb. 2.3 lb. 2.4 lb.

(276) (276) (260 (260) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP1407 12.88 5.88 12.25 5.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 14 oz. 14 oz. 2 lb. 2.1 lb.

(327) (149) (311) (133) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP1412 12.88 10.88 12.25 10.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 1.125 lb. 1.3 lb. 2.8 lb. 3 lb.

(327) (276) (311) (260 (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP1614 14.88 12.88 14.25 12.25 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 1.5 lb. 1.4 lb. 3.8 lb. 4.1 lb.

(378) (327) (362) (311) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BP1816 16.88 14.88 16.25 14.250 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 1.94 lb. 2 lb. 5.5 lb. 5.4 lb.

(429) (378) (413) (362) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)BPJ2016 18.88 14.88 18.25 14.250 .080 .125 .060 .075 Flat .25 4 2.25 lb. 2.1 lb. 6.1 lb. 6.1 lb.

(479) (378) (463) (362) (2) (3) (2) (2) (6)

Caution: Metric units are for reference do not convert.Note: When specifying combine Size ID Number and Material Suffix

Example: BP64SS for 6x4 Stainless Steel Back Panel

Typical Series Designators: DS, J, JCC, RJ, CL, PC, F Back Panel Dimensions

Panel Weight Fits TypicalSIZE ID Thickness Panel Hole # of (Steel) Enclosure

NUMBER BA BB BK BL BT Type Dia. Holes (suffix: CS) SizeBP2016CD 16.88 13.38 15.25 11.25 0.13 Formed 0.31 4 7.3 lbs. 20 x 16

(429) (340) (387) (286) (2) (8) Disconnect Enclosure

BP2412CD 20.88 9.38 19.25 7.25 0.13 Formed 0.50 4 6.5 lbs. 24 x 12 (530) (238) (489) (184) (2) (13) Disconnect

EnclosureBP2424CD 20.88 21.38 19.25 19.25 0.13 Formed 0.50 4 14 lbs. 24 x 24


BP3024CD 26.88 21.38 25.25 19.25 0.13 Formed 0.50 4 19 lbs. 30 x 24 (683) (543) (641) (489) (2) (13) Disconnect

EnclosureBP3630CD 32.88 27.38 31.25 25.25 0.13 Formed 0.50 6 29 lbs. 36 x 30


Caution: Metric units are for reference do not convert.Note: Carbon Steel (CS) available only

Typical Series Designators: C - Disconnect Back Panel Dimensions

JWCE PART# E01-044-002V, PAGE 2 OF 2


A 16

� AC: 1/10 to 30A600VAC, 200kA I.R.

AMP-TRAP 2000®

ATQR

Ratings

Features/Benefits

� Time delay for control transformer inrush loads withoutnuisance opening

� Highly current limiting for low peak let-thru current

� Rejection-style design prevents replacement errors (when used with recommended fuse blocks)

� High-visibility orange label ensures instant recognition, and simplifies replacement

� Metal-embossed date and catalog number for traceability and lasting identification

� Fiberglass body provides dimensional stability in harsh industrial settings

� High-grade silica filler ensures fast arc quenching andhigh current limitation

TAKE CONTROL OF FAULT CURRENTS HEADED FOR YOUR CONTROL TRANSFORMER

ATQR small-dimension fuses feature time delaycharacteristics ideally suited for the high inrushcurrents of control transformers, solenoids, andsimilar inductive loads. The newest member of ourAmp-trap 2000® family of fuses - ATQR fuses providesuperior protection for the branch circuits of elec-trical distribution systems.

TIME DELAY / CLASS CC

� UL Listed toStandard 248-4

� CSA Certified toStandard C22.2No. 248.4

ApprovalsAPPLICATIONS:

� Control Transformers� Solenoids� Inductive Loads� Lighting, Heating &

General-purpose Loads

HIGHLIGHTS:

� Time Delay� Best Choice for Small

Transformer Protection� Most Current-Limiting



A 17

A

TIME DELAY / CLASS CC FUSES ATQRAMP-TRAP 2000®

AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOG AMPERE CATALOGRATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER RATING NUMBER

1/10 ATQR1/10 8/10 ATQR8/10 2-8/10 ATQR2-8/10 7-1/2 ATQR7-1/2

1/8 ATQR1/8 1 ATQR1 3 ATQR3 8 ATQR8

15/100 ATQR15/100 1-1/8 ATQR1-1/8 3-2/10 ATQR3-2/10 9 ATQR9


2/10 ATQR2/10 1-4/10 ATQR1-4/10 4 ATQR4 12 ATQR12


3/10 ATQR3/10 1-6/10 ATQR1-6/10 5 ATQR5 17-1/2 ATQR17-1/2


1/2 ATQR1/2 2 ATQR2 6 ATQR6 25 ATQR25


3/4 ATQR3/4 2-1/2 ATQR2-1/2 7 ATQR7

Standard Fuse Ampere Ratings, Catalog Numbers

Recommended Fuse Blocks for Class CC Fuses

ADDER 30310R 30320R 30350R

1 USCC1I 30311R 30321R 30351R

2 USCC2I 30312R 30322R 30352R

3 USCC3I 30313R 30323R 30353R

Numberof

Poles

Screwwith Double

Quick Connects

Pressure Platewith Double

Quick Connects

CopperBox

Connector

Recommended ATQR Class CC Primary Fuses ForSingle Phase Control Transformers

Primary fuses - If primary FLA is less than 2 amps, fuse may be 300%max. (500% for motor control). If primary FLA exceeds 2 amps but isless than 9 amps, fuse may not exceed 167% of primary FLA unlesssecondary protection is used, when it may be increased to 250%. Fusesizes shown are based on approx. 40 x FLA for .01 sec.

* Secondary protection is required for these ratings.+ Fuse will withstand 30 x FLA for .01 second++ Fuse will withstand 25 x FLA for .01 second

TRANSVA

25

50

75

100

150

200

250

VOLTS600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120

FLA0.040.050.100.120.210.080.100.210.240.420.130.160.310.360.630.170.210.420.480.830.250.310.630.721.250.330.420.830.961.670.420.521.041.22.08

ATQRAMPS1/101/102/101/44/101/41/44/101/26/101/43/101/23/41

3/104/106/10

11-1/21/21/21

1-1/22-1/21/26/101-1/2

23

6/101-1/8

234*

PRIMARY TRANSVA

300

500

750

1000

1500

2000

3000

5000

VOLTS600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208120600480240208600480240600480

FLA0.500.631.251.442.5

0.831.042.082.404.171.251.563.133.616.251.672.084.164.818.332.503.136.257.2112.53.334.178.339.625.006.2512.58.3310.4

ATQRAMPS1-1/81-1/22-1/2

35*

1-1/224*6*10*

2-1/237*8*15*34*10*12*20*5*7*1020*25*8*10*

20++*20++*12+*15+*

30++*20++*25+*

PRIMARY

Dimensions

ULTRASAFE™Indicating

Fuse Holder



A 18

TIME DELAY / CLASS CC FUSES ATQR

AMP-TRAP 2000®

Max

. Ins

tant

aneo

us P

eak

Let-

Thru

Cur

rent

Available Current in RMS Sym. Amperes

Curr

ent

in A

mpe

res

Time in Seconds

Mel

ting

Tim

e –

Curr

ent D

ata,

600

V Fu

ses

ATQR1/8 to 30

Peak Let-Thru Current Data – ATQR1/8 to 30, 600 Volts AC



Bulletin 193-ED/-EE

E1 Plus Solid-State Overload Relays

2-173Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs


!

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Overview, Continued

!

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Side-Mount Expansion ModulesThrough the use of optional side-mounted accessory modules, functionality of the E1 Plus overload relays can be cost effectively expandedand machine operation and protection enhanced. Direct mounting to the left side of the 193-EE and 592-EE E1 Plus overload relays meansthat only 18 mm is added to the overall product width. The side-mounted modules electronically interface with the E1 Plus overload relay sothat all control circuit connections are made at the E1 Plus overload relay terminals.

E1 Plus DeviceNet™ Communication ModuleThe Bul. 193-EDN DeviceNet Communication Side-Mount Moduleprovides a cost-effective, seamless deployment of motor startersonto the Integrated Architecture™ as an accessory for the E1 Pluselectronic overload relay. The DeviceNet module providesIntegrated I/O (2 inputs and 1 output) providing local connection ofmotor starter-related I/O. The DeviceNet module offers expandedprotective functions including overload warning, jam protection, andunderload warning. The DeviceNet module also allows access toaverage motor current (percentage of FLA setting), percentage ofthermal capacity usage, device status, trip & warning identification,and trip history which allows continual monitoring of motorperformance.

E1 Plus Remote Reset ModuleThe Bul. 193-ERR Remote Reset Module is available forapplications that require remote reset of the E1 Plus overload relaysafter a trip occurs.

E1 Plus Jam Protection Module with Remote ResetThe Bul. 193-EJM Jam Protection Module provides front-accessibleDIP switches which offers flexibility to provide jam protection tomatch application requirements. Selections are available forenabling or disabling the jam protection function and remote resetoperation. Jam trip level settings are available at 150%, 200%,300%, and 400% of full load current setting. Trip delay settings of1/2, 1, 2, and 4 seconds are available to minimize nuisance trippingin applications where intermittent short-duration overloading ispermissible.

E1 Plus Ground Fault Module with Remote ResetThe Bul. 193-EGF Ground Fault Protection Module offers front-accessible DIP switches providing flexibility to configure groundfault protection to match application requirements. Selections areavailable for enabling or disabling the ground fault protectionfunction and remote reset operation. Ground fault trip level settingsare available in four ranges: 20…100 mA (resistive loads only, formotor loads consult your local Allen-Bradley distributor),100…500 mA, 0.2…1 A, and 1…5 A. Within each range, thespecific ground fault trip level can be set (20%, 35%, 50%, 65%,80%, 90%, or 100% of the maximum ground fault setting). Tripdelay is fixed at 50 ms ± 20 ms.

E1 Plus Ground Fault/Jam Module with Remote ResetThe Bul. 193-EGJ Ground Fault/Jam Protection Module offers front-accessible DIP switches to provide flexibility to configure groundfault and jam protection to match application requirements. Theground fault selections are the same as the Bul. 193-EGF GroundFault Protection Module. In addition to ground fault, this moduleoffers selectable fixed jam protection. The user can enable ordisable jam protection from the DIP switches. The jam protection isfixed at 400% of the full load current setting with a 0.5 second tripdelay.

E1 Plus PTC Module with Remote ResetThe Bul. 193-EPT PTC Side-Mount Module provides two terminalsfor the connection of positive temperature coefficient (PTC)thermistor sensors. PTC sensors are commonly embedded in themotor stator windings to monitor winding temperature. PTCsensors react to actual temperature, so enhanced motor protectioncan be provided to address conditions like obstructed cooling andhigh ambient temperature.



Bulletin 193-ED/-EE

E1 Plus Solid-State Overload Relays

2-174Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

!

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Catalog Number Explanation/Product Selection

Catalog Number Explanation

aBulletin Number

Code Description

193 IEC Three-Phase

193R IEC Three-Phase, Cage Clamp

193S IEC Single-Phase

592 NEMA Three-Phase

592S NEMA Single-Phase

cAdjustment Range [A]

Three-Phase Single-Phase

Code Description Code Description

A 0.1…0.5 P 1.0…5.0

B 0.2…1.0 R 3.2…16

C 1.0…5.0 S 5.4…27

D 3.2…16 T 9…45

E 5.4…27 U 18…90

F 9…45 — —

G 18…90 — —

H 30…150 — —

J 40…200 — —

K 60…300 — —

L 100…500 — —

M 120…600 — —

N 160…800 — —Product SelectionBulletin 193-ED – Three-Phase Devices

Bulletin 193-EE – Three-Phase Devices

Bulletin 193S-EE – Single-Phase Devices

CT Ratio Adjustment Range [A] Cat. No.

150:5 30…150 193-EEHZ

200:5 40…200 193-EEJZ

300:5 60…300 193-EEKZ

400:5 80…400 193-EEWZ

500:5 100…500 193-EELZ

600:5 120…600 193-EEMZ

800:5 160…800 193-EENZ

193 – EE C Ba b c d

bType

Code Description

ED1 Fixed Trip Class 10

EE Selectable Trip Class

dBulletin 100 Contactor Size

Code Description

B C09…C23

D C30…C43

E C60…C85

F D95…D180

G D210…D420

H D630…D860

Bulletin 500 NEMA Contactor Size

Code Description

T Size 00

C Size 0…2

D Size 3

Panel/DIN Rail Mount

Code Description

P Integrated panel mount and pass-throughwiring

Z Panel mount with external currenttransformers

Mounts to Contactor Adjustment Range [A] Cat. No.

100-C09…100-C23

0.1…0.5 193-ED1AB

0.2…1.0 193-ED1BB

1.0…5.0 193-ED1CB

3.2…16 193-ED1DB

5.4…27 193-ED1EB

Integrated panel/DINRail mount and pass-

through wiring

1.0…5.0 193-ED1CP

3.2…16 193-ED1DP

5.4…27 193-ED1EP

� Fixed Trip Class 10 � Manual reset� Screw-type control terminals

‡ Cage Clamp Control Terminals – To order, change the Bulletin number in the listed cat. no. from 193 to 193R (Example: Cat. No. 193-EEFD becomes Cat.No. 193R-EEFD).

� Does not include terminal lugs. See Accessories.

� Selectable Trip Class (10, 15, 20, 30)� Selectable manual/auto-manual reset� Screw-type control terminals

� Selectable Trip Class (10, 15, 20, 30)� Selectable manual/auto-manual reset� Screw-type control terminals

� Selectable Trip Class (10, 15, 20, 30)� Selectable manual/auto-manual reset


100-C09…100-C23

1.0…5.0 193S-EEPB

3.2…16 193S-EERB

5.4…27.0 193S-EESB

100-C30…100-C43 9…45 193S-EETD

100-C60…100-C85 18…90 193S-EEUE


through wiring

1.0…5.0 193S-EEPP

3.2…16 193S-EERP

5.4…27.0 193S-EESP

Bulletin 193 Panel Mount Devices for use with ExternalCurrent Transformers §♣

♣ Current Transformers supplied by customer.§ Order panel adapter, Cat. No. 193-EPB, separately.


100-C09…100-C23

0.1…0.5 ‡ 193-EEAB

0.2…1.0 ‡ 193-EEBB

1.0…5.0 ‡ 193-EECB

3.2…16 ‡ 193-EEDB

5.4…27 ‡ 193-EEEB

100-C30…100-C435.4…27 ‡ 193-EEED

9…45 ‡ 193-EEFD

100-C60…100-C85 18…90 ‡ 193-EEGE

100-D95…100-D180

18…90 � 193-EEGF

30…150 � 193-EEHF

40…200 � 193-EEJF

55…110 � 193-EEVF

100-D210…100-D420

40…200 � 193-EEJG

60…300 � 193-EEKG

100…500 � 193-EELG

100-D630…100-D860120…600 � 193-EEMH

160…800 � 193-EENH


through wiring

1.0…5.0 ‡ 193-EECP

3.2…16 ‡ 193-EEDP

5.4…27 ‡ 193-EEEP



Bulletin 100-C/104-CContactors

23

Product Selection, Continued

Reversing AC-Operated Contactors

• AC Operating Mechanism, 3 Main Contacts• Includes Mechanical/Electrical Interlock• Includes Reversing Power Wiring

➊➊➊➊ The N.C. auxiliary contact is supplied as part of the mechanical/electrical interlock.

�� Voltage Suffix CodeThe Cat. No. as listed is incomplete. Select a voltage suffix code from the table below to complete the Cat. No. Example: 120V 60 Hz: Cat. No.104-C09�22 becomes Cat. No. 104-C09D22.

Ie

Ratings for Switching AC MotorsAuxiliary Contacts

Installed perContactor

Cat. No.

AC-2, AC-3, AC-4

[A] kW (50 Hz) HP (60 Hz)

AC-3 AC-1 230V

380V415V400V 500V 690V

1� 3�

115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V N.O. N.C.➊➊➊➊

9 32 3 4 4 4 1/3 1 2 2 5 7-1/2 1 1 104-C09�2212 32 4 5.5 5.5 5.5 1/2 2 3 3 7-1/2 10 1 1 104-C12�2216 32 5.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 1 3 5 5 10 10 1 1 104-C16�2223 32 7.5 11 11 11 2 3 5 7-1/2 15 15 1 1 104-C23�22

30 50 10 15 15 15 2 5 7-1/2 10 20 200 1 104-C30�021 1 104-C30�22

37 50 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 3 5 10 10 25 250 1 104-C37�021 1 104-C37�22

43 85 13 22 22 22 3 7.5 10 15 30 300 1 104-C43�021 1 104-C43�22

60 100 18.5 30 30 30 5 10 15 20 40 400 1 104-C60�021 1 104-C60�22

72 100 22 37 37 37 5 15 20 25 50 500 1 104-C72�021 1 104-C72�22

85 100 25 45 45 45 7-1/2 15 25 30 60 600 1 104-C85�021 1 104-C85�22

StandardCoil

Voltages 12 24 32 36 42 48 100100-110 110 120 127 200

200-220 208

208-240

220-230 230

230-240 240 277 347 380

380-400 400

400-415 440 480 500 550 600

50 Hz R K V W X Y KP – D P S KG L – – F – VA T – – – N – G B – M C –

60 Hz Q J – V – X – KP – D – – KG H L – – – A T I E – – – N B – – C

50/60 Hz – KJ – – – KY KP – KD – – KG – – – – KF – KA – – – – KN – KB – – – –

Cat. No. 104-C09�22 Cat. No. 104-C30�22 Cat. No. 104-C85�22

Accessories — Page 25Specifications — Page 31Approximate Dimensions — Page 46

Prices – Consult Sales Office or price list



The Monster Family is Growing www.jwce.com

3/17/14

Project Name: Rock River Water Reclamation District JWC SO# 110349 To: Rock River Water Reclamation Attn: Warren Adam

Dear Mr. Adam:

Please review JWC’s responses to engineer comment in email dated 3/17/14.

1. Under the Motor Controller(s) section / Components / Control Devices lists contacts included for grinder run and fail. They are not shown on the prints.

Please see revised controller drawing, PC2200-000-1 rev C.

2. Also, we need a set of contacts off of the 3 position switch (SS1) for remote indication to the PCS.

Per quote #18061, this order is for JWC’s standard PC2200 controller, which does not come with a remote status contact. If a set of contacts off of the 3 position switch (SS1) for remote indication to the PCS is required, the controller will be upgraded to a PC2220 controller. Please contact and provide JWC with revised PO for price adder of $426.00.

Best Regards,

Patricia Loo Project Engineer (Grinder Team) JWC Environmental 2600 S. Garnsey St. Santa Ana, Ca. 92707 714 / 428-4741


ROCK RIVER WATER RECLAMATION DISTRICT

CO-DIGESTION RECEIVING STATION PHASE 2

CAPITAL PROJECT NO. 1155

ATTACHMENT TO THE SPECIFICATIONS

CO-DIGESTION RECEIVING STATION

OPERATIONAL NARRATIVE


BLACK & VEATCH |February 2015

1 Summary of Co‐Digestion Receiving Station Operations

1.1 DOCUMENT PURPOSE AND OVERVIEW

ThisdocumentisintendedtoprovideasummaryofoperationalintentfortheCo‐DigestionReceivingStation.Assuch,itbuildsonthedescriptionprovidedintheDesignMemorandum.

ThenewCo‐DigestionReceivingStationisdesignedandconstructedtoallowdeliveryandstorageofseptage,leachate,lowstrengthwaste,hydrophobicHSW,andhydrophilicHSW.FigureM‐1inthedesigndrawingspresentsaprocessflowdiagramofthefacility.Thisdocumentwillgenerallyfollowthewasteflowsthroughthereceivingstationandsubsequentstorageandtransferoperations.

Amorecompletedescriptionoftheequipment,tankvolumesandgeneralvolumetricbalancesisprovidedintheDesignMemorandum.Moredetailedcontroldescriptionsareprovidedinthetechnicalspecifications.

1.2 WASTE DELIVERY AND HAULER IDENTIFICATION

Nooperationalchangesarebeingmadetotheexistinghauleridentificationandweighingprocess.Theexistingweighscaleandkeycardswillcontinuetobeused.Theassignmentofuniquekeycardstohaulershasproventobeaneffectiveapproachtoregulatedeliveriesandrecordwastevolumesforbillingpurposes.Forgeneralunderstandingpurposes,theprocessisdescribedasfollows:

1. Haulerarrivesatfully‐mannedGuardShack/ScaleHouse2. Hauleridentifieshim/herselfandguardlocatespre‐assignedkeycard3. Guardswipescard,recordingpre‐deliverytruckweight4. HaulerunloadsproductandreturnstoGuardShack/ScaleHouse5. Guardswipescard,recordingpost‐deliverytruckweight,andstorescardattheGuardShack6. Haulerleavessiteandaccountisbilledforvolumeofdeliveredproduct

ThescalecardreadersystemisalreadyintegratedintotheplantSCADAsystem.NoadditionalmodificationstotheSCADAsystemtoidentifyhauler,materialtype,quantity,etc.arerequired.EachhaulerisassignedswipecardsbasedonthetypeofmaterialtheywilldelivertotheReceivingStation.ThehaulerwillneedtoswipetheircardontheReceivingStationpanelinordertoinitiatetheoff‐loadingprocess.

1.3 UNLOADING AREA AND UNLOADING OPERATIONS

AnunloadingareaisincludedaspartoftheCo‐DigestionReceivingStation.Theunloadingareaconsistsofacontainmentstructureandanunloadingpanel.Belowgrade,thecontainmentareaservestotemporarilycollectandstoreincidentalandaccidentalspillage,aswellasgeneralarea


Version8(February24,2015)


precipitationwater.Atgradelevel,thestructureincludeswaste‐specificconnections,signage,andautomatedelectricwasteinletvalvesforfiveseparatewastestreams:

HydrophilicHSW, HydrophobicHSW, Septage, Leachate,and LowStrengthWaste

Anunloadingpanelislocatednexttothecontainmentstructure.Thispanelisthemaininterfaceforhaulersandincludesanemergencyphone,alarmlights,andakeycardreaderforhauleridentification.Thehaulerunloadingprocessisdescribedasfollows:

1. HaulerarrivesatReceivingStationandagroundingloopdetectsthepresenceofavehicle.2. Haulerswipescardatunloadingpanel.3. Systemrecognizeshaulerandopenselectricwasteinletvalveforcorrespondingwaste(in

thecaseofHydrophobicHSW,thesysteminitiatesgrinderoperation).4. Haulerconnectsdischargehosetocorrespondingwasteinletvalveandinitiatesoperation

oftruck‐mounteddeliverypump(orgravitydrainsthecontentsofthetruck).5. Followingunloading,haulerdisconnectshose.6. Haulerdepressesa“complete”pushbuttonatunloadingpanelandthecorresponding

electricwasteinletvalvecloses(ifhaulerforgetstodepressthebutton,wasteinletvalveautomaticallyclosesuponexitofvehiclefromReceivingStationbay).Thesystemwillnotrequireamanualresetpriortothearrivalofthenexthauler.

Thefollowingsummarizesotheroperationalfeaturesofthereceivingstation:

Thewasteswillbepumpedusingtruck‐mountedpumpsorgravitydrainedintotheirrespectivesystems.

Exposedpipingatthecontainmentstructureisindoorsorisheattracedandinsulated.Thesystemisprotectedfromaccidentalover‐pressurizationwithrupturedisks.

Thecontainmentstructureincludesarecessedsumptocontainspillageandprecipitation.Thestructureisisolatedwithamanualvalve(normallyclosedtocontainspills)andconfiguredtodrainbygravitytotheplantinfluentsewer.

Thefollowingalarmsprotectthewastestoragesystems.Foreachalarm,apilotlightislocatedonthefaceoftheReceivingStationUnloadingPanel.Inadditiontothepilotlights,abeaconmountedtothetopofthepanelcansignalwarningconditionsandanaudiblealarmhorncansoundforhighlevelalarms.Audiblealarmsarenotactivatedtoavoidnuisancetoneighbors.ThebeaconandhornarenotprogrammedintothePCS,butaremountedonthepanel.Thealarmsystemincludesanadjustableduration(initially2minutes)priortoclosingtheassociatedwasteinletvalve:

HydrophobicStorageTank–HighLevelWarningandHighLevelAlarm(notethatthesealarmsreflecttotalavailablesystemvolume,notindividualtankvolumes)




HydrophilicStorageTank–HighLevelWarningandHighLevelAlarm SeptageStorageTank–HighLevelAlarm LowStrengthWasteStorage–HighLevelWarningandHighLevelAlarm

1.4 HYDROPHOBIC HSW HANDLING AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

Theexisting,northeastgravitythickenerwasconvertedintoanenclosedstructuretoholdthree11,000gallonFRPstoragetanks.Analuminumdomespanstotheprimaryexteriorwall(i.e.theweirwall,nottheouter‐mostwall)oftheexistinggravitythickener.Theflooroftheexistingstructureisslopedandwaspartiallyfilledwithconcretetoprovidealevelsurfaceforlower‐levelaccessandsupportoftheFRPtanks.Asuspendedwalkway,flushwithgrade,providesaccesstothetopoftheFRPtankswithinthestructure.ThefollowingsummarizesthehydrophobicHSWwastehandlingandstoragesystemfeatures:

Attheunloadingarea,thesystemincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,arocktraptocatchheavyitems,andautomaticvalving.Truckunloadingdurationsdependonseveralfactors,butareanticipatedtotakeapproximately15‐40minutes.(Inthefuture,theDistrictmaywanttoconsidercontractuallyrequiringtheuseoftruck‐mounted,thirdpartypumpsforHSWhaulerstoreduceunloadingdurations.)

PipingfromtheunloadingareatotheHydrophobicHSWstoragestructureisroutedinapipechaseandincludesseveralcleanouts.Thepipingisheattracedusingglycolsolutionandisinsulated.

Atentrytothestoragestructure,theHydrophobicHSWpipingcombineswithPrimaryScumpiping.PrimaryScumpipingisusedtoconveyconcentratedprimaryscumoffofascumconcentratorlocatedintheGravityThickeningBuilding.PrimaryscumdischargesintotheHydrophobicHSWsystemapproximatelyonceaweekfor30‐45minutesataflowrateof15‐25gpm,resultinginatotalvolumeofabout675gallons.ThisisscheduledtohappenattimeswhennoHydrophobicHSWisbeingpumpedintothesystem.

HydrophobicHSWandPrimaryScumpassthroughagrinderbeforeenteringoneofthreeFRPstoragetanks.Grinderoperationisautomatedwithactuationofeitherassociatedinletvalve.

ThethreeFRPstoragetanksareactivelyventilatedthruthedometooutside.Thetanksandairhandlingsystemaredesignedtofacilitatetheadditionofanodorcontrolsystematalaterdate.Noodorcontrolsystemhasbeenincludedatthistime.

LevelindicationoneachtankcommunicateswiththePCSandinitiatestheactuationoftankHSWinletvalvestodirectincomingwastetothecorrecttank.Aseachtankreachesadesired“fulllevel”,thetankHSWinletvalvesactuateaccordinglytoredirectwaste.Ifnoothertanksareavailableforreceiptofwaste,alevelindicatorsignalsbothhighlevel




warningsandalarmstotheunloadingpanel.Followinganalarmdelay,thePCSwillclosetheassociatedwasteinletvalvewithintheunloadingarea.

Levelindicationoneachtankisalsousedtototalizevolumesofallcontentsaddedtoeachtankforoperationalrecordpurposes.ThisincludesPrimaryScum,HydrophobicHSW,andTWAS.Eachtankisequippedwithanoverflowpipe.Intheeventthatatankisoverfilled,flowwillspilloutoftheoverflowpipeandflowbygravitytotheplantinfluentsewer.

EachstoragetankentrancenozzleisconnectedtoHydrophobicHSW/PrimaryScum(fill)andTWAS(pre‐dispersion).Automaticandmanualisolationvalvesareprovidedforeachconnection.OnetankHSWinletvalvewillbeopenatalltimes,unlessalltanksareeitherfulloroff‐line.TWASinletvalves(alsocalledpre‐dispersionvalves)foreachtankwillbenormallyclosed.

Eachstoragetankisprovidedwithaninternalheatexchangerandseparatemixingsystem.Themixingsystemforeachtankincludesthreenozzles,twolower(normallyopen)andoneupper(normallyclosedandisolatedwithamanualvalve).Theuppernozzlehasbeenprovidedtoassistinthere‐entrainmentofscum/floatables,shouldthisneedbeidentifiedbyplantstaff.

Oncethelevelofwastewithinatanksubmergestheinternalheatexchanger(approximately2feetofliquiddepth),heatedglycolsolutioncirculatesthroughtheheatexchangertoheatthetankcontents.Thesystemisdesignedtoprovideasmuchheataspracticaltothetankcontentstoassistinpumpingandlimitgreasesolidification.Giventhenumberoftanksinoperation,deliveredwastetemperatures,andambienttemperatures,itispossiblethateachtankmaynotfullyreachthetargettemperaturesetpointpriortoinitiatingdigesterfeed.

o Heatingcontinuesuntilthetargettemperaturesetpoint(measuredbyatemperatureelementinstalledinthewallofeachFRPtank)hasbeenachieved,atwhichpoint,theheatingsystemwilloperateintermittentlytomaintainthesetpointwithin10degF.Thetargetsetpointisoperatoradjustable,initiallysetat95degFforeachtank.

o Oncethewastelevelinthetankreacheslessthan(approximately)2feetofdepth,heatingisstoppedtopreventbakingwasteonthesurfaceoftheheatexchanger.

o Thesystemhasbeendesignedtoheatafulltankvolume(10,400gallons)ofwastefrom35degFto100degFwithin24hours.Inpractice,thesystemwilllikelynotseedeliveredwasteascoldas35degF,norbeexposedtoafulltankvolumeofwasteatthistemperature,consideringprimaryscumandTWASwillbewarmer.

o Thesystemhasbeendesignedtoheatonetankatatime,butiscapableofheatingallsimultaneously.Intheeventthattwoorthreetanksrequireheatingatthesametime,lessheattransferwilloccur.




Mixingisprovidedbythree960gpmrecirculationpumpslocatedinGalleryNo.2.Eachpumpisdedicatedtoasingletank.Thepumpsinitiateandbeginrecirculationwhenitsassociatedtankreachesanestablishedlevel(approximately4.75feetwhichcorrespondsto5,500gallons).Mixingofthestoragetankisdesignedtobecontinuoustoensuretankhomogeneity.Grabsamplesofthetankcontentscanbecollecteddownstreamofeachmixingpump.Mixingwillcontinueuntilthewasteleveldropstobelowapproximately3.75feet.

Dispersionwillbeinitiatedbyoneofthefollowingmethods:(1)operator‐initiated(thismethodrequirestheoperatortoenteranydesiredTWASfillvolumemanuallypriortoinitiationofdispersion),(2)automaticallyafterdeliveryofHydrophobicHSW,or(3)automaticallyonceatank’smaximumpre‐dispersionvolumehasbeenreached.

o Maximumpre‐dispersiontankvolumewillbecalculatedbythefollowingequationandoneofthetwoapproacheslistedbelow:MaxPre‐DispersionVolume=(MaximumTankVolume)–(DesiredTWASFillVolume)

Blending:Thismethodwillutilizeanoperator‐adjustableHSW:TWASblendingratio(initiallysetat75:25HSW:TWAS).Takingthestartingtankvolumeintoaccount,thesystemwillsetasideenoughstoragevolumetoallowforproperblendingratiostobemetpriortodispersion.Forexample,(forsimplicity,assumeamaxtankvolumeof11,000gallons)ifthestartingtankvolumeis7,000gallons,themaximumpre‐dispersionvolumewillbeachievedonce3,000gallonsofHydrophobicHSWhasbeendelivered,suchthat1,000gallonsofTWAScanbefedintothetank.Ifalltanksarefilledtotheirmaximumpre‐dispersionlevels(orabove),noadditionalHSWwillbeacceptedunlessmanuallyoverriddenbyplantstaff.

Top‐off:ThismethodwillincludeaminimumrequiredvolumeofTWAS(initiallysetat2,600gallons).AssumingaTWASflowrateof15gpm,thispre‐dispersionfilloperationwouldtakeapproximately3hours.

Followingisabasicdescriptionofthedispersionprocess:

o Oncepre‐dispersionisinitiated(manuallyorautomatically),thetank’sHSWinletvalveclosesandthenextavailabletank’sHSWinletvalveopens.

o Thetank’sTWASinletvalveopensandthenewautomaticTWASinletheadervalve(locatedinthePrimarySludgePumpStation,downstreamoftheGBTsolidspump)closes.

o TWASfillstheFRPtanktoobtainthedesiredvolume,blendingratio,ortotop‐offthetank(seeabove).ThenewautomaticTWASinletheadervalvewillthenopen,




thetank’sTWASinletvalvewillclose,andthetank’sHSWinletvalvewillopen(unlessthetankisfull).

o NotethatnoadditionalHSWwillbefedtoatankduringthepre‐dispersionTWASfillingprocess.Thenextavailabletankwillreceivethewaste.

o Timerequiredfordispersionwillbeoperatoradjustable(initiallysetat60minutes)andwillbeginoncetheTWASfillcyclehascompleted,irrespectiveoftankvolume.Duringdispersionthetank’sHSWinletvalvewillbeopentoreceiveadditionalwaste,unlessthetankisfull.

o Thedispersionprocess(followingTWASadditionandduringcombinedmixingandheating)willbeautomaticallyover‐riddenbythedeliveryofadditionalHydrophobicHSWifthesystemisinautomaticmodeandthetankisnotfull.

o Tankheatingandmixingwillremainonduringandfollowingthedispersionprocess.Itislevel/temperaturecontrolledandindependentoftankfilling,dispersion,anddrainingsequences.

Oncethebatchhasbeenfullydispersedandnoothertanksareinadigesterfeedingmode,thedigesterfeedingsequencemaybegin.ThesystemwillnotallowadditionalHSWtobefedtothetankuntilithasreacheditslowlevel.Thiscanbeoverriddenbyoperators.

Duringdigesterfeedingmode,aprogressingcavitypumpisusedtometerthecontentsofeachavailabletanktothedigesters.Feedingoccursfromonetankatatime;however,thefeedrateiscalculatedtofeedallcontentswithinanoperatoradjustabletransferduration(initiallysetat24hours).Thefollowingexampledemonstratesfeedrateestablishment:

o Alltanksareemptyandthesystemissettoruninautomatic,withpre‐dispersionvolumesestablishedbyblendingratio.

o TheHSWinletvalveforTankNo.1isopen.Ahaulerdelivers3,000gallonsofHSW.Ataratioof75:25,1,000gallonsofTWASisdivertedintoTankNo.1.Heatingandmixingbeginasdiscussedelsewhere.Oncedispersioniscomplete,TankNo.1entersdigesterfeedingmodeandcannotreceiveadditionalHSW.Thedigesterfeedpumptargetsafeedrateof4,000gallons/24hours(~2.8gpm)fromTankNo.1.Thisisbelowthepump’sminimumanticipatedoperatingflowof6.25gpm,sothefeedrateissetat6.25gpm(estimatedtimetoemptytankis10.7hours).NotethatthisisacasewhereanoperatormayelecttomanuallyaddadditionalTWASvolumetothetanktoextendthefeedbackduration.

o WhileTankNo.1isindigesterfeedmode,500gallonsofprimaryscumand6,000gallonsofHSW(followedby2,000gallonsofTWAS)fillTankNo.2(8,500gallonstotal).TankNo.2doesnotenterdigesterfeedmodebecauseTankNo.1isfeedingthedigesters.OncedispersioninTankNo.2iscomplete(andeachtimethismodeiscompleted),thesystemwillrecalculatethetargetfeedratebasedonthetotal




systemvolume(forexample1,500gallonsinTankNo.1and8,500gallonsinTankNo.2/24hours(~6.9gpm)).

o PumpingwillcontinueatthisnewratefromTankNo.1untilitisempty,andwillthenbeswitchedtoTankNo.2.

o Atanypoint,operatorsmayoverridethetargetfeedflowrateandinputavaluewithinthecapabilityofthepump(6.25to25gpm).Ifasituationoccurssuchthatthetankfeedingthedigestersbecomesemptywhilenoothertankisreadytobeginfeeding,thePCSwillnotifytheoperatorofthesituation.Thismayhappenif(1)alltanksareemptyor(2)ifthenexttankinfeedingsequencehappenstobeindispersionmodeatthistime.

Duetochallenges/inaccuraciesassociatedwithmeasuringlowflowrateswithmagneticflowmeters,analternateapproachtocontrolfeedratesisutilized.Thisapproachtakesthetargetfeedrateandback‐calculatesanapproximatepumpshaftRPM(andcorrespondingcurrentreading)basedonthemanufacturersuppliedpumpcurve.Theflowcalculationalsoincludesa“wearcorrectionfactor”toaccountforflowdeviationsattributabletorotor/statorwear.Thiswearcorrectionfactorwillbecalculatedperiodically(initialrecommendedfrequencyismonthly)toaccountfordifferencesbetweenactualandtheoreticaltankdrawdowns.

TheHydrophobicHSWStorageStructureisratedasClassIDivisionIIElectricallyHazardousSpaceandwouldalsobeclassifiedasaconfinedspacebyOSHA1910.Thefollowingengineeringcontrolsareinstalled:

o ExteriorsignageandpersonnelrequirementsconsistentwiththeDistrict’sConfinedSpaceEntryProgram.(Thisshouldincludemandatoryuseofportablegasdetectionequipment.)

o Exterioractuationofa30airchangeperhourventilationsystempriortoentry.

o Exteriorindicationofsuitableentry(post‐ventilation).Systemincludesalightconnectedtoanadjustabletimer.ThedurationofthistimerisoperatoradjustableandbasedonDistrictexperience(initiallysetat4minutes).

1.5 HYDROPHILIC HSW HANDLING AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

Theexisting190,000gallon,southeastgravitythickenerwillbeconvertedintoaHydrophilicHSWTankwithafiberglassreinforcedplasticcover.TomaintaingravitydrainageoftheHydrophilicHSWhandlingsystem,theusablevolumeofthistankwillbereducedtoapproximately150,000gallons.Thecoverwillspantotheprimaryexteriorwall(i.e.theweirwall,nottheouter‐mostwall)oftheexistinggravitythickener.




Itisexpectedthatvarioustypesofhydrophilicwasteswillbereceivedandthetypesofwastewillchangeseasonallyandyeartoyear.Designcriteriaforthehydrophilicwasteareasfollows:

Temperature40to180F;averageof90F

pH2.0to7.0

AsnotedinthePreliminaryDesignReport,themaximumdailyvolumeofacceptedhydrophilicwasteisexpectedtobeabout22,000gallons.Thesizeofandmixinginthehydrophilictankisintendedtohomogenizethevariouswastetypesforcontinuousblendintothedigesters.MixingisbeingprovidedbyanexternalVaughanmixingpump.ThefollowingfeaturesareincludedfortheHydrophilicHSWsystem:

Attheunloadingarea,thesystemincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,andautomaticvalving.Spaceisprovidedforfuturebasketstrainers,ifdesired.Truckunloadingdurationswilldependonseveralfactors,butareanticipatedtotakeapproximately15‐40minutes.(Inthefuture,theDistrictmaywanttoconsidercontractuallyrequiringtheuseoftruck‐mounted,thirdpartypumpsforHSWhaulerstoreduceunloadingdurations.)

PipingfromtheunloadingareatotheHydrophilicHSWstoragestructureisroutedinapipechaseandincludesseveralcleanouts.Thepipingiselectricallyheattracedandinsulated.

HydrophilicHighStrengthWastewillenterthetankthrougha4”fillpipecarryingwastefromtheReceivingStation.Thisfillpipeentersthetankatinvertelevation701.92.Wastewillexitthepipethougha45‐degreeVictaulicbyplainendelbowinstalled6”offthetankwall.Thetankalsohasanoverflowpipe.This8”plainendpipehasaninvertelevationof702.08.ElevationswithinthetankwillbemonitoredandcontrolledthroughuseofanexistinglevelindicationdevicebeingrelocatedwithinGalleryNo.1.Thedeviceismountedonablindflangewhichwillbeinstalledonthedownstreamsideofa6”knifegatevalveontheexisting,andrenamed,6”HydrophilicHSWTankLevelpipe.LevelindicationonthetankwillcommunicatewiththePCSandsignalbothhighlevelwarningsandalarmstotheunloadingpanel.Followinganalarmdelay,thePCSwillclosetheassociatedwasteinletvalvewithintheunloadingarea.Anoverflowpipewillpreventthetankfromoverfillinganddirectexcesscontentstotheplantinfluentsewer.

Thetankcoatingsystemwillincludeconcreterepairandpatchingasrequired,primecoating,andfinishedcoating.Thecoatingsystemwillbeasrecommendedbythecoatingmanufacturersandindicatedwithinthecoatingsspecification.Thecoatingforthetankwillbeanovolacepoxy,appliedin1or2coats(atthemanufacturer’sdiscretion),atathicknessofatleast40mils.Thistopcoatingiscapableofreceivingtheanticipatedwaste,includingtheexpectedrangeoftemperatureandpH.Topreventdelaminationofthecoatingsystem(separationoftheepoxycoatingfromtheconcrete)duetothermalshock,itisrecommendedthatwastebeyond120Fonlybeprovidedtothetankwhenlevelsareataminimumelevationof695.0.Therefore,theminimumdesigntankoperatinglevelissetat695.0toreducetheriskofcoatingsystemfailure.




ThetankwillbepassivelyventedthroughaFRPgooseneckinthetankcover.Notreatmentforodorcontroliscurrentlyprovidedfortheventedair.

Thetankwilldischargethroughitsexistingdrainandbepumpedtoanaerobicdigestersbyanexistingprogressingcavitypumpatflowratesrangingfrom6to50gpm.Thepumpwillrun,ifdesiredbytheoperator,onlywhenthetankreachesalevelsetpointofEL695.33(bottomoftanksidewallisatEL694.7forreference).Toprotectthetankcoating,dischargewillnotoccurwhenthewasteleveldropstoapproximatelyEL695.0feet.Thedesiredtransferdurationfromthestoragetanktothedigesterswillbeoperatorenteredandbeajudgmentcallbasedon(1)theamountofwastecurrentlyinstorageand(2)theamountofwasteanticipatedtobedelivered.Forexample,ifitisanticipatedthat22,000gallonswillbedelivered7daysaweek,thisequatestoapproximately15gpm.Ifitisanticipatedthat22,000gallonswillbedelivered5daysaweek,afeedrateof11gpmcouldbeselectedtoequalizetheflowovera7dayfeedingperiod.

Mixingisprovidedbya2,000gpmrecirculationpumplocatedinGalleryNo.1.Mixingofthestoragetankisanticipatedtobecontinuoustoensuretankhomogeneity.Grabsamplesofthetankcontentscanbecollecteddownstreamofthemixingpump.WhilethetankdischargepumpwillonlybeoperationalwhentanklevelsreachEL695.33,themixingsystempumpwillbesuppliedtorunatalevelsetpointofEL692.75andoperatingshutoffliquidlevelofEL692.25.

1.6 SEPTAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

Theseptagehandlingandstorageequipmentincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,arocktrap,automaticvalving,andanew2,000gallonstoragetank.Septagenormallyflowsthroughthehandlingequipmentandstoragetankbygravitytotheplantinfluentsewer.Itwillnotnormallybestoredwithintheseptagetank.

Thestoragetankisequippedwithanisolationvalveandapumpformixingofseptagematerial,shouldstorageofthiswastebedesiredforsamplingorotherpurposes.Themixingpumpwillnotnormallybeutilizedtomixthecontentsofthetank.Inmanualmode,operationofthispumpwillbeinitiatedbytheoperator.Inautomaticmode,thepumpwillstartatadepthof3.5feetandwillcontinuemixinguntiltheleveldropsto2.5feet.

1.7 LEACHATE HANDLING AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

Theleachatehandlingequipmentincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,andautomaticvalving.Withtheexceptionoftherelocatedreceivingarea,leachatehandlingoperationsarenotbeingmodified.Theexistingleachatestoragetankwillbereused.Thefollowingsummarizestheleachatewastehandlingandstoragesystemfeatures:




Attheunloadingarea,thesystemincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,andautomaticvalving.

AportionofthepipingfromtheunloadingareatotheleachatestoragetankisencasedinconcretebeneaththeCo‐DigestionReceivingStation.

Theexistingleachatestoragetankdoesnothavelevelindication,nordoesithavehighlevelwarningsoralarmsattheunloadingpanel.

Theexistingleachatestoragetankhasanoverflowpipetopreventthetankfromoverfillinganddirectsexcesscontentstotheplantinfluentsewer.Theleachatetankcanbeisolatedfromtheplantinfluentlinebyclosinganormally‐openmanualvalve.

1.8 LOW STRENGTH WASTE HANDLING AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

Thelowstrengthwastehandlingequipmentincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,andautomaticvalving.Fromthereceivingstation,wasteispumpedintooneoftwoexisting,15,000to20,000gallonstoragetanks,whichwherereused.

Thestoragetanksareeachequippedwithanewisolationvalve,submersiblepump,levelsensinginstrument,andlevelswitches.Thesubmersiblepumpsareusedtodraineachtankanddischargeintoanexistinglinewhichdrainsintotheleachatedrainmanholeandbacktotheplantinfluentsewer.

Thefollowingsummarizesthelowstrengthwastehandlingandstoragesystemfeatures:

Attheunloadingarea,thesystemincludesacam‐lockfitting,rupturedisk,piping,andautomaticvalving.

AportionofthepipingfromtheunloadingareatothelowstrengthwastestoragetanksisencasedinconcretebeneaththeCo‐DigestionReceivingStation.

BuriedLSWtankinletvalveswereaddedtothefillpipingtoallowisolationofeachtankfromservicefortestingandtemporarystorageofreceivedwastes.Thesevalvesaremanualandincludefloorstandoperatorswithhandwheelsandendoftravellimitswitches.ThevalvepositionsignalsarecommunicatedtothePCSsothesystemknowswhichtank(s)is/areinservice.

Thelowstrengthwastestoragetanksarenormallyoperatedinabatchmode,withonetankonlineandonetankoffline.Thedeterminationofwhichtank(s)areonline/offlineismadebasedonthepositionofeachtankinletvalve.Ifbothmanualvalvesareclosed,thelowstrengthwasteinletvalveattheunloadingareawillnotopen.Ifbothmanualvalvesareopen,flowwillsplithydraulicallyandthesystemalarmingdescribedbelowwillbebasedonwhichevertankalarmsareactivatedfirst.




LevelindicationoneachtankcommunicateswiththePCStosignal(1)HighLevelWarnings(initiallysetat24”belowthetankoverflowconnection)andcurrentliquidlevel.Levelindicationisprovidedfrompressuretransducers.TankHighLevelAlarms(initiallysetat12”belowthetankoverflowconnection)areprovidedfromhighlevelfloatswitches.

FollowingatankHighLevelAlarmanddelay,thePCSwillclosetheassociatedwasteinletvalvewithintheunloadingarea.Intheeventofafailure,anexistingoverflowpipebetweenthetwotankswillhelppreventatankfromoverfilling;however,inthiscasethecontentsofonetankwillcascadeintotheothertank.Thesouthtankisequippedwithanoverflowpipetotheleachatetank’seffluentmanhole.

Anewsubmersiblepump(aswellasamodifiedpumpconnectiontoexistingpiping)isprovidedforeachstoragetank.Thepumpshavevariablefrequencydrivestoallowforoperatorselectedmeteringoflowstrengthwastetotheheadoftheplant.FlowrateswillbecalculatedvolumetricallybythePLCbasedoninputfromtheassociatedtanklevelsensor.

OperationofeachpumpwillbeinitiatedbytheoperatoreitheratalocalcontrolstationorthroughthePCS.Ahard‐wiredlowlevelfloatswitchwillinhibitoperationofthepumpbelowamanufacturerestablishedcutoffelevation(approximately12inchesofdepth).
